Pega CSSA

2/13/23, 3:47 PM Pega Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Study
Pega
Leave the first rating
Textbook solutions for this set
Starting Out with Python

4th Edition • ISBN: 9780134444321
Tony Gaddis
629 solutions
Search for a textbook or question
Terms in this set (354)
Generally used to map data from a source to a

How are data transforms target as well as performing transformations on that
generally used? data required to achieve the intended mapped
results.
What is the data transform Created for new cases, allows you to set properties
pyDefault? as the case is created
If properties are set in both The data transform in the subclass overwrites
the superclass and subclass, anything already sey by the data transform in the
what happens? superclass
What must be selected to Call superclass data transform

casue the system to invoke
data transforms of the same
name in parent and child
classes
https://quizlet.com/300581694/pega-flash-cards/ 1/25
Pega
In which of the following Set defulat values when creating a case and copy
situations would you use a data between pages
data transform (2)?
1.) Set default values when

creating a case
2.)Copy data between pages
3.) Create properties after the
case has been created
4.)Execute a flow action
What is the purpose of the To initialize property values when a case is created
pyDefault data transform?
Can configure applications using consistenet set of

What is the significance of a
componenets. This reduces application
unified platform?
development time.
Pega Platform uses a __________ model-based

approach to application
development
Business users of the applications, processing and

Who are the case participants?
closing cases.
Create, view and work on theri cases and

Who are the case workers?
assignments.
Can case workers monitor or No

manage the work among other
case workers?
Responsible for working on cases and monitoring

Who are the case managers?
work group status, goals, and deadlines.
Part of the delivery team responsible for designing

Who are the case designers?
and building busniess applications
Pega
Who are the business
First group of case designers, work with case
participants and other stakeholders to define
architects?
busniess objectives and application requirements.
Provide the technical skills needed to complete the

Who are the system architects
application.
When should you use Pega When you want to quickly build the case structure
Express and process steps
When should you use the when you want to refine the case life cycle design.
Designer Studio?
What is simulation mode in Allows you to test your design as a user would
Pega Express experience it.
Pega
An organization wants to 1 and 4
automate its existing expense
reporting process.
Which two actions should the
organization take in order to
follow Pega's best practices
for application design?
(Choose Two)
1.) Use DCO to enter business

requirements for the
application to facilitate direct
engagement of IT and business
resources.
2.)Identify the departments

responsible for the application
design and have them work
independently to enhance
organizational efficiency.
3.)Build the required features

as soon as they are needed
during application
development to keep the
project moving quickly.
4.)Build and test the

application before rolling it
out for review by interested
parties to ensure the
application is ready for
release.
Help develoopers to track compliance with Pegas

What are two benefits to using
best practices and help them build apps that are
Pega guardrails
easier to maintain and have fewer defects.
Pega What is a case? Work that delivers a business outcome
What are processes in Pega? Define one or more paths the case must follow
Define the tasks and decisions needed to resolve a

What are case types
case
Each case type captures what the life cycle of a specific type of case
contain workflows or processes that users follows

What are stages in Pega before they can move a case to the next phase in
the case life cycle.
In a case life cycle, stages that lead to the

What are primary stages
expected outcome
What is a happy path Sequence of primary stages
An action a user performs, an automatic action, or

What are steps in Pega
separate set of actions which define the process
Ensure all team members have a common

Why should you design a case
understanding of how a case is processed and
life cycle?
resolved.
You are developing a case life Collect personal info

cycle for a human resources
application. The first stage
contains a single process
named Collect Candidate
Information. Which one of the
following steps would you
choose to include in the
Collect Candidate Information
process?
Pega
u are adding steps to a Confirm employee
process named Select
Insurance Policy. Which one of
the following steps would be
named correctly?
In a help desk ticket Step

application the Respond to
Ticket assignment can be
handled by any help desk
agent. To configure the
assignment for routing you
update the _____________?
A loan origination case Work queue

requires the loan application
be routed to an underwriter
for verification. Any
underwriter in the department
can complete the verification.
How would you route the
verification assignment?
What are Service Level Help ensure work completes within the expected
Agreements time intervals.
Service levels are defined by goal, deadline, and past deadline

what three milestones?
The goal milestone in a service The amount of time in which the case or step
level defines: should be completed
The primary purpose of a Help ensure timely completion of assignments

service level is to __________.
Pega
What are forms designed to
Allow end users to complete specific tasks, data is
entered and the app will use this data to process a
do?
case.
What fields do end-users need to see?
What three questions should

How will end-users enter values in those fields?
be asked before creating a
form?
Can end-users modify the field values or only read
the values?
What does the view Enables you to define the data elements that the
configuration tool allow you to system uses for processing cases.
do?
Process of collecting, analyzing, refining, and

What is requirments
prioritizing product requirements and then
management?
planning for their delivery.
Helps ensure the business applications you build

What does requirements
validates and meets the needs of all customers and
management help ensure
stakeholders.
Statements that describ business value the

What are business objectives? application must provide, oir the business needs
the application must address
An agreement between stakeholders on what a

How does Pega define the business application will do, they're the events or
term "requirement" functions that must be implemented and tracked in
a development project
How does Pega define How you implement your application

specifications
Pega The ability to link specifications back to business

What is traceability? objectives and requirements, and forward to
implementation artifacts, and test cases
What are at the center of Specifications

traceability?
Which statement demonstrates 2

a well-written business
objective?
Require HR VP approval for

sabbatical leave.
Reduce inaccurate claims to

less than 10 percent of all
claims.
Allow up to 200 concurrent

users.
Passwords must be at least

eight characters.
Pega
a well-written requirement?
Eliminate order processing

delays due to incorrect routing
of requests.
A user should be able to

cancel an order at any time.
User must be able to select

"Add Temporary Member"
when "Authorization is
Required" notice is displayed.
System displays "Authorization

History and Summary" for the
last 12 months.

a well-written specification?
User passwords shall be

encrypted using AES-256
encryption.
If the complainant type is

"Provider," then provider
information must be populated
during the Triage Stage in the
Basic Research Step.
The product catalog should be

easy to navigate.
Reduce time needed for time-

off approvals from three
weeks to one.
Pega
What is the difference A requirement describes what the business need is,
between a requirement and and specifications describe how the application will
specification? meet the business need.
Used to organize process steps that ar enot part of

What are alternate stages? the normal course of events but must be available
under certain circumstances
For primary stage, when all Automatic transistion to the next primary stage
steps in a stage are
completed, the default option
is to do what
What is a change stage Automatically transitions the case flow to a

process step? specified stage .
Define the tasks that users accomplish while the

Alternate stages are used to
case is inthe stage and organize process steps that
do what
are not part of the normal course of events
Supplement that tasks users can do as they work on

What is the definition for user
a case. Allow users to leave the primary path of a
actions
case tom complete another process
Should the user be allowed to update the

information at any time during a case or stage?
When determining if you need
to use a user action, consider Do you need multiple steps to update the
the following questions: information?
Can the information be updated in a single screen?
Used when multiple steps are needed to update a

case. Will run a new process, difference between
What are optional processes?
an optional process and regular process is user
determines when the optional process is executed.
Pega Allows the user to perform a single task outside the

What are local actions primary path on a single screen. User will return to
the primary path upon completion.
Local actions are single tasks and return to the

Main difference between local primary path of a case, whereas an optional
action and optional process? process is a series of steps that is not required to
return to the primary path of a case.
A business process Add a local action to the case type

requirement states that users
should be able to modify the
shipping address at any time
and not interrupt the primary
case. How is the best way to
design this?
Which requirement could be 1

satisfied with a user action?
Allow a user to transfer a case

to another employee at any
stage of the case.
An application randomly sends

a survey to customers once
their case is resolved.
Reassign any task that remains

open after three days to
another user.
Requiring a separate approval

process whenever an order
exceeds USD 10,000.
Pega When does the correspondence need to be sent?

Who is the user that receives the correspondence?
be asked when creating a
correspondence?
How will the correspondence be sent? (Email, text,
fax, regular mail)
Why should you automate To send timely communication and send consistent
correspondence? information to users.
Primary indicator of the progress of a case towards

Definition for case status?
resolution
What benefit comes from Describes to an end user what should nbe done in
adding instructions to a step? the step
A step in the case life cycle At the beginning of the step

has a Set status value of
Pending-Approval. When is the
status of the case
automatically updated?
Visual method for modeling a process in the

What is a flow rule? application using shapes and connectoros to
define a sequence of events
Flow rules represent a process

____________ in the case life cycle.
Flow shapes represent tasks to be completed as part of a business

____________. process
A connector is used to Identify order of events in a process, indicate

______________________________. (Choose possible branches of a process, and identify an
Three) outcome of a decision
Pega Numerical values of data. How many times was

What are business metrics? something ordered. How many orders of a certain
type get cancelled.
Process data is automatically defined and

What are process metrics? generated within the app. Enables business analysts
to discover issue
A sales manager is required to Business metric. This is because it is the manager

run weekly performance who is providing the information rather than Pega
reports on how long it takes automating it.
for a car to be prepared for
customer delivery after the
sale has been signed. Which
type of report metrics does
this report apply to?
The report browser allows Create reports and delete reports

users to do what (2)
Direct the technical effort on a project, work with

BA's to design app architecture, design architecture
Responsibilities of the LSA
to reuse the app assets as much as possible, meet
quality goals, including app performance.
Focus on particular process or UI form and

Responsibilities of Senior supervise development, add technical details to
System Architects specifications, identify opportunities to reuse
existing assets with then app design
Configure and unit test individual application

Responsibilities of a system elements such as correspondenct and automated
architect decisions. Help draft processes and user interfaces
during DCO sessions.
Pega
On a Pega project, who is LSA
typically responsible for
designing the application
architecture?
With whom does a system BAs

architect work to develop
application specifications?
Pega definition of rules Rules are the instructions to resolve a case.
rule type, a rule type is something which is tailored

A rule is an instance of a
to a specific type of case behavior. One type of
______________________ and what is
rule is for processes, another type of rule is for
this?
automated email notification.
Specific aspects of case behavior, such as a

What should a rule describe?
submission form or an audit process.
rules allow for modularity versioning, delegation and reuse

which provide three benefits
which are
Create new version of a rule whenever case

behavior needs to change. Since each rule
What is versioning?
describes a specific case behavior, the rest of the
case is unaffected.
Allows business users to update case behavior as

business conditions change. You create a rule to
test expense reports of USD25 or less and
What is delegation? delegate the rule to the Accounting Department.
The Accounting department can then update the
rule to have the threshhold for automatic payment
raised to USD50.
Pega Package of rules that are realted in a process and

What is a ruleset? can be shared between apps to allow several
applications to use the same rules.
Allows SA's to update applications by providing

What is a ruleset version?
access to an entire set of rules at once.
Version numbers for rulesets major, minor and patch version

are divided into three numbers
which are termed
Major represnets a substantial release of an

application. extensive change to app functionality.
What do major, minor and Minor version is an interim release or

patch versions do? enhancements to a major release.
Patch version consists of fixes to address bugs in an

app.
Bob creates rules for the first version of an app.

Explain how a ruleset stack is Labels it Expense:01-01-01. Tonya updates the rules
used in an example with more behavior, she labels this Expense:01-02-
01.
Contains the rules that describe how to process a

What is a work class? case, such as processes, data elements, and user
interfaces.
Contains the rules that describe how the

What is an integration class?
application interacts with other systmes
contains the rules that describe the data objects

What is the data class?
used in the app
What is pattern inheritance Share rules through an organization
Pega Allows applications to reuse rules from classes in

other applications and standard rules provided by
What is direct inheritance Pega. Basically, you specify the class you want to
inherit from and are not constricted to pattern
inheritance.
An application references a Directed Inheritance

data element found in the
Work- class. How is this rule
inherited by the application?
rule type - determines behavior modeled by the

rule.
Four things which uniquely

identifier - purpose of the rule
identify a rule. Brief
description of each
class - scope of the rule
ruleset - container for the rule
Process for which pega calls upon the appropriate

What is rule resolution rule by looking at the four characteristics of a rule
which distinguishes it from others
Each user is represented by an opertor record. The ID entered by the user when
____________________. What is used to logging in is used.
connect a user with a unique
operator record?
each operator is a member of access group

an ___________________
Describes set privileges.
Properties of access groups Only one can be open at a time.
Each group references a speicific application
Pega
Which type of record Access group
indentifies the application that
a user has access to when
logging into Designer Studio
__________ is an abstract model of case type, case

a business transaction, while a
_________ is a specific instance of
the transaction.
User creates a loan request. In Loan request is the parent and appraisal is the child
order for the loan request to
be approved, the loan officer
must receive the results of an
appraisal. How should the
case type be configured.
What is the data model Defines the data structure for the case
Collection of related elements. Customer which

What is a data object?
has more than a single value to represent it.
Data elements are called what properties or fields

in pega
Describe a single piece of information such as a

What are value modes and
total. Should be used for properties with no
when should they be used?
correlation to other properties.
Describe a data object such as a customer (multiple

What are page modes and pieces of information). Use if you need to establish
when should they be used? a contextual relationship between single value
properties
Property of mode single value Stores textm numbers, dates, Boolean values and
definition maounts
Pega Acts as a container for an ordered list of text

What is a value list? values. Each code is a single piece of info, but a
clear relationship exists between the codes.
Acts as a container for an unordered list of text

What is a value group?
values. Phone numbers - home, work and mobile.
What is a page A single entity such as a customer
What is a page list Numerically ordered list.
What is a page group A semantically ordered list
In data explorer, what are the Simple, fancy and complex.

three different field types?
Similar to the property types defined on the

What are simple field types?
property itself. Home, work or mobile number
Provide capability to upload an attachment, show

what are fancy field types
location on a map, reference a user on the system
what are complex field types. define page and page list properties.
A claim case records the items page list

of loss. The property reference
to the description of an item of
loss looks like this:
.ItemOfLoss(1).Description. The
property reference
.ItemOfLoss(1).Description is
an example of a __________
property?
Pega
You want to capture the Pick list
delivery method for a
purchase request. The options
are: Standard, premium, or
next-day. You use the Data
Model tab to create the
property. How would you
define the list with the
options?
A candidate's language skills value group

are captured in a candidate
case. What type of property is
used to capture the
candidate's language skill if the
property reference looks like
this: .Language(Spanish)?
Allows you to configure your application so the

system automatically updates property values
What is declarative
which are affected by other fields. An amount
processing?
being increased/decreased by the quantity
specified.
Depends upon rules, such as data transforms,

activites, or user interface rules, to instruct the
What is procedural application when to look for a trigger event.
processing? Doesnt happen automaticaly. For example, waiting
for a user to hit the submit button before triggering
updates to other properties.
Declare expressions are Expression and target property. The expression

comprised of what two things? calculates and updates the target property value.
And how do they work
Updates the target property value when a source

What is forward chaining? property value changes. (number of items will
update total)
Pega Target property value (order total) is not

automatically updated when other declare
What is backward chaining?
expressions in a network update their target values
(individual item cost).
An expression using backward When the application references the property by

chaining only updates its name.
target property when?
If the expression uses many source properties that

change frequently. If an target is dependent on a
How can forward chaining
large amount of source properties, the expression
slow system performance?
will be updated every time any one of these source
properties is updated.
If an expression has many Backwards chaining. All the values can be collected
source properties, what type before displaying the expression, so it only needs
of chaining should be used, to be calculated once as opposed to continuosly
and why? with forward chaining.
Define the target property - the value that is

updated when a declare expression calculation is
performed.
What are the three steps to

Define the expression that calculates the target
creating a declare expression?
property value.
Configure the declare expression to use either

forward or backward chaining .
Which option in pega should Whenever Inputs Change (Auto)

be selected when you wish to
you use forward chaining?
Pega
In a purchase order 2 and 3
application, you have been
asked to add an order total
field that is used on multiple
forms in the application. You
want to make sure that
whenever the input values
change the order total will
change in all the forms. Which
two of the following reasons
would you choose to use a
declare expression for the
calculating value. (Choose
Two).
A declare expression
calculates a specific value that
is used on multiple forms.
The system monitors input

properties and determines
when to update the target
property value.
To update the calculation, you

only update one rule making
the application easier to
maintain.
A declare expression updates

the total value on all the forms
when any form containing the
field is submitted.
Pega
You are configuring a 1
declarative network that
contains eleven declare
expressions, which are used to
calculate the interest rate for a
home mortgage. For example,
the target value Property Tax
Assessment is used a source
value when calculating the
Assessed Property Value. The
declare expressions use target
values from other expressions
to calculate their target values.
The field displaying the
interest rate appears on the
approval form. To reduce the
number of calculations in
order to optimize
performance, how would you
configure the declare
expressions?
Specify backward chaining in

the total interest rate declare
expression.
Apply the declare expression

in the approval flow action.
To calculate the total interest

rate value, add the all the
declare expression target
property values.
Specify forward chaining in the

declare expression that
calculates the total interest
rate value.
Pega
You are designing a travel plan 1 and 3
application. A hotel booking
step displays a form in which
users select a hotel and enter
the number of days they are
staying at the hotel. The form
displays the total cost for the
hotel room. The form also
includes fields for selecting, at
extra cost, options for valet
parking. The cost for any
selected options are totaled
and then added to the total
cost for the room to equal the
grand total, which is displayed
in a field. Which two of the
following properties would
you use as the target
properties? (Choose Two)
Total cost of options
Price of each option
Total cost for the hotel room
Number of days at the hotel
Mechanism of copying data within the case

What is data propagation?
hierarchy.
What does data propagation That the appropriate information is propagated to a

ensure? subcase.
Pega
When a property in the parent No
class is propagated to a child
class or spin-off case, and that
value later changes in the
parent class, is the change
reflected in the subclasses?
Use data propagation to subcases and spin-off cases

automatically copy values
from a case to __________.
When does data propagation When the subcase or soin-off case is created
occur?
Use _________________ to use A data transform

conditional logic to determine
which data should be
propagated
What tool is used to access Clipboard tool

data in memory?
What two things comprise a Name of the element and the value
data element?
Each data element is stored in page

memory on a ________
Structure for organizing data elements in an

What is a memory page?
application
During case processing, each clipboard

page remains in memory in a
structure known as the
______________
Pega
How is information, such as the Information such as the color of a vehicle is
color of a vehicle, stored in associated with a data element. The data element
memory for use in a Pega (property and value) is stored on the clipboard in a
application? structure called a page.
All the data generated as you create and process a

What is the pyWorkPage? case is stored here such as the date the case was
created or the ID number for a case.
This is where the data that describes a data type is

stored. For example, if a case uses a data type
What is the embedded page? named Customer, then Customer is considered an
embedded page within the pyWorkPage. All data
for the Customer (such as name)
2/13/23, 3:30 PM Pega CSSA part 2 Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSSA part 2 Study
Pega CSSA part 2

Advanced Engineering Mathematics

10th Edition • ISBN: 9780470458365
Erwin Kreyszig
4,134 solutions
A1: Operator ID
You add a new work group to
DS1: Operators and Work Queues belong to work
an application. Which two
groups
organisations rules do you
A2: Work Queue
need to update? (Choose two)
DS2: As above
A: Work Group
Which of the following is not
DS: A work group is used to allow managers to
part of the organisational
monitor, report and assign work among operators
structure?
and work queues across the organisation
https://quizlet.com/tw/515619051/pega-cssa-part-2-flash-cards/ 1/11
Pega
The TGB CSSA part
organisation 2
structure A: Add the regional units as sub-units to the Sales
has a Sales unit, and it belongs unit
to a Marketing Division. TGB DS: The regional units report to the Sales unit.
plans to add new units for the Therefore, the regional units are sub units to the
East, Central and West Sales unit.
geographical sales regions.
These regional units report to
the Sales unit. How do you
configure the organisational
hierarhcy to support the new
structure?
A: Create a field value record for each value and

How do you customise the
set the context using the Apply to: field
allowed values for a property
DS: You can add different field values for a single
based on the context of the
property in separate contexts using the Apply to:
property using field values?
setting for each value
A: Customise a list of allowed values for a property

based on the context of the property
Field values enable you to
DS: Field values enable you to manage the list of
_______
allowed values and customise the allowed values
based on the context of the property
Which step do you perform to A: Upload the image in the application theme
update the logo in a portal DS: To update the logo in the portal header, upload
header? the new logo in the application theme.
Which record do you A: Navigation record

configure to add an item to DS: Menus are configured in the navigation record
the left panel menu in the
Case Manager portal
Pega CSSA part 2 A1: The user role of the type of user who would
access the portal
DS1: You configure a portal rule to support either
Which two options do you user or developer access
configure on a portal record? A2: The appropriate skin to apply branding to the
(Choose Two) portal
DS2: You configure a portal to use the branding
configured application skin, or to apply a specific
skin to the portal
A1: High contrast colour schemes are available for

users with vision limitations
Which two standard
DS1: Tooltips on controls and high contrast colour
accessibility options are
schemes are available without adding the PegaWAI
available without adding the
ruleset
PegaWAI ruleset? (Choose
A2: Tooltips on controls are read aloud to the user
Two)
by a screen reader
DS2: As above
A: Provide enhanced interface support for users

What is the purpose of requiring assistance
accessibility roles? DS: Some users require the accessibility features to
interact with your application
A: Add the PegaWAI ruleset to the list of

What do you do before you application production rulesets
configure the Advanced tab of DS: To implement the PegaWAI ruleset, you first
the Access group to apply the add and save the ruleset to the list of production
PegaWAI ruleset? rulesets in the Advanced section of the application
Definition page
Pega CSSA
A developer part
decides that2 A: The Disability preview in the Accessibility
buttons in a Pega application Inspector Tool
are blue, while the button text DS: The Disability preview in the Accessibility
is purple. What Pega feature Inspector tool allows you to preview what the
allows the developer to check current UI looks like to users with different forms of
whether the application users colour blindness
with a form of colour blindness
can easily differentiate
between the button text and
button background
A1: You can use the Localisation wizard to export

the string to be translated which contain rules such
as field value or message rules
DS1: Field values and message rules appear in an
Which of the following two
XML file. The translated version is inserted in the
statements are true about the
XML file, and imported into Pega Platform
Localisation Wizard? (Choose
A2: Correspondence and paragraph rules are
Two)
exported as HTML files to be translated
DS2: After downloading the translation pack, look
for Base and Translation HTML files. Save the
localised versions in the Translation files.
Which rule is used to store the A: Field value

labels, messages and other DS: Field values support localisation by overriding
text strings that require an English word or phrase with an equivalent term
translation? in another language
Pega CSSA part 2 A1: Instruction text

DS1: Field values are use to localise instruction texts
under 64 characters
A2: Short descriptions
DS2: As above
You can use field values to
localise ________ and ______.
Additional info;
(choose two)
Field values seem to be used for two things; define

items in a selection list AND to support localisation
by overriding an English word or phrase with an
equivalent term in another language.
Users must select the make A: Source the contents of the UI control directly
and model of their vehicles from a data page
when submitting a new DS: The reference pattern references data directly
insurance claim. Which is the without making it part of the data model
best implementation for this
use case?
Pega CSSA part 2 A: Configure a page property with the Refer to a

data page option enabled
DS: The system of record (SoR) pattern references
data in an external system without including it in the
case data
Additional info:
A product return case must Keyed access pattern; used to populate a list of
always show the current objects and access information about a specific
contact information for the object in the list - This is used for frequent back and
customer from the customer forth between objects in a large list (i.e. currencies)
database. Which is the best SoR: used to access data in another system or
implementation for this use application - the case does NOT own the reference
case? data
SoR pattern can be used when we want to keep

the data up-to-date for both inflight & new cases
whereas, Snapshot pattern can be used to maintain
a copy of data for inflight cases and up-to-date
information for new cases.
Both Page and PageList properties can be
configured using SoR & Snapshot pattern.
An online order must include A: Configured a page property with the Copy data
item price information at the from a data page option enabled
time of the order placement. DS: The snapshot pattern copies data from an
Which is the best external system to the case
implementation for this use
case?
Pega CSSA part 2 A: Create a keyed data page with vehicle

information
DS: A keyed data page frontloads the data from the
data source and then uses one or multiple keys to
locate and return matching instances. The keyed
data page is the best implementation where there
are frequent unique queries before the information
becomes stale
When users select the model
of their vehicle, the application
Additional info:
displays the specifications for
the model. Most vehicle model
Keyed data page
requests occur before the
PROS:
vehicle information becomes
-It avoids unnecessary database hits when the
stale. Which is the best
parameter changes, thereby enhancing the
performance.
case?
-Unlike parameterized data pages, it does not
create multiple versions of data pages in the
clipboard.
CONS
-Keyed data pages can only be referred from
property rule. If referred in any other rules like
section, flow-action, etc. it acts as a normal data
page as we don't have an option to pass key.
A1: An external class always has an associated

database table instance
DS1: Each external class has an associated
Which two statement about database table instance. Properties in an external
external classes are true? class are present on the clipboard, and you can set
(Choose Two) property values with declare expressions.
A2: It is possible to create declare expression rules
on external classes
DS2: As above
Pega CSSA part 2 A1: Execute a complex SQL statement such as a join
or stored procedure against an external database
DS1: Use Connect SQL rules to execute a complex
Which two of the following SQL statement such as a join or stored procedure
options are good uses of against an external database
Connect SQL rules? (Choose A2: Execute SQL statements that contain database
Two) vendor specific syntax
DS2: Use Connect SQL rules to execute SQL
statements that contain database vendor specific
syntax
Which symbolic index keyword A: <Append>

adds an element to the end of DS: <Append> adds an element to the end of a
a page list propert? page list property
An activity executes the A: 5

following five steps on an DS: The first Property-Set is written to the deferred
integer property in the list and persisted to the database at the Commit
sequence shown. What is the step overwriting the second Property-Set value
value in the database after all written directly to the database.
five steps complete?
Property-Set (value = 5)
Obj-Save
Property-Set (value = 10)
Obj-Save with Write now
Commit
A1: Data pages

DS1: A connector can be directly referenced from
A connector can be directly
an activity and a data page
referenced from ________ and
A2: Activities
_________ ? (Choose Two)
DS2: A connector can be directly referenced from
an activity and a data page
Pega
In which CSSA
order arepart 2
rules and A: 1,2, 4, 3, 6, 5
data instances applied for a DS: The mapping of the response occurs before
connector? 1. Data applying the data transform
Page/Activity 2. Data Transform
(from application data
structure to integration
clipboard structure) 3.
Mapping rule (from integration
clipboard structure to format
specified by the target service)
4. Connect rule 5. Data
Transform (from integration
clipboard structure to
application data structure) 6.
Mapping rule (from format
received by the service to
integration clipboard
structure)
In which of the following A: When the interface definition is not finalised

situations do you simulate a DS: If the interface definition is unavailable, there is
data page? no connector and you must simulate the data page
A1: Call a connector from a flow

Which two of the following DS1: An activity is required to simulate a connector.
situations require an activity? An Integrator shape calls an activity
(Choose Two) A2: Simulate a connector
DS2: As above
A1: Create a data page

Which two of the following DS1: You use a data transform to load a data page
steps are necessary to with the correct settings and a data page to access
implement Global Resource the Global Resource Settings
Settings? (Choose Two) A2: Create a data transform
DS2: As above
Pega CSSA part 2 A: Dynamic System Setting

Which of the following record DS: A dynamic system setting is a data record used
types are editable on a to store environmental variables and are not part of
production system? a ruleset. Data records are editable even when the
rulesets are locked in production
A1: Global Resource Settings allow you to manage

settings in one place
DS1: Managing your integration settings in one
Select two benefits of using place allows you to easily make changes
Global Resource Settings. A2: Global Resource Settings allow you to manage
(Choose Two) settings without unlocking rulesets.
DS2: Using Global Resource Settings allow you to
not have to update the rules in the application, just
the data values for the integration properties.
An error is generated when a A: The service is running on a system that is

connector invokes a remote temporarily unavailable.
service. Which of the following DS: This is a transient error because the situation is
is an example of a transient temporary.
error?
Which of the following allows A: Use an existing function in the error handling
you to write all errors that are data transform.
detected when loading a data DS: There is an existing function for writing
page to a log file? messages to a log file
A1: The error handler flow is invoked if the error is

not handled elsewhere.
DS1: The error handler flow is always enabled and
Which two of the following
invoked if the error is not handled in the data page
statements are the most
or activity.
accurate with respect to the
A2: The standard connector error handler flow can
error handler flow? (Choose
help recover from transient errors
Two)
DS2: The standard error handler flow retries
sending the request in order to recover from
transient errors
Pega CSSA part 2 A1: Access data from a data page

Which two of the following DS1: The Pega API allows you to create new cases
actions can you perform with and access data from a data page
the Pega API? (Choose Two) A2: Create a new case
DS2: As above
A1: Only properties can reference keyed data

pages
DS1: Configuration of a keyed data page occurs on
a data page with a list structure.
Regarding keyed data pages,
A2: Keyed page access is not available for single
which two statements are true:
pages
DS2: Only a property can reference a keyed data
page. Parameters can be used in both non-keyed
and keyed data access
A: An external class maps Pega properties to

An external class differs from
database columns
other Pega classes in which
DS: An external class maps Pega properties to
way?
database columns
2/13/23, 3:41 PM PCSA - Pega Certified System Architect 2 Flashcards | Quizlet
PCSA - Pega Certified System Architect 2 Study
PCSA - Pega Certified System Architect 2

Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
J. Douglas Faires, Richard L. Burden
873 solutions
In a mortgage application, the Make loan request a parent case type and
user creates a loan request. In appraisal a child case type.
appraisal. How would you
configure the case types to
reflect their relationship?
A reservation process allows A visible when condition applied to the check box
customers to reserve a flight,
hotel room, and rental car as
part of a travel itinerary. Which
configuration displays a check
box to allow users to select
travel insurance only if the
itinerary includes a flight?
https://quizlet.com/562014476/pcsa-pega-certified-system-architect-2-flash-cards/ 1/38
PCSA - Pega
A form lists Certified System
a group of Architect
§ set the 2 to other importance.
image column
recreational activities users § set the check box column to secondary
can select when booking a imporance.
vacation. One column !ism the § set the activity name column to primary
activity name, a second importance.
column provides the check
box for activity selection, and
a third column displays a
thumbnail image of the activity.
When viewed on a small
screen, you do not need to
display the images.
What three configuration steps
would you take to support this
requirement? (Choose Three)
Review the following Page List

screenshot. In the
Miscellaneous Item section,
the user can enter several item
names. The entered values are
stored in Items property.
Which type of property is this?
You have been asked to Decision tree

configured a rule for use in a
business process to evaluate
multiple property values and
return a text value as a result.
Which type of rule satisfies this
requirement?
PCSA - Pega Certified...System Architect 2

A prospective
employee must pass a
criminal background
check before receiving
an offer. When would
you add a decision
point to the workflow
process?
§ Rules are used to define and configure an

Select the statement that best application
define a rule. (Choose Two) § Rule are organized in RuleSets, which are then
organized into class
In the Answer Area, select the Correct

development approach that
corresponds to each attribute.
Solution:
Determine whether the given

solution is correct?
PCSA
Customer-Service
Pega Certified System
Allow Architect 2 a value
the CSR to select
Representatives (CSRs) review for.pyUrgencyAssignAdjust.
customer requests to replace a
lost or stolen credit card.
Once the request is approved,
customers are notified by
letter of the expected delivery
date for a replacement card
typically within one week. The
CSR must be able to prioritize
time-sensitive requests such as
requests from customers who
are on vacation.
Time-sensitive requests are
prioritized as follows:
- Customers receive a
replacement card the next day.
- Fulfillment requests are sent
to a dedicated workbasket.
- Customers receive
notification of the expected
delivery date by email.
How do you provide CSRs
with the option to increase the
assignment urgency for
requests from a customer with
a time-sensitive need?
Select the corresponding user Correct

interface (UI) action set
component for each behavior
in the Answer area.
Solution:

PCSA - best
What is the Pega Certified
thing if we System Architect
Decision tree 2
have many nested ifs?
You need to read from an § Use a SQL connector

external database table § Map the table to a class
containing inventory data.
Which two ways could you
integrate with the table?
(Choose two.)
Match the business need to Correct

the most appropriate work
party instantiation option.
Solution:

Which to rule to use for the § Decision Tree

following case. § Decision Table.
- Return Grade A for 91-100
- Return Grade B for 71-90
- Return Grade C for others
Choose two)
PCSA - Pega
The approval Certified
process for a System Architect
Decision tree 2
purchase request case must
satisfy the following
requirements:
- A request for office supplies
placed by the Facilities
department that totals EUR100
or less is automatically
approved.
- A request for software is
automatically rejected unless
requested by the IT
department.
- Any request that exceeds
EUR1000 is automatically
subject to review by the
Auditing department.
Which type of rule would you
configure to satisfy this
requirement?
Users can select a check box Use a when condition in the UI form to determine
to subscribe to a messaging whether to show the mobile phone number field.
service. Selecting the check
box displays a field for a user
to enter a mobile phone
number. How do you
configure the application to
display a field for entering a
mobile phone number only
when the check box is
selected?
PCSA - Pega Certified System Architect

§ The framework layer2is a reusable application that
can be used as the basis for a specific
From the following choices,
implementation
select three statements that
§ A framework layer may be built upon another
are true about a framework
framework layer
layer. (Choose Three)
§ Rules applied to a class in the framework layer
can be called from the implementation layer
What are two ways you can § Add a field group list to a view in App Studio.
add a table to a view? § Add a table to a section used by the view.
Which shape allows the user to Flow Action

decide how to advance to the
next step in a flow?
Which of the following types Requirement

of information is NOT provided
in the New Application
Wizard? (Choose One)
A customer data object As a page list

references an address as
depicted by the data model
below. How would you define
the address property in the
customer class?
You have to create a field to Use edit validate rule

enter only past date. then what
is the best method.
§ A human resources manager who approves time

off requests - Specific user (Work list)
§ A customer creating an order online - Current
Match the following: Routing
user
§ An employee in the Benefits department who
processes benefit changes - Work queue
PCSA - Pega
An application Certified System
allows Architect
configure 2
a parallel process for each of the
consultants to enter hours required approvals.
worked on a project on a
weekly basis.Consultant hours
need approval by the manager
and the project supervisor. The
approvals can occur in any
order. Which of the following
approval configurations meets
the requirement?
A company requires that Data-Party-Person

patients receive status updates
during processing of medical
tests. Patients are not users of
the application. You create the
work party for the patient as
an instance of which class?
What is the best way to ensure Edit validate

a user enters email in proper
format.
The use case is to create a Create a service for Purchase Request and a
purchase request case upon connector for retrieving currency values.
receiving an email and need to
fetch the currency values from
an external system.How would
you implement this scenario.
§ Text message
Select notify modes
§ Mail
Unit testing identifies configuration issues that can

Which best describes the
propagate to other rules with potentially serious
benefit of unit testing rules?
consequences.
PCSA
The case - Pega
type Certified
hierarchy in System Architect
§ In each 2 data transform, set the work
subcase type
your insurance application urgency to the required value.
consists of three case types: § Select the Call superclass data transform option
Claim (top level). Personal in each of the subcase data type transforms.
Injury (subcase type of Claim),
and Emergency Care (subcase
type of Personal Injury). In the
Claim case type, a data
transform sets the claim date
and work urgency. To reduce
maintenance. You do not want
to set in each subcase the
properties that were already
set in the parent data
transforms.
However, you want to set work
urgency to different values in
each subcase type. What two
configuration steps would you
take to meet this requirement?
(Choose Two)
In processing a parent case P- Both C-l and C-2 must be resolved before P-l can
l, two child cases C-l and C-2 be resolved.
are created. Which of the
following statements is correct
about the processing of P-l, C-
l, and C-2?
PCSA - an
You create Pega Certified
employees to System Architect
Use byDefault 2
and bySetFieldDefaults. When the
submit timesheets. Employees process invokes the data transforms, the remaining
enter week work, vacation, and vacation and sick time calculate.
sick time for a particular week.
On the entry form, employees
see a summary of the total
hours entered.
After the employee submits
the timesheet, the application
displays remaining vacation
and sick time for the
employee. You configure the
user view that displays
remaining vacation and side
lime. The balance calculates by
subtracting the vacation time
and sick time for the week
from the current vacation and
sick time balances.
Which configuration option is
used to summarize the
remaining vacation and sick
time?
PCSA - an
You create Pega Certified
application for System Architect
Use procedural 2
processing. When the value of any
employees to submit work, vacation, or sick time changes and the user
timesheets. Employees enter submits the form, the total hours change.
work, vacation, and sick time
for a particular week. On the
entry form, employees see a
summary of the total hours
entered. After the employee
submits the timesheet, the
application displays remaining
vacation and sick time for the
employee.
To configure the form where
users enter hours, select the
best configuration option to
calculate the total hours for
the week.
You have a requirement to add Use an edit validate rule that validates the routing
a bank routing number field to number pattern.
a view. Routing numbers must
contain nine digits. How would
you configure the field to
support this requirement?
You are implementing a data Edit Validate rule

entry screen to include an
asset ID field to track company
equipment. All asset IDs are
eight characters in length. The
first three characters are
letters followed by a five-digit
number.
Which validation approach
restricts entries to the required
format?
PCSA - Pega
A development learnCertified
plans to System Architect
Place the 2 into a new minor version of
updated rules
enhance functionality of an the ruleset and include the new ruleset version In a
existing application by new version of the application.
changing several user
interface rules. The team
would like to pilot the
enhancements to small group
of users before rolling the
changes out to the entire user
base.
What approach maximizes
reuse and maintainability?
During a design review of an reused in other forms

application, some of the
layouts in various sections are
saved as separate sections. A
layout can be saved as a
section so it can be_____________.
You are designing a form for Column layout

an online bookstore to display
new arrivals. The form is
displayed on laptops and
tablets. Pictures of the book
covers are displayed in
columns. The number of
columns changes depending
on the screen size.
Which layout do you use to
display the book cover
pictures?
PCSA - Pega
In a purchase Certified
application, you System Architect 2
§ Customer
allow customers to create § Purchase order
purchase requests. Each
purchase request contains a
list of line items. Each line item
holds the product identifier,
quantity, and price. If a
product is not in stock the
application creates a purchase
order. The purchase order is
processed by the purchasing
team.
Which two entities would you
model as case types? (Choose
two.)
Information about the case pyWorkPage

data is stored in which page
on the Clipboard? (Choose
One)
Review the following Decision Reject

Table:
If the credit score is 723 and

the outstanding balance is
2157, which value will be
returned?
PCSA - Pega
An on-demand Certified System
transportation Architect
No system of record 2
application has a Conversation
preference data type. When
customers use the application
a ride, they can specify their
conversation preference:
whether they would like to talk
to their driver or if they would
prefer silence. Company
stakeholder are interested in
analyzing the conversation the
performance data.
How is the Conversation
preference data type sourced?
§ A customer service representative who speaks

Spanish - toSkilledGroup
§ A manager who approves laptop and software
Match the following: Routing requisitions for remote employees - usiness Logic
to groups and individuals. Routing
§ A human resources manager who distributes work
to the human resources team - Work group
Manager
Several development teams § Set up branch ruleset for each team.

work on different § Create a new ruleset version for each team.
enhancements. The release
date for each enhancement is
uncertain.Which two options
allow each team to keep its
work separate? (Choose two.)

§ A small 2 a Pega application for job
company uses
applications. The Available positions data type
includes fields for position title. description, and
qualifications. - Pega system of record
§ An auto repair shop uses a Pega application to
schedule appointments. The Vehicle data type
includes fields for make, model, and year. The
Creating data types.
application must be able to accommodate any
vehicle. - External system of recordStandardized
test enrollment application contains a Special
accommodations data type. Special
accommodations include needing readers, large-
print exams, special seating or extended time. - No
system of record
You are developing a purchase Report Definition

application that integrates with
an external inventory
management system. A __________
allows you to build the
interface so that Pega can
request information from the
inventory management system
KChapman@MyCo.com needs KChapman@MyCo.com

to check out the NewAccount
flow rule in the
MyCoCommercialAccount:03-
05-02 RuleSet in order to
modify it. When it is checked
out, a copy of the rule is
placed in which RuleSet?
(Choose One)
Which business need do you A service representative must attach the

address through delegation? appropriate form when emailing a customer.
PCSA
Select the-statement
Pega Certified
about a System Architect
A subcase cannot be2
created manually by an end
subcase creation that is user
incorrect
Select each piece of Correct

Information on the left and
drag it to the appropriate
Clipboard Location.
Solution:

A purchase request case The data propagation features propagates values

creates a child case to check from the purchase request case on creation of the
inventory. If products are check inventory case. Subsequent updates need to
added to or deletsed from the be handled manually.
purchase request, the data
needs to be propagated to the
check inventory case. What is
true with regards to the data
propagation feature for the
above requirement?
§ The application identifies the customer upon

An organization requests the
login.
following behavior for a case
§ The case type lists the last 10 orders placed by
type that allows customers to
the customer.
place orders for fulfillment.
§ The customer can select one of the previous 10
When the customer logs in:
orders as the basis for the current order.
PCSA - Pega
In an insurance Certified System
claims AccessArchitect 2
group -> Application
application, you want to
capture miscellaneous
inventory items, as displayed in
the screen below.
Which of the following

relationships is strictly one- to-
one mapping?
You want to engage business Direct Capture of Objectives (DCO)

and IT resources to review the
working models. What best
practice helps accomplish this
objective?
You need to copy data from a Declare expression

page with customer data to a
page used for a credit
payment. Most of the
properties can be mapped as-
is, but the first and last names
must be concatenated into a
full name.
Which rule type would you use
to copy the content?
Which of the following should Use a Validate rule to check if it is numeric and
be done to check that a greater than zero.
property is greater than zero.
In which of the following Two SOAP connectors execute in parallel to

situations would you configure improve performance.
global resource settings?
PCSA - Pega
The following imageCertified
is a page System Architect
A repeating dynamic 2
layout
list presented in a nonlinear
format that automatically
adjusts based on screen size.
The image is an example of
_______.
A customer views a product Drop-down

available in multiple color
options. The customer must
select only one color for each
product. Which UI control
allow a developer to present
the user with all color choices
at once, without prompting or
clicking, while ensuring that
the user can only select one of
the color options?
You want to capture the Picklist

are Standard, Premium, or
Next Day. You use the Data
define the list with the delivery
options?
Which two conditions do you § A property value is set correctly by a data

test with a unit test? (Choose transform.
Two) § A data page populates without any errors.
A survey is sent to a customer Use the Insert Property feature of a Send Email
via email. How do you step to add the case ID when composing the
configure a solution to ensure message dialog.
the email includes the case ID
for the survey?
PCSA - Pega
You are defining Certified
a user view System Architect
Use a validate rule to2
verify the Date account
for a loan application. If the opened is in the past.
loan applicant indicates there
is an existing open account,
the Date account opened
must be before the current
date. Select the approach that
meets the validation
requirements.
The report contains a filer to DueDate

only return purchase requests
with a status (.pyStatusWork) of
open. Which property can you
optimize to improve report
performance?
You are configuring an Define a case calculation to update the reservation

application to process travel total with the total of each child case.
reservations. The reservation
case creates child cases for
each booking component:
flight, hotel stay, and vehicle
rental.
How do you update the total
cost of the reservation as users
update each child case?
§ Assigned case worker (.pxAssignedOperatorID)

You have been asked to create § Requestor (.pxCreateOperator)
a report that displays the § Request date (.pxCreateDateTime)
following information: § Due date (.DueDate)
§ Assigned vendor (.VendorName)
An application references a By applying directed inheritance.

PCSA
From the - Pega
left, Certified System
drag the Architect 2
Correct
scenario from to the blank
rectangle next to the
approprite routing option.
Solution:

Which shape can be used for Decision

user to decide which flow
need to be taken.
You are updating a system of Implement the logic in the connector"TMs error
record using a SOAP handler flow.
connector. If the system of
record is unavailable, you want
to retry after an hour. If it is still
unavailable after an hour, a
notification should be sent to a
system administrator. How do
you implement this
requirement?
A manager has requested a Use the cost center column to group the results.
report that shows the purchase
requests for each of the
regional cost centers. The
manager wants to organize the
results so the cost center
appears only once on the
report and the requests are
listed under cost center.
How would you configure the
report definition?
PCSA - Pega
Data pages Certified System
can be populated Architect
§ Report definition 2
from a: (Choose Two) § Data transform
Consider the following a review request

request: An Employee submits
a request to purchase
equipment. The request is sent
to the manager for review.If Is
approved, the request is
forwarded to the fulfillment
department. How Do you
name the step where the
request is sent to the
manager?
Data Pages operate within § Thread

which of the following scopes? § Node
(Choose Three) § Requestor
Which types of content can a § All node-level pages created by their application
system architect find on the § Information about all cases open by users
clipboard? (Choose Two)
A requirement states: When a Configure hotel review as a child case of the

business guest checks out of a checkout request.
hotel, the guest must
complete a hotel review to
receive a corporate discount.
Select the case type
relationship that satisfies the
requirement.
PCSA - Pega
A customer Certified System
data object Architect
As a page list 2
reference an address as
depicted by the data model
below.
How would you define the

address property in a
customer class?
A requirement states: The tax Use an edit validate rule that validates the tax
identification number must identification number pattern.
contain 10 digits. How do you
configure the field to support
this requirement?
A class group is used store data from different child classes in a single
to______________. table
In an application for A data page

configuring hardware
equipment for new employees,
the manager chooses a laptop
model from a drop-down list.
The list of available laptop
models is maintained in an
external system and may
change over time.
Which of the following do you
use as the data source for this
drop-down list?
What is the primary purpose of To allow the end user to change the work status of
an assignment shape in a flow? the case
PCSA
Consider - Pega
the Certified System
following Architect
Use a Create 2 shape and reference the
PDF Smart
requirement: The system must UI section to transform to PDF
generate a PDF for the Fraud
Claim Resolution. Which
Configuration satisfies this
requirement?
Drag the data type description Correct

from the left to the blank
rectangle next to the
approprite sourcing option.
Solution:

Which two statements § Reports are used to assess process performance.

demonstrate the role of a § Reports are used to select items from a list while
report? (Choose Two) working in an assignment.
Which of these options are § Label Positioning

typically configured on a § Alignment of field values
dynamic layout? (Choose Two)
Which option represents the A control specifies a format which uses a mixin.
relationship between mixins,
controls, and formats?
An SLA is defined as below 55

.What would be the value of
urgency after5 days of no
action.Default Urgency -
10Initial Urgenct - 0Goal - 1
day -10Deadline - 3 days -
15Past Deadline - 1 day -
10Repeating past deadline - 3
times
PCSA - Pega
A form allows Certified
customers to System Architect
From the flow action 2
where the customer submits
specify the amount of a the form
balance transfer for their credit
card. The form contains two
fields: one to display the
available balance on the
customer's credit card, and
one for the user to enter the
amount of the balance transfer.
You configure a validate rule
to verify that the amount of a
balance transfer is less than
75% of the available balance
on the customer's credit card.
How do you call the validate
rule?
Select the decision rule that is Decision Tree

most appropriate for
implementing a set of nested if
conditions.
In an insurance application, a Page list

claim case records the items of
loss. Given the property
reference Item 0f
Loss(1).Description, itemOfLoss
is a ______.
In the Answer Area, identify Correct

the data access option for
each type of reference data.
Solution:

PCSA - Pega
An application must Certified
validate System Architect
§ Configure 2 control to select the
a dropdown
postal codes for Canadian postal code based on the specified city and
customers to match the province.
pattern A1A 1A1, where A § Configure an edit validate rule to test that the
represents a letter and 1 entered postal code conforms to the required
represents a number. Which pattern.
two configuration options
allow you to ensure that a user
provides a valid postal code?
(Choose Two)
An order fulfillment case type § Account ID and password

allows a customer to update § Customer contact information
user profile information during § A list of open orders with status of each order
the order placement stage.
The user profile consists of the
following three pages:
You have added a page list Set .Dependents(1).Relotionship to Not Applicable

property named Dependents
to a view in the Case Designer.
This page list contains the
property .Relationship. You
want to display the list in the
view and populate a field with
the default value of Not
Applicable. How do you
configure the
pySetFieldDefaults data
transform to meet this
requirement?
How do you configure the Add a set of optional actions to the case workflow.
case type to allow customers
to update any of the user
profile pages at any time
during case processing?
PCSA
You have -Designed
Pega an Certified
Enter System Architect
Remove 2
the Data Transform and Create a Declare
Order Form that uses a data Expression
Transform to Calculate the
Total order amount based on
the item Price and Order
Quantity. You have been asked
to create other forms in which
the total order amount is
calculated. Each of the new
Forms must also use the Enter
Order Data Transform in order
to make the calculation.
How do you Configure your
application to avoid using the
Enter Order Data transform to
make the calculation in every
new Form?
While preparing to release an Replace the activity with a data transform to copy
application, you notice a the content of the previous order to the current
guardrail violation on an order.
activity you wrote. The activity
copies the content of a
previous customer order to the
current order. How do you
address the guardrail
violation?
Which component defines and Connector

implements an interface
between an external
application acting as a client
and a PRPC system acting as a
server?
PCSA
You need-toPega Certified System
fetch exchange Node Architect 2
rates that are updated on a
daily basis from a web service
and make them available in
your application using a data
page. Which scope would you
select for the data page?
A user view includes a list of Configure a picklist with radio buttons for the
four urgency options urgency options.
selectable by radio buttons.
How do you configure the
selection list?
§ First stage - New Order

Drag the data source type to
§ Next stage - shipping
the corresponding usage.
§ Last stage - Delivery
A requirement for an insurance Declare Expression

quote states that as customers
add or remove coverage
options. The total cost of
policy changes. Which type of
rule do you configure to
satisfy this requirement?
A sales manager runs weekly Business metrics

reports on how long it takes to
prepare a car for customer
delivery. Which type of report
metrics apply to this report?
PCSA
You have -been
PegaaskedCertified
to create System Architect
To perform 2 wherever a field is
the calculation
a sequence of user forms for a updated
travel reservation process. The
forms contain fields that
require calculation. For which
reason do you use a declare
expression to calculate
values?
You need to add a button to a Configure an action set on the button control.
user form. When the button is
pressed, the application
invokes a data transform, then
creates a new case. How do
you implement this
functionality?
When do we use a single When the assignment shape is not related to the
assignment in a step? next shape.
§ A work type represents a fundamental unit of

work to be processed and resolved
Which of the following are true
§ A work type is a template used to create a work
statements regarding a work
item
type?
§ A work type defines the process used to
complete, or resolve, work
Which two configuration steps § Select a ruleset configured to store automated

do you perform, in test cases.
combination, to record a unit § Add an assertion to define an expected result.
test for automated testing?
(Choose Two)
PCSA - Pega Certified System

§ If theArchitect 2 score is unacceptable, the
customers credit
customer is notified of the result and the loan
An applicant submits a loan
application is closed.
request. The system validates
§ If the customers credit is acceptable, the loan
information on the loan
application is forwarded to a loan officer for review.
application and calculates the
§ If the loan officer approves the loan request, the
applicants credit score based
loan application is sent to the underwriting
on credit reports and
department for processing.
customers account history with
§ If the loan officer rejects the loan request, the
the bank.
customer is notified of the result and the loan
application is closed.
Which requirement is best You cannot complete a purchase case on a website

implemented using a Wait step unless you complete a new account subcase.
in a case?
When are data pages created? When they are first accessed
A data page holds the local 11:40

weather information and has
the Reload if Older Than field
set to 10 minutes. The data
page is created at 11:22.
The user then performs the
following actions:11:28 the user
refreshes the weather
information11:40 the user
refreshes the weather
information
At what time is the data page
reloaded?
Which shape can be used to Decision

call a Decision Tree.
Select the statement that A case identifies the work to perform, while a
describes the difference process defines how the work is performed
between a case and a process.
PCSA - Pegaapplication
A hotel reservation Certified System Architect 2
AutoComplete
has the following requirement:
Users must select the
destination city from a list of
options. The list is filtered
based on user entry. As a user
types the city name, the list of
options narrows.
Which UI control allows you to
implement this requirement?
You create an application to § A set of fields to capture the shipping details

track package deliveries. § A work party to represent the customer
Choose three elements that § A user view to enter the shipping details
are essential for this
application. (Choose Three)
§ You use a single page for a single record, and a

list for loading multiple records. - Structure
§ The data type (class) of the data page - Object
type
Match the following
§ ptions include read only, editable, and savable -
Edit mode
§ ata is available to a single case, a single user, or
all users on the system. - Scope
Which of the following Access group -> Application

relationships is strictly one- to-
one mapping?
Which requirement can be An application routes upgrade requests for US

implemented through customers to one work queue, and requests for
circumstancing? European customers to a different work queue.
What three questions should § Who is the user that receives the correspondence
you answer to create effective § when does the correspondence need to be sent?
correspondence? (Choose § How will the correspondence be sent?
Three)
PCSA - Pega
An international Certified
online car System Architect
Configure 2 to an external system of
a connection
parts business wants record that contains the make, model, and year
customers to find parts for any vehicle data.
vehicle easily. You are asked to
implement the following
requirement: Customers muse
select a make, model, and year
to initiate a vehicle-specific
search. How do you configure
the data storage in the
application to implement the
requirement?
On a service level, the passed The end of the deadline interval.

deadline interval is measured
from ______________________.
Pega comes with numerous When automating case processing

API activities. In which
situation would you explore
available API activities?
While reviewing a UI form in a Live UI

Grooming/Elaboration
playback, you notice a typo in
the label of a field. Which tool
allows you to identify the
section rule that contains the
incorrect label?
In which situation is the use of Writing a message to a log file

an activity necessary?
PCSA - Pega
A customer Certified System
files a fraud Architect
Investigate Claim 2
complaint. The complaint is
investigated by a customer
service agent. The customer
service agent may request
additional information from the
customer.
The merchant is notified and
given 15 days to dispute the
fraud claim. If the fraud claim is
approved, an affidavit is sent
to the customer and a refund is
posted to their account.
How do you name the step
where the agent investigates
the claim for fraud?
Identify the principal reasons § To group related processes and steps.

for dividing a case into stages. § To provide context for the events that occur while
(Choose Two) processing a case.
The application contains a ORG-App-Data-Customer

case type ORG-App-Work-
PurchaseOrder. The case type
uses an embedded page to
hold customer information. The
embedded page is of class
ORGApp- Data-Customer.
What would be the most
appropriate "Applies To:" class
for a section rule displaying
customer information?
PCSA - Pega
A data page Certified System
holds product Architect
§ 8:10 the 2 the product information
user refreshes
information and has the § 8:45 the user refreshes the product information
Reload if Older Than field set
to 30 minutes. The data page is
created at 7:43. The user then
performs the following actions:
In which situation does a case The case type uses an authorization process used
type for software upgrade throughout the organization.
requests reuse a rule through
pattern inheritance?
At what time is the data page 8:45

reloaded?
Which statement best When a given milestone is reached, the specified

describes how a service level urgency value is added to the current urgency
affects the urgency value of an value.
assignment or a case?
A purchase request list report Summarize the case ID column by count.

includes columns for case ID
and regional cost center. A
manager wants the report to
show the total number of
purchase requests for each of
the regional cost centers. How
do you configure the report
definition?
PCSA
An online-sales
application Architect
§ Adjust 2 behavior in the skin for
the responsive
supports both laptop and optimal viewing in the mobile portal.
mobile devices. You are § Do not use a skin for the mobile application
configuring the application version.
skin and you notice the
responsive layout in the
mobile device & not displaying
views as stakeholders require.
Which two options allow you
to resolve this situation without
negatively impacting the
laptop users? (Choose Two)
Which two configurations do § Reference the Edit Validate rule on the

you use to validate the CollectAccountlnformation flow action.
minimum age of a new § Reference the Validate rule on the
potential customer in the CollectAccountInformation assignment.
CollectAccountInformation
assignment step? (Choose
Two)
The primary purpose of a updated in a production environment

production ruleset is to allow
rules to be _____________________.
Developers are finished Lock the RuleSet version

developing rules in a particular
RuleSet version. What should
be done to prevent these rules
from being updated by
others? (Choose One)
PCSA - Pega
A candidate's Certified
language skills System Architect 2
Value group
used to capture the
property reference is
.Language(Spanish)?
What are the minimum One action and one event

components of a user
interface (UI) action set?
You configure a service level Urgency value remains at 100, but other service
to adjust assignment urgency level processing continues.
to 100 when the goal interval
lapses. How does the
assignment urgency impact the
deadline and passed deadline
intervals?
You need to configure a case § Create one correspondence rule containing the
type to send a confirmation for confirmation, then circumstance the
change-of-address requests. correspondence rule for each correspondence
The confirmation is sent to type.
customers as an email, text § Create one correspondence rule for each
message, and letter. correspondence type. Configure each
Which two options ensure that correspondence rule to reference another
the content of the correspondence rule that contains the
confirmation is the sa me for confirmation.
all three correspondence
types? (Choose two.)
When modeling the life cycle § represent exceptions to the normal course of
of a case, alternate stages _____ events
and ______. (Choose Two) § can be sequenced in to primary stages
PCSA - Pega
You use the Certified
Clipboard tool to System Architect
§ Test case 2 setting property values for
behavior by
perform which two tasks? an open case.
(Choose Two) § Review the current values of case data.
Which set of filtering condition Credit Card equals MoreCash OR Credit Card
returns a report with the equals Vista AND Billing Cycle is not quarterly AND
desired data? Expiration Date is less than 60 days
An application that generates § Up to $10/day

auto insurance quotes allows § Up to $25/day
users to add a substitute § Up to $50/day
transportation reimbursement
option to their coverage. Users
who add this option are
required to select one of three
reimbursement levels:
A report contains columns for § The customer is on a monthly billing cycle

Customer, Billing Cycle, Credit § The credit card is either MoreCash or Vista
Card, and Expiration Date. A § The credit card expires within
manager requests that the
report show only those
customers who meet the
following conditions:
PCSA
You have -added
an approval Architect
Configure 2 approval flow type based
a cascading
process assignment to a loan on the reporting structure of the current user.
request process. The
requirement states that a
request can be routed to one
or more managers for their
approval. Te hierarchy of
approvals depends upon the
total dollar amount of the
request. For example, Cost
Center Managers approve
requests that are less than USD
25,000. A request of greater
than or equal to USD 25,000
requires the approval of the
Cost Center Manager,
corporate Vice President, and
Vice President of Finance.
routing for the approval
process assignment?
You have created a series of Use the backward chaining option for the total
forms for a vacation booking amount expression. Use forward chaining for all the
process. Declarative other expressions.
expressions are used to
calculate values such as the
cost of the flight, hotel, car
rental, and taxes. The last form
includes a field that displays
the total amount that will be
charged on the user's credit
card.
calculations so that the total
amount is calculated only
when the user reaches the last
form?
PCSA - Pega
If the default Certified
urgency value for System
60 Architect 2
the work item is 20, what is the
urgency four days after the
work item reaches the
assignment? (Choose One)
A flow displays a guardrail Justify the warning because the flow is in

warning that the flow is draft Development.
mode. The flow is in
development How do you
respond to the warning?
2/13/23, 3:05 PM PEGA Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA Study
PEGA
Technical Writing for Success

3rd Edition • ISBN: 9781111260804
Darlene Smith-Worthington, Sue Jefferson
468 solutions
1. Creating User Defined, A. No, We need to avoid creating our own activity,
activities a best practice of whenever it is possible.
development?
2. What are the max records 10000 records.

that an Obj-Browse can fetch?
A. Primary page is the Page on which a rule runs.

What is the difference
B. Step page is the one which we mention at a step.
between Primary page and
If we don't mention any page at step, that will be
Step Page
occupied by Primary page.
PEGA Call
It Calls Child Activity, then Parent activity waits for
child activity to get completed, once child activity
execution completes, control comes back to parent
activity.
Further steps after call step gets executed.
This behaviour is called synchronous processing.
Branch
It Branches Child Activity, then Parent activity waits
for child activity to get completed, once child
Difference Between Call,
activity execution completes, controls comes back
Branch and Queue
to parent activity.
Further steps after Branch step will be ignored
This behaviour is called synchronous processing.
Queue
It Queues Child Activity, But Parent activity will not
wait for child activity to get completed, The parent
activity and child activity executes in different
threads.
This behaviour is called Asynchronous processing
How to pass parameter page A. By selecting the Option "Pass Current Parameter
from one rule to another? Page".
Parameters we can not see on clipboard. We only

How to see param values.
see on tracer. Paramter page name "Unnammed".
PEGA Write Now Method: It performs Immediate Commit

on Specific Obj-Save , on which it is selected.
It will not be able to release LOCK
between Write Now and
Commit method: It performs commit of Entire Differ
Commit methods?
Queue , More than one Obj-save, those are
executed so far, gets commited.
This will release the lock
Rollback
This methods rolls back (Erases) entire differ
Queue, all the obj-Save methods, executed so far,
gets erased.
between Roll back and Obj-
Save Cancel?
Obj-Save-Cancel
This is going to rollback(ERASE) the latest
uncommitted obj-Save.
When do we need to use A. When the activity is NOT part of WO

Commit, Write now option in (Transactional) processing, then we need above
the Obj-Save/Obj-Delete options, else not needed.
activity.
What is the option "Allow A. When we call activity from Services, Agents,
direct invocation from the Connectors, HTML controls, we need to select this
client or a service" ?when we option.
use it?
What are different Activity A. Activity, Utility, On change, Trigger, Load Data
Types? page, Route, Assign etc...
PEGA A. Activity type Activity can be called from other

activities and HTML rules. Whereas utility can be
called from Utility shape.
What is the Different between
Activity Types Activity &
The main difference is Utility can use only back
Utility?
ground processing methods. We cannot use front
end methods like Show-HTML, Show-Page, Show-
Harness, Show-Property etc....
Select to require that only authenticated requestors

What is the option "Requires
can start this activity, generally the activity which
Authentication"? When we use
part of security rule and create in class Code-
it?
Security.
Suppose when we save We can use OOTB activity

multiple records of data let's "CommitWithErrorHandling" make sure transaction
say 100, suppose if record 59 is is fully committed.
failed for some reason. How to
ensure to revert all the records
saved so far to be reverted.
Continue Whens : When a condition is satisfied, it

will execute next when condition. If there are is no
What is the Difference when condition after the current condition, then
between, "Continue Whens", step will get executed.
"Skip Whens" at activity pre or
post conditions? Skip Whens : When a condition is satisfied, It ignore
the execution of next when conditions, proceeds
executing the step.
What is the property for Step pxMethodStatus.

Status in activity?
When we have OOTB when A. It's not only two Status for Step, we have Warn,
rule StepStatusGood, Why do GoodWarn etc...
we need again another when
rule StepStatusFail?
PEGA
I want to update the value of We can use a method Property-Set-Special. We
px-properties using Activity, can update pxProperties.
how to active this?
A. Class key is Unique ID of an instance, which is

defined in the class rule form. For a given class, we
1. What is the difference
can have more than class key, is possible.
between class key and
pzInsKey?
pzInsKey is Unique Primary of an instance. An
instance will have one and only one pzInsKey.
1. What is difference between Both will be fetching one record , page format.
obj-open, obj-Open-By- Open will fetch based on class key(s).
Handle? Open-By-Handle fetches based on pzInsKey.
1. Different between Write- A. Write Now can not release the lock, whereas
Now and Commit w.r.to commit releases the lock.
locking?
Primary page is the page on which a Rule Runs.

between Primary and Step
Step Page is the one which we mention at the
Page?
specific steps.
1. Can we pass local variables A. No. only params can be passed.

from one rule to other rule?
A. We can see local variable on tracer, on a page

1. Where can see local variable LocalVariables.
defined on the rules? To see this, we need to choose an option on tracer
settings, Local Variables.
PEGA A. We can use Obj-Refresh-And-Lock

à This method fetches one record onto step page
like obj-open.
è If the instance is already being acquired with
lock, this method will not have any impact.
è Else, this method opens the record on to step
page and acquire lock on it.
1. What is Obj-Refresh-And-
è This method is introduced as exception handling
Lock Or how to do exception
of Obj-Open, in case of clocking.
handling to ignore locked
cases while obj-Open?
If we try obj-Open, if lock is already acquired on

case, this will halt the program by throwing error
message.
But Obj-Refresh-And-Lock will not halt the
program, as given above, that's what we call
exception handling, during locking.
We can do this is by calling OOTB activities
1. How to call flow from Call NewFromFlow(WorkClasSName, FlowName)

activity? Call New
Call Add
Call AddWork
On selection of dropdown Use Ticket... On change of dropdown, call activity

value,it will move to particular and set ticket.
assignment ,How can we
configure?
Trance the agent of SLA. But in production we will

If you have any agent issue in
not trace the agents. We need to go to log files and
production ,how can we
see if there are any errors by agent. Accordingly we
debug.
need to fix it.
PEGA
from Activity calling Question is In Complete or wrong.
Connector or From datapage
calling connetcor which one
takes priority ?
Asynchronous Communication While calling connector, choose the option run in

in connectors? parallel.
I have one parent and 3 child Use Obj-Open/ Open by handle and update it.
cases,i want to update 2nd
child case data to the parent ?
how we can?
I want to fetch the external In Connect SQL rule, browse tab call
system data stored from storedprocedure. Call Procedurename;
procedure ,how to configure
using activity?(USing RDB-List-
connect SQL Rule)
after creating properties We can write activity to create these properties

through wizard,what is the uploading from EXCEL. Parsing can be done by
approach to create request using MSOParseExcel OOTB acrivity.
and response properties?150
properties how to send the
external system
Currently I am in case 100,i Open 150th case using activity and update it back
want to update the status of to db.
case 150(pendingtoresolved),is
it possible to update the
status?
Agent when it wakes up, the activity which we call

What is the purpose of
in the agent rule form will be picked from the rule
mentioning access Group for
sets which are associated with the mentioned
Advanced Agent.
access group related application.
PEGA
1. When we don't mention any A. Agents are un authenticated and runs on access
access group for the advanced group "PRPC:Agents". Though we mention an
agent then what is the access access group, every agent must be using
group PRPC going to use? PRPC:Agents access group also.
A. Before an operator Login to PRPC, process

1. What is the access group
commander uses an access to run the required
pega used before we login to
rules, which is Guest role access group
PRPC?
""PRPC:Unauthenticated".
Using Admin Studio, or We can open agent

1. How to stop an agent?
schedule rule , un check "Enable" check box.
1. We have a standard agent , The 4 servers are there at different location, INDIA,
which is running on 4 nodes. USA, JAPAN, AUSTRALIA.
The agent has a schedule
defined like Every Day , IST
time zone, 7 AM.
A. After the agent is deployed, we need to update

We want agent to run at 7 AM ,
agent schedule rule on each server to respective
based on server Time Zone?
time zone.
1. Advanced Agent, Running on Requirement is, we want this agent on single node
Single Node. Schedule is 9 AM to run at 9 AM Monday, 10 AM Tuesday, 11 AM
Every Day. Wednesday and so on....
1. Agent and agent schedule Agent is instance of "Rule-Agent-Queue". Agent

are instances of which class? Schedule is instance of "Data-Agent-Queue"
By calling OOTB activity QueueForAgent , we can

1. How to push items to agent
push items into agent queue. Queue table is
queue? What is Queue table?
System-queue-Defaultentiry (Pr_SYS_QUEUES).
The items failed to process, their status gets

1. What is Broken-Queue?
updated to, Borken-Process.
PEGA
1. How to re-queue items? a. Using Admin studio Broken Items Wizard. Item
What happens when we re- status gets updated to scheduled. It will be picked
queue. during next run time.
A. We can create an advanced agent which will run

1. How to Auto requeue broken
at schedule time and updated the broken items of
Items?
"System-Queue-DefaultEntry" class.
Is a process of Copying rules from lower versions

Skimming
to next higher minor or major version.
Two Types
Skimming creates rules for a major or minor RuleSet
version by copying selected rules of
Examples
Major: Skimming rules in 06-05-01 through 06-09-
25 into 07-01-01
Minor: Skimming rules in 06-05-01 through 06-09-
25 into 06-10-01
Major Skim
During a major skim, rules with Availability of 'Yes',
Skimming Types
'Blocked', and 'Final' are carried forward. Rules with
availability of 'No' (not available) or 'Withdrawn' are
filtered out. Blocked rules are carried forward
because a Blocked rule can block rules in other
rulesets, and that relationship should be maintained
if it exists.
Minor Skim
During a minor skim, rules with Availability of 'Yes',
'Blocked', 'Withdrawn' and 'Final' are carried
forward. Rules with availability of 'No' (shown as
'Not Available' in the table below) are filtered out.
PEGA A. We block a rule to not get the rule picked during

rule resolution process.
Let's say business wants to drop off a rule's
execution in production. The rule is there in version
01, 02, 03, 04.
We need to create the above rule in version 5
(Availability = Blocked) and then movie.
Going fwd this rule will not be picked by PC, during
2. Why Blocked rules always rule resolution process.
gets carry forwarded, after --
skimming. After the above is done, let's say we are skimming
from version 01 to 05, if blocked rule is filtered,
version 04 will get moved. The issue is going to be ,
the rule will still run in production which business
do not want it to run.
To avoid such situation PRPC always carried

blocked rules to next minor or major version while
skimming.
After skimming is done, what We need to update application rule form , the
are the follow up tasks? respective rule set for it's minor or major version.
à Farm-FarmersI-Insurancework(Class Group)
Class is an instance class of WO(s), which derives
from Work- or sub classes.
è Farm-FarmersI-Insurancework (Class Group)

VehicleInsurance (Case Types)
HealthInsurance (Case Types)
PersonalInsurance (Case Types)
between a class Group and
Work pool
Class Group + All Case Type = Work pool
A class Group which is referenced at Access

Group's advanced tab will be treated as Work pool.
Work pool is Work class + case types to gather

defines work pool.
PEGA
5. Which inheritance of the
A. Pattern Inheritance is first priority when below
option is selected. If we uncheck the above check
classes takes first Priority?
box, direct inheritance will take first priority.
How to override it to not give
first priority.
Done.
When we route to WorkListàtoWorkList (Type =

1. What is the OOTB activity Route)
that run when we route? When we route to WorkQueue or
WorkBasketàtoWorkBasket (Type = Route)
1. Can we call an activity using Yes, we can call activities of type "Route". For
assignment shape? example toWorkLsit or toWorkbasket.
Assignments gets stored into either of below

tables.
1. Where does assignments PC_ASSINGN_WORKLIST (When assignment routed
gets Stored? to single operator)
PC_ASSINGN_WORBASKSET (When assignment
routed to Work Queue or Work Bakset)
Using the business logic option we can do it. Now,

the return values of Decision tree should be
OperatorID's or WorkBasket names.
Accordingly It gets routed.

Done.
1. How to Route conditionally

Suppose the same you have to implement by your
either to Work list or Work
own activity.
Basket.
Create an activity of type, Route.

In this activity add two steps,
Precondition (A=B) Call toWorkList
Precondtion (C=D) Call toWorkBakset
Done.
PEGA Work table pzInsKey column value will be there in

1. What is the relation between above table with in a column pxRefObjectKey
work and workist/workbasket
tables Work table pyID column value will be there in
above table,with in a column pxRefObjectInsName
1. I want to create to fetch Where Condition pxAssingedOperatorID =

open assignments of Current OperatorID.pyUserIdentifier.
Operator.
Create a report in assing-
worklist class.
When an operator login and click on get next work.
1. What is get next work 1. PC , Open the Top Assignment from Work List
2. If there are not Work list items, then PC pick from
Work Basket
1. How to override to pick the Go to operator profile and choose below option
assignment from work basket
first instead of Work list.
1. While routing assignment to We can specify a substitute operator for the

operator, we would like auto operator who is on leave.
reroute the assignment to At run time PC , auto re routes the assignment to
other work list or work basket, substitute operator or Work queue when in case
if the operator is on Leave. operator is on leave.
How to achieve this?
A. Routing we have done to Work list or

Workbasket à Push Routing
1. Push Routing Vs Pull When an assignment is Routed to work basket à

Routing? any operator of that basket picks the assignments,
then assignment will come to Operators work list to
be performed.
Generally this is by GetNextWork.
PEGA A. This is an OOTB feature provided by Pega, when

click on , the highest urgency task will get opened
to the current operator from Work list.
1. What is Get Next Work?
If two tasks have same urgency then the task which

is created in PAST will get opened.
... ...
Depends on the implementation you can see in

pyAttachments property or via the data page
1. Where can we see
D_AttachmentsByCategory.
attachments in clip board?
This data page is applying to Link-Attachment class.
What is its related tables
The Attachments are usually from class Data-
WorkAttach-...
Pega CSSA part 1 Study
Pega CSSA part 1

5.0 (1 review)
Intensified Algebra I Volume 1: Foundations for Functions, and

Linear and Statistical Models, Volume 1 2018
ISBN: 9781948905923
Agile Mind
A: ECS provides a structure supporting rule reuse.

What is the purpose of the
DS: ECS has layers designed to hold rules specific
Enterprise Class Structure
to that layer. The placement of rules within ECS is a
(ECS)?
determining factor in how they are used
You have a requirement to A1: Organisation

create an email DS1: The Organisation layer contains the assets
correspondence that can be used on an enterprise-wide basis. Assets contained
reused by other applications. in the Organisation layer are available for use in
In which two layers of the applications.
Enterprise Class Structure A2: Division
could you apply the email DS2: Assets in the Division layer are available for
correspondence rule? use in applications
(Choose two)
Pega CSSA
Which layer of thepart 1
Enterprise A: Framework
Class Structure contains DS: The Framework layer contains assets used to
generalised assets that are create generalised, reusable applications. A
then extended by specific framework application is then extended by specific
implementations implementations.
A: He wants to reserve some space for urgent

What would be the reason for
patches e.g. version 01-01-03
a developer to roll from
DS: The ongoing development can continue on
version 01-01-01 to version 01-
version 01-01-05 while only rules in version 01-01-03
01-05
are deployed within the urgent changes
A: Application versioning preserves prior

application versions
What is the importance of DS: Application versioning preservers prior
application versioning? application versions. You can edit application
functionality in a new version of the application
without changing the initial version
A: Skimming is most efficient for major and minor

updates. Lock and roll is most useful for patches.
What advantage does
DS: Skimming is the process of saving the highest
skimming provide over lock
version of a rule into a new, higher ruleset version.
and roll as a versioning
In lock and roll, you must select the appropriate
option?
rules to copy into a new empty ruleset. Lock and
roll is labor-intensive when used for major updates.
Pega CSSA part 1 A1: Application

DS1: Production rulesets are specified on the
application and the access group
A2: Access group
DS2: Same as DS1
Additional info:
An application contains a set of rulesets. The New

Select two record types that Application Wizard creates the initial application
involved when configuring a rulesets. When the application is generated the
production ruleset. (Choose created rulesets include two rulesets for the
two) application itself and two organisational rulesets.
Add additional rulesets for reusable functionality
that you might want to migrate to other
applications.
Production rulesets have at least one unlocked
ruleset version in the production environment. The
most common use of production rulesets is for
delegated rules. However, production rulesets can
be used for any use case requiring rules to be
updated in a production environment.
A: Rules using application validation

DS: Rules using application validation cannot
reference rulesets in applications built on the
application.
A claims framework contains
two rulesets, ClaimsFW and
Additional info:
ClaimFWInt. An application
built on the framework also
Ruleset validation is performed every time a rule is
contains two rulesets, Claims
saved. It guarantees that referenced rules are
and ClaimsInt. Which
available on the target system when the ruleset is
statement is FALSE if all the
promoted.
rulesets are configured as
Ruleset validation does not affect rule resolution at
Application Validation?
run time but is applied only at design time. There
are two options for validation mode:
- Application validation
- Ruleset validation
Pega
A claims CSSA part
application 1
contains A: Rules in MyCo can reference rules in Claims
two organisation and two DS: When using Ruleset Validation, rulesets can
application rulesets MyCo and only reference their prerequisites.
MyCoInt are configured as
Ruleset Validation, where the Additional info:
prerequisite for MyCo is
MyCoInt and the prerequisite If your ruleset does not have any prerequisite
for MyCoInt is Pega-Platform. ruleset versions, you need to specify the base
The two application rulesets product rulesets Pega-ProcessCommander as a
Claims and ClaimsInt are prerequisite. The Pega-ProcessCommander ruleset
configured as Application lists all product rulesets. You do not need to list any
Validation. Which of the product rulesets below Pega-ProcessCommander
following statements is FALSE? ruleset available in the product.
A1: Create a team application

DS1: The two prerequisites for creating a branch
rule rule for parallel development are a team
Which two of the following are development application and an access group with
prerequisites for creating a application developers that references the team
branch for parallel application.
development? (Choose two) A2: Create an access group that references the
team application. Add developers to the access
group
DS2: As above
A1: Is based on another ruleset

A branch ruleset is a ruleset DS1: A branched ruleset is based on another ruleset
that _______ and ______. (Choose and is designed for large projects
two) A2: Is designed for large projects
DS2: As above
A1: Check in rules to merge

Which two steps do you
DS1: Check in, review, and resolve conflicts related
perform after you develop
to merging rulesets before the merge
branch rules and before you
A2: Review conflicts and warnings
merge a ruleset? (Choose Two)
DS2: As above
Pega CSSA part 1 A1: The rule purpose takes precedence over the
rule availability
DS1: The algorithm checks the rule availability after
checking the rule purpose.
A2: If a user does not have access to the selected
rule, the system sends a message that the rule is
not authorised for execution.
DS2: The rule resolution algorithm verifies that the
user has authoristion to access the selected rule.
Additional Info:
The purpose of a rule is designed by a combination

of all the key properties of a rule, except the Apply
statements are true about the
To: class on which the rule is designed. For
rule resolution process?
example, the key properties of a section rule
(Choose Two)
include the Apply To: class, the rule type and the
rule name.
Rule resolution is a search algorithm used to find

the most appropriate instance of a rule to execute
in any situation.
The Rule- base class is the abstract class that

contains all rule classes
Rule resolution does not apply to records that

instances of classes derived form any other
abstract class such as Data- System- or Work-
Which rule availability setting A: Withdrawn

can you use to force the DS: When a rule marked as Withdrawn is found
system to look for an instance during rule resolution, the system looks for an
of the rule in the next highest instance of the rule in the next highest class or
class or ruleset? ruleset.
Pega CSSA part 1 A: A national insurance company requires a

In which of the following different minimum for liability coverage in each
situations would you use a rule state.
circumstance to resolve the DS: Circumstancing allows you to create a targeted
requirement? rule for each state, rather than one complex rule
for all states.
An application change goes A: Circumstance the form by property and date;

into effect on June 15, 2019. specify June 15, 2019 as the start date.
Due to this change, two fields DS: The circumstanced rule goes into effect on
are added to a user form to June 15th, 2019
collect information for
compliance purposes.
Assuming that today is April
30, 2019, how should you
configure circumstancing for
the form.?
A: The base rule is used if no circumstanced variant

Which statement best
applies.
describes the role of the base
DS: The base rule describes the behaviour of a rule
rule in circumstancing?
if no circumstanced variant is used
When a process is configured A: The case is stored in memory

to create temporary cases, DS: The case is only stored in memory, whether the
which of the following occurs case is temporary or permanent
when a user creates a case?
A: Add a Persist Case SmartShape to the process

DS: The case is persisted by calling the Persist Case
Smart Shape
What task must you perform in
order to persist a temporary Additional Info:
case?
In the settings of the case you can set a 'temporary
case' but to allow it to persist later on, you must use
a Persist Case Smartshape
Pega
You wantCSSA part
to evaluate 1 as
cases A: Add a basic condition where the create operator
potential duplicates when the in an existing case is the same as in the current
existing cases and the current case.
case have the same create DS: If the basic condition evaluates to true, the
operator. How would you current case is eligible as a potential match and is
ensure that only cases with the evaluated using weighted conditions.
same create operator are
evaluated?
Management reports that an A1: Adjust the threshold value.

unacceptably large number of DS1: Adjust the weighted conditions sum threshold
cases are incorrectly identified value, so that the more conditions or conditions
as potential duplicate cases. with higher weights must evaluate to true.
Which two approaches could A2: Adjust the condition weights
you use to modify the DS2: Give conditions that frequently produce
duplicate case search process invalid duplicates lower weights.
so that it produces fewer
invalid duplicates? (Choose
two)
You application contains a A: You select the ALLOW ONE USER locking option
top-level case type name on Purhcase Requests and select ALLOW ACCESS
Purchase Request and a FOR THE PARENT CASE WHEN TEH CHILD CASE
Purchase Order child case. The IS OPENED option on Purchase Orders.
company has determined that DS: As above
only one user at a time may
open and work on a case.
However, users working on
purchase orders should not
lock out users working on the
parent purchase request
cases. How would you
configure the lock settings
among the case types?
Pega CSSA part 1 A: An Any join condition

DS: This condition resumes the main flow when only
one of the subprocesses completes.
Additional Info
Split join; You use the Split Join shape to call

multiple independent process that operate in
parallel and later rejoin. For example, a mortgage
application process may require that a user
validates the home buyer's credit history. At the
same time, another user must perform a title search.
Both of these processes are unrelated and can be
performed in a subprocesses that proceed
In a prepare job offer process, independently and in parallel. When the
you configure a Split For Each subprocesses are complete, the main mortgage
shape. The shape runs a application process can continue. This is similar to a
compensation approval sub parallel process in the case life cycle - when all the
process to a list containing processes in a stage are completed, the case
four managers. The prepare enters the next stage or is resolved. However, the
job offer process resumes as Split Join shape gives you the flexibility to use join
soon as one manager conditions that determine when the primary
completes the approval process can continue. The join condition may
process. Which join condition iterate over a when condition or a count to
in the Split For Each shape determine when to resume the flow. For instance, a
supports this requirement? Split Join may include three separate approval
subprocesses. You can specify that only two of the
three approvals must be completed before
resuming the main flow.
Split For Each: A Split For Each shape allows you to

run one subprocess multiple times by iterating
through a set of records stored in a page list or
page group. When the items on the list have been
processed, the main flow continues.
Spinoff: The spinoff option in the Subprocess shape

allows you to run the subprocess in parallel with
the main flow. The main process does not wait for
the subprocess to complete before proceeding.
Pega CSSA part 1

An order fulfillment process A: Add a Split For Each shape and run the request
includes a request for quotes subprocess for each vendor on a page list.
from multiple shippers. You DS: As above.
want the system to
automatically call a quote
request subprocess for each
vendor. How do you configure
your process?
A1: The action runs each tiem the user returns to the
assignment
DS1: A pre-processing action runs each time the
flow action is performed on an assignment. If the
user returns to an assignment, the pre-processing
action is repeated.
A2: The action automatically runs if the flow action
has the highest likelihood for the assignment in the
process flow.
Which two statements about
DS2: The flow action with the highest likelihood on
adding a pre-processing
an assignment automatically runs when the user
action to a flow action are
reaches the assignment.
true? (Choose two)
Additional info:
Sometimes you need to perform a set-up or wrap-

up action in conjunction with a flow action. For
example, you may need to initialise items in a list or
copy data from one property to another. To satisfy
these needs, you can add pre-processing and
post-processing actions to a flow action.
Pega CSSA
You created part
a data 1
transform A: The data transform runs every time the user
to concatenate the first and performs the flow action run
last name values of a user DS: Pre- and post- processing data transforms and
name. You add the activities run every time you invoke the flow action.
concatenate data transform to
a flow action as a post-process
action. What occurs when the
flow runs?
A job recruiter screens A: Create one column for feedback, with three rows
candidates to assess their for the three possible decisions.
qualifications. The recruiter DS: As above
determines whether the
candidate matches the
targeted position, matches a
different position in the
company or does not match
an position. A decision table,
based on the recruiters
feedback, automatically
advances the case through a
corresponding connected
named Selected Position,
Targeted Position, and Reject.
condition column(s)?
Pega CSSA
Candidate part 1 are
hiring decisions A1: Two nested branches - one to evaluate
based on the feedback from technical skill scores and another to evaluate
the interviewer and test interpersonal skill scores
scores. If necessary, other test DS1: Branches to evaluate technical skill and
scores are used in the interpsonal skill score would be nested under an
evaluation. Candidates with an evaluation for assessment score of 60 or less
assessment score of 40 or less A2: A top-level branch that tests for assessment
are automatically rejected. scores less than 40
Candidates with an assessment DS2: A score of less than 40 evaluates to NO and
score of 60 or less are does not have to evaluated further
rejected if either their technical
skill score or their
interpersonal skill score is
below 40.Candidates with
assessment scores higher than
60 are automatically approved.
You are using a decision tree
to make the evaluations. Which
two branch configurations
would you use in your decision
tree? (Choose Two)
You have designed a decision A: Check the decision tree for conflicts
tree that you want to unit test. DS: Checking for conflicts verifies that every row
You want to verify that every will be evaluated by identifying one or more
row can be evaluated branches that cannot be reached. If a branch
regardless of the input values. cannot be reached, the test values will not be
How would you test your evaluated.
decision tree?
You configure a cascading A: Authority matrix

approval step for insurance DS: You use the authority matrix model when the
claims. The request requires approvals are not based on a reporting structure
approval from the submitter's
manager. However, approval
from operators in other units in
the organisation may be
required. Which approval
model would you use?
Pega
You haveCSSA
added apart 1
cascading A: Set the decision table to evaluate all rows
approval step that uses an DS: You must select evaluate all rows in the
authority matrix. You have decision table. Otherwise, the table returns only
specified a decision table to one result
determine the approvers for
each case. You have confirmed
that the conditions in the
decision table are configured
correctly. You test the
configuration by entering
requests that require multiple
approvers. However, the
system routes all request to
only one approver. which of
the following actions would
you take to correct this issue?
You application requires a A: Select the reporting structure configuration with

cascading approval for custom levels, then configure when rules to
expense reports. Approvals determine the number of levels.
must follow the submitter's DS: When rules are used to test whether an
reporting structure with the approval level is needed.
following thresholds. A
manager must approve
expense reports up to
USD500. A director must
approve expense reports up
to USD1500. A Vice President
must approve expense reports
of USD1500 or greater. How
do you configure the approval
process?
A: Save store in the Pega Platform Database.

DS: Temporary cases are stored in memory on the
What is one main purpose of
clipboard and are not in the Pega Platform
using temporary cases?
database. The use of temporary cases saves
storage in the Pega Platform Database
Pega CSSA part 1

Pessimistic locking ensures
A: True
DS: The first user to open an unlocked case locks
data integrity by limiting case
the case, preventing other users from opening the
access
case
Optimistic locking favours A: True

simultaneous access to a case DS: More than one user can open a case at the
by preventing users from same time but a user cannot save changes if
updating a case that has another user saves the case
changed
The case locking strategy A: False

applied to a child case is DS: A child case inherits the locking strategy set for
independent of the strategy its parent case
applied to the parent case
One major difference between A: True

decision tables and when
conditions is that decision
tables can return results other
than true/false
If a decision table fails to A: The decision table returns the result of the
return a result for any of the otherwise row
testable rows, which of the
following occurs?
Each row of a decision table A: When all of the conditions in the row are true
consists of one or more
testable conditions organised
into columns. How does Pega
Platform determine when to
return the specified result for a
row?
2/13/23, 3:26 PM Pega CSSA Part 3 Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSSA Part 3 Study
Pega CSSA Part 3

5.0 (1 review)
Introduction to Algorithms
3rd Edition • ISBN: 9780262033848
Charles E. Leiserson, Clifford Stein, Ronald L. Rivest, Thomas H. Cormen
726 solutions
A: Columns to display are: Manager, Name and

You create a report that uses Count of operators that report to each manager.
data from two classes. Which Filter by Managers with more than five direct
of the following reporting reports.
requirements requires the use DS: You use an aggregate function in a subreport
of a subreport? to determine the count of direct reports for each
manager.
Pega CSSA Part 3 A1: Use a class join to the Assign-Worklist class.
Specify a join filter where the pxRefObjectKey in
You create a report in a work the join class is equal to an object identifier in the
class that displays the assigned work class.
operator and task name for DS1: The class join specifies the class you are
each open case. Which two joining and a filter that describes how the data
ways can you combine data in between the classes are joined
the Assign-Worklist class for A2: Use a worklist assignment association rule to
your report? (Choose Two) join the Work class to the Assign-Worklist class.
DS2: The association rule defines the join operation
and enables you to select data objects in the class.
A: A list of all child cases showing the work urgency

of their parent case
Which report requires joining
DS: You would join the case and subcase classes by
classes?
matching the subcase cover ID (pxCoverInsKey) to
the case identifier (pzInsKey)
A1: Add the privilege to a user role that is available

You want to restrict access to to the users' access group.
a specific flow action to DS1: Add the privilege to a user role to allow users
certain users. Which two steps to perform the action
must you perform? (Choose A2: Add the privilege to the flow action record
Two) DS2: Add the privilege to the flow action to require
that users have the privilege to perform the action.
A: Accountants can edit a purchase request only if

the case was created by a member of their
What requirement do you
assigned department
satisfy with an Access When
DS: Access When records are used to conditionally
record?
allow users to perform an action such as editing a
case
Pega CSSA Part 3 A: To explicitly prevent users from deleting cases to

satisfy a company policy
DS: You configure an Access Deny record if
government or corporate regulations require
For what reason would you explicitly denying an action to users.
configure an Access Deny
record? Additional Info
Use an Access Deny rule to restrict users who have

a specified access role from accessing instances of
specific classes under certain conditions
A1: You can use the existing skin from the

application, or modify the skin rules associated with
the portal rules
Which two of the following DS1: The application style reflects the styling used
statements are true about by the website hosting the mashup. You can apply
styling a Pega Web Mashup? the skin rule by configuring a portal for web
(Choose Two) mashup users using a portal skin
A2: The style of the application is configured
through a skin rule.
DS2: As above
A1: Generate the mashup code

DS1: In App studio, create a new Mashup channel
interface and configure the channel with the
desired action and case type to generate the
appropriate mashup code.
steps are required to create a
A2: Configure a list of approved sites for the site
Pega Web Mashup? (Choose
origin.
Two)
DS2: To open a channel between the host site and
the Pega Platform application, configure the
application permissions by specifying a list of
trusted domains in the Pega Application rule.
Pega
You wantCSSA Parta Pega
to configure 3 A: data-pega-parameters="
Web Mashup gadget to use {Customer:'{page/id/Account]'}" - where the DOM
the value of an element from element is named "Account"
the host page as the value of a DS: Use [page/id/elementID], where elementID is
gadget attribute or action the name of an element from the host page.
parameter. Which of the
following is the correct
syntax?
Every activity step has multiple A: Method

parts. Which part of an activity DS: The method indicates the action the system
step indicates the action to performs on a step
perform?
An application for a retail A: DiscountItems.pxResults

company runs an activity DS: The search results are contained in the
nightly to identify and discount embedded .pxResults page of the DiscountItems
aged inventory. For each aged page
item, the activity discounts the
unit price by 20 percent, then
rounds the price down to end
in $0.97. If the price already
ends in $0.97, the item is
already discounted and is
skipped.
Using the Obj-Browse method,
the first step generates a list of
items that expire within one
week. The PageName
parameter provided to the
Obj-Browse method is
DiscountItems. The second
step updates the unit price
property of each qualifying
item. Which step page is best
for the iteration in step two?
Pega CSSA Part 3 A1: The date and time at which the queued item can
be processed
Refund requests are queued DS1: For a dedicated Queue processor configured
for overnight processing. What to process items on a delay, you must specify the
information is required to queue processor ID and provide a Date time
queue the refund request? property for the queued object, at which time the
(Choose Two) system processes the queued item.
A2: The ID of the queue processor
DS2: As above
The user enters a response on A: Use the Tracer tool, search for the first FAIL
a form and clicks submit. The status, and see which step is causing the error.
Pega application returns an DS: In the Tracer tool, search for the first FAIL status
error. Which tool can you use to identify the step that is the cause of the error.
to determine the cause of the
error in your application?
A1: Pause the Tracer tool until just before the

moment the error occurs.
DS1: Pausing the Tracer tool until just before the
Select two methods to limit the
moment the error occurs or starting the Tracer tool
amount of information
just before the moment the error occurs are both
displayed in the Tracer tool to
good methods to limit the amount of information
the specific time when an error
you need to search through.
occurs. (Choose Two)
A2: Start the Tracer tool just before the moment the
error occurs.
DS2: As above
Which performance tool do A: Performance Profiler

you use to collect DS: The Performance Profiler is used to collect
performance data for performance data for individual steps in a data
individual steps in a data transform
transform?
The reason you want to run a A: To allow the rules to assemble

process immediately before DS: Run through the process to ensure first use
taking performance readings is assemble (FUA) has taken place.
_______________.
Pega CSSA Part 3 A: A company has multiple Pega applications and is

In what scenario is it most interested in monitoring the health of all active
appropriate to leverage applications
Predictive Diagnostics Cloud DS: PDC can actively gather, monitor, and analyse
(PDC)? real-time performance and health indicators from
all active Pega Platform applications
A: A developer wants to make a common

cancellation flow available in App Studio
DS: In this situation, it is appropriate to mark the
flow as a relevant record. The process is
subsequently available in App Studio for the rest of
the application development team.
Which of the following use
cases benefits from leveraging Additional Info
relevant records?
A relevant record is used to highlight and make
available particular records for reuse.
Fields, views, processes, and user actions are
automatically marked as relevant records when you
create them in the context of a case type or data
type.
A: Mark the relevant record as inactive from the

Relevant Records landing page
How do you make a relevant DS: To make a relevant record unavailable in App
record unavailable in App Studio, mark the record as inactive from the
Studio? Relevant Records landing page. From the landing
page, you can mark the record as active to make it
available in App Studio
Which three rule types can be A: Sections, Flows and Paragraphs (NOT DATA
reused through the use of TRANSFORMS)
relevant records? (Choose DS: As above
three)
Pega CSSA Part 3

Which two components does
A1: Data types
DS1: Settings in the product rule and Application
the Application Packaging
Packaging wizard let you automatically include
Wizard prompt you to include
data instances and data types
when you generate an archive
A2: Data Instances
file? (Choose Two)
DS2: As above
You use the Application A: Users can start executing rules as soon as the
Import wizard to import an rules are imported
archive file on a destination DS: The import process does not need to complete
system. When does the before the rules may execute
destination system begin
executing the imported rules?
A1: Check in rules that are in the application ruleset

DS1: Check in rules to make sure that the rulesets
You create a product rule to
are current and complete
generate an application
A2: Associate application data instances with
archive file for export. Which
application rulesets
two actions do you perform
DS2: Association application data instance with
before creating the archive
application rulesets help ensure that the archive file
file? (Choose Two)
contains all the data instances required for the
application
A1: Incorporate native device features

DS1: Using native device features simplifies mobile
Select two best practices to
application design and provides a consistent user
follow when designing mobile
experience on the device.
applications. (Choose Two)
A2: Use controls that allow tapping.
DS2: A mobile application should be tap-friendly.
Pega CSSA Part 3 A1: Use a table and mark the columns in the table as
To display a list of items to a primary, secondary and other
user who may access the DS1: The table layout uses responsive specifications
application on mobile and to adjust when information is displayed on a mobile
non-mobile devices, which two device.
of the following options are A2: Use a repeating dynamic layout
best practice for designing the DS2: Reporting dynamic layouts automatically
user interface? (Choose Two) adjusts the the layout elements with respect to the
screen size.
You are designing an offline A1: Update the locales list

mobile that translates DS1: The locales list contains locales that should be
American English to Canadian packaged and served offline
French and from Canadian A2: Delta-sync blacklist items in the American
French to American English for English and Canadian French dictionaries.
users in the US and Canada. DS2: You use the delta-sync blacklist to exempt
Which two tasks do you from a delta-sync a data page that contains a large
perform to configure this app? amount of data that changes infrequently.
(Choose Two) Language dictionaries fall into this category
You are configuring a process A: Add decision shapes configured with Boolean
in which users advance to the expressions.
appropriate forms based on DS: You can use a decision shape with a Boolean
yes/no answers on the forms. expression - it does not require server processing
process so that users working
in an offline mobile app can
complete the necessary forms
A: The case type, The access group, The mobile

When enabling a mobile app channel (NOT THE WORK GROUP)
for offline processing, what DS: You select the enable offline option in the Case
three elements in your Designer for the case type.
application do you updated? You select the enable offline option in the access
(Choose three) group.
You configure the mobile channel.
Pega CSSA
What occurs in anPart
offline-3 A: The new case or completed task is added to the
enabled mobile app when a action queue.
user creates a new case or DS: Whether your device is online or offline, any
completes a task? changes you make are added to the action queue.
A1: Append ;large to the name of data page

After you have created a data DS1: You append ;large to the name of the data
page, what two steps do you page
perform to declare the page A2: Add the name of the data page to the whitelist
as a large data page? (Choose for data pages that are available offline but are not
Two) referenced directly in the UI
DS2: As A2
A1: Activity rules automate the processing of work

DS1: Activities are used to create a sequence of
automated steps
Regarding activities, which of A2: Developers should use alternate rule types,
the following are true? instead of activities where possible
DS: Developers should consider reusing standard
of existing activities before creating a customer
activity for their application
A1: To allocate a task to a specific node or nodes in

a cluster
What are the two reasons to
DS1: Allocated to a dedicated server where user
configure background
activity will not be affected
processing for rules for tasks?
A2: To defer tasks to a specific time, such as off-
(Choose Two)
peak hours.
DS2: Deferred and processed at and optimal time
A1: The user sees an unexpected result

Which two of the following DS1: You can view the origin of unexpected
issues can you identify by behaviour by using Tracer tool
using the Tracer tool? (Choose A2: The application log shows an error occured
Two) DS2: You can view the errors logged in the log file
by using the tracer tool
Pega CSSA
What happens Part
when an 3 A: Application execution halts
application execution DS: Breakpoint halts the execution so application
encounters a Breakpoint state can be examined
defined in Tracer
A1: Upload a certificate set for the appropriate

What prerequisites must be mobile platform
satisfied before configuring a A2: Configure access to the Pega Mobile Build
channel to build a mobile app? Server
(Choose three) A3: Confirm that Pega Platform is configured to
support access through HTTPS
2/13/23, 4:07 PM Pega CSSA Review Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSSA Review Study
Pega CSSA Review

Service Management: Operations, Strategy, and Information

Technology
7th Edition • ISBN: 9780077475864
James Fitzsimmons, Mona Fitzsimmons
103 solutions
1. Data Page/ Activity uses Data Transformer to set

request data in the integration clipboard.
2. The data page/activity then invokes the
connector. The connector maps request data to
protocol-specific format using the mapping. The
application sends the request to the external
Connector Flow system. The application receives the response and
parses it using mapping rules to set the response
data on the integration clipboard. Connector
finalized and control returned to Data Page/Activity
3. Lastly a data transform maps request data from
the integration clipboard to the data structure for
the application
https://quizlet.com/423803730/pega-cssa-review-flash-cards/ 1/10
Pega CSSA Review 1. A client application sends a request to your

application.
2. The service listener listens for incoming requests.
3. The service listener receives the request and
instantiates the Service API to provide
communication with Pega. Then, the Service API
hands control over to Pega.
4. Pega looks up the service package and related
service rule
5. Pega then establishes the service requestor and
optionally performs authentication based on
security credentials that are passed in the request.
Once authenticated, service processing continues
using the authenticated user's access group, not the
Service Flow
access group that is contained in the service
package
6. The request is mapped, using the instance of an
XML Parser rule, onto the clipboard according to
the specifications contained in the service rule.
7. Control is passed to the service activity, which
provides the logic for the service.
8. The service rule maps the clipboard data to form
the response data, using the XML Parser rule.
9. The service listener receives the response from
the Service API.
10. The service listener sends the response back to
the application that made the request.
11. The client application receives the request.
Pega CSSA Review 1. Create a class in the base class of the integration
2. Add page to class that is related to your type of
integration for example (Embed-Env-SOAP)
3. add Dynamic System Settings to page
4. Create a data transform to assign values to these
GRS FLOW properties (getDataSystemSetting will get a string)
5. Create a node data page that sources the GRS
DataPageName.IntegrationPropertyName.FieldPro
pertyName
Connector -> Data Page -> Data Transform -> GRS
function
Provides the ability to obtain a list of assignments

PEGA REST Assignment API for a user, obtain the details of any specific
assignment, and perform an assignment action
PEGA REST Authenticate API Allows you to verify user credentials
Provides the ability to obtain a list of cases for a

PEGA REST Cases API user, create a new case, obtain case details, and
update a specific case
Provides the ability to obtain a list of case types for

PEGA REST Casetypes API
the authenticated user
Facilitates the process of obtaining the contents of

PEGA REST Data API a data page and obtaining the metadata for a
specific data page
Provides access to the complete documentation

PEGA REST Docs API
for the Pega API
Service Exception When The specified when rule returns true.

Condition
Pega CSSA Review If the specified when rule returns true, the request
is queued and a Pega-specific SOAP fault that
Service Queue When
includes the queue ID of the request is returned.
Condition
Useful when processing errors are due to
temporary issues, such as item locking.
Service Mapping Error An error occurs while mapping incoming data from
Condition the request message to the clipboard.
Service Security Error Authentication fails.

Condition
Service / Service Error A valid instance of the service activity cannot be

Condition found.
Operator IDs (Data-Admin-Operator-ID)

Email listeners (Data-Admin-Connect-EmailListener)
Does not use rule resolution
Operator's favorites (System-User-MyRules)
The rule check-in process (Work-RuleCheckIn)
Case types (Rule-Obj-CaseType )

Properties (Rule-Obj-Property )
UI rules such as Sections (Rule-HTML-Section) and
Does user rule resolution
Harnesses (Rule-HTML-Harness)
Declare expressions (Rule-Declare-Expression)
Data pages (Rule-Declare-Pages)
Predefined rule keys that are used as a unique

identifier, such as the Apply to: class, rule name,
and rule type
User's ruleset list
Rule Resolution Inputs Class hierarchy of the rule in question
Circumstances such as the value of a property, or
time and date restrictions
Availability of the rule
User's access roles and privileges
Pega CSSA Review

What requirement must a case The case type must be initialized and instantiated
type satisfy before you enable with the pyStartCase starting flow.
the case type for offline
processing?
What are the two key You consider which essential elements should be
considerations when available offline and how to ensure
configuring a mobile app for synchronizations are fast and efficient.
offline use?
What types of resources do Cache manifest resources include images, icons,

you add to the cache and font families.
manifest?
is a set of rules requiring synchronization between

mobile processing whitelist
a mobile app and the server
a set of rules that are not synchronized between a

mobile processing black list
mobile app and a Pega application
A delta sync incrementally exchanges smaller

delta synchronization amounts of data to reflect user activity, such as
performing assignments or creating cases.
A full sync forces the mobile app to overwrite an

How is a delta-sync difference entire rule or data record. Delta-syncs
from a full sync? incrementally exchange smaller amounts of data to
reflect changes.
What are the two key benefits Performance and memory management
of using large data pages for improvements are the two key benefits of using
reference data? large data pages for reference data.
You use the Modify locales list link from the Mobile
Where do you configure the
Offline landing page to edit the
locales for offline apps?
pyLocalesListOffline rule.
Pega CSSA
how to make largeReview
data page add:large to the end of the name
"large"
warnings, errors, and information messages about

The PEGA log contains
internal operations.
The ALERT log contains performance-related alerts
contains alerts (identified by the prefix SECU) that

suggest improper configuration of Internet
The ALERTSECURITY log Application Composer facilities, or overt attempts
to bypass system security features through URL
tampering.
is created by the Business Intelligence Exchange

during extract operations. BIX is an optional add-
The BIX log is
on product that provides the extract functions of an
ETL (extract, transform, and load) utility.
The SERVICES-PAL log performance data saved from services.

contains
contains information about the setup and run-time

The CLUSTER log
behavior of the cluster.
What is the purpose of an An appender manages the writing of errors,

appender? (Loging) warnings, and other debug information to a log file.
a standalone web application that developers and

PegaRULES Log Analyzer
system administrators can use to view summaries of
(PLA) is
console logs.
test new or reconfigured Pega applications during

user acceptance testing (UAT), performance and
Use the PLA to
stress testing, and immediately after deployment
into a production environment
Pega
The PLA CSSA Review
consolidates and ALERT, PEGA, and Garbage Collection (GC)
summarizes three types of
logs
The Database Trace tool is useful to tune the

Database Trace application in case of any database performance
issues
Use the Profiler to obtain a detailed trace of

performance information about the execution of
activities, when condition rules, and data transforms
executed by your requestor session. The Profiler
traces every execution (in all Threads) of rules of
Performance Profiler
these three types in all rulesets. The Performance
Profiler should be run in conjunction with
Performance Analyzer to narrow down the specific
step (Performance Profiler) of the cause
(Performance Analyzer).
Pega Platform™ always gathers cumulative

resource statistics. Use the Performance Analyzer
(PAL) to understand the system resources
Performance Analyzer (PAL)
consumed by processing a single requestor
session. PAL works on existing data; it does not
degrade processing.
a Software as a Service (SaaS) tool that runs on

Pega Cloud® and actively gathers, monitors, and
Pega Predictive Diagnostic
analyzes real-time performance and health
Cloud™ (PDC) is
indicators from all active Pega Platform™
applications.
PDC monitors your application performance and

diagnoses system health issues to minimize their
What is the business value of
impact on your business. PDC analyzes information
PDC?
sent from Pega Platform to provide suggestions on
possible solutions to issues as they occur.
Pega CSSA
pyID)Review A case identifier
pyWorkParty) the work parties participating in a case
pyCustomer The customer identifier such as an account number
pyStatusWork) The work status of the case
pc_assign_worklist Data table for worklist assignments
pc_assign_workbasket Database table for workbasket assignments
pxAssignedOperatorID The operator who has the assignment
pxFlowName The flow rule for the assignment
pyHistory type identifies the event that caused the history event
identifies the operator who completed the event

pyPerformer
recorded in the history instance
pxTaskElapsedTime to report the total time spent on an assignment
pyPerformTaskTime to report on the total time spent by all users
If pyPerformTaskTime is idle for a long time

significantly lower than
pxTaskElapsedTime, then the
assignment has been
Consider subreports as a way IN, HAVING, and WITH clauses.

of combining data using
Pega CSSA Review

When configuring a class join, Create a filter condition
how do you specify a property
that defines the relationship
between the primary and
joined classes?
How can you use a subreport Use the subreport as a filter, comparing with a list
to list the operators who have of all operators and removing all entries where
not updated cases of a there is a match between the two reports.
specific case type within the
past week?
Good indicater of subreport aggerate function
RBAC Role Based Access Control
ABAC Attribute-based Access Control
RBAC enforces security on user roles
ABAC enforces explicit security
roles are assigned to Acess Groups
When an acess group applies applies the least restritive

more then one role covering
the same component pega
Access Deny Record explicit deny aces to an instance of a class
Access When Provides or denines access bassed on a when rule
creates security configuration for a class bassed on

Access of Role to Object a class + role schema. So any role that access said
(ARO) class be given or denied permission bassed from
that class based on their role
Pega CSSA Review Is configured bassed on role can be used to deny

Privilege Record access to individual records like flows or
correspondences
Pega Study
Pega
Elementary Number Theory

7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
is a general purpose layout used to organize a

Dynamic layout
single set of fields.
is used to organize lists, tables, and other repeating

Repeating layout
structures.
Design templates Configure section layouts.
shows users what they need to know to perform a

Intent-driven UI
task.
Aligning the user view with the case life cycle to

model-driven UI
ensure the user interface is model-driven.
responsive behavior enable a layout to adjust according to screen size.
https://quizlet.com/gb/497346965/pega-flash-cards/ 1/11
Pega used to identify the purpose of the section. The

Label label is used to generate an identifier for the
record.
the class to which the record is applied.The class

Class determines the availability and re-usability of the
section.
that contains the record. PEGA defaults to the

Ruleset & version highest unlocked application ruleset when you
create a record.
arrange items in a flexible form, automatically

Dynamic layouts
adjusting to screen size.
used to present content in a non linear, more

Repeating dynamic layout
aesthetic format.
use responsive breakpoints to change the layout

Responsive dynamic layout
format.
a response performed by the system as a result of

Action
the user event.
enables a layout to automatically adjust to

rendering devices. Elements can move around,
Responsive UI
resize, or completely disappear based on screen
resolution & size.
Responsive breakpoints define changes in behavior on different devices.
a trigger performed by users such as clicking a

Event button, a pointer, hovering over a field or entering
a value in a field.
Pega Conditions
restrictions such as when rules, which can be
applied to an event & action combination.
Is a business solution that automates workflow in

Application
your organization.
defines a set of style attributes that can be reused

Mixin
in user interface elements.
Format defines the styling of a specific UI component.
allows a skin to inherit formats and mixins from a

Skin inheritance
parent skin.
Mixin inheritance mixins can also inherit from other mixins.
tool that provides access to all of the reports that

Report browser
are available to you.
process of using an SQL query to retrieve & sort

Reporting information from the PEGA rules databasase, an
external database, or the elastic search index.
BLOB Binary Large Object
container for ruleset with rules that are undergoing

branch
rapid change development.
is visible to a specific user or group of users with a

Delegated rule
specific access group.
Build for Change is Pegasystems' corporate slogan

Build for change
and application development philosophy.
Pega Is a single value property that is stored as a column

in a database table, in addition to the storage
Optimized property
stream BLOB, to enhance record selection
operations in reporting.
Is an aggregate property, a property within an

embedded page, or a single value property that is
unoptimized property
stored in a specially formatted storage stream or
BLOB column.
Is the address of a property name-value pair on the

Target property
clipboard, in the context of change to the value.
This rule dictates how properties appear on user

Control forms, correspondence and other HTML forms, for
both display and accepting user input.
An edit validate rule defines a Java routine to test

Edit validate the validity of an input value and/or format data;
listed in the Data Model rule category.
A perform harness is a standard Pega user

Perform harness interface rule used to display an assignment for
processing by an end user.
allows you to configure your application so that the

Declarative processing system automatically updates property values such
as a total order amount.
depends upon rules, such as data transforms,

Procedural processing activities, or User Interface (UI) rules, to instruct the
application when to look for a trigger event.
That relationships between properties so the

Declarative rule system can automatically use one or more import
values to determine the value of a property.
Pega Allows for a computation to advance even when

Backward chaining the value of an input or parameter property is not
suitable.
Allows for the automatic propagation of changes in

Forward chaining one property value to changes in other property
values onto indexes.
The interval data structure that defines the

relationship between properties whose value is
Declarative network
automatically calculated based on changes and
other property values.
Contains pages created due to user action, either

User pages
directly or indirectly.
Contains read only pages created by data page

Data page
rules.
read-only pages created by linked properties,

Linked property pages which contain information from data objects
referenced by a linked property.
Contains pages that describe the current user

System pages
session, such as the active user and the application.
Is a collection of entities and attributes that

Data model describes the objects modeled in an application,
and their relationship to eachother.
A clipboard is a temporary memory area on the

server that is associated with every connected
Clipboard
Pega platform requester, including browser-based
users & unauthenticated guest users.
The pyWorkPage is the name of the clipboard page

pyWorkPage
that represents the current case being processed.
Pega Property
A property defines the format and visual
presentation of data in your application.
displays information or collects input from users as

Form they create, update, and resolve cases in your
application.

Work class case or cases, such as processes, data elements,
and user interfaces.
Contains the rules that describe how the

Integration class application interacts with other systems, such as a
customer database or a third-party web server.
Contains the rules that describe the data objects

Data class used in the application, such ad customer or
collection of order items.
Major version represents a substantial release of an application.
represents an interim release or enhancements to a

Minor version
major release
Patch version consists of fixes to address bugs in application
determines the order in which Pega looks through

Ruleset stack
rulesets to find the rule being used.
Private edit provides a nonexclusive checkout of a rule.
is automatic. It uses the class name structure to

Pattern inheritance
determine rules available to reuse.
Is a second type of inheritance between classes

Directed inheritance
where the parent class is explicitly specified.
Pega Top-level
A case that does not have a parent case, but can
cover, or become a parent of other cases.
Child Use case that is covered by a parent case.
Database table Is a set of related data in a database.
A flow models a business process in your

Flow application by using graphical shapes & connectors
to define a sequence of events.
Displays a task or a choice, such as Approve or

Flow action
Reject, to users when they run flows.
Is the portion of an application responsible for the

presentation of information and functionality to an
User Interface (UI)
end user to facilitate the effective control of the
application by the end user.
Defines the responsive behaviour and formatting

such as colours, fonts, images, and layout, of
Skin portals, cases, ruleforms, and reports. A skin
generates the styling (cascading style sheet) for
the application.
enable a layout to adjust according to screen size,

Responsive behavior providing an optimal user experience on a desktop,
laptop, and phone.
Is an area of a standard user form that is

Section
incorporated on a harness form.
That defines the content and behavior of a user

interface, including property references, controls,
Section rule
and layout types, referred to by flow action rules &
harness rules.
Pega Data type define and hold data for your application.
lets you review and manage data types in your

Data designer
application.
Any source of data that an application uses, such as

Data source a connector, report definition, or lookup. Data
sources are referenced in data pages.
Is a data source of type connector, a lookup with

an externally mapped applies to a class, or a report
External data source
definition with an externally mapped applies to
class.
Is a feature that lets you store data records for a

Local data storage data type without having to manually create or
maintain database tables.
type of integration rule that allows an application,

Connector rule acting as a client, to interact with an external
system or database.
A data record is an instance of a data type stored

Data record
from your application.
Pages are data structures that hold name- value

Page property mode
pairs.
A property mode that allows an embedded

Page list
ordered array of pages.
A rule type used to query for and return case or

Report definition
process data.
that functionality assigns high urgency tasks before

GetNextWork
low urgency tasks.
PegaCase management is a business practice that helps you deliver

outcome driven results or relies on case types.
Optional process to update information in multiple steps.
Optional user actions update information in a single user screen.
Condition consists of a field, comparator, and value.
result of running a strategy in the interaction

Decision
context.
Is a durable, potentially permanent, saved

Instance representation of a concrete class that is stored in
the database.
create a new version of a rule whenever case

Versioning
behavior needs to change.
delegate rules to business users to allow business

Delegation users to update case behavior as business
conditions change.
Reuse rules whenever an application needs to

Reuse
incorporate existing case behavior.
defines intervals of time, goal... that are used to

Service Level Agreement (SLA)
standardize how you resolve work.
defines the behavior part of an application. They

Rule are saved in PegaRULES database. Unique key for
storage and access.
identifies, stores, and manages the set of rules that

Rulesets define an application or a major portion of an
application.
Pega Case is a specific instance of the transaction.
Case types model repeatable business transactions (abstract).
transfer of a case from one caseworker to another

Stages
or a significant change in the status of the case.
Primary stage high-level phase in the life cycle of a case.
Process contains a series of tasks.
user action or automated action performed by the

Step
application.
task that must be completed before an open case

Assignment
can continue an executing flow.
expectation of performance for completion of a

Service level
task or case.
A set of application development tools and best

practices designed to capture and tie businesses
Direct Capture of Objectives
and project goals, objectives, processes,
(DCO)
specifications and requirements to
implementations.
guardrails are guidelines that help developers

Guardrail achieve, project success, optimal performance,
reuse and maintainability for applications.
A compliance score is a weighted score for each

application that measures overall compliance with
Compliance score
the Pega Platform best practices. The score is
available on the Guardrails landing page.
Pega Pega Cloud

provides services for customers to augment their IT
staff
is one of 12 standard abstract classes that are

base class
immediately below the top-class in the hierarchy.
is a button on the Designer studio toolbar used to

related rules access a list of other rules that are alternatives or
otherwise related to this toolbar.
is a metaphor to describe how Pega interacts with

Situational layer cake
customers the right way at the right time
The role-based authorizing environments that

studios speed application development and enhance
productivity
2/13/23, 4:20 PM Pega Express Methodology Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Express Methodology Study
Pega Express Methodology

Where user research is done, microjourneys are

Discover Phase discovered and modeled, prototypes are built,
some governance plans are made
All governance is planned and coordinated;

meetings, Scrum systems, and data keeping are
Prepare Phase documented and agreed on; user stories are
identified; a backlog is created; a DevOps
pipeline is created
Where actual development takes place; backlog

Build Phase
is prioritized and broken into MLPs
Product is being rolled out; communication with

the client is managed; support systems are
Adopt Phase
established and running; smooth deployment and
operation is ensured
the overarching set of actions a user must take to

Journey
achieve some high-level end goal; AKA an epic
Microjourney a smaller user story as part of a journey
Three Pillars of a Customer Microjourneys and cases; personas and channels;

Journey data model and integrations
Persona some typical type of person or user in a case
https://quizlet.com/722194618/pega-express-methodology-flash-cards/ 1/2
2/13/23, 4:20 PM Pega Express Methodology Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Express
Channel Methodology
a means by which a persona interacts with a case
DCO Direct Capture of Objectives
a Microjourney; a single task with a clear definition

User Story
of done; represents
a tool that allows us to enter artifacts from the

Agile Workbench prepare phase consisitng of 3 elements: user
stories, bugs, feedback
represent functionality that doesn't work as

Bugs
desired
represent notes on functionality that is neigher

Feedback
new nor broken
used to determine the amount of time it will take

Estimator tool
for a development team to complete a release
a set of processes by which a team can manage a

Pega Express Methodology
Pega project from start to finish
https://quizlet.com/722194618/pega-express-methodology-flash-cards/ 2/2
2/13/23, 3:38 PM PEGA Exam Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA Exam Study
PEGA Exam
5.0 (1 review)
Certified Enterprise Architect All-in-One Exam Guide

1st Edition • ISBN: 9781260121483
Ann Reedy, Beryl Bellman, Prakash Rao
You are the Business Architect D

on a project. Which task would
not be expected for your role?
(Choose One)
A.Identify the scope of the
initial release.
B.Organize the initial Project
Kickoff meeting.
C.Identify backlog of cases to
be created
D.Assist in the grooming of
user stories.
https://quizlet.com/457659191/pega-exam-flash-cards/ 1/57
PEGA Exam a case

You are conducting A+D
lifecycle playback and
although everything meets the
product owners specifications,
they would like to suggest a
slight alteration to the Create
view. What is the easiest way to
communicate this to the
development team using Agile
Workbench? (Choose Two)
A.Capture screen.
B.Attach file(s).
C.Create a bug.
D.Create a feedback item.
How do Pega BA's participate A+C+D

in Journey Centric
Development? (Choose Three)
A.Refining the backlog of user
stories.
B.Project sizing and scoping.
C.Reviewing completed
configurations.
D.Planning sprints and
developing features.
E.Formal testing of completed
configurations
PEGA Exam
Using Pega's Direct Capture of B+C
Objectives methods improves
many aspects of application
delivery. Which of the
following is not a benefit of
DCO? (Choose Two)
A.Helps to eliminate
translation errors between IT
and business.
B.Delivers better testing results
in record time.
C.Faster coding release from
IT development team.
D.Improves speed and
accuracy of your
implementation.
An application lets customers C

book airline reservations
online. What would you expect
to be defined as the case type
in the application?
a) A confirmation email
b) A reviewed reservation
c) A reservation
d) An airline ticket
PEGA Examto implement

You are helping A
the technical components of a
new application. Before you
can begin work, you must
obtain definitions of the
business processes and
service-level agreements.
Which members of the
development team would you
go to for this information?
a) Business architects
b) Subject Matter Experts
(SMEs)
c) Case participants
d) Stakeholders
You want to engage business B+C

working models. What two
best practices accomplish this
objective? (Choose Two)
a)Guardrail compliance
b)Iterative delivery
c)Direct Capture of Objectives
(DCO)
d)Approval process
PEGA
Which twoExam
are benefits of A+D
following Pega guardrails.
(Choose Two)
a)Guardrails help developers
to track compliance with Pega
best practices.
b)Guardrails help project
managers ensure that
applications are completed on
time.
c)Guardrails help managers
create schedules for efficiently
allocating developer
resources.
d)Guardrails help developers
build applications that are
easier to maintain and have
fewer defects
When collecting information A+D

for a loan application, a case
worker needs to enter the date
of birth on the loan application
form. What two tasks do you
perform to enable the case
worker to enter this
information? (Choose Two)
a)Add the date of birth field to
all the user views in the case
type
b)Add a date of birth field to
the appropriate stage
c)Add a date of birth data field
to the case type
d)Add the date of birth field to
the case worker's view of the
case type
PEGA Exam
A Pega team is working with an A+C
organization to customize a
Pega application. The team is
following the Journey Centric
Delivery methodology. What
two tasks must the team
perform in the first stage?
(Choose Two)
a)Create an estimation of
effort based on the case type
backlog.
b)Review the goals and
approach with the project
team and sponsors.
c)Identify case types and build
a user case backlog using
DCO.
d)Prioritize the user stories in
the backlog for work to do in
the first sprint.
PEGA
Select theExam
answer that C
summarizes the role of the
Pega Business Architect (BA)
during Journey Centric
Development.
a) The Pega Business Architect
(BA) implements Pega training
to bridge skill gaps in the
customer's teams.
b) The Pega Business Architect
(BA) runs the project kickoff
during which a series of
presentations are made to
ensure everyone is aware of
the project goals.
c) The Pega Business Architect
(BA) participates in refining the
backlog of user stories and
developing application
features.
d) The Pega Business Architect
(BA) designs detailed
acceptance criteria which
helps to define the test plan
for the resulting configuration.
How do you defer a feedback C

item to an upcoming
application release in Agile
Workbench?
a) Set the item priority to "low".
b) Set the item priority to "nice
to have".
c) Set the item priority to
"future".
d) Set the item priority to "to
do".
PEGA
Select twoExam
ways you use Agile B+C
Workbench to add detail to
bugs and feedback items.
(Choose Two)
a)Use the integrated audio
recording tool.
b)Use the integrated screen
capture tool.
c)Use the integrated video
recording tool.
d)Record the bugs and
feedback in the case life cycle
step descriptions.
What are the two uses of Agile C+D

Workbench in product
development? (Choose Two)
a)Backlog storage
b)Feature updates
c)Capturing user story refining
d)Progress tracking
PEGA Exam
The backlog contains user A+D
stories that relate to steps in
your application's case life
cycle. User interface
stakeholders want to monitor
work performed on Collect
Information steps. To make
tracking easier, the
stakeholders want the work
organized by stage within
each case type. The case type
features have already been
created in the Application
Overview landing page. What
two tasks would you perform
to support the stakeholders'
requirements? (Choose Two)
a)Create a Collect Information
subfeature beneath each stage
subfeature.
b)Create a Collect Information
subfeature beneath a case
type feature.
c)Create a case type
subfeature beneath each
Collect Information
subfeature.
d)Create a subfeature for each
stage beneath the case type
feature.
PEGA
A productExam
owner has decided A+C
that development for a Must
have user story, currently
marked as Doing, will be
suspended and completed in a
release that has not been
determined. What two
changes to the user story
would you make in Agile
Workbench to reflect this
change? (Choose Two)
a)Mark the user story status as
To do.
b)Mark the user story status as
Done.
c)Change the user story
priority from Must have to
Future.
d)Change the user story
priority from Must have to
Nice to have.
All cases generally have the following

Case characteristics - have a unique identifier, status,
urgency and follow at least one process
does not have any parent case type, but can cover,
top-level case type
or become a parent of, other case types.
is covered by a parent case type. Child case types

child case type represent work that must be completed to resolve
the parent.
Primary
Three different Stage types Alternate
Resolution
PEGA Exam automatically or manually transition to another

stage
Primary stages Automatic - represented by the chevron on the
stage shape
Manual - represented by a rectangle shape
Alternate stages manual transition to another stage
manual transition to another stage

Resolution stage Denoted by a red line under the stage name - does
not automatically update status
more complex validation, we can test property

values against specified criteria and for a valid
Validate Rule
range
Referenced in a Flow Action Rule
rule useful in making sure the pattern is matched -

Edit Validate
Referenced in a Property Rule
PEGA Exam
To place an online order, a A
customer provides their
personal details such as full
name and address. The
customer can search for, and
select items to order. After the
order is placed, it is processed
by the Accounts Payable
department. The order is then
sent to the Fulfillment center
where the order items are
packaged and shipped to the
customer. The customer may
cancel the order at any time.
Now consider this case life
cycle design:
Primary Stage: New Order ->

Processing -> Fulfillment ->
Shipping
Alternate Stage: Cancellation
The stages identified in the

case life cycle design are
_____________________.
A.valid because they represent
a transfer of the case from one
part of the organization to
another.
B.valid because the names
used to describe the stages do
not use a verb+noun naming
convention.
C.not valid because there are
not at least 5 primary stages.
D.not valid because the
Cancellation stage should be
part of the primary flow.
PEGA Exam would be

Which requirements A+D
best implemented as an
Alternate Stage when defining
a Case Type? (Choose Two)
A.An expense report that
requires an audit when certain
spending thresholds are
crossed or the expense report
is billable.
B.An expense report that
requires us to capture a
receipt.
C.An expense report that
allows us to skip a stage if the
expense report is not billable.
D.An expense report is
rejected.
PEGA Exam
In a Job Recruitment A+C+D
application, business needs to
schedule interviews for
candidates who meet passing
requirements. Each interview
must be tracked from interview
date/time to resolution
date/time for quality control
purposes. The status of
interview can change from
New, Open-Scheduled, Open-
InProgress, Resolved-
Rejected, and Resolved-
Approved. What are the new
records are essential for this
application? (Choose Three)
A.A field for interview
date/time.
B.A Wait shape to hold
processing until interview is
completed.
C.A case type.
D.A view to capture scheduling
information.
E.A service level to ensure
timely resolution.
Slide 56 Exam prep w/ answers ...
PEGA Exam about Draft

Which statements B+C
Mode are true? (Choose Two)
A.When we open a process for
the first time, Draft Mode must
be turned on before modeling
the process.
B.When we open a process for
the first time, our process
diagram is in Draft Mode.
C.If a rule is referenced in a
shape that has not been
created, it will save
successfully in Draft Mode.
D.Only existing rules may be
referenced in flow shapes
when Draft Mode is on.
When routing to a Work A

Queue, an assignment remains
in the queue until it is selected
by an operator. When
selected, the case ____________.
(Choose One)
A.is moved to the operator's
worklist awaiting action
B.is transferred to the next
available operator's worklist
C.remains in the queue until
the operator commits an
action
D.is moved to the next queue
by the operator's action
PEGA
Given theExam
following business B
requirement, "Once a loan
application is complete the
case is routed to a group of
underwriters for review." What
type of routing is needed to
ensure the case is handled by
the next available underwriter?
(Choose One)
A.Worklist routing
B.Work queue routing
C.Workpool routing
D.Work basket routing
PEGA Exam
An insurance company A
provides personal property
insurance. Jewelry is
categorized as a special type
of personal property. Requests
for jewelry coverage require
that a user managing the
request is trained to appraise
jewelry. The requirement is to
route assignments for jewelry
appraisals to users who have
this skill. Which one of the
following routing approaches
would you use?
A.Route requests to a work
group that uses skill rating
parameters for work group
members.
B.Route requests to a decision
table which routes the request
to a work group in a location
where there are users who
have appraisal skills.
C.Route requests to a
reporting manager who
assigns the request to an
available user to ensure fast
processing.
D.Route directly to a user who
is a member of work group
that uses skill rating
parameters.
PEGA Exam to
Use data propagation D
automatically copy values
from a case to __________.
(Choose One)
A. child cases only
B. its parent case and any
subcases
C. any type of case
D. child cases and spin-off
cases
When does the Status of a B

case change when a Work
Status change is configured on
an Assignment shape?
(Choose One)
A.Upon completion of the
Assignment
B.When the Case reaches the
Assignment shape and the
Assignment Object is Created
C.On the Connector prior to
the Assignment shape
D.At the start of the Flow
(Process) containing the
Assignment shape
PEGA Exam
A Wait step may pause a case's B
processing until a
predetermined time expires or
___________________________. (Choose
One)
A.completion of the
Assignment
B.that case or dependent
case(es) processing reaches a
specific status
C.a property's value exceeds a
threshold
D.a subcase or spin-off case is
created
What three questions can you B+D+E

ask to help you plan user
views? (Choose Three)
A.Will users want to see
information displayed in
different styles?
B.How will users enter values
into those fields?
C.Will the information be
stored in an external
database?
D.What field do users need to
see?
E.Can users modify the values
or only read the values?
PEGA Exam
The first stage of your process D
contains an assignment step.
As a Pega BA you need create
a new custom user view with
appropriate fields for this step.
The quickest way to do this is
via the _________. (Choose One)
A.Case Designer, Settings Tab
B.Case Designer, Data Model
Tab
C.Case Designer, Views Tab
D.Case Designer, Workflow
Tab
slide 66 on exam prep ...
When modeling the life cycle A+C

of a case, stages typically
represent a _______________ or a
________________. (Choose Two)
a)significant change in the
status of a case
b)subset of data used to
resolve the case
c)transfer of authority
d)single actor performing a
single action
PEGA Examthe life cycle

When modeling A+D
of a case, alternate stages
typically represent ____________
and can ___________. (Choose Two)
a)be sequenced into the
primary stages
b)only be accessed manually
c)a separate, but related
business transaction
d)exceptions to the normal
course of events
A business process C
case. Which of the following
options is the best way to
design for this requirement?
a) Add a step in a process.
b) Add an optional process to
any stage in the case type.
c) Add a local action to the
case type.
d) Add a process in a stage.
PEGA Exam could be

Which requirement A
satisfied with a user action?
a) Allow a user to transfer a
case to another employee at
any stage of the case.
b) Requiring a separate
approval process whenever an
order exceeds USD 10,000.
c) Reassign any task that
remains open after three days
to another user.
d) An application randomly
sends a survey to customers
once their case is resolved.
Adding instructions to a step C

____________.
a) Describes the business
value of the step.
b) Instructs an architect how to
build the step.
c) Describes to an end user
what should be done in the
step.
d) Defines what the step
should do.
A step in the case life cycle C

has a case status value of
status of the case
a) Only if the user manually
updates the case status
b) At the end of the step
c) At the beginning of the step
d) The status of a case cannot
be automatically updated
PEGA
What typeExam
of step typically A
requires contextual
instructions?
a) Collect information
b) Change stage
c) Create case
d) Approve/Reject
When is the earliest A

opportunity for you to
configure the user view for a
step in a case life cycle in Pega
Express?
a) You can configure the user
view for a step after you add
that step to the case life cycle.
b) You can configure the user
view for a step before you
start creating the case life
cycle.
c) You can configure the user
view for a step any time after
you configure the pick list data
types.
d) You can configure the user
view for a step after you create
the entire case life cycle.
PEGA
You have Exam
a requirement to add D
a bank checking account
number field to a view. Routing
numbers must contain nine
digits. How would you
this requirement?
a) In an edit validate rule,
configure a function to test for
a routing number pattern.
b) Set the minimum and
maximum values to 9 in a text
field.
c) Use a decimal property type
and make the field required.
d) Use an edit validate rule
that validates the routing
number pattern.
PEGA
You have Exam
a requirement to add B
to a view a check box that
indicates the user qualifies for
an auto insurance discount. In
order to qualify, two
conditions must be met. First,
the user must be older than 25.
Second, the user cannot have
received a traffic violation in
the past three years. Unless
both conditions are met and
the user selects the check box,
the form displays an error
when the user submits the
form. Which one of the
following approaches would
you use to support this
requirement?
a) Use two validate rules, one
for each condition.
b) Use a single validate rule to
verify both of these conditions.
c) Use an edit validate rule that
validates both conditions.
d) Associate an edit validate
rule with the flow action that
references the form.
PEGA Exam
You are adding a field to your A+B
case type in which users must
enter the day, month, and year
they were hired before the
user can submit the user form.
The field type must enforce a
date format. What two
validation approaches would
you use to meet the validation
a)Use the required option
b)Define the field type as a
date
c)Define the field type as an
integer
d)Use the read-only option
e)Add the word "Required" to
the field label
Which requirement is best B

implemented using a Wait step
in a case?
a) You need to send an email
after a user completes a form.
b) You cannot complete a
purchase case on a website
unless you complete a new
account child case.
c) You need to pause a case
until a user uploads a signed
document.
d) You cannot proceed in an
expense report until a
manager approves the request.
PEGA Exam
In an mortgage application, D
the user creates a loan
request. In order for the loan
request to be approved, the
loan officer must receive the
results of an appraisal. How
would you configure the case
types to reflect their
relationship?
a) Make mortgage a parent
case type. Make loan request
and appraisal child case types.
b) Make appraisal a parent
case type, and loan request a
child case type.
c) Make both loan request and
appraisal peer case types.
d) Make loan request a parent
case type, and appraisal a
child case type.
PEGA Exam
In an online shopping D
application, the primary case
type PurchaseOrder has two
child case types: Payment and
Packaging. In processing
PurchaseOrder case PO-11,
Payment case Pay-37 and
Packaging case Pac-56 are
created. Which statement
about the processing of PO-11,
Pay-37, and Pac-56 is correct?
a) Pac-56 has to be resolved
before Pay-37 is resolved.
b) PO-11 has to be resolved
before either Pay-37 and Pac-
56 is resolved.
c) PO-11 can be resolved when
either Pay-37 or Pac-56 is
resolved.
d) Both Pay-37 and Pac-56
have to be resolved before
PO-11 can be resolved.
When does data propagation C

occur?
a) Whenever a parent's value
changes
b) When a parent's value
changes and a data transform
is used to configure the data
propagation
c) When a case is created
d) When a value in the child
case or spin-off case changes
PEGA
You have Exam
a purchase request C
case and want to spin off a
supplier case for a new
supplier. How can you copy
data to the supplier case?
a) the Update a Case smart
shape
b) a data page
c) a data transform
d) a decision tree
Use __________ to sum a value in a B

child case and record the total
value in the parent case.
a) data propagation
b) a calculation
c) the Update a Case smart
shape
d) a data transform
Use __________ to conditionalize D

the logic to determine which
data should be propagated.
a) a decision tree
b) a data page
c) the property mapper
d) a data transform
Goal
§We define service levels
Deadline
using 3 milestones
Passed Deadline
how long it should take - measured from

Goal
assignment start
how long it may take - measured from assignment

Deadline
start
PEGA Exam how long after the deadline before taking

Passed Deadline additional action - measured from the end of the
deadline - repeatable
Worklist a list of all the assignments for a particular operator
routing queue where assignment are stored and

Work Queue
multiple operators can access them
Perform a single task without interrupting the

Optional Action
primary path
when a user is allowed to determine if a new

Optional Process
process needs to be called.
Which shape would you use if B

you wanted the system to
automatically choose between
multiple outcomes? (Choose
One)
A.Assignment
B.Decision
C.Subprocess
D.Utility
As a general guideline, C
emanating connectors should
be limited on Assignment and
Decision shapes to
____________________? (Choose One)
A.15 or less.
B.7 (+ or - 2).
C.no more than 5.
D.no more than 10.
PEGA Exam
In a support application you A
have the requirement:
An email notification should

be sent within four hours of
receipt of the support issue.
What in the service level

should be set to four hours to
meet this requirement?
(Choose One)
A.Goal
B.Deadline
C.Passed Deadline
D.Expired
You configure a service level A

to start with 0 points and
adjust assignment urgency to
20 when the goal is reached,
another 20 when the deadline
is reached, and 50 when the
passed deadline event is
triggered. You iterate the
passed deadline 3 times. How
many points will the
assignment have on the last
iteration of passed deadline.
A.100
B.140
C.190
D.230
PEGA Exam
An application allows C
employees to submit expense
reports on a weekly basis.
Expense reports must be
approved by both employee's
manager and audited by
finance. The tasks may be
completed in any order, but
both must be approved for
payment to be made. How do
you configure the approvals in
the application (Choose One)
A.Configure cascading
approval process based on
user reporting structure
B.Configure a case-wide
optional process for each
approval process
C.Configure parallel processes
for each set of required steps
D.Configure cascading
approval process based on an
authority matrix
PEGA Exam
We have an assignment C
service level that has the
following configuration:
Initial Urgency - 10
Goal - 1 day - Urgency - 15
Deadline - 3 days - Urgency -
20
Passed Deadline - 24 hours -
Urgency 20
If the systems creates an

assignment with this service
level associated to it on March
1st at 9am, what will the
urgency value be on March
4th at 5pm? (Choose One)
A.25
B.35
C.45
D.55
PEGA Exam request,

In a new prescription C
all NSAID medication requests
must have a pharmacist with
DRG Level 3 approvals. Any
pharmacist who meets or
exceeds Level 3 may approve.
To meet this requirement you
configure the case design to
have ______________________. (Choose
One)
A.A step that routes to
Pharmacist Level 3 worklist
B.A custom utility step that
uses a standard Pega router
C.A step that routes to the
Pharmacist Level 3 skilled
queue
D.A send email utility step that
Which of these rule types can C+E

be used in a flow to direct the
processing of a case? (Choose
Two)
A.Integrator
B.Assignment
C.Flow Action
D.Transformer
E.When
Where is a When rule B

referenced when called from a
flow? (Choose One)
A.Assignment
B.Connector
C.Decision
D.Fork
E.Service Level
PEGA Exam
Which variable in the D
assignment urgency
calculation enables users to
increment the service level
urgency on a case-by-case
basis?
a) .pxUrgencyAssignSLA
b) .pxUrgencyWork
c) .pxUrgencyAssign
d) .pyUrgencyAssignAdjust
slide 144 on exam prepG ...
The goal milestone in a service A

level defines the amount of
time _____________________.
a) in which the case or step
should be completed
b) allowed before an
assignment is considered
overdue
c) allowed for a user to
advance a case to the next
stage
d) in which the case or step
must be completed
The primary purpose of a B

a) assign cases to the
appropriate case worker
b) help ensure timely
completion of assignments
c) track assignment status over
time
d) generate service level
reports
PEGA Exam
What three questions should B+D+E
you ask when creating a
correspondence? (Choose
Three)
a)How often should you send
the correspondence?
b)How will the
correspondence be sent?
c)Which email server should
the correspondence use?
d)When does the
correspondence need to be
sent?
e)Who is the user that receives
the correspondence?
Which two statements identify C+D

why you should automate
Two)
a)Automating correspondence
allows you to advance a case.
b)Automating correspondence
keeps all interested parties
informed of the current status
of a case.
c)Automating correspondence
allows you to send timely
communication.
d)Automating correspondence
allows for sending consistent
information to users.
PEGA Exam
In a new hire process, a hiring A
manager needs to be
automatically notified by
email, when a job application
case reaches a Collect Work
Sample assignment. How
would you configure this
correspondence requirement?
a) Enable assignment
notifications for the case type.
b) Before the assignment, add
a SendEmail SmartShape.
c) After the assignment, add a
SendEmail SmartShape.
d) Add a
SendCorrespondence local
action to the assignment.
PEGA Exam a standard

You are configuring C
email to automatically be sent
to loan applicants informing
them that their loan has been
approved. The requirement
states that the email must
include values for the
applicant's name, the loan
office, and the loan amount.
The email must also include
boilerplate content stating the
loan's terms and conditions,
which is regularly updated.
This content is in a paragraph
rule shared by other standard
emails throughout the
organization. How would you
configure your email?
A) Insert the applicant name
and loan office properties.
Include a correspondence
fragment that contains a link to
the organization's website
page that contains loans and
conditions.
B) Add placeholder text for
the applicant's name, loan
office, and amount. Also, insert
the paragraph rule.
C) Insert applicant's name,
loan office, and loan amount
properties. Also, insert the
paragraph rule.
D) Insert applicant's name,
loan office, and loan amount
properties. Also, copy and
paste the paragraph content
into your email.
PEGA Exam
An expense report process A
requires the assignment for
travel expenses to be routed
to a specific auditor. The
auditor is also a member of an
auditing work group. How
would you route the
assignment so that the user
receives it?
a) To the user
b) To the user's work queue
c) To the user's manager
d) To the user's work group
PEGA Exam
An insurance company C
provides personal property
would you use?
a) Route requests to a decision
table which routes the request
to a work group in a location
where there are users who
have appraisal skills.
b) Route directly to a user who
is a member of work group
that uses skill rating
parameters.
c) Route requests to a work
group that uses skill rating
parameters for work group
members.
d) Route requests to a
reporting manager who
assigns the request to an
available user to ensure fast
processing.
PEGA Exam
A home loan company has C
home appraisal offices in
various regions. Each office
has its own work queue.
Company policy requires that
home appraisals are assigned
to offices based on the home's
location. For example,
appraisals for homes located
in Boston are assigned to the
New England office work
queue. Which routing
approach would you choose
to support this requirement?
a) It is not possible to support
this requirement. The router
must define a specific work
queue.
b) Route the assignment based
on an appraiser role.
c) Route the assignment to the
correct work queue based on
a decision rule.
d) Route the assignment based
on appraiser skills.
PEGA
Select twoExam
benefits of A+C
adopting a rule delegation
strategy. (Choose Two)
a)Adopting a rule delegation
strategy can help improve the
business' ability to adapt to
changing business conditions.
b)Adopting a rule delegation
strategy enable business users
to change business policies
more quickly by avoiding long
approval processes.
c)Adopting a rule delegation
strategy enables business
users and architects to focus
on their specific tasks related
to application development
and maintenance.
d)Adopting a rule delegation
strategy can help lower the
overall costs of building and
maintaining business
applications, because fewer
architects are required if
business users can make
changes to the application on
their own.
PEGA
What twoExam
items should a B+C
developer configure before
delegating a rule? (Choose
Two)
a)A separate Operator ID that
has access to the delegated
rules
b)An Access Group that has
access to the production
ruleset
c)An unlocked ruleset added
to the Application rule as a
production ruleset
d)An Access Role that has
access to the production
ruleset
Conditional paths in a case life A+C

cycle are used to define
______________________. (Choose Two)
a)paths in the case life cycle
that are followed based on
run-time values
b)subprocesses that run in the
context of the current case
c)paths in the case life cycle
that are chosen by a user at
run-time
d)subprocesses that run in
parallel with the context of the
current case
PEGA
A parallelExam
process is defined as A
___________________________.
a) a process that executes over
the same time period as other
processes
b) a process that executes in
the context of the current case
c) a process that is not part of
the primary flow in the case
life cycle
d) a process that executes in
the context of another process
Automating decisions based B

on business logic enables
___________________________.
a) architects to spend less time
building the application
b) application users to focus
on more nuanced decisions
that require business expertise
c) architects to improve the
performance of the
application
d) application users to mark a
specific location for business
exceptions that may arise in
the process flow
Rule used to query information from external

database and data tables
Reports Definition
Automatically generates SQL
Number of different configuration options available
List Reports
Two different types of reports
Summary or Chart Reports
PEGA Exam
List Reports
Spreadsheet style reports that can combine
business and process metrics
For aggregating data with counts, totals, averages

Often used to show trends over time
Summary or Chart Reports May include a chart or graph to display
summarized data - Available charts include - line,
bar, column, pie, bubble and gauges to name a few
allow you to only show records that are relevant to

Filters
your design requirement.
What does the Report Browser A+D

allow users to do? (Choose
Two)
A.Create Reports
B.Modify Reports
C.Delete Reports
D.Run Reports
PEGA
You have Exam
created a new report D
that contains a list of resolved
expense reports by approver.
Columns include Expense #,
Expense Amount, Approved
(Y/N), Resolution Date,
Comments, and Approver ID.
The finance manager wants
you to display each Approver
ID in a row, Beneath each
approver, you must list the
expenses Expense Amount,
Resolution Date, Approver ID,
and Comments.How do you
configure the report? (Choose
One)
A.Filter by the Approver ID
column.
B.Summarize the Approver ID
column.
C.Sort the Approver ID
column.
D.Group by the Approver ID
column.
What are two types of Report C+D

Definitions available in Pega 7?
(Choose Two)
A.Detailed
B.Table (Grid)
C.List
D.Summary
PEGA Exam has a

Your organization D
standard loan request report
that contains columns for loan
ID, loan officer, work status,
and a loan creation date. A
manager requests a report that
includes only loans created in
the previous quarter and do
not have a status of New. How
would you configure the
report filter to support this
requirement? (Choose One)
A.Create two conditions: Work
Status does not equal New,
AND Creation Date is less than
current quarter.
B.Create two conditions: Work
Condition equals New OR
Creation Date does not equal
Previous Quarter.
C.Create one condition: Work
status does not equal New
where Creation Date is equal
to Previous Quarter.
D.Create two conditions: Work
AND Creation Date is equal to
Previous Quarter.
PEGA Exam
A manager has requested a C
listed under cost center. How
report definition?
a) Use the requests column to
group the results.
b) Filter the results so that only
cost center and requests are
included in the report.
c) Use the cost center column
to group the results.
d) Summarize the requests
column by count.
PEGA Exam
A manager requests a report D
that contains the following
columns: Create Date, Case ID,
Create Operator, and Work
Status. You must sort the Case
ID values so the case with the
highest ID value appears at the
top of the list and descends in
order. How would you design
the report definition to
a) Make sure that the Case ID
is the first column in the report.
b) Add a filter condition where
Case ID is greater than one.
c) For the Case ID property,
select Count in the Summarize
column.
d) For the Case ID property,
select Highest to Lowest sort
type.
PEGA Exam has a

Your organization C
standard loan request report
that contains columns for loan
requirement?
a) Create two conditions: Work
AND Creation Date is less than
current quarter.
b) Create one condition: Work
status does not equal New
where Creation Date is equal
to Previous Quarter.
c) Create two conditions: Work
AND Creation Date is equal to
Previous Quarter.
d) Create two conditions: Work
Condition equals New OR
Creation Date does not equal
Previous Quarter.
PEGA
What are Exam
the possible When not following best practices, you may spend
consequences of not following more time re-creating existing functionality, or
best practices and guardrails debugging a component that is not well designed.
when designing and building There is also the risk that you will implement a
an application on the Pega 7 feature that does not work correctly.
platform?
prepare
Main stages in the Journey
build
centric delivery
go live
Identify case types and build a user case backlog

using DCO
Define the MLP for the release.
prepare stage in Journey The project team creates an estimation of effort
centric delivery based upon the case type backlog.
Define the MLP for the release.
Assemble and train the team.
Complete necessary logistical and legal activities.
Project team and sponsors meet to review the

goals and the approach. Ensure everyone has the
same understanding.
build stage in Journey centric
Refine the backlog stories targeting the first two
delivery
sprints using DCO.
Perform other project setup activities essential to
successful delivery.
PEGA Exam Customers perform testing, with the assistance of

the project team as needed, on projects that may
require specific testing due to regulatory or
company/industry specific requirements.
A formal review panel decides whether or not to
Go Live stage in Journey
go live with the release based on criteria
centric delivery
documented and reviewed in advance with key
stakeholders.
Consider how the business is going to implement
future changes, bug fixes, or enhancements after
go live.
When do you use DCO in You use DCO during the Prepare and Build stage.
Journey Centric Delivery?
BAs participate in Journey Centric Delivery by

How do BAs participate in helping to refine the backlog of user stories,
Journey Centric Delivery? planning sprints, developing features, and
reviewing completed configurations.
You have quick access to Agile Workbench in both

Pega Express and Designer Studio, you can capture
What are the benefits of using
and share bugs, feedback, and user stories with
Agile Workbench to capture
others from inside your application, and you can
bugs, feedback, and
use the integrated screen capture and video
enhancements?
recording tools to visualize bugs and
recommended changes.
You use Agile Workbench to The Application Overview landing page

update the status of a bug or
feedback item. Where can you
view the resulting impact of
project completion?
What is the main benefit of Features help stakeholders easily identify the
organizing user stories into product components that are being built and
features? visualize how the components fit together.
PEGA Exama feature that

You are viewing Select the Show button in the Work items header.
has a subfeature. What would
you do to see only the
backlog items related to the
feature you are viewing?
When preparing a backlog Associate a feature with the item, update the work
item for tracking in the status if necessary, and specify an owner and due
Application Overview date.
dashboard, what tasks do you
perform?
A _______________ delivers a case

meaningful business outcome
to a customer, partner, or
internal stakeholder.
The modeling technique used case life cycle design

to describe in business terms
how a business application
should work is called
______________.
happy path sequence of primary stages
A _______________ is used as a first stage

level of organizing work in a
case.
In Pega Platform, _______________ processes

are organized within stages
and define one or more paths
the case must follow.
allow the users to leave the primary path of a case

optional actions
to complete another task or process
PEGA Exam if you need

When determining Should users be allowed to update information at
to use an optional user action, any time during a case or stage?
consider the following Do you need multiple steps to update information?
questions: Can information be updated in a single screen?
optional processes
two types of optional actions
optional user action
when you need multiple steps to update

optional processes information. it allows users to run a new process
within a case.
optional user action when the case can be updated in a single screen
What are the main differences An optional user action is a single task and typically
between an optional user returns to the primary path of a case, whereas an
action and an optional optional process is a series of steps that may or
process? may not return to the primary path of a case.
Consider what fields the users need to see, how

What should you consider
values will be entered, and whether users can
before creating a user view?
modify or only read the values.
stores text, numbers, dates, Boolean values, and

single value or scalar property
amounts.
acts as a container for an ordered list of single

value list
values
acts as a container for an unordered list of single

value group
values.
page single entity
page list numerically ordered list
PEGA Exam
page group unordered list
You have added fields for Define the name and address properties as text
entering the name and property types.
address of a loan applicant.
What validation methods
would you use?
Which validation method validate rule

would be appropriate for
checking that a user enters a
date for scheduling a home
inspection that is in the future?
How would you configure a You would use a picklist field and specify either a
field in which a user selects radio button or dropdown control type.
one of four possible shipping
methods?
When would you use the You set a field as required when you want to make
required fields validation sure users enter a value before they can continue.
approach?
How would you ensure that a You would use editable settings to set both the
user always enters 20 minimum and maximum number to 20 characters.
characters in a field?
Validate rules enable you to different values are required based on business
use a single property when logic
______________.
How is the validation creation First, Pega Express automatically applies the
process in Pega Express validation rule to the flow action that corresponds
different than the process in to the user view. Second, Pega Express only
Designer Studio? supports comparisons against a constant value.
PEGA
Why mustExam
a validation Validating that a date is in the future or the past
condition that tests whether a requires the use of a function.
date is in the future or the past
be configured in Designer
Studio?
You have added a field for An edit validate rule ensures that the phone
entering a U.S. phone number. number contains the correct number of digits. The
Do you use a integer data type integer data type only ensures that the user enters
or an edit validate rule to numbers in the field.
validate that the phone
number is in the correct
format?

Top-level case
cover, or become a parent of, other cases.
A case that is covered by a parent case. When you

configure a case as a child case, Pega maintains a
child case relationship between the parent and child cases.
Child cases represent work that must be completed
to resolve the parent.
What is the difference A child case has a relationship with the parent case
between a top-level case and and a top-level case does not.
a child case?
What are the two ways you You can configure a case to wait for a set amount
can configure a Wait step to of time or until a subcase reaches a defined status.
pause a case?
the mechanism of copying data within the case

hierarchy. By sharing data among cases, you save
Data propagation time by eliminating the manual task of copying data
and you provide relevant information to
caseworkers.
PEGA Exam
Service Level Agreement (SLA) establishes a deadline for work completion.
PEGA Study
PEGA
The Heart of Mathematics: An Invitation to Effective Thinking

4th Edition • ISBN: 9781118235706
Edward B. Burger, Michael Starbird
1,757 solutions
Models the behaviors either in Rule

the UI or surrounding users.
· Reduce development time

· Develop and deploy low code business apps
· Facilitate collaboration between IT and business
users
What are the benefits of using · Automate processes, decreasing waste and wait
PEGA? times
· Increase process quality with built in best
practices
· Reuse apps
· Dev and deploy in the cloud or on prem
PEGA
Collaboration between IT and DCO - Direct Capture of Objectives
business users leveraging
visual tools to remain in sync
on objectives.
Best practices enabled in Guardrails

PEGA used to ensure
maintainability, quality &
scalability
Low code/no code model driven app development

What is PEGA? tool enabling business users and IT to work
together.
Best practice for number of 5+-2

cases in a Case Life Cycle for
reusability
1. Predictive
2. Admin
3. App
6 Portals in PEGA
4. Dev
5. Case Manager
6. Case Worker
Made up of case types, made Application

up of class structures and rule
sets.
Case identifier, what users see pyID

for their specific case instance.
Property visible and editable py

to user.
This is the shared layer of the Common Application

Situational Layer Cake.
PEGA
Property that is system pz
generated.
Property that is read only. px
Anyone who does tasks Case Worker
Anyone who has an interest in Case Manager

work being done by others.
A business user submitting a A Case

request is an example of...
Setting deadlines for workers SLA - Service Level Agreement

is...
1. Primary Path
3 Case Types are... 2. Alternate Path
3. Resolution
Organization-Division-Unit is Class Structure

an example of
Model of repeatable business Case Type

transactions.
Verb + Noun is a good naming Process or Step naming

structure for what?
Place order and Ship item is an process or step naming

example of
Series of tasks or steps a user Process

completes as they work on a
case.
PEGA
User action or automated Step
action performed by the app.
1. Start
2. Goal
4 intervals of SLA's
3. Deadline
4. Passed Deadline
Base layer consists of the most Situational Layer Cake

reusable rules/rulesets, the
higher the layer the more
specialized the rulesets
Where can SLA's be set in Case, Stage, Process, Step (Assignments)

PEGA?
Urgency default value = 10 (for the case type SLA)
On what steps can goals and tasks/assignments (green)

deadlines be placed?
A transfer of authority or a Stage

significant status change
represents a...
A status gets set when in a At the beginning of a stage or step. All steps under
case life cycle? that stage inherits that status.
Exceptions to a Case life cycle 1. Alternate Stage

are? 2. Optional Action
Someone who knows jewelry Skill based routing

is an example of...
What 2 items determine the Status change & Time

wait on a Wait shape?
PEGA
What step goes hand in hand Create Case
with a Wait shape?
A mechanism to control Create Case / Wait step

processes between a parent
and child
When in a parent case that has pyWorkPage

a child case, where can you
find the active properties?
Noun phrasing is used when Stage naming structure

naming what?
When in a parent case that has You can't

a child shape, where can you
find the child case's
properties?
When in a child case where pyWorkPage

can you find that case's
properties?
When in a child case where pyWorkCover

can you find the parent case's
properties?
1. Optional Action
2 Actions Types in PEGA?
2. Flow Action
1. Local Action (does not change the location in a

What are the 2 types of case life cycle)
Optional Actions? 2. Connector Action (changes location in case life
cycle)
PEGA
After performing a local action They stay in the same step/stage
what stage does a user
navigate to?
What stage does a user Another stage (may or may not return to the parent
navigate to after an optional process)
process?
Updating an address is an Optional Action

example of what?
Case wide or on a stage (literally it can be added

Where can you set up an
on a flow connector or in the upper right hand
Optional Action?
side)
Add an instruction
What can you do in dev studio parallel process
but not in app studio? set passed deadline
add grouping to a report
Order does not matter here for Parallel process

cases...
2 processes that occur in an Sequential process

order is an example of a
Anyone can pick up a task Workbasket/Work Queue

here...
Tasks that are assigned to you Work list

live here
What type of process is an Subprocess

approval?
PEGA
Where do you place a when On a flow connector
rule?
In an SLA what are the options Assignee, Manager or Participant

you can escalate a task to?
1. Single
2 levels of approvals 2. Cascading (authority matrix & reporting
structure)
Route an approval through Cascading approval structure

multiple parties
Multiple parties need to give Authority Matrix

approval and multiple
conditions exist
Values in session memory are Clipboard

located here
You wish to change properties The Clipboard

of a page in order to debug a
case where do you go?
The best practice number of 15

shapes in a workflow is...
1. Condition on a stage
What are the 4 ways to control 2. Condition on a process
a case life cycle/workflow? 3. Optional Action
4. Decision shape
Examples of valuable Clipboard, Declarative network (NOT Tracer!)

debugging tools we've
learned about...
PEGA
A bug was fixed on ruleset 08- 08-02-05
02-04. What is the new
version?
Submission, Processing, Stages

Delivery are naming examples
of
This is stored in your personal Private Edit / Checked out rules

ruleset...
Which rule will be used by a The last checked in version of that rule
user after a developer checks
that rule out?
2 ways to 'Route To' (2 1. Work Queue (workbasket)

locations you can send a task 2. Work List
to)
Routing a task to the closest Business Logic (not skill based routing!)
center that knows Spanish is an
example of
Use of a condition for routing Business Logic

is
Structure that defines reuse Classes
Determines rule priority, a Rule Set Stack

collection of rule sets
Work - Rules represents what Case level

level?
1. Direct inheritance
2 types of class inheritance
2. Pattern inheritance
PEGA
What type of Inheritance Pattern inheritance
indicates rule reusability,
developed by us...
You can choose a rule to Direct inheritance

inherit from another
application
A ruleset was previously 03-01-01

packaged as version 02-01-04.
A new version was developed
with an architectural change.
What will the next version be
packaged as?
Rule Set Version structure is Major-Minor-Patch

defined in what way...
Everything is a rule except Data
1. Work
3 types of classes 2. Data
3. Integration
Rules describing how the Integration rules

application interacts with other
systems
Rules describing the data Data rules

objects used in an app
Rules that describe how to Case Life Cycle

process a case
.Badge(WMG) is an example of Value Group

a
PEGA
What is Company in property Page Group
eference:
Company(Partner).Location(3).Address
1. Alternate Stage
2 stage transitions
2. Change Stage
1. Set value(s) from one page to another

A Data transform will do these
2. Set a default using superclass data transform (act
2 things:
as a constructor to set default values)
What is a Superclass transform It sets all the same values cumulatively, changes
and where can it be called inheritance and can be set anywhere a data
from? transform can take place. pyDefault
What is the name of the data pyDefault

transform that calls the
superclass data transform?
Non-technical business users Citizen Developer

participating in app
development
Subject matter expert, gathers Business Architect

business requirements
What is Location in property reference: Page List

Company(Partner).Location(3).Address
The user that defines business Business Architect

rules, SLA's & processes
User who specializes in System Admin

security & integration with
expertise in infrastructure
PEGA
How would you reference the .Badge(3)
property that is the 3rd badge
from a value list.
User who automates System Architect

descisions, designs
architecture, configures UI
forms
User who owns product Product Owner

backlog & prioritization, &
creates acceptance criteria.
Act of having trained certified Co-Production

customers bridging the gap
between business and IT
You wish to give user context Dev Studio, "Add customer information."
on a step, Add customer
information. Where and how
do you enter it into PEGA?
Defines a condition controlling When logic

whether a process or stage
runs in a case
Where can a conditional On a flow connector

execution be placed?
1. Organizational Structure
2. Work Group
What are the 6 operator 3. Work Queue
records ? 4. Skill
5. Calendar
6. Scheduled Absence
PEGA
Abstract model of behaviors in Rule Type
cases
1. Versioning
3 Benefits of Rules 2. Delegation
3. Reuse
What is called by data pySetFieldDefaults

transform pyDefault?
1. What do users want to see?

What 3 things should you ask
2. How will the users enter information (interact
yourself when determining
with info)?
user properties?
3. Can users modify?
Statuses, instructions & User context

defining steps are examples of
what?
1. Procedural Processing
2 types of processing
2. Declarative Processing
PEGA automates a condition Declarative Processing

specified by developer, PEGA
looks for something to happen
and then does something
Conditional execution is what? When logic
A user directly calls an action Procedural Processing

using a button, what kind of
processing is this an example
of?
A Declarative expression is Target Property = Source Properties (and

made up of expression)
PEGA 1. When used, if a property is missing

3 types of backward chaining 2. When used, if no value is present
3. Whenever used
What do source properties Expression

make up in a declarative
expression?
Total = quantity * unit cost is an A Declarative Expression

example of?
2 types of declarative 1. Forward Chaining

processing 2. Backward Chaining
1. Property Type
2. Control Rule
What are the 5 Validation
3. Required
Types?
4. Validation
5. Edit Validate
Total cost is not calculated Backward Chaining

until it appears on the
clipboard page. This is an
example of...
This controlled calculation Backward Chaining

improves performance
What calculates after shifting Forward chaining

focus from a property to
another property?
A user has entered a check in A Validation rule

date to a hotel that is after
their check out date the
validation type that would not
allow this is...
PEGA
The bridge between a case Data Page
and data from another
location
This stores / caches Data Page

information...
Rules that capture and cache Data Pages

data are...
A user changes their check-in Declarative Processing

date for a hotel reservation
and the total cost recalculates,
this is an example of
Providing a list of values a user Control rule

can choose from is an
example of what validation
type?
Comparing a property against Validation rule

a condition is an example of
what validation type?
Data that users need to PEGA System of Record

edit/manage quickly would be
stored in what type of system
of record?
Looking for a pattern in a Edit Validate

single value is an example of
what validation?
Validating a field as a date Property Type (also a Control)

field is what kind of validation
type?
PEGA 1. None (No system of record)

The 3 systems of record are... 2. External System of Record
3. PEGA System of Record
App developers, account App Studio , Dev Studio

admins & security admins
should work out of which of
the 6 PEGA portals?
Rules that cache data to be data view / data page

put in a clipboard would be a...
A visual display of case & data Integration Designer

types used in cases and their
associated system(s) of record
May contain case and data Data model

types, can reference other
data types
Layer that end users work in Implementation Layer

and tend to be specialized
Layer with all common rules Shared Layer
A large volume of data that External system of record

needs called in an app would
be stored in what type of
system of record?
A Data type you wish to be Organizational Layer

available across all
applications, should be placed
in which layer?
PEGA
Data that is case specific No system of record
would be stored in what type
of system of record?
You must set up these 2 things 1. Populate save type

on a Savable Data Page 2. Populate class name
If data is stale the data won't Refresh Strategy

reload until the next
interaction. This principle is
from...
1. Requestor - user session, user specific

What are the 3 different
2. Thread - only available in specialized path, case
scopes for a data page from
specific
narrowest to broadest?
3. Node - all users in an application can access
Business architects, app App Studio

developers, UI developers,
and data engineers should
work in which of PEGA's 6
portals?
Routing to a work list

What happens on the SLA
instantiation of a step? sending of an email
status change
2/13/23, 3:49 PM pega final Flashcards | Quizlet
pega final Study
pega final
Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
service level agreement establishes a deadline for work competition
defines how long the assignment should take;

goal typically measured from when the step or case
begins
defines the amount of time the step or case may

deadline
take before it is late
defines when to take further action because the

step or case is past the deadline; the passed
passed deadline
deadline interval measures the time that has passed
since the deadline for a still-open assignment
defined as between 10 and 100 for each milestone;

urgency
higher the value, the higher the urgency
https://quizlet.com/344372812/pega-final-flash-cards/ 1/16
pega final task that must be completed before an open case

can continue through an executing flow; you can
assignment configure assignments in a flow by using Case
Designer or Process Modeler; either a user or
external system can act on an assignment
collection of rules or other objects; each class

defines capabilities such as properties, activities,
class and HTML forms that are available to other,
subordinate classes, or to instances of the class;
organized into a hierarchy
interval of time that is defined in a service-level

deadline agreement; required resolution time for an item,
such as a case or stage
programmatic component that defines and

implements an interface between an external
application acting as a client and a Pega 7 Platform
service
system acting as a server; external system sends a
request to a Pega 7 Platform application and
receives a response
expectation of performance for completion of a

task or case; establish two time intervals ""a goal
and a deadline"" that define when a task or case
service level should be completed, the goal and when the task
or case must be completed, the deadline; for a
case is defined as part of the case; for an
assignment is defined with a service level rule
Goal and deadline intervals do not repeat. You can

how does the passed deadline
configure the passed deadline interval to repeat a
interval differ from the goal
fixed number of times, or repeat indefinitely until
and deadline intervals?
users complete the assignment
pega final do you gain

what capabilities You can add behavior for late assignments, and
by configuring a service level determine when an assignment is ready for users to
agreement rule in Designer perform
Studio?
what are the three factors that Default urgency for the case type, the urgency
influence assignment urgency calculated from the service level rule, and manual
value? adjustments (if enabled)
which variable in the .pyUrgencyAssignAdjust

assignment urgency
basis?
A service level agreement rule 60

describes the following
behavior:
(graphic on SG)
The service level provides a

four-hour initial delay. If the
case urgency is set to 10 and
the case reaches the
assignment at 9 a.m. Monday,
what is the assignment
urgency at 12 p.m.
Wednesday?
the goal milestone in a service In which the case or step should be completed
time ______
the primary purpose of a Help ensure timely completion of assignments

service level is to _____
pega final
owner person who created the case
person on whose behalf the case is transacted;

customer person may or may not process the case, but may
want-- or need-- notification of any changes
person who tracks the progress of a case but does

interested
not process the case
business solution that automates work flows in your

organization; multiple, unrelated applications can
application
be hosted in the same system; you create an
application by running the New Application wizard
represents work in your application that follows a

life cycle, or path, to completion; each case type
has a hierarchical structure and can include
case type
attachments that provide relevant details about the
work that you are processing; instances of case
types are called cases
outgoing email, letter, fax, or text message that is

produced by the system and its users; typically
associated with one work item, or a cover or folder,
correspondence
and can include text and images; sent to the
originator of a work item is known as an
acknowledgement
notation for a run-time reference to the name or

value of a property that you can use in activities,
property reference
data transforms, HTML, and other places; also
called dot notation
pega final Who is the user that receives the correspondence?

what three questions should
you ask when creating a How will the correspondence be sent?
correspondence?
When does the correspondence need to be sent?
Automating correspondence allows you to send

which two statements identify timely communication
correspondence? Automating correspondence allows for sending
consistent information to users
In a new hire process, a hiring Enable assignment notifications for the case type
manager needs to be
pega final a standard

You are configuring Insert application's name, loan office, and loan
email to automatically be sent amount properties. Also, inset the paragraph rule
list of all open assignments, ordered by urgency,

worklist
for a specific user
list of all open assignments, ordered by urgency,

work queue
for a group of users
contain logic that determines the appropriate user

or work queue based on parameters that you
router
define; Pega provides many standard users to suit
your specific requirements
displays information or collects input from users as

they create, update, and resolve cases in your
form
application. Use Case Designer to define the visual
presentation of a form
pega final evaluates assignment criteria, such as required skill

sets and user availability, to determine whether an
assignment moves to a worklist or work queue for
router activity processing; router activities have the Usage field
set to Route on the Activity form, and return a result
by assigning a value to the AssignTo output
parameter
queue of open assignments; sometimes referred to

as a work queue; to view the workbaskets in your
workbasket application, open the Designer Studio > Process &
Rules > Work Management > Workbaskets landing
page
a user access assignments worklist

from a ____. Users in a work
group access assignments work queue
from a _____
An expense report process To the user

would you route the
receives it?
pega final
An insurance company Route requests to a work group that uses skill rating
provides personal property parameters for work group members
would you use?
A home loan company has Route the assignment to the correct work queue
home appraisal offices in based on a decision rule
ruleset in which rules can be modified and saved;

unlocked ruleset potential security risk, so it should consign solely to
delegated rules
ruleset containing rules that can be modified after

production ruleset
the application deploys
pega final Pegasystems' corporate slogan and application

development philosophy, that acknowledges the
Build for Change continuous evolution of business processes
through methodologies and tools that embrace
flexible procedures
used to dictate how properties appear on user

forms, correspondence and other HTML forms, for
control both display and accepting user input; Pega
provides many standard controls, which are
preferred over custom controls
Rule delegation empowers business users to

What is the purpose of rule
respond to continuously changing business
delegation?
conditions
What are the criteria for You determine which rules to delegate based upon
determining rules to delegate? business needs and ease of business user access
Why is organizing delegated You cannot edit rules in a locked ruleset

rules in an unlocked ruleset
necessary?
Why is a meaningful Business user delegates need to understand the

description for a delegated possible impact of their changes
rule important?
Adopting a rule delegation strategy can help

improve the business' ability to adapt to changing
business conditions
Select two benefits of
Adopting a rule delegation strategy enables
business users and architects to focus on their
specific tasks related to application development
and maintenance
pega final
What two items should a
An Access Group that has access to the production
ruleset
delegating a rule? (Choose
An unlocked ruleset added to the Application rule
Two)
as a production ruleset
result of running a strategy in the interaction

decision context; several decisions can be involved in a
single interaction
business process in your application by using

graphical shapes and connectors to define a
flow
sequence of events; you can edit a flow in Case
Designer or Process Modeler
A conditional path is a branch in the life cycle of a

case that is contingent upon run-time values. By
What is a conditional path in a
defining the business logic decisions that cause a
Pega process flow rule?
case to follow different paths, you can improve the
flexibility of your application.
What is the prime Parallel processes do not have a configurable

consideration for process order. The processes you select for parallel
order when configuring processes must be adaptable to any order.
parallel processes?
Paths in the case life cycle that are chosen by a

Conditional paths in a case life user at run-time
cycle are used to define _______.
(Choose Two) Paths in the case life cycle that are followed based
on run-time values
A parallel process is defined as A process that executes over the same time period
_______. as other processes
pega final
Automating decisions based Application users to focus on more nuanced
on business logic enables decisions that require business expertise
__________-.
retrieve records from a database; use to specify the

data from each record that you want to include in
Report definition
the report; retrieves the data from a database and
returns the results in a table of columns or rows
define the report's contents; each column

Report columns
corresponds to a single data element
use to make reports more useful; allow you to

functions
calculate results derived from data in the database
compares a data value in the record against a

report filter defined condition; if the comparison result is true,
the report includes the record
let you select time periods or dates without having

symbolic dates
to build functions
business metrics represent the data you define for an application
include how it takes to complete an assignment,

how often a path is followed in a flow, or the
process metrics
number of SLA violations; defined and tracked by
Pega
tool that provides access to all of the reports that

are available to you; you can complete many tasks,
such as browsing and searching for existing
Report Browser
reports, running and scheduling reports, creating
and modifying reports, and sharing reports with
colleagues; available in the Case Manager portal
pega final process of using an SQL query to retrieve and sort

information from the PEgaRULES database, an
external database, or the Elasticsearch index;
reporting
generates HTML that displays the query results in a
variety of formats; report definition rule generates
the SQL query
A sales manager runs weekly Business metrics, because how long it takes to
reports on how long it takes to prepare a car for customer delivery is not a metric
prepare a car for customer based on a Pega Platform parameter
delivery. Which type of report
metrics apply to this report?
A manager has requested a Use the cost center column to group results
report definition?
A manager requests a report For the Case ID property, select Highest to Lowest
that contains the following sort type
pega final has a

Your organization Create two conditions: Work Status does not equal
standard loan request report New, AND Creation Date is equal to Previous
that contains columns for loan Quarter
requirement?
report columns define the report's contents
use in columns to make reports more useful, allow

functions you to calculate results derived from data in the
database
compares a data value in the record against a

report filter
defined condition
business metrics represent the data you define for an application
tracked by Pega; case ID, elapsed time on an

process metrics
assignment, or the current status of a case
use to search for, organize, schedule, and run

report brower
reports
X; things such as raw material, equipment, work

inputs
instructions, time, computer, software, etc.
outputs Y; final results, the products or service provided
x; represents the sources of variation in a specific

process parameters
step in a process
pega final
product parameter
y; failure of the process or service of the specific
step
specific methodology to evaluate a system, design,

process, or service for possible ways in which
FMEA failure can occur; of each cause identified, an
estimate is made of its occurrence, severity, and
detection
select the process function that represents the

most likelihood of liability and significant failures;
process function can be identified by the process map; not all
process steps will need to be analyzed on the
FMEA
identify the product parameters from the process

map; you can determine the results of a specific
Product parameters
process function; there can be more than one
failure from one function
what happens or what are the ramifications of this

Effects of failure problem or failure?; usually evaluated from the
customers' perspective
rating (1-10) indicating the seriousness of the effect

Severity of the potential process failure mode; always
applies to the effect of the failure mode
should be listed as a process parameter; think of

Causes of failure
what caused the failure
rating value; derived from the estimated number of

failures that could occur due to a specific cause
Occurrence
over a given quantity of parts; scale of 1-10, 10
being most frequent
pega final
Controls
could be to prevent the occurrence or a detection
method to signal the occurrence
rating corresponding to the likelihood that the

current process controls will detect a specific root
detection cause of the failure mode before the part leaves
the manufacturing area; assumption is that a failure
has occurred
the product of the severity, occurrence, and

detection numbers; used to define the priority of
RPN
the failure; used only to rank the potential process
deficiencies
may be specific actions or it might be further

Recommended action studying; idea is to reduce the occurrence and/or
detection of the failure mode
can be estimated before or after the pilot; re-

Revised RPN evaluate the consequences of severity, occurrence,
and detection
assign a rating from 1 to 5 for each action that will

show the "risk" associated with each action; small
Risk of each action
number means you will probably have a high
chance of success at implementing the action
measured as the percentage of the total cycle time

Cycle time efficiency
spent on value adding activities
cycle time if we only counted value-adding

Theoretical cycle time activities and excluded any waiting time or
handover time
Cycle time difference between a job's start and end time
pega final
Cycle time analysis
the task of calculating the average cycle time for an
entire process or process fragment
2/13/23, 4:01 PM CSA Pega 8 Flashcards | Quizlet
CSA Pega 8 Study
CSA Pega 8
5.0 (5 reviews)

7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
Direct Capture of Objectives The ability to directly & visually capture business
(DCO) requirements
Allows business & IT stakeholders to remain in sync

What does DCO do?
throughout the app development life cycle
By eliminating manual decisions, enabling dynamic

How does Pega allow for routing, orchestrating data exchange, and applying
automation of processes? deadlines throughout a case life cycle to reduce
time to resolution
What do Pega's guardrails and Ensure the maintainability, scalability, and quality of
best practices do? your application
The ability to reuse application functions

Situational Layer Cake
throughout different areas of your app
https://quizlet.com/354759286/csa-pega-8-flash-cards/ 1/15
CSA Pega 8
Rule Defines the behavior of a part of an app
In the PegaRULES database, with the rule names

Where are rules saved?
acting as unique keys for storage and access
Identifies, stores, and manages the set of rules that

Ruleset define the behavior of an app or a major portion of
an app
Rule instances, which are divided into ruleset

What do rulesets contain?
versions to support version management
Focuses on app development (case design, data &

App Studio
integrations, channels & interfaces, UI authoring)
What are the targeted roles of Business analysts, app developers, front end
App Studio? (UI/UX) developers, and data engineers
Focuses on advanced functionality (system

settings, complex rules - rule form access, security,
Dev Studio component reuse (across studios), collaborative,
branched development, versioning and source
control)
What are the targeted roles of Experienced app developers, account admins, and
Dev Studio? security admins
Focuses on system operations (requestors, jobs

Admin Studio (agents), queue processes, agents and queues,
listeners, logs, APIs)
What are the targeted roles of System administrators

Admin Studio?
CSA Pega 8 Focuses on defining AI models and assets

Prediction Studio (predictive analytics, adaptive analytics, text
analytics, transparency policies, data exploration)
What are the targeted roles of Data scientists and decision architects
Prediction Studio?
Works with Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) and

Business Architect (BA)
stakeholders to understand business needs
Translates business needs into requirements by

What does a BA do? creating user stories, defines business rules, Service
Level Agreements (SLAs), and processes
System Architect (SA) Designs and configures the application
Contributes object-oriented design and technical

What does an SA do?
implementation skills
Promotes and supports Scrum and ensures all team

Scrum Master
members understand Scrum theory and practices
What does a Scrum Master Facilitates Scrum events as needed

do?
Owns the product backlog and prioritization of

Product Owner (PO)
backlog items, creates acceptance criteria
Manages the project as part of governance,

Engagement Leader / Project
provides overall project plan and delivery guidance
Manager
(outside project team)
Deployment Architect Sets up environments (specialty role)
Designs and develops UX designs & wireframes

UX Architect
(specialty role)
CSA
QualityPega 8 (QA)
Assurance Write and execute test scripts and document &
engineers track test results
Case Work that delivers a meaningful business outcome
Case type An abstract model of a business transaction
A modeling technique that allows business users to

Case life cycle design interact with an application the same way they
would think about it
Represent the transfer of a case from one authority

Stages to another or a significant change in the status of
the case (2-word noun phrase)
High-level phases in the life cycle of a case (Stages

Primary stages
that lead to the expected outcome, happy path)
Represent exceptions to the normal path of events

Alternate stages
and can be sequenced into primary stages
(Within a stage) Contains a series of tasks (steps)

Process that a user completes as they work on a case
(verb + noun)
(Within a process) Either a user action or automated

Step action performed by the application (should be
limited to 5 +- 2) (verb + noun)
Can be set on each step in the case life cycle

Case status (Pega standard values include Open, Pending-
Approval, and Resolved-Completed)
Service Level Agreement (SLA) Establishes a deadline for work completion
Start (SLA interval) Step begins
CSAGoal
Pega 8
(SLA interval)
(Occurs once) Defines how long the assignment
should take
(Occurs once) Defines the amount of time the step

Deadline (SLA interval)
or case may take before it is late
(Can repeat) Defines when to take further action

Passed Deadline (SLA interval) because the step, assignment, or case is past the
deadline
Can be launched by users to update information in

Optional process
multiple steps
Update information in a single user screen (case-

Optional user actions
wide or stage-only)
Allows a case to advance through multiple (non-

Parallel processing sequential) paths at the same time within a stage
(created in Dev Studio)
A process that executes over the same time period

Parallel process
as other processes
Used to model automated decisions defined by a

set of one or more conditions or business logic
Decision shapes
(built on a when condition, configured to advance
automatically)
What does automating Enables application users to focus more on

decisions based on business nuanced decisions that require business expertise
logic do?
What are conditional paths in a Paths in the case life cycle that are chosen by a
case life cycle used to define? user at runtime or are based on runtime values
CSA Pega
How does 8 routing
assignment By assigning work to the most appropriate parties
improve efficiency?
Work queue (assignment A list of all open assignments in order of

routing type) importance, for a GROUP OF USERS
Worklist (assignment routing A list of all open assignments in order of

type) importance, for a SPECIFIC USER
Current user, specific user (ToWorklist), work queue

Routing options
(ToWorkbasket)
Organizational structure, work group, work queue,

Operator records
skill, calendar, scheduled absence
Decision points at which one or more users decide

Case approvals
whether to approve/reject a case
Assigned to the worklist of a specific user or a work

Single approver
queue
Cascading approval - Require approval of an employee's direct manager

reporting structure and higher
Cascading approval - authority Supports routing to other entities outside of the

matrix reporting structure (more flexible)
Used to configure approvals, calls the process that

Approval/Reject shape
you configure to manage the case approvals
By user roles (ToWorkGroupManager), by user skills

Routing methods (ToSkillGroup), by decision routing
(ToDecisionTable)
When SAs create a new version of a rule whenever

Versioning
case behavior needs to change
CSA Pega 8 When SAs delegate rules to business users to

Delegation update case behavior as business conditions
change
SAs reuse rules whenever an app needs to

Reuse
incorporate existing case behavior
An instance of a ruleset, created to update the

Ruleset version
contents of a ruleset
How are rulesets identified? By its name and version number
Major-minor-patch where major version represents

a substantial release of an app, minor version
How is a version number
represents interim release/enhancements, and
divided?
patch version consists of fixes to address bugs in
applications
Ruleset stack A sequence of rulesets
Determines the order in which Pega looks through

What does a ruleset stack do?
rulesets to find the rule being used
What does each entry in the All the versions of the specified ruleset from listed
ruleset stack represent? version to lowest minor & patch versions
The process by which an app calls the correct rule

Rule resolution
during case processing
Class A grouping of rules

Work Class case or cases (ex. processes, data elements, and
UIs)
CSA Pega 8 Contains the rules that describe how the app
Integration Class interacts with other systems (ex. customer database
or a third-party web server)
Contains the rules that describe the data objects

Data Class used in the application (ex. customer or a
collection of order items)
Parent class A class that contains another class
A class that is contained by another class, can

Child class reuse, or inherit, any rules defined for its parent
class
Each case type in your application (each of which

Work class child classes
contains all of the rules unique to a case type)
Data class child classes Each data object
The classes that comprise an application,

Class hierarchy determines how SAs can reuse rules within the app
(Case Type > Div/Org > Other Apps > PEGA)
To organize rules within an application; the position

What is the purpose of a class
of the class within the class hierarchy determines
in a Pega application?
the reusability of the rules in that class
Determines the type of behavior modeled by the

Rule type (rule creation)
rule
Identifier (rule creation) Identifies the purpose of the rule (from Label entry)
Class (rule creation) Identifies the scope of the rule (Apply to field)
Ruleset (rule creation) Container for the rule
CSA Pega 8
Check out
Creates a copy of a rule in a ruleset that is only
visible to you called a personal ruleset
What does check-out allow Allows for an SA to update a rule while preventing
for? updates by other SAs
Private edit Provides a nonexclusive check out of a rule
What does a private edit allow Allows other SAs to edit a rule at the same time
for?
An optional method where a class inherits

characteristics from other classes and affects the
Pattern inheritance first steps in the rule resolution algorithm,
describes the business relationship between
classes
The method by which a class inherits characteristics

directly from a specified parent class, regardless of
any defined pattern inheritance, describes the
functional relationship between classes
Pattern inheritance allows you to reuse rules within

a single application.
How does directed inheritance
Directed inheritance allows you to reuse rules in
differ from pattern
other applications, including standard rules
inheritance?
provided as part of the Pega Platform (i.e. from the
Work- or Data- class).

Top-level case
cover, or become the parent of, other cases
A case that is covered by a parent case, represents

Child case work that must be completed to resolve the parent
case
Wait step Enforces a dependency between cases types
CSA Pega 8
What happens when a parent
The parent case pauses until (1) all of the child
cases are resolved or (2) a predetermined time
case reaches the wait step?
expires
An app references a data By applying directed inheritance

element found in the Work
Class. How is this rule inherited
by the application?
You check out a rule to update The app ignores the checked out version and uses
it. While the rule is checked the previous version in the app ruleset
out, another developer
decides to test a case type by
creating and processing the
case. What happens when the
app attempts to use the rule
you checked out?
Owner (case communications) Person who created the case
Person on whose behalf the case is transacted,

Customer (case
doesn't process the case but needs to be notified
communications)
of changes
Interested (case Person who tracks case progress but does not
communications) process the case
Pega correspondence types Email, Text Message, Fax, Regular Mail
Used to define, in HTML, templates for the content

Correspondence rules
of outgoing correspondence
Text for one type of correspondence such as email,

What does each
letter, SMS phone text, or fax (each of which
correspondence rule contain?
corresponds to a different Data subclass)
CSA Pega 8
Where can email
Email correspondence can be configured in either
App Studio or Dev Studio. Other types of
correspondence be
correspondence must be configured in Dev Studio
configured? Other
via a correspondence rule and sent using a
correspondence types?
correspondence activity
Source (correspondence View/update the source as HTML codes

content)
Insert property Include properties in your app. such as pyID,

(correspondence content) LastName, and Department
Include content in other rules such as paragraphs,

Insert rule (correspondence
sections, and correspondence fragments. You can
content)
also include other correspondence rules.
Paragraphs (correspondence Present formatted text that can include colors,

content) fonts, styles, and images
Sections (correspondence Allow you to reproduce all or part of a form in the

content) correspondence
Correspondence fragments Useful for reusing boilerplate content (links,

(correspondence content) disclosure)
(1) Automating correspondence allows you to send

Which two statements identify
timely communication
(2) Automating correspondence allows for sending
correspondence?
The data elements or collection of related data

Data model
elements in a case type
Properties/fields What data elements are called in Pega
CSA Pega
Value mode 8
(property mode A single piece of info, such as a total
type)
Single value (value mode Stores text, numbers, dates, booleans, amounts
property)
Value list (value mode Container for an ORDERED list of single values
property)
Value group (value mode Container for an UNORDERED list of single values
property)
Page mode (property mode A data object, such as a customer

type)
Page/field group (page mode Single entity (ex. Customer)

property)
Page list/field group list (page Numerically ordered list (ex. line items that make up
mode property) a purchase request)
Page group An unordered list (ex. address property)
Data model tab (in Case Can be used to add or remove properties (called
Designer) fields in DM tab) from your case type
px (Pega standard property Your app can Read only

rule)
py (Pega standard property Your app can Read and write

rule)
Supports internal system processing - the meaning

pz (Pega standard property
of values may change with new product releases.
rule)
Your app can Read only
CSA Pega
How would you 8
refer to a .OrderDate
single value property named
OrderDate?
How would you refer to an .Phone(Mobile)

entry in a value group
property, such as the mobile
phone number?
How would you refer to the .DiscountCode(1)

first entry in a value list
property, such as one of the
discount codes?
How would you refer to a .Customer

page that contains customer
information?
How would you refer to an .Address(Work)

entry in a page group
property, such as the work
address?
How would you refer to the .LineItems(3)

third page of a page list that
contains purchase request line
items?
How would you refer to a .Address(Work).City

specific property on the page,
such as the city in the work
address?
User view Pega's term for a user form
CSA Pega 8
modify or only read the values
In App Studio, when is the You can configure the user view for a step after you
earliest opportunity to add that step to the case life cycle
configure a user view for a
step in a case life cycle?
How do you configure a user Case Types > (select case type) > (select step) >
view using App Studio? Contextual Properties panel > Configure view
A pairing of two pieces of information: the name of

Data element
the data element and the value assigned to it
Page A structure for organizing data elements in an app
The portion of memory on the server reserved by

Clipboard
Pega for the data generated by applications
What does a clipboard consist All the pages used to track the name-value pairs
of? that represent case and session data
How is information, such as the Information such as the customer's date of birth is
customer's date of birth, associated with a data element. The data element
stored in memory for use in a (property and value) is stored on the clipboard in a
Pega application? structure called a page.
Stores all the data generated while creating and

pyWorkPage
processing a case (specific page on the clipboard)
What kind of data does an Data that describes a data type (ex. if a case uses a
embedded page within Customer data type, Customer is an embedded
pyWorkPage store? page within pyWorkPage)
CSA Pega 8 Contains the case data for the parent case, enables
pyWorkCover you to copy data between parent case and child
case
If you omit the class information, Pega cannot

Why is it important to include
obtain property values from the correct page. Pega
class information when you
does not know if the properties are valid and the
reference data on
rule that references the properties does not
pyWorkPage?
function correctly.
Organizes and presents all the pages on the

Clipboard tool
clipboard
Corresponds to a unique action currently managed

Thread by Pega (ex. Dev Studio, open rule forms, open
cases)
Header (part of clipboard Used to select which thread to view

tool)
Left Pane (part of clipboard Lists each page defined on the clipboard for the
tool) selected thread
Right Pane (part of clipboard Lists all of the properties defined on the selected
tool) page, and their values
2/13/23, 4:06 PM Pega Certified Senior System Architect Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Certified Senior System Architect Study
Pega Certified Senior System Architect

Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
Where do you set the Visible On the layout

When condition to display a
layout based on the click of a
button?
https://quizlet.com/514927359/pega-certified-senior-system-architect-flash-cards/ 1/39
Pega Certified
In an application sellingSenior
office System
ReuseArchitect
the Payment section in the OrderSummary
supplies, the Payment form form and circumstance the section rule to hide
displays order items and payment information.
collects payment information.
In the Payment section rule,
the order items are grouped in
a dynamic layout. You find out
later that the OrderSummary
form also needs to display the
order items.How do you
implement the UI so that the
order items display is shared
between Payment and
OrderSummary forms?
An application includes the Do nothing. Rule resolution does not consider rules
following set of circumstanced in a lower minor version of a ruleset.
instances of a decision table.
You update the application

and increment the
AccountManage ruleset
version to 01- 02-01. As part of
this update, the circumstance
.Status="Silver" is no longer
needed by the application.
How do you implement this
change?
You are configuring duplicate Add a weighted condition where the work status of
case search logic in a case potential duplicates does not contain "Resolved".
type. How do you ensure that
resolved cases are not
evaluated as potential
duplicates?
Pega Certified
You need to update theSenior System Architect
The Tracer
navigation menu in a portal.
Which tool do you use to
identify the rule that contains
the menu?
An application establishes a goal of four hours to

Which requirement can be
adjust claims for platinum customers. For other
implemented through
customers, the application establishes a goal of
circumstancing?
one business day.
A given user interaction takes Performance Analyzer (PAL)

five seconds. You need to
investigate why it is taking so
long. Which tool do you use to
start the investigation?
You are working on an update Use the Ruleset Maintenance wizard to merge the
to an application which only existing rules in the relevant rulesets to the new
affects some rules for a certain version.
case type. The customer has
requested that a patch update
be released. How do you
create the new ruleset
version?
Pega
You haveCertified
been asked toSenior
create System Architect
Select the report definition option that displays
a report definition that your report in the Report Browser.
includes information about the Create a report category rule for sales office
sales offices and sales reports.
representatives. The manager
wants to access the report in
the Report Browser in the user
portal.
The manager also wants to
include the report in a new
report category specifically
for the sales group. What two
configurations are required to
support this request?(Choose
Two)
Pega
A health Certified Senior System
plan application Add aArchitect
cascading approvals shape that is called by
includes a process for surgical the evaluation subprocess.
procedure requests. Currently,
there is an evaluation
subprocess in which a
physician reviews the diagnosis
and enters the recommended
procedure and its urgency. The
request then advances to a
medical director who analyzes
the feedback and approves
the appropriate procedure.
The health care organization
has created a new
requirement, which states that
three physicians can perform
the evaluation independently.
Only two evaluations are
necessary to advance the case
to the medical director. In
order to allow the three
physicians to review the orders
in parallel, how would you
configure the process?
Which two statements identify Automating correspondence allows for sending

why you should automate consistent information to users.
correspondence?(Choose Automating correspondence allows you to send
Two) timely communication.
Which statement best The base rule is used if no circumstanced variant

describes the role of the base applies.

Pega
ConsiderCertified
the following Senior System Architect
PegaHRFramework-
inheritance diagram: When
running a flow for the TimeOff
worktype, rules applied to
which of the following classes
cannot be executed?
(Choose One)
In an mortgage application, Make loan request a parent case type, and

the user creates a loan appraisal a child case type.
relationship?
You are asked to create a Create a Field Value record named Open-Review
custom status named Open- for .pyStatusWork with the Apply To class set to the
Review. This status is to be class group.
applied to assignments in one
application. How do you
satisfy the request?
Facilitate collaboration between business and IT

Select the three benefits of
around working models.
using Direct Capture of
Enter and store business requirements in the
Objectives (DCO).(Choose
application.
Three)
Automate custom business process.
You want to restrict access to Add the access role for allowed users to the
a workbasket to certain users. workbasket record.
How do you configure this
requirement?
Which situation requires the A list of child cases categorized by the case ID of
use of a class join? the parent case
Pega Certified
pyWorkPage Senior
stores which type System Architect
Information about a case.
of information?
You use the Clipboard tool to Review the current values of case data.
perform which two tasks? Test case behavior by setting property values for
(Choose Two) an open case.
Your application requires a Select the reporting structure configuration with

cascading approval for custom levels, then configure when rules to
expense reports. Approvals determine the number of levels.
must follow the submitter's
reporting structure, with the
expense reports up to
USD500. A director must
approve expense reports up
to USD1500. A vice president
must approve expense reports
of USD1500 or greater. How
do you configure the approval
process?
report definition?
Pega
You haveCertified Senior System
a connector that Data Architect
page
fetches a list of currency
exchange rates from an
external system. Where do you
invoke the connector from?
In the event-action model of An event can be configured to perform multiple

dynamic UI, which of the actions.
regarding event processing?
Which configuration allows Update the access control setting for adding
you to control which user roles attachments in the Access Manager.
can add attachments to a
case?
Select the two items of The class of the rule.

information used to uniquely The type of the rule.
identify a rule.(Choose Two)
Direct Capture of Objectives Accuracy

(DCO) aims to increase which Speed
two aspects of application
delivery?(Choose Two)
Pega Certified
A client wants Senior
to replace the System Architect
Upload each logo to the portal record.
Pega logo in the Case
Manager and Case Worker
portals. Instead of using the
company logo, the client
wants you to use the logos for
each of the company's
operating subsidiaries - a user
in the ABC subsidiary sees the
logo for ABC, and a user in the
XY2 subsidiary sees the XYZ
logo.
How do you add the logos to
the application?
Obj-Browse allows you to return a page list of data

on the clipboard.
Which three statements are
Obj-Open loads an instance of a class from a
true about Obj- methods?
database onto the clipboard.
(Choose three.)
Obj-Refresh-and-Lock can acquire the lock and
refresh a page if stale.
A client wants to replace the Circumstance the portal harness on the user's
Pega logo in the Case division.
Manager and Case Worker
portals. Instead of using the
company logo, the client
wants you to use the logos for
each of the company's
operating subsidiaries - a user
in the ABC subsidiary sees the
logo for ABC, and a user in the
XYZ subsidiary sees the XYZ
logo.
How do you ensure that each
user sees the appropriate logo
in their portal?
Pega
In which Certified Senior System
situation do you WhenArchitect
you need the data to be stored as part of the
select the Copy data from a case
data page option rather than
Refer to a data pageoption to
populate a page?
An application contains a rule Set the availability of the rule in TGB-HRApps-

with an Apply to: class of TGB- Work-Expenses to "Withdrawn."
HRApps- Work- Expenses.
When updating the
change the Apply to: class of
the rule to TGB. How do you
prevent the application from
using the rule in TGBHRApps-
Work-Expenses!
A company requires that Data-Party-Person

the application. You create the
work party for the patient as
an instance of which class?
Which of the following is least The order of the columns in the report
likely to impact the runtime
experience of a report?
(Choose One)
Your application. Thus, a connector is when your

The terms "connector" and
application requests data from an external system,
"service" are from the
and a service is when external systems request data
perspective of __________.
from your application.
Pega Certified
Users can Senior
select a check box System
Use aArchitect
when condition in the UI form to determine
to subscribe to a messaging whether to show the mobile phone number field.
number. How do you
configure the application to
display a field for entering a
mobile phone number only
selected?
Consider the following user Use a ToLeveledGroup router and Pega's Get Next
story: Work functionality.
As a loan officer, I want to be
able to automatically accept
the next available application
for review so I can complete
the next highest priority case.
user story?
Users can access an apartment Use a dynamic layout with a responsive breakpoint
hunting application from at 800 pixels to change from inline-grid triple to
different devices with different inline-grid double format.
screen sizes. A screen displays
the photos of available
properties.
By default, the photos are
displayed in three columns.
When the screen width is less
than 800 pixels, the photos
should be displayed in two
columns.
How do you implement the
screen for this requirement?
Pega
Which ofCertified
the following Senior System Architect
Provide problem-solving guidance for customer
requirements can be service representatives so every customer is
implemented using Next Best treated consistently.
Action?
A dynamic layout uses an Undetermined — it depends on the sizes of the

Inline format to organize UI elements.
elements on the screen. The
Inline format is configured with
two responsive breakpoints:
the first one is to change to an
Inline grid triple format at 1024
pixels, and the second one is
to change to an Inline grid
double format at 768 pixels.
The UI elements are arranged
into various numbers of rows
depending on the screen size
and number of elements on
the screen.
When the screen size is at 800
pixels and there are five
elements on the screen, how
many elements should be in
the last row?
During the development of Before you run the Application Packaging wizard,
your application, you created save the operators to an organization ruleset.
operators for testing purposes. Select the Exclude non-versioned rules check box
You are preparing to migrate in the Product rule.
the application to another In the Operators step in the Application Packaging
environment. You do not want Wizard, clear the check boxes next to the operator
to include the operators in the names. In the Product rule, clear the Include
archive file. associated data items check box.
Which two options exclude the
operators?(Choose Two)
Pega Certified
In an application Senior System
for applying Architect
Configure the submit button in the section rule to
to jobs, a submit button is in use the new format.
the section rule for uploading
resume. You defined a new
button style format with a gray
background color and crimson
font color. What do you need
to do to apply this new style
format to the submit button?
You want to unit test a rule. To Run a data transform to create the test page.
ensure that the rule executes Configure a validate rule to populate the needed
as intended, you need to data.
populate the clipboard with
valid data. Which two options
allow you to populate the
clipboard before testing the
rule?(Choose Two)
Consider the following partial Get from workbaskets first

requirement for configuring Merge workbaskets
the Get Next Work
functionality in Pega: All
workbaskets with which a user
is associated must be checked
first. Then, all eligible
assignments from all
workbaskets must be
consolidated into a single list
before being filtered and
sorted.
Which two options must you
select in the Operator ID
record to implement this part
of the requirement?(Choose
Two)
Pega Certified
You are building a formSenior
that System Architect
Create a field group list property and make the
contains a list of courses. property a data reference.
Users will select the courses in Edit the field group list property and set data
which they want to enroll. access to copy data from a data page.
Which two tasks can you
perform in Pega Express?
(Choose Two)
In which types of UI controls Dropdown

are reference data from the
local data source typically
used?
Which requirement could be Allow a user to transfer a case to another

satisfied with a user action? employee at any stage of the case.
As part of an employee Data-Party-Operator

resignation case, the HR
business partner assigned to
the employee's department
must perform an exit interview.
You create a work party called
HR Partner to model the HR
business partner. HR Partner
should be an instance of the
____________________ class or one of
its descendants.
Pega Certified
You are configuring Senior System
a drop- Architect
Select the Manual option so the user can add
down list with a page list selected data to the page-type property through
property. When the user the UI.
selects an item in the list, you
want to retrieve data
associated with the selected
item and add the data to the
case.
data access for the page list
property?
If the complainant type is "Provider," then provider

Which statement demonstrates
information must be populated during the Triage
a well-written specification?
Stage in the Basic Research Step.
You are updating a system of Customize the standard pxErrorHandlingTemplate

record using a SOAP data transform.
connector. If the system of
record is unavailable, you want
to retry after an hour. If it is still
unavailable after an hour, a
notification should be sent to a
system administrator.
requirement?
Business metrics are used to define the data types for an application
__________________.
An application recommends Predictive model

mobile phone plans to
customers. Which type of rule
predicts the customer
response to an offer based on
existing data?
Pega
In a hotelCertified
reservation Senior System Architect
Configure action sets on the date fields to refresh
application, a form displays a the section when the date values change.
list of hotels with available
rooms based on the check-in
and check-out dates entered
by users. How do you
configure the form to refresh
the hotel list whenever the
check-in or check-out date
changes?
You have been asked to add Use a single validate rule to verify both of these
to a form a check box control conditions.
named "Auto Insurance
Discount." Selecting the check
box indicates that the user
qualifies for the discount.
However, in order to qualify,
two conditions must be met.
First, the user must be older
than 25. Second, the user has
not received a traffic violation
in three years or more. If both
conditions are not met and the
check box is selected, an error
appears when the form is
submitted.
Which one of the following
approaches would you use in
order to support this
requirement?
Pega Certified
To ensure a case is not Senior
a System
Add aArchitect
must-match condition to list only cases that
duplicate, the application match the customer name.
should present users with a list Add a weighted condition to compare the
of open cases matching either customer name to existing cases.
the customer name or the type Add a weighted condition to compare the type of
of inquiry. Which three inquiry to existing cases.
configuration options satisfy
this requirement?
(Choose Three)
You need to determine if all data transform

paths of a flow will execute data page
correctly. Select two rules
used to simulate service calls.
(Choose Two)
What three questions should When does the correspondence need to be sent?
you ask when creating a How will the correspondence be sent?
correspondence?(Choose Who is the user that receives the correspondence?
Three)
Consider the following Add a case-wide optional action to the case life
requirement: The patient must cycle.
be able to modify physician
details at any time without
impacting primary case
processing.
Which configuration satisfies
this requirement?
Pega Certified
An organization uses a Senior System
Use aArchitect
skill-based router to route assignments to
common process to address users in the appropriate division.
account inquiries from
customers. Each division
maintains its own workbaskets
for processing account
inquiries.
Select the configuration that
standardizes the process while
ensuring that users in each
division only see assignments
appropriate to their division.
In which of the following Copy data between pages

situations would you use a Set default values when creating a case
data transform?(Choose Two)
In Pega Decision Enrichment

Management, you need to
calculate the margin for
propositions. What category of
flow components do you use?
Which two of the following are Users change the arrival date on a hotel reservation
considered property-based to one week later.
events in Pega's dynamic UI Total value of a customer order reaches $500.
model?(Choose Two)
A requirement states: The tax Set the minimum and maximum values to "10" in a
identification number must text field.
contain 10 digits. How do you
this requirement?
How do you propagate data Configure the Create Case shape to copy specified
to a new child case in Pega properties.
Express?
Pega
In a helpCertified
desk ticket Senior System
Step Architect
update the _____________?
Which two configurations can Add the access group to the Product record in the
you use to include access Individual instances to include section.
groups into your Product rule? Associate the access groups with a ruleset
(Choose Two) included in the application.
You have designed a decision Check the decision tree for conflicts.
tree that you want to unit test.
You want to verify that every
row can be evaluated
regardless of the input values.
How would you test your
decision tree?
A requirement states that if the Add an Approve/Reject step. Set the approval flow
request is less than EUR1000, type to Cascading and use an authority matrix.
the request is routed to a Cost
Center Manager. If the amount
is greater than EUR1000, the
request is also routed to a
Director. In addition, if the
request is for customer billable
expenses, the request must be
approved by an Accounts
Payable manager.
process to satisfy this
requirement?
Pega
In a new Certified
hire process, aSenior
hiring System
Add aArchitect
notification to the assignment.
manager needs to be
automatically notified, by
An online shopping Payment class

application has a work class
named PurchaseOrder. The
Work class has an embedded
page for customer information,
and this embedded page is of
a data class named Customer.
The Customer class contains
an embedded page for
payment information, and this
embedded page is part of a
data class named Payment.
You need a reusable section
for displaying payment
information on an order.
Where should you define this
section?
A Purchase Order case is Enable Optimistic Locking on the Purchase Request

instantiated as a child of a case type
Purchase Request case. Select
the locking option that allows
multiple users to edit the
Purchase Order case at the
same time.
Pega Certified Senior System

What three questions can you
How Architect
will users enter values in those fields?
What fields do users need to see?
ask to help you plan user
Can users modify the values or only read the
views?(Choose Three)
values?
What effect does the Use all This option limits the workbasket search to only
workbasket assignments in those workbaskets defined in the user's work
user's work group option have group.
on how workbaskets are
searched when using the Get
Next Work functionality?
When a user selects a product When the product is changed

in a list, the application
displays data about that
product. Data is copied to a
page property using the Copy
data from a data page option.
After the data has been
copied to the property, when
is the data copied to the
property again?
A customer wants to copy the Data transform

contents of a previous order to
their current order. What rule
type do you use to copy the
order contents?
An agent runs every 300 Change the Recurring pattern to Periodic and
seconds. You have been asked enter the Interval value.
to update the agent so that it
runs every Friday at 12:00 A.M.
How do you modify the agent
schedule to meet this
requirement?
Pega Certified
In an open Senior
account case, the System Architect
Configure .PrimaryAddress as a reference property
customer contact details are
captured. The customer can
provide several addresses,
which are stored in the page
group .Addresses. One of the
addresses is the primary
address used for
correspondence with the
customer. To easily identify the
primary address, you add a
.PrimaryAddress page
property in the case type.
How do you link
.PrimaryAddress to the
relevant entry in .Addresses
without duplicating data on
the clipboard?
Identify the order of events in a process.

A connector is used to
Identify an outcome of a decision.
___________.(Choose Three)
Indicate possible branches of a process.
You have a data page with The data page reloads on the next access one hour
customer data. The data page after it was created
is configured to reload if it is
older than one hour. Which of
the following best describes
when the data page will be
reloaded?
You want operators in two On each operator's record, associate the operator
separate units to be able to with both units.
perform work routed to either
unit. Which configuration
supports this requirement?

What two artifacts must you
Architect
An unlocked ruleset that is added to the
Production ruleset list of the Application rule
prepare before delegating a
An Access Group that has access to the ruleset
rule?(Choose Two)
used to organize delegated rules
In an activity ProcessOrder, OrderInfo

the fourth step invokes
another activity
CheckInventory. The step page
for step 4 is specified to use a
page named OrderInfo that is
listed the Page & Classes tab.
When the CheckInventory is
executed by step 4 of the
ProcessOrder, what is the
primary page for
ProcessOrder execution?
A class group is used store data from different child classes in a single
to______________. table
An application displays a list of Create the property in the class group. Create field
product categories. Some value rules for the list values in the appropriate
product categories are class.
common to all case types. The
remaining product categories
vary by case type. How do you
configure the list values?
The primary purpose of a updated in a production environment

production ruleset is to allow
rules to be _____________________.
Pega Certified
You are configuring Senior System
a standard InsertArchitect
applicant's name, loan office, and loan
email to automatically be sent amount properties. Also, insert the paragraph rule
organization.
How would you configure
your email?
Use __________ to use conditional a data transform

logic to determine which data
should be propagated.
You have a requirement to Associate the users to a common work group. Then
associate users in different associate the work group to the appropriate units.
units to the same workbasket.
requirement?
Which type of record identifies Access group

the application that a user
opens when logging in to
Designer Studio?

Select two benefits of using
Architect
Global Resource Settings allow you to manage
settings in one place.
Global Resource Settings.
(Choose Two)
settings without needing to unlock rulesets.
that contains the following sort type.
order.
How would you design the
report definition to support
this requirement?
In which of the following The Enterprise Int RuleSet (MyColnt)

RuleSets is it most appropriate
to define connector rules
integrating with an Enterprise
Service Bus?(Choose One)
Several development teams Set up a branch ruleset for each team.

work on different Create a new ruleset version for each team.
enhancements. The release
date for each enhancement is
uncertain. Which two options
allow each team to keep its
work separate?(Choose Two)
Pega Certified
As part of Senior System
the process of Architect
A top-level branch that tests for assessment scores
assessing a candidate, the less than 40.
feedback provided by the Two nested branches - one to evaluate technical
interviewer is used to decide skill scores and another to evaluate interpersonal
whether or not to hire a skill scores.
candidate for a position. If
necessary, other test scores
are used in the evaluation.
- Candidates with an
assessment score of 40 or less
are automatically rejected
before they are evaluated
further.- Candidates with an
are rejected if either their
technical skill scores and
interpersonal skill scores are
below 40.- Candidates with
scores higher than 60 are
automatically approved.
tree? (Choose Two)
A requirement states that when Add Open-Review as an allowed status on the case
a case is assigned to a user for type record.
review, its work status is set to Apply the Open-Review status to the appropriate
Open-Review. Which two steps assignments.
do you perform to implement
this requirement?(Choose
two.)
When does data propagation When the subcase or spin-off case is created
occur?
Pega Certified Senior System Architect

Use the data-pega-event-onpagedata attribute to
configure the default value for the gadget.
What are three valid ways to Use an action object configured as a script to
exchange data through a Pega perform additional actions on a web mashup
Web Mashup?(Choose three.) gadget.
Use the Javascript function doAction() to set or
read data values through the hosting web page.
In which two of the following The service is not available yet.

situations would you simulate You need to test each flow path in the case
an integration?(Choose Two) processing.
Which of the following would Delivery options

be typical data stored in a
local data source?
Timesheets require the Worked on weekend -> VP Finance

following approvals: Negative time-off balance -> HR Director
Regular 40 hours -> Supervisor
of employeeAny overtime ->
Manager of SupervisorWorked
on weekend -> VP
FinanceNegative time-off
balance -> HR Director
Which two conditions require
an authority matrix?(Choose
two.)
Decision Management is used determine the cause of a customer's problem

to_ .
Which type of data is exposed Process metrics, such as the current stage or status,
by default? are exposed by default.
Pega Certified
You are adding steps toSenior
a System Architect
Confirm employee
named correctly?
A company sends a standard Enterprise

confirmation email whenever a
case is created. In which layer
of the Enterprise Class
Structure (ECS) could you
apply the email
correspondence?
Select two configuration Add parameters to the data page to store the value
options that enable you to use of the selected list item.
the same data page for Set the data page Edit mode to editable so the list
populating a list and looking of values can be updated.
up information based on the
selected item in the list.
(Choose Two)
Pega Certified
An application containsSenior
the System Architect
AccountManagementInt
following rulesets. AccountManagement
AccountManagement contains
the rules for administering
checking and savings
accounts.
AccountManagementInt
contains supporting rules for
integrating with other
applications.
BankCorp contains rules
shared across the entire
organization. BankCorpInt
contains supporting rules for
integrations shared with other
internal applications.
CreditCheck contains rules for
processing a credit check and
is shared with another Pega
application to administer loans.
Which two rulesets can be
configured to use application
validation, according to best
practices?(Choose Two)
You want to allow users to use Configure UI elements to use native controls on
an application on a mobile mobile devices.
device, even if the device is
not connected to a network.
Which configuration option
Pega Certified
You are configuring an Senior System Architect
Select the Operator is available to receive work in
application to use Get Next the operator ID records.
Work. The requirement states Use a ToWorkGroup router for the assignments.
that operators must always
work on the next highest
priority assignment from
workbaskets.
Which two configuration
options do you use to
(Choose Two)
Which three decisions would Determine whether to perform a data transform.

you model with a When rule? Determine if a process runs.
(Choose Three) Determine whether a UI field should be visible.
______ is a template for creating Top-level case , child cases

_____ at run time.
Fill in the blanks with one of
the following pairs.
A connector can be directly activities

referenced from __________ and data pages
__________?(Choose Two)
In processing a parent case P- Both C-1 and C-2 must be resolved before P-1 can
1, two child cases C-1 and C-2 be resolved.
are created. Which of the
about the processing of P-1, C-
1, and C-2?
Which statement demonstrates A user should be able to cancel an order at any

a well-written requirement? time.
Pega Certified
You need to display an Senior
error System
In theArchitect
response data transform
message to the user if a data
page fails to retrieve data from
an external system. Where do
you detect the error?
A manager wants to use Work group

resources from two different
units to process onboarding
cases. You create a record to
meet this requirement.
In a purchase request case step that routes to the manager

type, you have the following
requirement: Purchase
requests should automatically
go to a manager of an
employee. To meet this
requirement, you design a
case with a____________.
On a Pega project, who is Lead System Architect

architecture?
Which two statements inserts a new element in a value list or page list
accurately describe the use of property as the first element.
a symbolic index?(Choose sets or retrieves an element value from the end of a
two.) value list or page list property.
Pega Certified
A list report Senior System
includes columns Architect
Summarize the purchase requests column by count.
for purchase requests and
regional cost centers. A
the regional cost centers.How
definition?
A health plan application Use a Some join condition.

includes a process for surgical
procedure requests. Currently,
there is an evaluation
subprocess in which a
physician reviews the diagnosis
and enters the recommended
procedure and its urgency. The
request then advances to a
medical director who analyzes
the feedback and approves
the appropriate procedure.
The health care organization
has created a new
requirement, which states that
three physicians can perform
the evaluation independently.
Only two evaluations are
necessary to advance the case
to the medical director. How
do you configure the process
so that the request can
continue to be processed if
only two of the three
physicians approve the order?
Pega Certified
Which two Senior System
options do you Architect
The potential reuse of the flow action
consider when creating a pre- The effect if the flow action is reloaded
processing data transform?
(Choose Two)
A global application with Use the Run in background step in the case life
infrastructure nodes located cycle and design a dedicated queue processor.
throughout the world requires Use the Queue-For-Processing method in an
certain operations to start activity and design a dedicated queue processor.
executing at midnight GMT.
Select two possible designs
for this use case.(Choose two.)
Consider this business use Define the response times using property values
case: that are circumstanced to account for the seasonal
Responses to customer adjustments.
service requests are required
within 24 hours of receipt. Due
to seasonal fluctuations,
response times may be
adjusted at the discretion of
business managers. You create
a service level agreement
(SLA) to monitor response
times.
Which solution allows
adjusting the response times
on demand?
Pega
You haveCertified Senior System
added a cascading Architect
Set the decision table to evaluate all rows.
approval step that uses an
authority matrix. You have
specified a decision table to
each case. You have confirmed
approvers.
However, the system routes all
requests to only one approver.
Which of the following actions
would you take to correct this
issue?
You are troubleshooting a Performance Profiler

performance issue with a user
interaction that exceeds the
maximum time of five seconds.
The elapsed time shown in the
performance report indicates
a total of two seconds. Which
tool do you use to determine
what is adding the additional
three seconds to the
performance measure?
A separate, unlocked ruleset is necessary because

Select two reasons for changes cannot be made to rules in a locked
organizing delegated rules in a ruleset.
separate, unlocked ruleset. A separate ruleset can help prevent accidental or
(Choose Two) unauthorized changes to critical elements of the
application.
Pega Certified
Using Live UI, you mustSenior System
In theArchitect
hierarchy tree, drag and drop the element in
reorder the position of fields the new position.
on a user form. How do you
use the tool in order to
complete this task?
You have been asked to Delay the availability of the assignment until a
configure a service level condition is satisfied.
agreement for an assignment. Add behavior for an assignment that is considered
Which two requirements late.
require you to configure the
service level agreement using
the rule form?
One concern about Global Resource Settings

integrating with external
systems is managing
connection information as the
application migrates from one
server to another. You address
this concern using________ .
A requirement states the case Add a Change Stage smart shape to the case life
must advance to one of three cycle and use a parameter to identify the
possible stages based on a appropriate stage.
known condition. The
conditions are subject to
change. Which configuration
option provides the most
flexibility when configuring the
case life cycle?
Pega Certified
You are preparing Senior System
to migrate Architect
Associate data instances with an application
an application to the User ruleset.
Acceptance Testing Check in rules in the application ruleset.
environment. What three Lock production rulesets.
actions should you perform
before you create the archive
file?(Choose Three)
The design document of an The placement of the screen content adjusts to

application states that the different screen sizes and devices automatically.
application must be
implemented with UI
responsiveness. Which
behavior does the design
require for the application?
A candidate's language skills Value group

used to capture the
A mortgage application Add a Split Join shape

process includes two different
subprocesses that can run in
parallel. When the two
subprocesses are complete,
the mortgage application
process continues. How do
you configure the mortgage
application process to
Pega Certified aSenior

You are implementing UI System Architect
Configure the mandatory fields as Required in the
form collecting job applicant section rule
information. Users must
provide values to certain fields
before submitting the form.
Which configuration adds
asterisks to indicate the
mandatory fields on the form?
In a flow, an integrator shape Leave the flow in draft mode and simulate
calls a connector that writes integration values in a data transform.
data to a system of record. The
system of record is not
currently available. How do
you simulate the service call
invoked from the integrator
shape?
When processing an auto Create an approval step with cascading approval.

accident claim, the system
requires three approvals:
Approval from the adjuster
who inspected the car,
approval from the medical
administrator who provided
medical care to the insured,
and approval from the
insurance agent who verified
the claim.
requirements so each
approver can work
independently?
Which two dependencies do Pausing a case until another case (or all cases)
you directly enforce with a reach a specified status
Wait step?(Choose Two) Pausing a case until a user submits a specified value
Pega Certified
Users must work on theSenior
next System Architect
Get from workbaskets first
highest-priority assignment Merge workbaskets
from the workbaskets
associated with their operator
ID record. This requirement
must be implemented using
Get Next Work. Which two
configuration options in the
operator ID record do you use
to satisfy this requirement?
(Choose Two)
The following example shows Rules checked out by the operator

the ruleset list for the logged-
in operator. What is stored in
the Admin@MyCo ruleset?
An online shopping Section

application collects and
displays the user's shipping
address. An address contains a
street number, city, state, and
zip code. This information is
always presented together in a
group, whether it is used for an
order confirmation or for
invoice billing.
Which UI component is
appropriate for displaying the
address information?
You want to allow a user to run Add the privilege to the flow action record.
a specific flow action without Add the privilege to a user role that is available to
conditions. Which two steps the user's access group.
must you perform?(Choose
Two)
Pega Certified
While running Senior
an application, a System
PegaArchitect
user notes that a system
exception occurred. Which log
do you review to identify the
issue?
An application change goes Circumstance the form by property and date;

into effect on June 15, 2016. specify June 15, 2016, as the start date.
Due to this change, two fields
are added to a user form, to
the form?
You are configuring a screen Select the Enable navigation link option for step
flow as shown below: four, and the Only allow navigating back to this
step option for step five.
Steps three through five must
be completed in order. How
do you configure the screen
flow to meet this requirement?
The customer, a medium size Create one scheduled job and select its run
toy maker, wants to fulfill schedule as multiple times a day.
orders received during the
peak season in December and
process them in batches
multiple times a day. How do
you implement this use case?
2/13/23, 3:43 PM PCSA - Pega Certified System Architect Flashcards | Quizlet
PCSA - Pega Certified System Architect Study


7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
Consider an online order case First stage - new order

and how the stages of the next stage - shipping
order would work. Match the last stage - Delivery
stages and correct sequences:
Users are required to enter Use a Validate rule to test the value entered by the
their date of birth in the format user.
dd/mm/yyyy. Which two Use a Calendar control to allow the user to select
options ensure that a user the date.
provides a date in the correct
format?
https://quizlet.com/561859708/pcsa-pega-certified-system-architect-flash-cards/ 1/40
PCSA - Pega Certified

Before development, your System
ImportArchitect
stories
team creates a spreadsheet
with work items to populate
the backlog. All work items
that describe business
requirements are prioritized as
Must have. You also create
work items to address:
A future enhancement request
to group a set of existing steps
into a multistep form. A drop-
down list that is missing one of
the required options - This
work item is in progress
because the missing option
prevents work from being
done.
How do you populate the
backlog directly from the
spreadsheet?
When a user enters a claim Add an optional action to save their progress
request, they need an option
to save their progress so they
do not lose their changes.
Select the best option to
satisfy this requirement.
Where do u create a section In data class where the data class is present.
related to all properties in a
page which references a data
class?
How do you configure the Add a set of optional actions to the case workflow
to update any of the profile
pages at any time during case
processing?
PCSA
A process-toPega
handle Certified
laptop System
The IT Architect
Manager receives a notification if the goal
replacement request includes interval expires before the assignment is completed
an assignment for a support and the request is for an executive
technician to order a
replacement laptop for an
employee. You have been
asked to configure a SLA for
the Assignment, which of the
following requirements is
configured using when rule?
In this same application, you Correct

now want to drill down into the
Data Designer for the Online
Orders and Order History data
types. Click Online Orders and
Order History to enter the
Data Designer. View the
information in the Data
Designer before you proceed.
Information from this view of
the Integration Designer helps
you complete the second
activity. You can return to this
information at any time from
the activity page by clicking
the back arrow.
Solution:

PCSA
HOTSPOT-An
Pega
online Certified
retailer System Architect
Correct
creates a case type that
processes and manages
custom order, The check
resources ha four steps.
1. Review Order: The customer
reviews the items in order of
add-t-cart selection and can
adjust the quantity of each
item and delete items to
calculated and display the
order total.
2. Select Shipping Option: The
customer selects a shipping
option to determine and
display the shipping charge for
their order.
3. Enter Delivery Address: The
customer enters their delivery
address to determine the sales
tax, if applicable, and the
application displays the
calculated sales tax.
4. Enter Payment Information:
The customer selects a
payment option and confirms
the grand total of the order.
For each calculation, identify

the appropriate chaining
option to maximize
performance.
Solution:

PCSA
You have -been
PegaaskedCertified
to create System Architect
Summarize the manager name column.
a pie chart that shows the
number of cases each
manager has created. A list
report contains columns for
manager name, case ID, and
office.
How do you configure the list
report in order to create the
pie chart?
While testing a process you Use the Clipboard tool to provide a value for the
want to ensure that an missing property
application selects the correct
result of a decision table to
direct a case along the correct
branch. The data element used
by the decision table has not
yet been added to any form in
the application.
How do you test the decision
Table while running the
process to verify that the
application selects the correct
branch?
Which of the following two Double-click > Scan barcode/QR code

sets represent action sets Tab key > Add new work
(event > action) in Pega
Platform?(Choose Two)
Match each data page scope Incorrect

to its use case.
Solution:

PCSA - Pega
An application Certified System
that generates - Up toArchitect
$10/day
auto insurance quotes allows - Up to $25/day
users to add a substitute - Up to $50/day
option to their coverage. Users
who add this option are
required to select one of three
reimbursement levels:
You must configure a form to Add a visible when condition on the radio button
add a check box that allows control.
users to select the substitute
option. Users selecting this
option are presented with
three reimbursement levels as
a set of radio buttons, similar
to the following example.
How do you configure the UI

to present users with the set of
reimbursement levels only if
the user selects the
reimbursement option?
In which of the following Update a table in an external database

situations would you use a SQL
connector?
What is the most appropriate The class where the data elements for the page
"Applies To:" class for a section property are defined
used to display data elements
contained in a page property.
PCSA - Pegaa Certified

You are designing form for System Architect
Dynamic layout
new arrivals. In the form, the
book cover pictures are
displayed in a row, like words
in a sentence. Once the row
reaches the full width of the
screen, it wraps around to
begin a new row.
pictures?
Which control is used to Auto complete

display some dynamic content
as list?
If a flow is placed in Draft The flow can be executed

mode, which of the following Rules may be referenced that do not yet exist
two statements are true?
(Choose Two)

You are configuring a standard System Architect
Add the applicants name. loan office. and loan
email to automatically be sent amount properties. Also, insert the paragraph rule.
applicants name, the loan
content stating the loan's
terms and conditions, which is
regularly updated. The content
is in a paragraph rule shared
by other standard emails
throughout the organization.
How would you configure
your email?
Need to develop a report with No need to optimize any of them.

case id and operator id. Then
From the left,match the role to Correct

the studio that targets that
role. Determine whether the
given solution is correct?
You need to configure a user Configure the button with action set with two
form to create a new case events and one action
when a button is pressed or
when the enter key is pressed
while the button is in
focus.How do you configure
the UI to implement this
Functionality?

§ A request for office supplies placed by the
Facilities department that totals EUR100 or less is
The approval process for a automatically approved.
purchase request case must § A request for software is automatically rejected
satisfy the following unless requested by the IT department.
requirements: § Any request that exceeds EUR1000 is
automatically subject to review by the Auditing
department.
Which type of rule would you Decision tree

configure to satisfy this
requirement?
An online retailer allows Define an approval process for adding and

customers to select a courier removing courier services.
service for deliveries. The list Delegate the records for the courier service data
of available courier services is type.
drawn from a data type
sourced in the Pega database.
The Fulfillment department
wants to allow local
warehouse managers to add
courier services to mitigate
increases in delivery limes and
remove courier services that
fail to meet delivery metrics.
Which two options are
required increase managers to
update courier service records
in production?(Choose Two)
How does assignment routing By assigning work to the most appropriate parties
improve efficiency?
PCSA - Pega
Hospital staff Certified
members enter System
Add a Architect
Send Email step and compose the message
appointment details including to reference the relevant properties.
relevant patient information, Add a Create PDF automation that references the
diagnoses, lab orders, and Patient visit summary view.
prescribed medication. This
information is aggregated in
the Patient visit summary view.
The patient receives a copy of
this view through email.
Which two configurations,
when applied in combination,
achieve this behavior?(Choose
Two)
A customer refund case type Configure the email to go to a work queue.

requires that an auditor
receives an email notification if
the refund is greater than
twice the price of the item.
Which recipient role do you
select to configure this
requirement?
Which requirement is satisfied A transaction review is completed within 24 hours.

by configuring a service level
agreement?
You justify a Guardrail Warning There is no better alternative to the current design
When_________?
PCSA
Customer-Service
Pega Certified System Architect
Send the notification by email rather than letter.
Representatives (CSRs) review
typically within one week. The
CSR must be available to
prioritize time-sensitive
requests such as requests from
customers who are on
vacation.
Time-sensitive requests are
prioritized as follows:
§ Customers receive a
§ Fulfillment requests are sent
§ Customers receive
Which action for time-sensitive
requests do you implement as
an optional action?
A requirement lot a hotel Add a When condition to the room selection step.
reservation case type states
that as customers change their
room selection, the total cost
of the reservation updates.
How do you satisfy this
requirement?
What can be a source of Page list

repeating layout?
PCSA - Pegacustomer
Relation between Certified System
Page Architect
and address is 1-1 then what
will be address mode
A book seller maintains a Add an autocomplete control and source the data
database of more than 10,000 using a data page.
book titles. You have been
asked to configure a form that
allows users to select a book
by title. How do you configure
the form?
home appraisal offices in based on business logic.
has a work queue. The
company requires that
appraisals be assigned to
offices based on the home's
location. For example, home
appraisals for Boston are
assigned to the New England
office work queue. Which
routing approach supports this
requirement?
Consider this requirement: A Build a secondary portal for the manager so he can
manager of a car dealership switch to that portal to create quotes.
company will typically access
a bunch of reports to look at
their sales, active quotes and
performance of sales persons.
In some special cases, he
would like to use the system to
configure the quote.
Which of the following choices
is best suited to support this
requirement?(Choose One)
PCSA
Users can-access
Pega an Certified
apartment System Architect
Use a dynamic layout with a responsive breakpoint
search application from at smart phone screen width to change from an
different devices with different inline format to a stacked format.
properties. On a wide desktop
screen, the photos are
displayed in an inline format.
On a smart phone, the photos
should be displayed in a
vertical stack.
Defined a data page refresh Data page will get refreshed once we access it
strategy as reload if older than after 2 hrs of in active
2 hrs.
Tasks and decisions needed to complete a business

transaction
A case type can be defined as
Representing a specific business transaction
______________.
A collection of Pega-related artifacts used to
implement the tasks for a case
Which statements best § To update the value of a property

describe the purpose of a data § To manipulate data copied from one case to a
transform.(Choose Two) subcase (Missed)
Guardrails help developers build applications that

Which two of the following are
are easier to maintain and have fewer defects.
benefits of following Pega,
Guardrails help developers to track compliance
guardrails?(Choose Two)
with Pega best practices.
Select rule that is the most When rule

appropriate to evaluate a
specific condition
PCSA - Pega
What statement bestCertified
describes System Architect
Data propagated from a case to a subcase occurs
the relationship between a when the subcase is created (Missed)
case and a subcase?
You are designing a travel plan § Total cost of option

application. A hotel booking § Total cost for the hotel room
their check-in and check-out
dates. The application
calculates and then displays
the cost for the hotel room.
The form also includes fields
to select options, such as valet
parking. at an extra cost. The
application totals the cost for
any selected options and adds
that amount to the total room
cost to equal the grand total.
which is displayed in a field.
properties would you use as
the target properties?(Choose
Two)
The relation between Page

customer and address is 1-1
then what will be address
mode
Which all shapes can be used § Maintain all calls received from a customer
to send an email notification? § Maintain account types given to customers.
Which of the following two Double-click > Scan barcode/QR code

sets represent action sets Tab key > Add new work
(event > action) in Pega
Platform?(Choose Two)

assignments assigned to operator
Worklist contains.
assignments pending with operator.
Routing can be decided by A decision tree

using:(Choose Two) A decision table
In a purchase order Create an integer property to store the value and

application, we want the user use an edit validate rute (Missed)
to enter a non-negative
number of items. Select the
best option:
Match each debugging need Correct

with the appropriate Tracer
feature.
You want to unit test a rule. To § Run a data transform to create the test page.
ensure that the rule executes § Configure a validate rule to populate the needed
as intended, you need to data.
valid data. Which two options
allow you to populate the
clipboard before testing the
rule?
(Choose Two)
Which of the following factors The RuleSet version that contains the rule instance
impacts whether an operator The application version listed on the operator's
can use a particular rule access group
instance when running an Circumstancing the rule instance
application? (Choose Three)
PCSA
We need -
toPega
create aCertified
report System Architect
optimize order cost column.
with creation date and order
cost as columns.How do you
optimize the report.
By default, declare The target property is referenced

expressions calculate when:
You want to modify the Add an Assignment shape to the Yes connector
following order approval and add a notification to the assignment.
process so that a text message
is sent to a customer when the
order has been approved and
will be fulfilled.
How would you modify the

process to send the text
message?
The relation between Page list

customer and address is 1-n
then what will be address
mode

A library application used by System Architect
Correct
staff creates a loan request
case when a member wishes to
borrow one or more books. As
part of the case process, the
application shows the staff a
read-only list of outstanding
past-due books to remind the
member to return late books.
In the Answer Area, select the
Data page definition for this
use case.
Solution:

When applying for a credit In the Employment Information process add a card
limit increase, customers with type true/false field to a user view.
standard credit cards must
provide information in an
Employment Information
process. Requests from
customers with Platinum credit
cards automatically skip this
process. What task do you
perform to implement this
requirement?
PCSA
report - Pega
contains Certified
five columns of data System Architect
§ Expiration date (.ExpiryDate)
out sales quotes: § sales territory (.Territory)
The case ID (pyID)
The sales territory (Territory)
The expiration date of the quote
The currently assigned sales
presentative(.pxAssignedOpperatorID)
The creation data of the sales
ote(.pxCreateDate)
or to property optimization which two
operties does the report identify as
otentially impacting performance?
hoose Two)
A development team plans to Place the updated rules into a new minor version of
enhance functionality of an the ruleset and include the new ruleset version in a
existing application by new application
enhancements to a small
group of users before rolling
the changes out to the entire
user base.
Consider the following Add a case-wide optional action to the case life
requirement: The patient must cycle.
be able to modify physician
details at any time without
impacting primary case
processing. Which
configuration satisfies this
requirement?
PCSA - Pega
The default urgency Certified
for an System
50 Architect
assignment is 10. An
assignment with this service
level associated to it is
started:Initial Urgency :
15GOAL : 1 day - 10DEADLINE:
3 day -15PASSED DEADLINE : 1
day - 10If after four business
day, the assignment is not
completed, what will be the
case urgency value?
A data page is used to retrieve Configure an error handling process that displays
data from an external system. the error message and sends an email.
If an error occurs, you want to
display a message to the user
and send an email to the
system administrator. How do
you implement this
requirement?
Adopting a rule delegation strategy enables

business users and architects to focus on their
specific tasks related to application development
and maintence
strategy.
Adopting a rule delegation sarategy can help
business conditions.
PCSA
You need-toPega
send Certified System
CreateArchitect
one correspondence rule for the email and
correspondence t o customers another correspondence rule for the letter.
who have been approved for a
mortga ge. The loan officer
sends a preliminary approval
by email. The system then
sends an official approval by
letter. How would you
configure the necessary
correspondence rule(s)?
A requirement lot a hotel Add a When condition to the room selection step.
requirement?
Which all shapes can be used § Utility

to send an email notification? § Notification tab of Assignment shape
Which source do you select Lookup

for a data page that contains
the details of single record for
a data type?
What is the source for a § Page list

repeating layout.(Choose two) § Report Definition
PCSA - Pega
A purchase Certified
request list report System Architect
Summarize the case ID column by count.
definition?
You have a cleaning service Implementation data class

booking application,
CleanApp. You are creating a
local data type,
HomeCleaningPackages, and
you want to leverage an
existing data class, CleanApp -
Data - CleaningPackages.
When defining your data type,
which option would you
choose for asset reuse?
PCSA
From the - Pega Certified...System Architect
employee
training portal, an
employee opens a new
Enrollment case,
submits course
selections, and receives
an email confirmation.
There is an error in the
email confirmation. You
must identify the cause
of the error by
recording a set of
interactions on the
portal and testing
expected behavior on
the data collection
fields.
What three steps, when
applied in combination,
achieve the required
testing?(Choose Three)
§ Business Architect - Defines business rules

Drag every responsibility over § System Architect - Configures user interface
to the appropriate role. forms
§ Product Owner - Creates acceptance criteria
A purchase request list report Summarize the case ID column by count.

definition?

External System of Record
Architect
Can source external data types (ex. Candidate data
type from external vendor)
From the employee training § Add assertions on the UI elements to verify

portal, an employee opens a correct data collection.
new Enrollment case, submits § Add stage-entry validations on the Enrollment
course selections, and case fields.
receives an email confirmation. § Run a new Enrollment case from the employee
There is an error in the email training portal.
confirmation. You must identify
the cause of the error by
recording a set of interactions
on the portal and testing
expected behavior on the data
collection fields.
What three steps, when
applied in combination,
achieve the required testing?
(Choose Three)
Can locally source data types (ex. locally sourced

Pega System of Record
Conference room data type)
Which rule can only return a When rule

true/false result when
evaluating a condition?
Data types Uniquely define and hold data for your application
On a form user enters a start § Edit validate

and end date for an § Validate rule
automobile insurance quote.
Which two rules can you use
to prevent users from
submitting the form unless the
start date is either the current
date or a date in the future?
PCSA
Why must-a Pega Certified System
validation Architect
Validating that a date is in the future or the past
condition that tests whether a requires the use of a function.
date is in the future or the past
be configured in Dev Studio?
The primary benefit of declarative processing is

What is the primary benefit of that the system processes the relevant actions and
using declarative processing? sets of properties automatically. They run
automatically when a value is set or changes.
use a single property when logic (ex. different validate rules for start date
______________. depending on job history or new hire)
Depends upon rules, such as data transforms,

Procedural processing activities, or UI rules, to instruct the application
when to look for a trigger event
What are the 3 basic ways you Control types (field types), Required field, and
can use controls for Editable settings (restrict the input values to valid
validation? formats ex. min & max # of chars)
Which technique should you Use procedural processing by putting a data

use if you want to update transform on a flow action.
values when the user submits a
form?
Used with single value, value list, and value group

Edit validate rules
properties to test for character patterns
Which technique should you Use a declare expression.

use if you want the total price
to update immediately when a
quantity is changed?
Compare a property against a condition when the

Validate rules
user submits a form

Contain a target property and source properties,
Declare expressions most often used to calculate and make immediate
updates to property values on user forms
What are the methods of data Property, Control, and Validation Rules
validation?
A sequence of interdependent declare

expressions; a declare expression in a network can
Declarative network
use a target property from another declare
expression as a source property
When can forward chaining When an expression uses many source properties
have a negative impact on that change frequently
performance?
Where are the source values In Case Designer, the source values are entered in
entered when creating declare the Calculation field. In Dev Studio, the source
expressions in Case Designer values are entered in the Expression field.
and Dev Studio?
Expression only updates its target property when

Backward chaining
the application references the property by name
Updates the target property value when a source

Forward chaining property value changes (used by default for
declare expressions)

You are configuring a System Architect
Specify backward chaining in the total interest rate
declarative network that declare expression.
expressions to calculate the
interest rate for a home
mortgage. For example, the
target value Property Tax
Assessment is used as a source
Assessed Property Value.
The declare expressions use
target values from other
expressions to calculate their
target values. The field that
displays the interest rate
appears on the approval form.
To improve performance, how
can you reduce the number of
calculations?
You want to provide § Paragraph rules support rich text.

instructions to the user filling § Paragraph rules can include images.
out a form. You are § Paragraph rule are supported in correspondence.
considering using paragraph
rules for the instructions. What
three benefits do paragraph
rules provide over standard
labels?(Choose three.)
A user need to perform an Add a local action to the collect Customer

assignment called Collect Information assignment.
Customer Information. While
working on the case, the user
may need to check the
customer's credit score before
sending the case to the Review
Request assignment. Select the
configuration that satisfies this
requirement.

How can a subcase be
Architect
§ Manual.
§ Automatic.
created(Choose Three)
§ Conditional.
§ Empower project participants to review

Select the three benefits of
development progress.
§ Facilitate collaboration between business and IT
Objectives (DCO).(Choose
Three)
§ Automate custom business processes.
An insurance claim type is When the Review claimstep starts.

defined as follows:
If the Review claim step is

configured to set the status to
Pending-Investigation, when is
the status of the case set to
Pending-Investigation?
Which business need do you A service representative must attach the

address through delegation? appropriate form when emailing a customer.
A bookseller maintains a Add an autocomplete control and source the data

database of more than 10,000 using a data page.
book titles. You have been
asked to configure a form that
allows users to select a book
by title. How do you configure
the form?
PCSA
HOTSPOT-An
Pega
online Certified
retailer System Architect
Correct
creates a case type that
processes and manages
custom order, The check
resources ha four steps.
1. Review Order: The customer
reviews the items in order of
add-t-cart selection and can
adjust the quantity of each
item and delete items to
calculated and display the
order total.
2. Select Shipping Option: The
customer selects a shipping
option to determine and
display the shipping charge for
their order.
3. Enter Delivery Address: The
customer enters their delivery
address to determine the sales
tax, if applicable, and the
application displays the
calculated sales tax.
4. Enter Payment Information:
The customer selects a
payment option and confirms
the grand total of the order.
For each calculation, identify
the appropriate chaining
option to maximize
performance.
Solution:

PCSA - configurations
Which two Pega Certified System Architect
§ Select a ruleset configuration to store automated
steps do you perform to test cases
record a unit test for § Add an assertion to define an expected result
automation.(Choose two)
You want to create a new Lock and roll the existing ruleset, and update the
minor version of an application existing application version.
ruleset to add a new feature to
your application. The new
feature will be made available
to users in a phased rollout.
How do you update the
application to add the new
ruleset version?
You are adding a field to your § Define the field type as a date
case type in which users must § Use the Required option
requirements?
(Choose Two)
PCSA - requests
A manager Pega Certified
a report System
For theArchitect
Case ID property. select Highest to Lowest
order.
How would you design the
report definition to support
this requirement?
Which of the following Cell spacing between two fields

configurations are not
supported in a dynamic
layout?
An Application form for Create a validate rule that first tests the date of
employee health care benefits birth is in the past, and then tests for the
includes a field for entering dependent's age.
the date of birth for an
employee's dependents. If the
dependent is 26 years old or
younger, the dependent
qualifies for insurance
coverage. Otherwise, the
Dependent does not qualify.
You need to make sure that
users enter a date of birth that
is the past.
How would you enforce these
validation requirements?
PCSA
A process-includes
Pegastandard
Certified System
§ Add Architect
a transfer action to the deadline.
and gold program levels. § Use a when condition test for gold level cases.
When the deadline has passed
for gold level cases, the
system transfers the case to
the manager. Which two
configurations would you
make to the SLA to support
this requirement?(Choose
two.)
A customer wants to copy the Data transform

order contents?
Which statement best Allows managers to adjust application behavior in

describes the business value production to meet changing business needs
of delegation?
A solution design document § Interaction.xml

outlines several projects for § Activity
the solution. You are assigned § String Variable
to the Loan Servicing project
(LoanSvcPrj). The project uses
the Interaction Framework
function to communicate with
the other projects.
Which three toolbox project
items do you add to
LoanSvcPrj? (Choose three.)
PCSA - Pega
You are creating Certified
a case type to System
CreateArchitect
a process on one stage for the background
process job application for check and a process on another stage for the
large corporation. Job physical assessment.
application for security
position require physical
assessment in additional to the
standard before or after the
background check.
How do you configure a case
type lo achieve the required
behavior?
You Justify a Guardrail Warning The flow is in development

when____________.
help desk ticket case type is When the Process ticket step starts
defined as follows:
If the Process ticket step is

configured to set the status to
Pending-Triage, when is the
status of the case set to
Pending-Triage?
PCSA - Pegacolumns
A report contains Certified System
CreateArchitect
three conditions: Location equals Boston
New Hire ID, New Hire Name, OR Location equals Atlanta AND Start Date equals
Start Date, and Location. The 30 days.
organization has offices in
various cities throughout the
U.S. A facilities manager
requests a report that includes
only new hires who are
located in the Atlanta and
Boston offices and have a start
date within 30 days of the
report date.
filter to support this
requirement?
To reduce training By using REST calls from the Pega API

requirements for users, a
company wants to utilize the
existing front end of their
application.How can a third-
party application use Pega
Platform?
A CSA needs to do the Create a multistep process

following activities. Collect
customer details Collect
problem details. Based on the
problem assign to a user.
In the Answer Area, identify Correct

the type of data measured in
each report.
Solution:

PCSA - Pega
A stakeholder Certified
prefers to group System
Status Architect
a set of existing actions into a
multistep form. Which work
item do you create in Agile
workbench to address this
change request?
A hotel booking application § An editable data page containing the room

allows customers to change information
rooms after making a § A savable data page containing the room
reservation. The status of each information
room in each hotel is stored
on a data page sourced from a
database table.
options do you use to update
the database table when a
customer changes rooms?
(Choose Two)
How do you configure an First, configure a Click event with a Refresh action.
action set on a button to clear Next, add a View History action to the event.
user selections and then
review the previous actions on
the case?
Consider the following user add a case wide optional action to the case life
story: As a customer, i want to cycle.
be able to cancel an open
service request at any time.
Select the configuration
option that satisfies the user
story.
PCSA - Pega
An application Certified
allows bank System
Radio Architect
buttons
customers to apply for a credit
card. During the process of
applying for the credit card,
customers can elect to transfer
a balance to the card. The
bank currency offers three
balance transfer options for
customers applying for a new
credit card:
1. 0 percent interest for 6
months.
2. 2.9 percent interest for 12
months.
months.
The bank requires that
customers first elect whether
to transfer a balance. If
customers elect to transfer a
balance, they must select one
of the three options.
Which control allows you to
display all the balance transfer
offers on the form, but only
allows the customer to select
one offer?
Which configuration informs a Configure the case type to send assignment

user by email when an notifications to assigned users.
assignment is added to the
user's worklist?
PCSA - Pega
An application Certified...System Architect
allows
bank customers to
apply for a credit card.
During the process of
applying for the credit
card, customers can
elect to transfer a
balance to the card. The
bank currency offers
three balance transfer
options for customers
applying for a new
credit card:
Which piece of application Labels and drop-down values on a section rule

content do you localize by
using a Field Value rule?
In a mortgage application, the Make loan request a parent case type and
user creates a loan request. In appraisal a child case type.
appraisal. How would you
configure the case types to
reflect their relationship?
Which of the following steps § Set the data save options Class.
provide easy configuration § Set the data page definition edit mode to
and maintainability of a Savable.
savable data page for an § Set the data save options Save type to Database
existing data type? (Choose save.
Three)
A validate rule is executed. after submitting the form
Which is a valid case type. ABC-SERVICES-WORK-CREATECANDIDATE
PCSA - Pegaa Certified

You are designing credit System Architect
deadline
transaction case type and have
the following requirement:
Transaction disputes must be
resolved within 3 days. To
meet this requirement, you
need to set the _____________ in the
service level to 3 days.
In a job applicant case for a Route the job application to an operator within a
call center position, all skilled group using the specific user option
customer service agents must
speak english. In addition to
english. Some positions also
require spanish, french,
german fluency. During the
interview process illustrated
below, the conduct interview
task must be routed to an
interviewer who speaks the
same language as required by
the position.
What is the best way to design
routing so the correct
interviewer is assigned the
task?
User A should have application Update User A to the same role as User B.
permissions that are identical
to User B's permissions. Unlike
User B, User A lacks access to
the My Cases page. How do
you grant access to the My
Cases page for User A?
PCSA - Pega
A reservation Certified
process allows System Architect
A visible when condition applied to the check box
part of a travel itinerary. Which
configuration displays a check
box to allow users to select
travel insurance only if the
itinerary includes a flight?
Which of the following can § Prevent others from editing the report in the
you perform when editing a Report Viewer
Report Definition rule that you § Prevent the report from appearing in the Report
cannot do in either the Report Browser
Browser or Report Viewer? § Add sub-reports to filter the data the report
(Choose Three) displays
Which piece of application Labels and drop-down values on a section rule

content do you localize by
using a Field Value rule?
How do you ensure that only a Add a privilege to the flow action form, then add
manager can run a specific the privilege to a role assigned to the access group
flow action? for managers.
An accident claim case creates § Add a wait shape to the accident claim case to
a vehicle claim case for each wait until all vehicle claims have a status of
vehicle involved in an accident. Resolved.
Which two configurations § Add each vehicle claim as a child case of the
prevent the accident claim accident claim.
case from resolving before all
vehicle claims are resolved?
(Choose Two)
Which of the following Switching to a different operator

requires users to logoff?
(Choose One)
PCSA
Consider - Pega
the Certified System
following Architect
§ Notify Candidate
scenario: § Ask Questions
- During the Interview process
for a Job Application case, an
administrative assistant selects
the date and location of the
interview. Next, an email
confirmation is sent to the
candidate.
- During the interview, the
hiring manager captures notes
from the discussion.
- Finally, the candidate is
assigned a technical exercise
and the results are added to
the case.
Select two step names that
follow the guidelines for
identifying and naming the
steps in the process.(Choose
Two)
Other than an activity, which Report Definition

rule type can be used to
populate a declare page?
(ChooseOne)
PCSA - Pega
In an airline Certified System
reservation Architect
§ Validate
application, users enter § Data Transform
departure and return dates
and submit for flight search.
This is implemented as a flow
action. You need to ensure that
the return date is later than the
departure date. You also need
to copy the dates to a search
parameter page that is used
for flight search.
Select the two rule types that
the flow action references to
satisfy these requirements.
(Choose two)
2/13/23, 3:39 PM Pega CSA Test Questions Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSA Test Questions Study
Pega CSA Test Questions

5.0 (2 reviews)

4th Edition • ISBN: 9780134444321
Tony Gaddis
629 solutions
You need to read from an A and C

external database table
containing inventory data.
Which two ways could you
integrate with the table?
(Choose two.)
A) Use a SQL connector

B) Use a SQL listener
C) Map the table to a class
https://quizlet.com/407588649/pega-csa-test-questions-flash-cards/ 1/23
Pega CSA Test

When processing Questions
an insurance data page
claim you need to retrieve the
customer�s insurance policies
from a web service. You invoke
the connector from a ___________.
data transform
flow action
report definition
data page
The application contains a ORG-App-Data-Customer

case type ORG-App-Work-
PurchaseOrder. The case type
uses an embedded page to
hold customer information. The
embedded page is of class
ORG-App-Data-Customer.
What would be the most
appropriate "Applies To:" class
for a section rule displaying
customer information?
RG-App-Work
ORG-App-Data-Customer
ORG-App-Data
ORG-App-Work-
PurchaseOrder
Pega CSA Test

You are designing Questions
a form that D
uses a repeating grid to
display office furniture items.
Which two data sources can
you use as a source for a
repeating grid?
A) Local data storage

B) A page group property that
holds the data
C) A page list property that

holds the data
D) Both B & C
You need to add a button to a Configure an action set on the button control.
user form. When the button is
pressed, the application
invokes a data transform, then
creates a new case. How do
you implement this
functionality?
Configure a style format for

the button in the skin.
Configure a mixin for the
button in the skin.
Configure a local action on the
button control.
Configure an action set on the
button control.
Pega CSA
Users can Test
access Questions
an apartment Use a dynamic layout with a responsive breakpoint
search application from at smart phone screen width to change from an
different devices with different inline format to a stacked format.
properties. On a wide desktop
screen, the photos are
displayed in an inline format.
On a smart phone, the photos
should be displayed in a
vertical stack.
Use a dynamic layout with a

responsive breakpoint at smart
phone screen width to change
from an inline format to a
stacked format.
Circumstance the section rule

to display the photos with
different arrangements at
different screen sizes.
Use a column layout with a

responsive breakpoint at smart
phone screen width to hide
the left and right columns.
Circumstance the layout to

display the photos with
different arrangements at
different screen sizes.
Pega
Which ofCSA Test Questions
the following Clicking a button clears the fields in a form.
scenarios requires the
configuration of an action set?
Reducing the screen width

converts an inline to a stacked
dynamic layout.
Selecting a check boxshows

additional input fields.
Clicking a button clears the

fields in a form.
Entering a text value in a

numeric field displays a
custom error message.
Pega CSA Test

On an Account Questions
Management Configure an action set on the link to launch the
form, you need to add a link flow in a modal dialog.
control for changing the
mailing address. When users
click the link, the application
runs a ChangeAddress flow in
a modal dialog.
requirement?
Configure the edit mode of

the link to display the flow UI
in a modal dialog.
Configure an action set on the

link to launch the flow in a
modal dialog.
Configure a visible when

condition on the link to display
the flow in a modal dialog.
Configure the flow to render

its UI in a modal dialog instead
of a section.
Pega CSAallows
An application Test bank
Questions Radio buttons
customers to apply for a credit
card. During the process of
applying for the credit card,
customers can elect to transfer
a balance to the card. The
bank currency offers three
balance transfer options for
customers applying for a new
credit card:
1. 0 percent interest for 6
months.
months.
months.
The bank requires that
customers first elect whether
to transfer a balance. If
customers elect to transfer a
balance, they must select one
of the three options. Which
control allows you to display
all the balance transfer offers
on the form, but only allows
the customer to select one
offer?
Radio buttons
Check box
Picklist
Text area
Pega
Users areCSA Test
required Questions
to enter A and C
their date of birth in the format
dd/mm/yyyy. Which two
options ensure that a user
provides a date in the correct
format? (Choose two.)
A) Use a Calendar control to

allow the user to select the
date.
B) Use an Edit Validate rule to

test the value entered by the
user.
C) Use a Validate rule to test

the value entered by the user.
You are designing a form for Dynamic layout

new arrivals. The form is
displayed on laptops and
tablets. Pictures of the book
covers are displayed in
columns. The number of
columns changes depending
on the screen size.
pictures?
Column layout
Screen layout
Smart layout
Dynamic layout
Pega CSAcustomers
A form allows Test Questions
to From the flow action where the customer submits
specify the amount of a the form
balance transfer for their credit
card. The form contains two
fields: one to display the
available balance on the
customer's credit card, and
one for the user to enter the
amount of the balance transfer.
You configure a validate rule
to verify that the amount of a
balance transfer is less than
75% of the available balance
on the customer's credit card.
How do you call the validate
rule?
From the step in the case life

cycle.
From the section that contains

the field for entering the
amount of the balance transfer
From the flow action where

the customer submits the form
From the property used to

capture the amount of the
balance transfer
Pega
You wantCSA Test Questions
to provide All of the above
instructions to the user filling
out a form. You are
considering using paragraph
rules for the instructions. What
three benefits do paragraph
rules provide over standard
labels?
Paragraph rule are supported

in correspondence.
Paragraph rules support rich

text.
Paragraph rules can include

images.
All of the above
A hotel reservation application AutoComplete

has the following requirement:
Users must select the
destination city from a list of
options. The list is filtered
based on user entry. As a user
types the city name, the list of
options narrows.
Which UI control allows you to
List to List
Menu
AutoComplete
Drop-down
Pega CSA
In an airline Test Questions
reservation D
application, users enter
departure and return dates
and submit for flight search.
This is implemented as a flow
action. You need to ensure that
the return date is later than the
departure date. You also need
to copy the dates to a search
parameter page that is used
for flight search.
Select the rule types that the
flow action references to
satisfy these requirements.
A) Edit Validate
B) Validate
C) Data Transform
D) Both B & C
Which rule can only return a When rule

true/false result when
evaluating a condition?
Decision tree
Declare expression
When rule
Decision table
Pega
You haveCSA Test
designed Questions
a decision Run the decision tree and enter values on the test
tree that you want to unit test. page.
You want to test various input
values to ensure that you get
the expected results. How
would you unit test your
decision tree?
Run the decision tree and

enter values on the test page.
Check the decision tree for

completeness.
Check the decision tree for

conflicts.
Add the decision tree to a

decision shape in your
application and create cases
using various input values.
You have been asked to Decision tree

configured a rule for use in a
business process to evaluate
multiple property values and
return a text value as a result.
Which type of rule satisfies this
requirement?
Data transform
When rule
Validate
Decision tree
Pega
In which CSA Test Questions
of the following Update a table in an external database
situations would you use a SQL
connector?
Update a table in an external

database
Write to a table as part of a

distributed transaction
Retrieve a large list of

reference data
Execute a complex SQL

statement such as a stored
procedure
A data page holds the local 11:40

weather information and has
set to 10 minutes. The data
page is created at 11:22. The
user then performs the
following actions:
11:28 the user refreshes the
weather information
weather information
reloaded?
11:38
11:40
11:32
11:28
Pega CSA
You need Test
to copy dataQuestions
from a Data transform
page with customer data to a
properties can be mapped as-
full name. Which rule type
would you use to copy the
content?
Data page
Data transform
Declare expression
Function
Pega
You haveCSA Test
created Questions
a series of Use the backward chaining option for the total
forms for a vacation booking amount expression. Use forward chaining for all the
process. Declarative other expressions.
expressions are used to
calculate values such as the
cost of the flight, hotel, car
rental, and taxes. The last form
charged on the user's credit
card. How do you configure
the calculations so that the
total amount is calculated only
form?
Use the backward chaining

option for all the expressions.
Use the backward chaining

option for the total amount
expression. Use forward
chaining for all the other
expressions.
Use the forward chaining

Use the forward chaining

expression. Use backward
expressions.
Pega
You haveCSA TesttoQuestions
been asked create To perform the calculation wherever a field is
a sequence of user forms for a updated
travel reservation process. The
forms contain fields that
require calculation. For which
reason do you use a declare
expression to calculate
values?
To perform the calculation in a

specific case stage
To perform the calculation

when the user clicks a button

when a form is submitted

wherever a field is updated
Pega
A ServiceCSA Test
Request caseQuestions
type Configure the pyDefault data transform to set the
has a CustomerGrade CustomerGrade property value.
property. How do you set the
value of the CustomerGrade
property to Silver when a
service request case is
created?
Configure the CustomerGrade

property with a default value.
Configure the pyDefault data

transform to set the
CustomerGrade property
value.
Configure a declare
expression to set the
value.
Configure the first connector

in the first flow rule to set the
value.
In an application, three email Value group

addresses (work, home, and
other) can be captured for a
customer. You use .Email
(work) to refer to the work
email address. What type of
property is used to capture the
email addresses?
Page
Value group
Value list
Page group
Pega CSA
ABC Corp Test
requires thatQuestions Data-Party-Operator
expenses billable to a client
are reviewed by an auditor in
the Finance department. After
the auditor approves the
expenses, the client is billed.
You create the work party for
the auditor as an instance of
which class?
Data-Party-Org
Data-Party-Operator
Data-Party-Com
Data-Party-Person
-You are designing a case type Add an alternate stage and add the rejection
that includes a process to process to the stage.
perform when a case is
rejected. How do you model
this requirement in the case life
cycle?
Add a primary stage and add

the rejection process to the
stage.
Add an alternate stage and

add the rejection process as
an optional process to the
stage.
Add an alternate stage and

add the rejection process to
the stage.
Add the rejection process to

all the primary stages as an
optional process.
Pega CSAwith
Pega 7 comes Test Questions
numerous When automating case processing
API activities. In which
situation would you explore
available API activities?
When automating case

processing
When creating a new case
type
When designing your data
model
When debugging an
application
Pega
You haveCSA TesttoQuestions
been asked Configure the Account Opencase type to create a
configure the following Fund Account case as a top-level case. Configure
relationship between three theFund Accountcase type to create aLink
case types: Account Open, Savingscase as achild case.
Link Savings, and Fund
Account.
1. A customer can complete an
Account Open case before
completing a Fund Account
case.
2. A customer must complete a
Link Savings case before
completing a Fund Account
case.
this requirement?
Configure theAccount
Opencase type to create
aFund Accountcase as a top-
level case. Configure
theAccount Opencase type to
create aLink Savingscase as a
child case.
Configure theAccount
Opencase type to create
aFund Accountcase as a
childcase. Configure theFund
Accountcase type to create
aLink Savingscase as a toplevel
case.
Configure the Account

Opencase type to create a
Fund Account case as a top-
level case. Configure theFund
Accountcase type to create
aLink Savingscase as achild
case.
Pega CSA
Configure Test Questions
theAccount
Opencase type to create the
other cases as top-level cases.
Add a validate rule to
theAccount Opencase to
require a resolvedLink
Savingscase before theFund
Accountcase can be resolved.
Pega CSA
Customer Test Questions
Service Send the notification by email rather than letter.
Representatives (CSRs) review
typically within one week.
The CSR must be available to
prioritize time-sensitive
requests such as requests from
customers who are on
vacation. Time-sensitive
requests are prioritized as
follows:
- Customers receive a
- Fulfillment requests are sent
- Customers receive
Which action for time-sensitive

requests do you implement as
an optional action?
Increase the urgency for time-

sensitive requests.
Send the notification by email

rather than letter.
Update the notification with

the expected delivery date.
Route fulfillment requests to a

dedicated workbasket.
Pega CSA Test Questions
2/13/23, 4:12 PM Pega Study Guide Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Study Guide Study
Pega Study Guide

Intensified Algebra I Volume 1: Foundations for Functions, and

Linear and Statistical Models, Volume 1 2018
ISBN: 9781948905923
Agile Mind
You can configure a static list for a limited set of

values.
You can configure local data storage to store data

Three ways to use reference records for a data type, without having to create or
data maintain database tables.
You can connect to an external database to

retrieve data.
https://quizlet.com/379762318/pega-study-guide-flash-cards/ 1/28
Pega Study Guide You use Pega to quickly and easily model complex
business processes.
Pega Platform includes built-in tools to ensure that

you follow the best practices while building your
**3 Facts on Pega Platform
application.
Even though Pega sometimes increases

development costs, by following best practices,
you can keep pace with today's changing business
environment.
Direct Capture of Objectives allows business and IT

What is the purpose of DCO in stakeholders to use a shared visual model to
Pega? capture business requirements directly in the
application.
A case type (specific business transaction)
Three core components of a

At least one data element (field)
model-driven application.
A user view (to display the data element value)
Leverage DCO to improve product quality and

follow Pega guardrails.
With experience from
thousands of Pega project
implementations, Pega has
Iterate and test as you build
defined best practices that are
key to delivering successful
Pega projects. Select all of the
Communicate project progress at all levels and
best practices below:
collaborate with everyone invested in the success
of the project.
Pega Study
Pega Express Guide
is ______ that An accelerated application development
exposes key elements and environment
features of the Pega 7
platform.
_____ is a template for creating Case type, cases

_____ at run time.
Case life cycle design is a modeling technique

Pega uses to describe, in business terms, how a
business application should work.
**Which statements are true

about designing your
Cases are organized into high-level milestones,
application using a business
known as stages.
view of work? (three)
Stages are further organized into processes which

define one or more paths the case must follow.
________ are used to organize Alternate stages, primary stages

process steps that are not part
of the "normal course of
events" but must be available
under certain circumstances. In
a case life cycle, stages that
lead to the expected outcome
are called ________.
Stages typically represent the transfer of the case

from one authority to another, or from one part of
the organization to another.
What do stages typically
represent? (Select two)
Stages typically represent a significant change in

the status of the case.
Pega Study
For primary stages,Guide
when all Automatic, controlled
steps in a stage are
completed, the default option
is a(n) _______ transition to the
next primary stage. To allow
transitions to other stages
before the completion of the
current stage, you can add
a(n) _______ transition to a stage.
The _________ is the primary Case status

indicator of the progress of a
case towards resolution.
You use an optional process when you need

multiple steps to update information.
An optional process allows users to run a new

process from within the case.
**In regards to an optional
process.
Optional actions supplement the tasks users can do
as they work on a case.
Optional actions enable users to leave the primary

path of a case to complete another task or process.
An instruction for a step identifies to a user what

should be accomplished in an assignment.
**In regards to Instructions

Users see instructions in their worklist, when they
open a case, or when they are prompted for input
in a user view.
Pega Study Guide What fields do users need to see?
Before creating a view, what

How will users enter values in those fields?
three questions should you ask
yourself?
Can users modify the field values or only read the

values?
An intent-driven UI shows users only what they

Why would we want to design
need to know to perform a task; only relevant
an intent-driven UI?
information is displayed and nothing more.
The data elements or Data model

collection of related data
elements in a case type
comprise the case type's ______.
System architects typically Value, page

work with two types of
property modes. _____ modes
describe a single piece of
information such as a total. _____
modes describe a data object
such as a customer.
stores text, numbers, dates, Boolean values, and

Single value
amounts.
acts as a container for an ordered list of single

Value list
values.
acts as a container for an unordered list of single

Value group
values.
Page a single entity, also referred to as a field group.
Pega Study Guide numerically ordered list (for example, the line items
Page list that make up the purchase request), also referred
to as a field group list.
Page group unordered list (for example, the address property)
The data must be the right type.
What are some of the few

design requirements when The data must fit the business logic.
validation data?
The data must be restricted to possible values.
You use ______ rules to compare Validate

a property against a condition
when the user submits a form.
If the user enters a value that
fails to meet the condition, the
form displays an error when
the form is submitted.
What is control type is Date Calendar

only, Date & Time?
What is control type is Check box

Boolean?
What is control type is Picklist? Radio buttons or a drop-down
What is control type is Text area

Text(paragraph)?
Pega Study
______ rules Guide
enable you to use a Validate
single property when different
values are required based on
business logic. You use these
rules to ensure users have
entered the correct data or
performed all of the processes
before the case can enter a
specific stage.
You use ______ rules with single Edit validate

value, value list, and value
group properties to test for
patterns. For example, you can
configure a zip code property
so that the entered value has
to have five digits.
Flow actions provide additional processing

What are flow actions? capabilities such as running data transforms and
calling validation rules.
Pega Express automatically applies the validation

rule to the flow actions that corresponds to the
How is the validation creation
user view.
process in Pega Express
different than the process in
Designer Studio? (Select two)
Pega Express only supports comparisons against a
constant rule.
_____ - a case that does not Top-level, child

have a parent case, but can
cover, or become a parent of,
other cases. _____ - a case that is
covered by the parent case.
Pega
You can Study
enforce Guide Wait
dependencies between parent
and child cases with the ____
step. You can configure a case
to wait for a set amount of time
or until a subcase reaches a
defined status.
From a business perspective, Case, rule

the key building block of a
Pega application is a ____ - a
work that delivers a business
outcome. From a technical
perspective, the key building
block of a Pega application is a
____ - an object that defines the
behavior of a case, or part of
an application.
When you model a case type Rules

in a Pega application, you
configure the application with
instructions to create, process,
and resolve a case. These
instructions are ____. They
describe the behavior of
individual cases. The Pega
platform uses these to
generate application code.
Each rule is an instance of a Rule type

____. It is an abstract model of a
specific case behavior.
Pega Study Guide Versioning

The use of individual rules
makes your application
modular. What are three Delegation
benefits this modularity
provides?
Reuse
To package rules for Ruleset

distribution as part of an
application, you collect rules
into a group called a ____.
represents a substantial release of an application. It

Major version encompasses extensive changes to application
functionality.
represents an interim release or enhancements to a

Minor version
major release.
Patch version consists of fixes to address bugs in an application.
Each application consists of a Ruleset stack

sequence of rulesets, called a
______. It determines the order in
which Pega looks through
rulesets to find the rule being
used.
determines the type of behavior modeled by the

Rule type
rule.
Identifier identifies the purpose of the rule
Class identifies the scope of the rule
Pega Study Guide container for the rule. It identifies, stores, and
Ruleset manages the set of rules that define an application
or a major portion of an application.
The check-out feature is used to manage changes

to rules when multiple developers work on an
application.
**In regards to rule check out

Rule check-out creates a copy of a rule in a ruleset
and check in.
that is only visible to you, called a personal ruleset.
After you update the rule and test the changes, you
check in the rule.
A ______ provides a nonexclusive Private edit

check out of a rule. This allows
other system architects to edit
a rule at the same time. They
are useful for quick debugging
without interrupting
development by other team
members. This option is not
available in Pega Express.
______ inheritance describes the Pattern

business relationship between
classes. It allows your
application to share rules with
other applications throughout
an organization.
Pega Studydescribes
______ inheritance Guidethe Directed
functional relationship
between classes. It allows your
application to reuse rules from
classes in other applications
and standard rules provided
with the Pega platform.
Pega first searches through the parent classes

indicated by pattern inheritance.
**Two statements that are true
regarding reusing rules
through inheritance.
If the rule cannot be found after searching
@baseclass, Pega returns an error.
You should always check if a suitable data type is

available before creating a new one.
**Two statements that are true

regarding the Data Explorer.
Pega comes with many standard data types you
can use in your application to reduce development
effort.
identifies special properties - your application can

px
read but not write to these properties.
your application can read and write to these

py properties; properties that users can enter or
change via direct input
supports internal system processing - the meaning

of values may change with the new product
pz
releases. Your application can read but not write to
these properties.
Pega Study
A claim case Guide
records the items Value list
to the description of an item
loss looks like this:
property reference
.ItemOfLoss(1).Description is
an example of a _____ property?
Each ______ in a Pega application Data element

is a pairing of two pieces of
information: the name of the
data element, and the value
assigned to the data element.
Each data element is stored in Page

memory on a ____ - a structure
for organizing data elements in
an application.
During case processing, each page remains in

memory in the clipboard.
Two statements that are true
regarding the clipboard. The clipboard is the portion of memory on the
server reserved by Pega for the data generated by
applications.
______ stores all the data pyWorkPage, pyWorkCover

generated while creating and
processing a case, it is a
specific page on the
clipboard. If the case is a child
case, the clipboard also
contains the page ______, which
contains the case data for the
parent case.
Pega Study Guide contains pages created due to user action, either
User Pages directly or indirectly. They contain data related to
work being performed in the selected thread.
contains read-only data pages defined by data

Data Pages page rules. They are persistent pages in memory,
used to cache data.
contains read-only pages created by linked

Linked Property Pages properties, which contain information from data
objects referenced by a linked property.
contains pages that describe the current user

System Pages session, such as the active user and the active
application.
Use ____ to use conditional A data transform

logic to determine which data
should be propagated.
Set default values when creating a case

Two situations would you use a
data transform
Copy data between pages
(T or F)You can combine TRUE

several data transforms using
the superclass feature to set
values at multiple levels of the
class hierarchy. In order to use
this superclass feature, you
must give each data transform
the same name.
Pega Studyallows
______ processing Guide
you to Declarative
configure your application so
that the system automatically
updates property values such
as a total order amount. This
type of processing identifies
and maintains computational
relationships among
properties.
______ processing depends upon Procedural

rules, such as data transforms,
activities, or user interface
rules, to instruct the
application when to look for a
trigger event.
The primary benefit of Trigger event

declarative processing is that
updates occur only when
triggered in the application.
You use declarative rules to
define the ______.
You most often use ______ Declare

expressions to calculate and
make immediate updates to
property values on user forms.
They contain an expression
and a target property. The
expression calculates and
updates the target property
value. The expression uses
source property values in its
calculation.
Pega Study
_____ chaining Guide
in a declare Forward, backward
expression updates the target
property value when a source
property value changes. _____
chaining in a declare
expression means that a target
property value is not
automatically updated when
other declare expressions in a
network update their target
values.
What allows you to refer to a Work party

case participant by role,
without knowing any
identifying information and is
often used to send
correspondence during case
processing?
models a business that has a web domain ending in

Data-Party-Com
.com, such as a corporation.
models a government agency, such as the

Data-Party-Gov
Department of Revenue.
models a non-profit organization that has a web

Data-Party-Org
domain ending in .org, such as a charity.
models a case participant with a Pega login and

Data-Party-Operator represents a case participant, such as a case
worker or case manager.
models a case participant who lacks a Pega login,

Data-Party-Person
such as a customer.
Pega Study Guide indicates the beginning of flow processing, each

Start (green circle) flow rule contains exactly one of these, it is
automatically added to every flow rule.
creates a task in a worklist or work queue so a user

Assignment (green rectangle)
can provide input to the case.
indicates a reference to another flow rule from the

Subprocess (blue rectangle)
current flow rule.
Utility (yellow/orange indicates an automated system action.

rectangle)
indicates the end of flow processing, each flow

End (red circle) rule may include one or more of these shapes to
represent the potential end points of the process.
Connector (arrow) defines the sequence of flow execution.
Data propagation ensures that the appropriate

information is moved into a child case.
**Two statement that are true
about data propagation.
Data propagation is the mechanism of copying data
within the case hierarchy.
useful when the data page is context-sensitive to a

Thread
particular case.
lets you share data pages for a given user session

Requestor and is often used when the data page contains data
associated with the logged-in operator.
makes a single data page instance accessible by all

Node users of the application and other applications
running on the given scope.
Pega Study
You use a Guide
_____ page to retrieve Data
data for your application,
regardless of the source. These
pages cache data on demand
to a clipboard page and have
a scope, a refresh strategy and
a source, that are defined by a
data page rule.
What is the relationship A section is the rule used in Pega to configure the
between a section and a user contents of a user view.
view?
A group of information and functionality by context

Section
and purpose.
Layout Organization of UI elements.
A cell can be empty or contain various fields and

Cells
controls.
A dynamic layout is a general purpose layout used

Dynamic layout
to a organize a single set of fields.
A repeating layout is used to organize lists, tables,

Repeating layout
and other repeating structures.
Describe the purpose of Dynamic layouts arrange items in a flexible form

dynamic layouts. that automatically adjusts to screen size.
You use design templates to configure section

Design templates
layouts.
Design templates allow you to apply a consistent

What is one advantage of
structure to a form. You can change the structure
design templates?
by changing the template.
Pega Study Guide Used to identify the purpose of the section. The
Label label is used to generate an identifier for the
record.
The class to which the record is applied. The class

Class determines the availability and re-usability of the
section.
The ruleset and version that contains the record.

Ruleset and version Pega defaults to the highest unlocked application
ruleset when you create a record.
You can configure a section through a user view

using Pega Express. Certain section configurations
What are the three ways a can only be accomplished by accessing and
section can be configured? modifying the section rule directly using Designer
Studio. You can also configure the section using a
design template.
Describe the purpose of Dynamic layouts arrange items in a flexible form

dynamic layouts. that automatically adjusts to screen size.
A skin rule defines presentation formatting

Skin rule
instructions for one or more UI forms.
A Responsive UI enables a layout to automatically

Responsive UI
adjust to rendering devices.
Responsive breakpoints are default settings built

What are responsive
into the application skin rule. They manage the
breakpoints in Pega
content transition of an application between
applications?
monitor, tablet, and mobile phone displays.
Why do tables need Relying on breakpoints alone for tables can result
responsive configuration in in unimportant columns having prominence over
addition to responsive more important columns.
breakpoints?
Pega
Business Study Guide
metrics are used to Provide statistics on how work is performed in
_______. Pega applications.
Report definitions retrieve data from a database

Report Definitions and returns the results in a table of columns and
rows.
Which two of the following are Total value of a customer order reaches $500
considered property-based
events in Pega's dynamic UI
model? User changes the arrival date on a hotel reservation
to one week later
A. A section refreshes
B. User clicks a button
C. Total value of a customer

order reaches $500
D. User changes the arrival

date on a hotel reservation to
one week later
In Designer Studio, you create Label, class, ruleset, and version

sections from the Create
menu, or by right-clicking the
case type in the Application
Explorer and selecting the
User Interface category and
the Section rule type. When
you create a section, specify
the following information:
Pega Study
A _____ layout Guide
is a general Dynamic
purpose layout used to
organize a single set of fields.
It supports responsive
behavior to support use on
multiple devices. As the screen
size changes, the layout shifts
its contents to wrap content
on-screen.
Which situation should you A national insurance company requires a different

address with a rule minimum for liability coverage in each state.
circumstance?
A. A national insurance
company requires a different
minimum for liability coverage
in each state.
B. A service level notifies the

assigned user when a goal
interval is exceeded and
notifies the user's manager
when a deadline interval is
exceeded.
C. An online order process

optionally allows customers to
update the credit card number
saved with their account.
D. A process does not execute

if a user is not married.
Pega Study
To update any ruleGuide
on a Unlocked, unlocked
production system, a(n) ______
ruleset must contain the rule.
A(n) ______ ruleset is a ruleset in
which rules can be modified
and saved.
What is the criteria for You determine which rules to delegate based upon
determining rules to delegate? business needs and ease of business user access.

update the ______?
Owner
What three roles does Pega

define to send Customer
correspondence to?
Interested
You can configure a static list for a limited set of

values.
Select three ways you can use You can configure local data storage to store data
reference data in a Pega records for a data type, without having to create or
application. maintain database tables.
You can connect to an external database to

retrieve data.
Pega Study
What allows you toGuide
refer to a Work party
case participant by role,
without knowing any
identifying information and is
often used to send
correspondence during case
processing?
______ processing depends upon Procedural

rules, such as data transforms,
activities, or user interface
rules, to instruct the
application when to look for a
trigger event.
______ processing allows you to Declarative

configure your application so
that the system automatically
updates property values such
as a total order amount. This
type of processing identifies
and maintains computational
relationships among
properties.
Pega
In which Study Guide
of the following Set default values when creating a case
situations would you use a
data transform? (Choose two)
Set default values when
creating a case
Create properties after the

Execute a flow action
What is an action in a data An action is the individual operation specified in

transform? each row on the Definition tab of a data transform.
Value mode properties store single strings of data

Briefly describe the two types such as text, numbers, or dates. Page mode
of property modes. properties act as a container for value mode
properties.
Where do most data Most data transforms occur between assignments.

transforms occur in a process
flow?
You are using pyDefault to set You use the manager property as the Target and
the manager property to "Sharon Smith" as the Source.
Sharon Smith. What do you use
as your Target and Source
values?
Pega Study
What action Guide
is defined in The Apply Data Transform action.
pyDefault to ensure that
pySetFieldDefaults is invoked
when a case is created?
What data transform feature The superclass feature

do you use when you want to
set a different default value for
the same property within a
hierarchy of subclasses?
When you create data You give each data transform the same name.
transforms in a class hierarchy
and want to use the superclass
feature, how do you name
each data transform?
In an event reservation Set .Location as the target property equal to

application, you are .Destination as the source property.
configuring a Select Flights
view in which in which the user
enters the destination
(.Destination). Later in the life
cycle, you want to display the
destination value as the
location (.Location) value in a
Hotel Reservation view. How
do you configure the data
transform?
Pega
The caseStudy Guide
type hierarchy in Select the Call superclass data transform option in
your insurance application each of the subcase type data transforms.
consists of three case types:
Claim (top level), Personal In each subcase type data transform, set the work
Injury (subcase type of Claim), urgency to the required value.
maintenance, you do not want
transforms. However, you want
to set work urgency to
different values in each
subcase type. What two
(Choose Two)
Select the Call superclass data

transform option in each of the
subcase type data transforms.
Select the Call superclass data

transform option in the Claims
data transform and clear the
option in the Personal Injury
and Emergency Care data
transforms.
In each subcase type data

transform, set the work
urgency to the required value.
In the Claims data transform,

for each subcase type,
configure an Update Page
action and set the work

Pega
urgency Study
value. Guide
You have added a page list Set .Dependents(1).Relationship to "Not Applicable"

the default value of "Not
Applicable." How do you
configure the
requirement?
In which two of the following Set default values when creating a case
data transform? (Choose Two) Copy data from one page to another
Set default values when

creating a case
Execute a flow action
Copy data from one page to

another
Create properties after the


Pega Studyshould
Which technique Guide
you Use procedural processing by calling a data
use if you want to update transform from a flow action.
form?

What are the three A target property, an expression, and a source

components in a declare property
expression?
A declare expression in a A target property from another expression

network can use which
property as a source
property?
Where are the source values In Case Designer, the source values are entered in
entered when creating declare the Calculation field. In Designer Studio, the source
expressions in Case Designer values are entered in the Expression field.
and Designer Studio?
When does an expression When the application references the property by

using backward chaining name
update its target property?
performance?

Pega Studyshould
Which technique Guide
you Use procedural processing by calling a data
form?


expression?

property?
2/13/23, 3:02 PM Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega Academy Study Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega Academy Study Study
Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega Academy Study


7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
If a loan applicant resides in Canada, add a legally

required disclosure to the confirmation email
acknowledging the submission of their loan
request.
Which situation is best
addressed through *Circumstancing allows you to adjust execution of a
circumstancing? process step based on case conditions. Altering
the content of correspondence based on a specific
condition, such as the state of residence for a loan
applicant, is a common use case for
circumstancing.
https://quizlet.com/gb/306106286/pegacsakpm03pega-academy-study-flash-cards/ 1/14

An application uses an activity to add a customer
information to a system of record.
Which rule warning do you
address by justifying the *Writing data to a system of record may require use
current design? of an activity, even though activity use triggers a
guardrail violation. In this situation, the violation
should be justified.
If a timesheet is rejected, it can be corrected and

Which requirement would be resubmitted.
alternate stage when defining *Alternate stages are those stages that are not a
a case type? part of the "normal" course of events, but must be
available under certain circumstances such as this.
If a timesheet is rejected, it can be corrected and

Which requirement would be resubmitted.
alternate stage when defining *Alternate stages are those stages that are not a
a case type? part of the "normal" course of events, but must be
available under certain circumstances such as this.
Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega Academy Study the primary processing unit

A case is considered
(parent case) of a business transaction, while a child
case is any related case that represents work that
must be completed to resolve the parent case.
*A case is considered the primary work item. A child

case represents additional work that must be
completed to resolve the primary work item.
Select two statements that A case represents the processes, data, and work
best describe the relationship parties involved in completing a business
between a case and a child transaction. A child case typically focuses on a
case. (Choose Two) subset of data relative to a parent case and usually
involves different work parties than the parent case.
*A (parent) case typically includes various

processes, data, and work parties needed to
complete a business transaction. A child case
represents work that can be executed outside of
the context of the parent case, but resolving the
parent case depends on the child case being
completed first.
You have a case type for Data is propagated when the credit check child
account opening which has a case is created.
credit check child case. You
have configured data *Data is only propagated on case creation.
propagation on the account
case for the credit check
subcase. Which of the
following statements
described the data
propagation feature?
Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega Academy Studyto set properties values on a

Use data transforms
given page, whether they are initial values or
updated values.
*This is a very common use case for data

transforms.
Select the statements that best
describe the purpose of a data Use data transforms to map data from a source to a
transform. (Choose Two) target, and perform any conversions needed to
achieve the intended mapping results.
*Use a data transform to define how to take source

data values — data that is in one format and class —
and turn them into data of another format and class
(the destination or target).
Given this partial user story: Value Group
Customer must provide at *Use a Value Group property to create a property

least one of the following that can contain an unordered group of single
three telephone numbers: values.
•Home
•Office
•Mobile
Which property mode should

be used to collect and identify
this phone number by name?
An application includes the Page List

property reference
.Customer.Assets(3).AssetType. *A Page List is used to create a property that can
contain an ordered list of embedded pages.
The property type of
.Assets(3) is a ________________.
Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega
Two forms for an online Academy Studyfor the taxes and grand total
Backward chaining
shopping process use a
declarative network to *The values will be updated only when the second
calculate values. The first form form is opened.
contains fields that display the
item total amounts and the
order total amount. The
second form includes fields
that display the taxes and the
grand total that will be
charged to the user's credit
card. Which declare
expression configuration
would you use so that all the
values on the second form are
calculated only when the user
reaches the form?
A request is rejected if it has not been resolved by

the end of the Deadline interval.
*Updating the status of a case is a very common

Which two requirements are
escalation action.
examples of an escalation
action on a service level
An email is sent to the assignee's manager if the
agreement? (Choose Two)
assignment is unresolved at the end of the
Deadline interval.
*Sending email is a very common escalation action.
Pega.CSA.KPM.03.Pega Academy
Paragraph Study
*Paragraph rules are used to include strings of text

in correspondence.
Which three rule types can
you reference in a Section
correspondence rule to
provide content for the *Section rules are used to include content from
correspondence? (Choose user forms in correspondence.
Three)
Property
*Property rules are used to include case data in

correspondence.
An insurance claim process Add a Send Email Smart Shape to the deny
includes an assignment in connector leaving the review assignment.
which a manager reviews
claims. If the claim is denied, *The Smart Shape automatically sends email when
an email is automatically sent the case is resolved.
to the user and the case is
resolved.

process to send this
correspondence?
An email correspondence Include contents in a paragraph rule and reference

contains instructions for filling it in your correspondence.
out a form. The instructions
contain images which illustrate *Paragraphs present formatted text that can include
how to fill in fields. The colors, fonts, styles, and images.
instructions are used in various
correspondences used by
your company. Which is the
best way to include the
instructions?

Sending a text message when a case is resolved.
In which situation is the use of
an activity necessary? *You would use the CorrNew activity in a Utility
shape.
A step in an activity for Specify pyWorkParty as a step page.

creating correspondence calls
another activity to send *This step page provides data context during the
correspondence to all the execution of this step.
parties listed on the
pyWorkParty page.

first activity to achieve the
desired behavior?
You create a form that you None

want to add to your process.
In which flow shape would you *You add forms to flow actions, which are defined
add your form? in connectors.
A loan request application Academy Study
Decision tree
includes an approval process
as follows: *A decision tree uses if-then-else evaluations.
Requests for an amount

greater than USD30,000 are
reviewed by a credit manager
or a vice president. If the
customer's credit score is less
than 720, then the request is
reviewed by a vice president.
Otherwise, the request is
reviewed by a credit manager.
Requests for USD30,000 or
less are reviewed by a loan
officer.
Which rule would you use to

automatically advance the
request to the correct user?
When condition
*A when condition is used to evaluate a Boolean

logical statement involving comparisons among
values of properties to return true or false.
rules can be used to direct
case processing in a flow?
*Decision table
(Choose Two)
A decision table is used to derive a value that has

one of a few possible outcomes, where each
outcome can be detected by a test condition.
You are adding a date of birth Use a validate rule to test the date.
field to a job application form.
You want to make sure that the *A validate rule can use a function to test the date.
user enters a date in the past.
How would you support this
requirement?
A form contains a text field for Academy Study
Specify an edit validate rule in the property used
entering a U.S. postal code. by the text field.
You want to make sure that the
user enters five digits in the *An edit validate rule can test the field pattern, in
field. What rule would you use this case for five digits.
to enforce this requirement?
An online computer Configure an auto-complete control using a data

equipment vendor maintains page as the data source.
an inventory database of more
than 1000 items. While *A data page allows you to source data from the
shopping, users select items database. The autocomplete allows the user to filter
from a list. the list of items as they type.

field so that it displays the
items?
An application that processes Create the fields for the spouse in a separate layout
loan requests must collect and use a visible when condition to determine
information from borrowers to when the fields for the spouse should appear or be
check their credit report. If a hidden.
borrower is married, the
borrower must provide this *Every extra unit of information in a dialogue
information for a spouse as competes with the relevant units of information and
well. For each person, the diminishes their relative visibility. Use the visible
application requires a first when feature whenever appropriate so that users
name, last name, and taxpayer are not inundated with information until needed.
ID.
What is the best way to

Users can access an apartment Academy Study
Use a dynamic layout.
search application from
laptops and mobile phones. *You can configure a dynamic layout to arrange UI
Pictures of the apartments, elements in different formats at different screen
descriptions, and agent sizes.
information are organized in
columns.

screen to accommodate both
laptops and mobile displays?
You are configuring a grid Use two action sets: one for the right-click event,
layout so that a row is set in and one for the up key and down key events.
focus when a user right-clicks
a row, uses the up key, or uses *You can combine the focus and edit action for the
the down key. In addition, right-click event.
when the user clicks a row, it is
shown in edit mode.
How do you configure the grid

An employee medical Add a visible when condition to the section

coverage form contains a containing information about the spouse.
check box to indicate whether
the employee has a spouse. *You use the when condition to test whether the
When a user selects the check check box value is true or false.
box, the form displays a
section that includes additional
fields for entering information
about the spouse.

form?
Your organization replaces Academy Study
Create a Weeks Until Replacement column and use
employee laptops two years a function in the column to calculate the value.
from the date the laptop was
issued. A manager asks you to *A function can be used to calculate the number of
create a report that shows, for weeks remaining based on the Issue Date and two-
each employee, the number of year deadline.
weeks until the replacement
date. Report columns include
Employee ID, Laptop ID, and
Issue Date. How would you
configure the report definition
to provide the requested
information?
A report contains columns for Office location column equals Atlanta.

case IDs, creation dates,
managers, and office *This condition generates a report that includes
locations. How do you only cases created in Atlanta.
configure a report filter
condition so that it displays
only cases created in the
Atlanta office?
A data page has the Refresh if Depends on when it is accessed

Older Than field set to five
minutes. When will the data *A data page is refreshed on the first access after it
page reload? was marked stale.
Consider a purchase request To store options for the priority of a purchase

case. In which of the following request
local data source? *Use a local data source to store reference data.
In a purchase application you Academy
data page Study
need to retrieve product
details from the product *A data page is used to retrieve or read data from
catalog. There is a SOAP an external system.
connector configured for
integration with the product
catalog. The connector should
be invoked from a(n) __________.
You want to enable external Service

systems to retrieve the claim
history for a given customer *A service rule allows you to expose a service.
from a Pega claims application. Pega is acting as the service and the external
What component is required system as the client.
to implement this
requirement?
To map the columns of a database table to

properties in a data class, to facilitate access to the
contents of the database table.
Select the statement that best
describes the use of the *The Database Table Class Mapping tool provides a
Database Table Class Mapping wizard that generates all the artifacts needed to
tool. (Choose One) interact with reference data in an external database.
These artifacts include a data class, a database
table instance and a link between those two
artifacts.
The Clipboard tool

Which tool do you use to view
case data currently in
*The Clipboard tool is used to review case data
memory?
currently in memory.
When running an application, Academy Study
The Tracer tool.
you notice that a field contains
an incorrect value. Which *The Tracer tool records the execution of every rule
developer tool allows you used in an application. For each executed rule, the
analyze rule execution in the Tracer tool records the contents of the Clipboard
application to determine how at the time the rule was used, and the outcome of
the incorrect value was rule execution.
introduced?
Which tool would you use to Live UI

evaluate a user form and
identify which properties use *Live UI indicates properties used in declarative
declarative processing to processing with the letter "D".
calculate the values?
An organization wants to Build and test the application before rolling it out
automate its existing expense for review by interested parties to ensure the
reporting process.Which two application is ready for release
actions should the
organization take in order to Use DCO to enter business requirements for the
follow Pega's best practices application to facilitate direct engagement of IT
for application design? and business resources.
(Choose Two)

Select two benefits of are easier to maintain and have fewer defects.
following Pega's guardrails.
(Choose Two) Guardrails help developers to track compliance
with Pega's best practices.
You are assigned to a team to Ensure all team members have a common
develop a case life cycle understanding of how a case is processed and
design for an application. Why resolved.
would you design the case life
cycle?
You are developing a case life Academy Study
Collect personal information
cycle for a human resources
application. The first stage
contains a single process
named Collect Candidate
Information. Which one of the
following steps would you
choose to include in the
Collect Candidate Information
process?
You are adding steps to a Confirm employee

named correctly?

update the _____________?
A loan origination case To a work queue

requires the loan application
be routed to an underwriter
for verification. Any
underwriter in the department
can complete the verification.
How would you route the
verification assignment?
The goal milestone in a service The amount of time in which the case or step
level defines: should be completed
2/13/23, 3:35 PM PEGA CSSA 8.5 Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Study
PEGA CSSA 8.5

Book of Proof
2nd Edition • ISBN: 9780989472104
Richard Hammack
340 solutions
Production rulesets have at least one unlocked

ruleset version in the production environment.
Production rulesets include rules that are updated
in the production environment. Production rulesets
Production Ruleset
are commonly used for delegated rules. However,
production rulesets can apply to any use case that
requires rules to be updated in a production
environment.
Property circumstancing,Circumstancing by date,

Single-variable circumstancing
Template Circumstance
https://quizlet.com/580603122/pega-cssa-85-flash-cards/ 1/14
PEGA CSSA 8.5 1) Unavailable 2)Rules in inapplicable rulesets

In this step, the rule resolution algorithm uses the
operator's Ruleset list to determine which
candidate rules the operator can access.
1)To consider the rule in rule resolution, select

Available.
To exclude the rule from rule resolution and
disable validation logic so that you can continue to
edit the rule even if errors occur, select Not
available.
Rule Resolution
2)To consider the rule during rule resolution but to
stop processing and return an error to the user
when the user selects the rule, select Blocked.
3)To consider the rule during rule resolution but to
prevent users from extending the rule by copying it
to a different ruleset, unless the ruleset is a higher
version of the current ruleset, select Final.
4)To exclude the rule and all instances with the
same name, in previous versions of the same major-
version ruleset, from rule resolution, select
Withdrawn.
The GetNextWork selection algorithm in Pega

Platform identifies the next assignment on which
users can work. GetNextWork uses assignment
GetNextWork urgency (priority) when selecting the next
assignment for users. The algorithm identifies the
assignment with the highest (greatest) urgency to
determine the next assignment to perform.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Work-.UrgencyUpdate - A flow action that you can

call while processing a case. The integer that you
provide is added to the current urgency of the
case.
Work-.pyUrgencyWorkAdjust - A property that you
Manual changes to urgency can set to increase or decrease the current urgency
of a case. The value that you provide is evaluated
by the Work-.pxUrgencyWork declare expression.
Assign-.pyUrgencyAssignAdjust - A property that
you can set to increase or decrease the current
urgency of an assignment.
Split Join You use the Split Join shape to call

multiple independent processes that operate in
parallel and, later, rejoin.
A Split For Each shape allows you to run one
subprocess multiple times by iterating through a set
Parallel processing in Pega
of records stored in a page list or page group.
applications
The spinoff option in the Subprocess shape allows
you to run the subprocess in parallel with the main
flow. The main process does not wait for the
subprocess to complete before proceeding. The
subprocess does not rejoin the main process.
start working on an assignment by configuring pre-

processing for a flow action. Flow actions can call a
data transform, an activity, and a robotic
call from flow
automation, which gives you a possibility to meet
your unique business requirements connected to
data manipulation in a case.
Pre- and post-processing data Pre- and post-processing data transforms and
transforms and activities run activities run every time you invoke the flow action.
every time you invoke the flow
action.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Edit validate rules are defined on properties, and
not on activities or flow actions. Edit validate rules
are used for client-side validation, which means that
the value users enter is validated immediately
Edit-validate rule without referencing the server. Validation occurs
when users make a change to the entered value. To
apply an edit validate rule to a property, reference
the edit evaluate rule on the Advanced tab of the
property rule form, in the Use validate field.
Validate rule. -
Edit Validate rule.-using java code, returns bool
value
Edit input rule - formatting input. uses Java
What is validate rules
Constraints rule. used in forward chaining,
declarative rule
Validation through Property definition and Control.
Custom javascript validation.
Ensures that a valid data is entered in form or

validates data received from other system.
When a field fails validation, the rule adds an error
message and prevents successful submission of
Validate rule.
form.
We can add validation for any property rule and we
can customize the error message.
Mostly used in Flow actions and Activity rules.
Call the queue processor using either a Run in

background step or Queue-For-Processing method
in an activity. The parameters for each option differs
depending on whether you use the standard queue
Standard and dedicated processor or a dedicated queue processor.
queue processor Standard queue processor
Specify the activity to run on the queued item
Choose a locking option
Specify an optional access group to establish
context (optional)
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Dedicated queue processor

Specify the queue processor
Dedicated queue processor For delayed queuing, provide a Date time property
for the queued object, at which time the system
processes the queued item.
You use the Performance You use the Performance Analyzer (PAL) to
Analyzer (PAL) to understand understand the system resources consumed by
the system resources processing a single requestor session.
consumed by processing a
single requestor session.
You use the Performance Profiler to collect

Performance Profiler performance data for individual steps in a data
transform.
Circumstancing allows you to customize the

behavior of your application to address each
Circumstancing
exception. You create a variant of a rule tailored to
a specific circumstance.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Immediately

Assignments that are associated with this service-
level agreement are immediately sent to a worklist
or a work queue, and users can begin work
immediately.
Dynamically defined on a property
Assignments associated with this service-level
agreement use a DateTime property value that you
define to determine when users are expected to
Service Level Agreement
start work on assignments.
Timed delay
Assignments associated with this service-level
agreement start the assignment after a period of
time. You define the delay period (in Days, Hours,
and Minutes) before users are expected to begin
work on assignments. For example, you can set a
start time for an assignment to begin seven days
after it is created.
Field values provide an alternate method for

defining allowed values for properties. Field values
enable you to manage the list of allowed values
separately from the property. Managing the
allowed values separately from the property
enables you to reuse a single property, and
customize the allowed values based on the context
of the property. Field values also make it easier to
Field values localize words, phrases, and sentences that appear
on portal displays, reports, and user forms.
For example, in a Pega Platform™ application,

every case instance has a status, which changes as
the case progresses through the case life cycle. The
status of a case is set using the property named
.pyStatusWork. The list of allowed values for setting
.pyStatusWork is defined by using field values.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Assignment reports

Assignments are created during a case life cycle,
typically where some form of user interaction is
required. The two main types of assignment objects
created are worklist (class Assign-Worklist) and
workbasket (class Assign-WorkBasket), which are
Assignment reports
mapped to the database tables pc_assign_worklist
and pc_assign_workbasket respectively by using the
associated class mappings. When an assignment is
completed, the assignment object is deleted and
another is created following the processing in the
steps and stages of a case type.
Attribute-based access control (ABAC) is used to

control access to an object (case, report, property)
Attribute-based access control
by comparing characteristics of the object to
(ABAC)
attributes of the operator requesting access to the
object.
Pega Platform has two options for performing

Types of background
system tasks on objects in the background: Queue
processing
Processor rules and Job Scheduler rules.
Admin Studio is a workspace for system

administrators, database administrators, and
security administrators that provides runtime
information and configuration options for system
resources.
In Admin Studio, you can observe system execution
Admin Studio
at runtime, such as monitoring job schedulers and
queue processors, and managing system nodes.
For example, as part of a software audit, a
developer uses Admin Studio to identify active
requestors, both human and system users, and
monitor their usage.
The ServiceExport directory is a subdirectory of the

ServiceExport directory
temporary files directory on the server.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Pega Platform™ always gathers cumulative

resource statistics. Use the Performance Analyzer
(PAL) to understand the system resources
Performance Analyzer (PAL)
consumed by processing a single requestor
session. PAL works on existing data; it does not
degrade processing.
Use the Profiler to obtain a detailed trace of

performance information about the execution of
activities, when condition rules, and data transforms
executed by your requestor session. The Profiler
traces every execution (in all Threads) of rules of
Performance Profiler
these three types in all rulesets. The Performance
Profiler should be run in conjunction with
Performance Analyzer to narrow down the specific
step (Performance Profiler) of the cause
(Performance Analyzer).
The two prerequisites for creating a branch rule for

parallel development are a team development
creating a branch rule
application and an access group with application
developers that references the team application.
In a decision table, the values in a column evaluate

against the same property/operator pair, such as
Account type =, to return a value or property.
Developers can use a decision table when they
have to evaluate many combinations of the same
Decision table
set of properties or conditions to return one value
or property. For example, a company uses the
number of years at the company and ratings on five
employee evaluation metrics to determine bonus
eligibility.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Each branch in a decision tree evaluates the

property/operator pair against a single value to
perform an action, such as return a value or
evaluate a nested condition. Developers can use a
decision tree when they must evaluate conditions
on different properties that may be dependent on
other conditions. Each branch in a decision tree is
evaluated, and all branches that evaluate to true
perform the action that is described after, such as
decision tree
continuing the evaluation to the nested condition.
For example, a language learning app is running
extensive A/B testing, where some users receive
hearts, and other users receive stars for their
efforts. The values for hearts and stars are
collected in separate properties. A decision tree
evaluates the different rewards users are eligible
for based on the number of hearts or stars
associated with the account.
Ruleset validation does not affect rule resolution at

run time but is applied only at design time.
Ruleset validation
https://academy.pega.com/topic/ruleset-
validation/v1/in/2866/5221
One major difference between decision tables and

decision tables when conditions is that decision tables can return
results other than true/false.
A work group identifies a cross-functional team that

contains a manager, a set of operators, and a work
queue.
work group To determine which model to use, write the
requirement in a simple sentence, beginning the
sentence with "When." If approval conditions exist,
use the authority matrix model.
https://academy.pega.com/topic/harnesses/v1/in/2
Harness
866/5286
PEGA CSSA 8.5 https://onestoppega.com/decisioning-

declarative/declare-index-in-pega/
Declare Indexes in Pega are rule instances of class

Rule-Declare-Index.
Declare Indexes are used to expose aggregate
properties like Page/List/Group for reporting
purposes.
Declare Indexes belongs to the declarative
network and are fired automatically without any
invocation.
Declare Indexes
Declare indexes can be extended for Rule-, Data-
and Work- classes.
We can use OOTB activity
RecreateIndexesForClass to fire declare index for
the in-flight cases.
OOTB declare indexes PartyURI, Skills, etc.. can be
used readily for reporting purposes.
System-Declare-Changes keeps track of all the
declarative rules in the system failing which will not
trigger the declarative rules. Revalidation of the
rule can help in that case.
Use Queue Processors and Job Schedulers to

PEGA 7.3 to 8 replace standard and advanced agent types found
in older versions of Pega Platform.
The withdrawn rule masks all lower versions of the

non-circumstanced rules. The circumstanced rules
withdrawn rule have their own availability value. The rule request
meets the condition for the High Risk
circumstanced rule.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Function alias are rule type of class Rule-Alias-
Function.
Alias can be created for a SQL expression or a Java
function.
Alias rule created for a SQL expression should be
of class Ember-UserFunction & can only be
referred by developers in the report definition rule
or by the users (non-developers) in the report
viewer while creating or configuring reports.
Functions Alias rule created for a Java function can be of any
class other than Ember-UserFunction & can be
used by the users in any of the business rules
namely decision table, decision tree, when rules,
map value, etc.
Function alias promotes reusability.
Function alias can be sourced as a pure SQL/ using
JSP tags/ using Java snippets based on the need.
A function alias can also invoke another function
alias by using the function signature.
types of classes Work classes, Integration classes, Data classes
Standard Agent changed to Q-processor,

pega 7 to 8 Agents
Advanced agents changed to Job Schedulers
PEGA CSSA 8.5 https://community.pega.com/sites/default/files/hel

p_v61sp2/concepts/concepts2/conceptsjavadevelo
pers.htm
ProcessCommanderterm
Rule type
Similar Java, XML, ordatabase concepts
expressions-Java expressionsmodelsRule-Obj-
Modelinitializers, constructorsactivitiesRule-Obj-
Activitypublic Java instance methods with a void
return typemethodRule-Methodsystem-supplied
Relating Java terms to Process stored procedurepropertiesRule-Obj-
Commander terms Propertyinstance variablesSingle Value property
Java String objectrule resolution
inheritanceproperty of mode Page List repeating
groupoverridden rule overloaded methodWhen
condition ruleRule-Obj-Whenif statementdecision
tree ruleRule-Declare-DecisionTreenested if
statementType for Value mode properties primitive
data types.Most Java primitive data types are
available as Process Commander Types.primary
page of an activity this keywordultimate base
class@baseclassObject class — topmost classValue
Group property mode HashMap
IsInPageList,IsInPageListWhen CountInPageList
important pega methods IndexInPageList LengthOfPageList
pzRemoveDuplicatesFromListPage
An application contains a collection of rules, or a

ruleset, packaged primarily for distribution. The
New Application wizard creates the initial
application ruleset vs application rulesets.
production ruleset Production rulesets have at least one unlocked
ruleset version in the production environment.
Production rulesets include rules that are updated
in the production environment.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Ruleset validation

Ruleset validation is performed every time a rule is
saved. It guarantees that referenced rules are
Ruleset validation available on the target system when the ruleset is
promoted. Ruleset validation does not affect rule
resolution at run time but is applied only at design
time.
Application validation mode

If the AV mode is used, rules in the ruleset can
Application validation reference all rules in the rulesets defined in the:
Same application
Rulesets belonging to any built-on application
Edit validate is client side validation

Edit Validate Use an Edit validate rule to test whether an entered
value matches a required pattern.
Access Group
An Access Group record is the starting point for the
RBAC access control model. Each user belongs to
Access Group at least one access group. An access group
identifies the available application, default portal,
and one or more assigned access roles for a group
of users.
Access Role Name

Each access group references one or more Access
Role Name records, or roles.
An access role name record identifies the name of
Access Role Name
an access role, and aggregates all of the individual
access of role to object and access deny records
for that role. No access control configuration
occurs on the access role name record itself.
PEGA CSSA 8.5 Pega Platform™ provides two types of data

transforms that are used to automatically set
default property values and page properties when
you create a case: pyDefault and
pySetFieldDefaults.
Tip: As a best practice, use pySetFieldDefaults to
pyDefault and
set values for UI fields, and use pyDefault for
pySetFieldDefaults
properties not referenced in the UI. For example,
configure pySetFieldDefaults to set the default
value for the Reservation date field on a view to
reserve a rental vehicle and configure pyDefault to
set the default urgency for assignments for the case
type.
2/13/23, 3:42 PM Pegasystems Pega Certified System Architect (PCSA) Flashcards | Quizlet
Pegasystems Pega Certified System Architect (PCS... Study
Pegasystems Pega Certified System Architect

(PCSA)

7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
NO.1 How do you propagate D.Configure the Create Case shape to copy
data to a new child case in specified properties.
Pega Express?
A. Configure a data page to
copy specified properties.
B. Configure a case calculation
to copy specified properties.
C. Configure the Update Case
shape to copy specified
properties.
D.Configure the Create Case
shape to copy specified
properties.
https://quizlet.com/520244832/pegasystems-pega-certified-system-architect-pcsa-flash-cards/ 1/39
Pegasystems Pega Certified

NO.2 Your online shopping System Architect (PCS...
A. Thread
application serves
international customers. You
need to define a Data Page
that holds currency exchange
rates. All users accessing the
application need to use the
information.
The Scope of this Data Page
should be set to _____.
A. Thread
B.Application
C. Node
D.Requestor
NO.3 Which two statements A. Reports are used to assess process

demonstrate the role of a performance.
report? (Choose Two) D.Reports are used to source a list of selectable
A. Reports are used to assess items while working in an assignment.
process performance.
B. Reports are used to update
data in a database.
C. Reports are used to select
items from a list while working
in an assignment.
D.Reports are used to source a
list of selectable items while
working in an assignment.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.4 You are building a form Certified System
A. Edit the field Architect (PCS...
group list property and set data
that contains a list of courses. access to copy data from a data page.
Users will select the courses in D. Enable section editing and configure the
which they want to enroll. selection check box by removing the caption.
Which two tasks can you
perform in Pega Express?
(Choose Two)
A. Edit the field group list
property and set data access
to copy data from a data page.
B. Configure the view in Run
mode and change the order of
columns in the view.
C. Create a field group list
property and make the
property a data reference.
D. Enable section editing and
configure the selection check
box by removing the caption.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.5 In an application sellingCertified System
B. Build Architect
the OrderSummary (PCS...
section with a layout
office supplies, the Payment inside to group the order items, similar to the
form displays order items and Payment section.
a dynamic layout.
You find out later that the
OrderSummary form also
needs to display the order
items.
How do you implement the UI
so that the order items display
is shared between Payment
and
OrderSummary forms?
A. Reuse the Payment section
in the OrderSummary form and
circumstance the section rule
to hide payment information.
B. Build the OrderSummary
section with a layout inside to
group the order items, similar
to the Payment section.
C. Embed the Payment section
in the OrderSummary section.
D. Convert the Payment
section layout that contains
order items to a section, and
embed this section in the
OrderSummary section.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.7 You have created a newCertified System
D.Sort Architect
the manager column (PCS...
report that contains a list of
employees, hire dates, and
managers. You have been
asked to display each manager
in a row. Beneath each
manager row, you must list the
manager's employees and
their hire dates.
How do you support this
request?
A. Group the manager column
B. Filter the manager column
C. Summarize the manager
column
D.Sort the manager column
NO.8 As part of the case A. As part of the stage configuration

design, after someone
completes a purchase the
application shouldrsend a
confirmation email. How do
you design the case life cycle
to send the email?
A. As part of the stage
configuration
B. As an alternate stage
C. As part of the case
configuration
D.As a separate process step
Pegasystems PegadoCertified
NO.9 Which two conditions A. ASystem Architect
property value (PCS...
is set correctly by a data
you test with a unit test? transform.
(Choose Two) D.An application is successfully migrated to a test
A. A property value is set system.
correctly by a data transform.
B. A data page populates
without any errors.
C. An application displays user
views for 20 users within three
seconds.
D.An application is
successfully migrated to a test
system.
NO.10 Which requirement is B. A transaction review is completed within 24

satisfied by configuring a hours.
service level agreement?
A. Requests from customers
with elite status go to a
dedicated work group.
B. A transaction review is
completed within 24 hours.
C. Users are notified when
they receive an assignment.
D.Transaction dispute cases
are considered more urgent
than address change cases.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.13 You want to unit test a Certified System
A. Copy Architect
data from (PCS... page.
an existing clipboard
rule. To ensure that the rule
executes as intended, you
need to
valid data.
to populate the clipboard
before testing the rule?
(Choose Two)
A. Copy data from an existing
clipboard page.
B. Run a data transform to
create the test page.
C. Configure a validate rule to
populate the needed data.
D.Configure an assertion to
define the required data.
NO.14 In a purchase request A. step that routes to the manager

case type, you have the
following requirement:
Purchase requests
should automatically go to a
manager of an employee.
To meet this requirement, you
design a case with
a_______________.
A. step that routes to the
manager
B. change stage step to allow
the employee to route to the
manager
C. stage to route requests to
the manager
D.process that routes to the
manager

NO.15 A list report includes Systemthe
C. Summarize Architect (PCS...
purchase requests column by
columns for purchase requests count.
and regional cost centers. A
the regional cost centers.
report definition?
A. Use the purchase requests
column to group the cost
centers.
B. Filter the results so that the
report includes only cost
center and purchase requests.
C. Summarize the purchase
requests column by count.
D.Summarize the regional cost
centers by count.
NO.16 A company requires that B. Data-Party-Operator

the application.
the patient as an instance of
which class?
A. Data-Party-Person
B. Data-Party-Operator
C. Data-Party-Org
D. Data-Party-Com
Pegasystems Pega
NO.17 Select the three Certified
benefits System
B. Empower Architect
project (PCS...
participants to review
of using Direct Capture of development progress.
Objectives (DCO). (Choose C. Facilitate collaboration between business and IT
Three) around working models.
A. Generate the latest code D. Automate custom business processes.
from business-friendly
metaphors.
B. Empower project
C. Facilitate collaboration
D. Automate custom business
processes.
E. Enter and store business
requirements in the
application.
NO.18 What are the minimum B. One action and one event
A. Two actions and one event
B. One action and one event
C. One action, one event, and
one condition
D. One action and one
condition
NO.19 Which of these options D.Alignment of field values

are typically configured on a
A. Align columns and rows to
present data in a spreadsheet
B. Label Positioning
C. Number of columns in each
row
D.Alignment of field values
Pegasystems Pega
NO.20 Which requirement canCertified System
D. An Architect
application (PCS...
routes upgrade requests for US
be implemented through customers to one work queue, and requests for
circumstancing? European customers to a different work queue.
A. An application establishes a
goal of four hours to adjust
claims for platinum customers.
For other customers, the
application establishes a goal
of one business day.
B. An application sets the
default shipping option for
orders that exceed USD100 to
two-day delivery. Otherwise,
the default option is five-day
delivery.
C. An application audits
insurance claims that an
insurance adjuster values at
USD10000 or greater.
Otherwise, the claim is
approved.
D. An application routes
upgrade requests for US
customers to one work queue,
and requests for European
customers to a different work
queue.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.21 To qualify for an instantCertified System
A. Use two Edit Architect (PCS...
Validate rules: one for age and one
loan, an applicant must be for income.
older than 21 and have a
monthly income of at least
USD2000. How do you
enforce these restrictions?
A. Use two Edit Validate rules:
one for age and one for
income.
B. Use a single Validate rule
with two conditions: one for
age and one for income.
C. Configure the UI controls to
only accept values greater
than 21 for age and USD2000
for income.
D.Use two Validate rules: one
for age and one for income.

NO.23 In a hotel reservation Systemaction
C. Configure Architect
sets on the(PCS...
date fields to
application, a form displays a refresh the section when the date values change.
by users.
form to refresh the hotel list
whenever the check-in or
check-out date
changes?
A. Display the hotel in an
embedded section with a
visible when condition.
B. Configure edit validates on
the date fields to refresh the
section when the date values
change.
C. Configure action sets on the
date fields to refresh the
change.
D.Configure an action set on
the hotel lijt display to refresh
the section when the hotel list
changes.
Pegasystems
NO.25 You have beenPega Certified
asked to System
A. Select Architect
the option (PCS...
in the Report Browser that
create a report definition that allows users to view your report.
includes information about the C. Select the report definition option that displays
sales offices and sales your report in the Report Browser.
representatives. The manager
wants to access the report in
the Report Browser in the user
portal. The manager also
wants to include the report in
a new report category
specifically for the sales group.
What two configurations are
required to support this
request? (Choose Two)
A. Select the option in the
Report Browser that allows
users to view your report.
B. Create a report category
rule for sales office reports.
C. Select the report definition
option that displays your
report in the Report Browser.
D.Add a report category for
sales group reports in the
Report Browser.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.26 Users can access an Certified System
A. Use Architect
a dynamic layout with a(PCS...
responsive
apartment hunting application breakpoint at 800 pixels to change from inline-grid
from different devices with triple to inline-grid double format.
different
properties. By default, the
photos are
displayed in three columns.
When the screen width is less
than 800 pixels, the photos
should be
displayed in two columns.
A. Use a dynamic layout with a
responsive breakpoint at 800
pixels to change from inline-
grid triple to inline-grid
double format.
B. Use a column layout with a
pixels to hide the left column.
C. Circumstance the layout to
display different number of
columns at different screen
sizes.
D.Circumstance the section
rule to display different
number of columns at different
screen sizes.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.27 When processing an Certified System
D.Create Architect
an approval step with(PCS...
cascading approval.
auto accident claim, the
system requires three
approvals: Approval from the
adjuster who inspected the
car, approval from the medical
administrator who provided
medical care to the insured,
and approval from the
insurance agent who verified
the claim.
requirements so each
approver can work
independently?
A. Create three parallel
processes with approval
assignments.
B. Route to a workbasket
where all three roles have
access.
C. Create business logic to
route to the different
approvers.
D.Create an approval step with
cascading approval.
NO.28 In which two situations A. Defining valid values for a property

do you configure local data B. Caching data retrieved from an external system
storage? (Choose Two)
A. Defining valid values for a
property
B. Caching data retrieved from
an external system
C. Storing reference data as
part of the application
D.Saving case data in an
application
Pegasystems Pega
NO.30 Which three use cases Certified System Architect
C. Automatically (PCS...
calculate order total when users
demonstrate the Pega change quantities.
dynamic UI behavior? (Choose D. Display partner information fields when a screen
Three) loads for married applicants.
A. Display a message upon E.Display a shipping address section when users
form submission that a date select the Different than billing address check box.
field must be in the future.
B. Unmask a password field
when users click an icon.
C. Automatically calculate
order total when users change
quantities.
D. Display partner information
fields when a screen loads for
married applicants.
E.Display a shipping address
section when users select the
Different than billing address
check box.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.32 Users can select a Certified System
D. Use Architect
a circumstance (PCS...
on the check box property
check box to subscribe to a to create a rule variant that is effective when the
messaging service. Selecting check box is selected.
the check box displays a field
for a user to enter a mobile
phone number.
application to display a field
for entering a mobile phone
number only
selected?
A. Use a when condition in the
UI form to determine whether
to show the mobile phone
number field.
B. Use a when condition in the
flow to branch the flow based
on case data.
C. Use a when condition in a
data transform to determine
whether to show the mobile
phone number field.
D. Use a circumstance on the
check box property to create
a rule variant that is effective
selected.

NO.33 Consider the following SystemClaim
A. Investigate Architect (PCS...
scenario:
A customer files a fraud
complaint. The complaint is
investigated by a customer
service agent.
The customer service agent
may request additional
information from the customer.
The merchant is notified and
given 15 days to dispute the
fraud claim.
If the fraud claim is approved,
an affidavit is sent to the
customer and a refund is
posted to their account. How
do you name the step where
the agent investigates the
claim for fraud?
A. Investigate Claim
B. Claim Investigation
C. Fraud Claim
D.Investigate Fraud
Pegasystems
NO.34 You create an Pega Certified
C. ASystem
set of fieldsArchitect
to capture the(PCS...
shipping details
application to track package D. A work party to represent the customer
deliveries. E.A user view to enter the shipping details
Choose three elements that
are essential for this
A. A delivery cancellation child
case
B. A shipment tracking case
type
C. A set of fields to capture the
shipping details
D. A work party to represent
the customer
E.A user view to enter the
shipping details
NO.35 A customer wants to D.Function

copy the contents of a
previous order to their current
order. What rule type do you
use to copy the order
contents?
A. Data page
B. Data transform
C. Declare expression
D.Function
NO.37 Direct Capture of A. Accuracy

Objectives (DCO) aims to D. Performance
increase which two aspects of
application
delivery? (Choose Two)
A. Accuracy
B. Coding
C. Speed
D. Performance
Pegasystems
NO.38 You configurePega
an Certified System
C. Add Architect
one button (PCS...
and configure one action set. In
application to allow users to the action set, specify a click event with three
download a mobile app. When actions to open each vendor URL in a window.
users select one of the three Apply a when rule to each action to determine the
supported platforms (Android, correct URL.
iOS, or Windows Mobile), the
application opens a new
window pointing to the
appropriate app store.
behavior?
A. Add a button for each
platform and configure an
action set for each button. In
each action set, specify a click
event and add an action that
opens the vendor's URL in a
window.
B. Add one button and
configure three action sets. In
window.
C. Add one button and
configure one action set. In
the action set, specify a click
event with three actions to
open each vendor URL in a
window. Apply a when rule to
each action to determine the
correct URL.
D. Add three check boxes and
one button. For each check
box, configure an action set
with a click event to set the
value of the URL. For the
button, configure an action set
with a click event to open the
URL in a window.
Pegasystems Pega Certified System Architect (PCS...

NO.39 A bookseller maintains C. Add an autocomplete control and source the
a database of more than data using a data page.
10,000 book titles. You have
been asked to configure a
form that allows users to select
a book by title.
form?
A. Add a drop-down control
and source the data using a
data page.
B. Add an autocomplete
control and source the data
from the clipboard work page.
C. Add an autocomplete
control and source the data
using a data page.
D.Add a drop-down control
and source the data from the
property value used in the
control.
Pegasystems
NO.40 In processing Pega
a parentCertified System
D. Both C-l and Architect (PCS...
C-2 must be resolved before P-l
case P-l, two child cases C-l can be resolved.
and C-2 are created. Which of
the following statements is
correct about the processing
of P-l, C-l, and C-2?
A. P-l must be resolved before
either C-l or C-2 can be
resolved.
B. Either C-l or C-2 must be
resolved before P-l can be
resolved.
C. C-l must be resolved before
C-2 can be resolved.
D. Both C-l and C-2 must be
resolved before P-l can be
resolved.
NO.41 A data page holds C. 8:40

product information and has
set to 30
minutes.
The data page is created at
7:43. The user then performs
the following actions: 8:10 the
user
refreshes the product
information 8:45 the user
refreshes the product
information. At what time is the
data page reloaded?
A. 8:13
B. 8:10
C. 8:40
D.8:45

NO.42 Which two requirements System
C. Assign a newArchitect (PCS...
insurance claim to a case worker to
demonstrate the need to process.
configure correspondence? D.Phone a customer for additional information
(Choose Two) about the case.
A. Fax a new insurance claim
to the auto repair shop.
B. Text the customer with status
changes in an insurance claim.
C. Assign a new insurance
claim to a case worker to
process.
D.Phone a customer for
additional information about
the case.
NO.43 A requirement states: B. Configure checkout request as a child case of

When a business guest checks hotel review.
out of a hotel, the guest must
requirement.
A. Configure hotel review as a
spin-off case of the checkout
request.
B. Configure checkout request
as a child case of hotel review.
C. Configure both checkout
request and hotel review as
top-level cases.
D. Configure hotel review as a
child case of the checkout
request.

NO.44 Choose two scenarios C. ASystem Architect
purchase order (PCS...
request page with a summary
that you configure using of items. The order total price updates after the
procedural processing. customer changes a quantity.
(Choose Two) D. A flight booking page where customers can
A. A prescription order page adjust the location and date of the departure and
with a list of available return flights. The ticket prices recalculate after the
prescriptions sent from the customer chooses the "recalculate price" option.
customer's health care
provider. When the user opts
to fill one or more
prescriptions, the cost
summary updates.
B. A restaurant reservation
page in which the user
chooses a reservation fen e
and the system returns the
number of available tables.
C. A purchase order request
page with a summary of items.
The order total price updates
after the customer changes a
quantity.
D. A flight booking page
where customers can adjust
the location and date of the
departure and return flights.
The ticket prices recalculate
after the customer chooses the
"recalculate price" option.

NO.45 Consider the following System
B. Add Architect
a primary stage with at (PCS...
least one process to
requirement: the case life cycle.
The patient must be able to
modify physician details at any
time without impacting primary
case
processing.
this requirement?
A. Add a case-wide optional
action to the case life cycle.
B. Add a primary stage with at
least one process to the case
life cycle.
C. Add an alternate stage with
at least one process to the
case life cycle.
D. Add an assignment to the
case life cycle.
NO.46 While testing a business D.The Dependency Analyzer

process to approve an
expense report, you receive
an error. Which tool allows you
to review the rule execution to
determine the source of the
error?
A. The Tracer
B. The Clipboard tool
C. The Application Profiler
D.The Dependency Analyzer
Pegasystems
NO.47 A requirementPega
states: Certified System
D. Set Architect
the minimum (PCS...
and maximum values to "10" in a
The tax identification number text field.
must contain 10 digits. How do
you
this requirement?
A. Configure a validate rule to
test the tax identification
number pattern.
B. Use a decimal property type
and make the field required.
C. Use an edit validate rule
that validates the tax
identification number pattern.
D. Set the minimum and
maximum values to "10" in a
text field.
NO.48 You are implementing a A. Use a Validate rule to verify the mandatory fields
UI form collecting job have a value
applicant information. Users
must provide values to certain
fields before submitting the
form.
A. Use a Validate rule to verify
the mandatory fields have a
value
B. Configure the mandatory
fields as Required in the
section rule
C. Use multiple Validate rules
for each mandatory field
D.Use an Edit Validate rule to
verify if each of the mandatory
properties has a value
Pegasystems
NO.49 You have beenPega Certified
asked to Systemthe
D. Summarize Architect (PCS...
case ID column.
create a pie chart that shows
the number of cases each
manager has created. A list
report contains columns for
manager name, case ID, and
office.
report in order to create the
pie chart?
A. Group the case ID column.
B. Group the manager name
column.
C. Summarize the manager
name column.
D. Summarize the case ID
column.
NO.50 You are asked to build a A. Order Total

report listing customer order
cases with an Order Total value
over USD10000 sorted by
Creation date (pxCreateDate).
The report should display the
following three fields: Case ID
(pylD), Customer ID, and
Order Total.
Which property or property
combination should you
optimize to improve
performance?
A. Order Total
B. pxCreateDate
C. Customer ID and Order
Total
D.pxCreateDate and Order
Total
Pegasystems Pega
NO.51 An accident claim caseCertified System
A. Add a manualArchitect
approval step(PCS...
to the accident
creates a vehicle claim case claim case.
for each vehicle involved in an B.Add a wait shape to the accident claim case to
accident. wait until all vehicle claims have a status of
Which two configurations Resolved.
prevent the accident claim
(Choose Two)
A. Add a manual approval step
to the accident claim case.
B.Add a wait shape to the
accident claim case to wait
until all vehicle claims have a
status of Resolved.
C. Add each vehicle claim as a
child case of the accident
claim.
D.Add an optional process to
pause the accident case until
the vehicle claims are paid.

NO.53 The business process System Architect (PCS...
C. Repair
for an automobile insurance
claim consists of the following
phases:
* Submission: The customer
contacts a customer service
representative (CSR) to file the
claim.
* Review: An adjuster reviews
the claim, assesses the
damages to each vehicle, and
provides an
estimate of the cost of repairs.
* Repair: A third party
performs the repairs on each
vehicle, communicating with
the adjuster and customer as
necessary.
* Verification: After each
vehicle repair, the adjuster
closes the claim.
According to Pega best
practices, which phase can
you implement as a child
case?
A. Submission
B. Verification
C. Repair
D.Review
Pegasystems
NO.54 A requirementPega
states: ACertified System
A. Add Architect
a case-wide (PCS...
optional action to the workflow
customer can update an for the address submission.
address at any point during
case processing by
performing the following
steps.
1. The customer submits the
new address.
2. The application verifies that
the address matches postal
service requirements.
3. The customer then approves
the corrected address.
requirement?
A. Add a case-wide optional
action to the workflow for the
address submission.
B. Add a case-wide optional
process to the case workflow
to perform the address
change.
C. Add an alternate stage to
the case life cycle to change
the address.
D.Add a button to each
assignment to present the
customer with a form to submit
a new address.
Pegasystems
NO.56 Which two Pega Certified System
B. Pausing Architect
a case (PCS...time
until a predetermined
dependencies do you directly expires
enforce with a Wait step? D. Pausing a case until a user submits a specified
(Choose Two) value
A. Pausing a case until a new
child case is created
B. Pausing a case until a
predetermined time expires
C. Pausing a case until another
case (or all cases) reach a
specified status
D. Pausing a case until a user
submits a specified value

NO.57 A form listing nearby System
B. Set Architect
the importance (PCS...
of the Make reservation
restaurants has four columns: column to Primary.
Restaurant name C. Set the importance of the image column to
Restaurant location Other.
Thumbnail image of the F.Set the importance of the Restaurant name
seating area column to Primary.
Make reservation (check box)
You want to ensure that users
have the information they
need to make a reservation
regardless of
screen size. When viewed on a
small screen, you do not need
to display the images.
What three configuration steps
do you take to support this
A. Set the importance of the
image column to Secondary.
B. Set the importance of the
Make reservation column to
Primary.
C. Set the importance of the
image column to Other.
D. Set the importance of the
Restaurant name and Make
reservation columns to
Primary.
E. Set the importance of the
Restaurant location and Make
Secondary.
F.Set the importance of the
Restaurant name column to
Primary.
Pegasystems Pega
NO.59 You are defining a userCertified System
A. Use a pick listArchitect (PCS...
control to verify the Date account
view for a loan application. If opened is in the past.
the loan applicant indicates
there is an existing open
account, the Date account
opened must be before the
current date.
Select the approach that
requirements.
A. Use a pick list control to
opened is in the past.
B. Use a validate rule to verify
the Date account opened is in
the past.
C. Use a when rule to verify
the past.
D. Use a calendar control to
Pegasystems PegaanCertified
NO.60 You are configuring System
A. Define a caseArchitect
calculation to(PCS...
update the
application to process travel reservation total with the total of each child case.
reservations. The reservation
case creates child cases for
each booking component:
flight, hotel stay, and vehicle
rental.
cost of the reservation as users
A. Define a case calculation to
update the reservation total
with the total of each child
case.
B. Configure the Create Case
shape to propagate the total
cost from each child case to
the
reservation.
C. Create a declare expression
to update the reservation total
when the cost of each
component changes.
D.Add the Update Case shape
to the Reservation case type
to capture changes to each
component cost.
Pegasystems Pega
During a design review of an Certified System
B. reused Architect
in other forms (PCS...
saved as separate sections.
A layout can be saved as a
A. cached in memory to
improve performance
B. reused in other forms
C. aligned properly
D. rendered in different
browsers
1. You need to copy data from Data page

a age with customer data to a
properties can be papped as-
full name. Which rule tye
would you use to copy the
content?
Mark one answer
Data page
Data transfer
Declare expression
Function
Pegasystems
2. You have created aPega
series ofCertified System
B. use Architect
the backward changing (PCS...
option for te tota
forms for a vacation booking. amount expression. Use forward chaining for all the
Declarative expressions are other expressions,
used to calculate values such
as the cost of the flight, hotel,
car rental, and taxes. Te last for
charged on te ser's credit card.
calculations so that the total
amount is calculated only
form?
Mark one answer:
A. use the backward chaining
B. use the backward changing
option for te tota amount
expression. Use forward
expressions,
C. use the forward chaining
D. Use the forward chaining
expression. Use backward
expressions
Pegasystems Pega
3. You have been asked to Certified System
d. To Architect
perform the (PCS...a field is
calculation whenever
create a sequence of user updated
forms for a travel reservation
process. The forms contain
fields that require calculation.
For which reason do you use a
declare expression to
calculate values?
A. To perform the calculation
in a specific case stage?
B. To perform the calculation
when the user clicks a button
C. To perform the calculation
when a form is submitted
D. To perform the calculation
whenever a field is updated
4. A service request case type b. Configure the pyDefault data transform to set
has a customergrade property. the customergrade property value.
How do you set the value of
the customergrade property
to silver when a service
request case is created.
a. Configure the
customergrade property with
a default value
b. Configure the pyDefault
data transform to set the
customergrade property
value.
c. Configure a declare
expression to set the
customergrade property value
d. Configure the first
connector in the first flow rule
to set the customergrade
property value.

5. In an application, three System
b. Value group Architect (PCS...
email addresses(work, home,
and other) can be captured for
a customer. You use
.email(work) to refer to the
work email address. What type
of property is used to capture
the email addresses?
a. Page
b. Value group
c. Value list
d. Page group
6. ABC Corp requires that b. Data-party-operator

expenses billable to a client
are reviewed by an auditor in
the finance department. After
the auditor approves the
expenses, the client is billed.
the auditor as an instance of
which class?
a. Data-party-org
b. Data-party-operator
c. Data-party-Com
d. Data-party-Person
Pegasystems
7. You are designing aPega
case Certified System
c. Add Architect
an alternate (PCS...
stage and add the rejection
type that includes a process to process to the stage
perform when a case is
rejected. How do you model
this requirement in the case life
cycle?
a. Add a primary stage and
add the reflection process to
the stage.
b. Add an alternate stage and
add the rejection process as
an optional process to the
stage
c. Add an alternate stage and
add the rejection process to
the stage
d. Add the rejection process to
all the primary stages as an
optional process
An experienced Pega business C. during the executable modeling phase only

architect can apply their
expertise __________.
A. throughout the entire
development life cycle
B. during the analytical
modeling phase only
C. during the executable
modeling phase only
D. during the descriptive
modeling phase only
2/13/23, 3:59 PM Pega CSA Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSA Study
Pega CSA
3.0 (2 reviews)

4th Edition • ISBN: 9780134444321
Tony Gaddis
629 solutions
Pega Platform is a visually driven application

development environment that enables you to
Pega Platform
deliver applications faster than traditional
approaches.
The ultimate (topmost) parent class in the class

hierarchy for any Pega application. All other classes
@baseclass (ultimate
are derived from this class. The standard rules in
baseclass)
this class are available for every object in the Pega
system.
https://quizlet.com/226747611/pega-csa-flash-cards/ 1/29
Pega CSA An abstract class supports the definition of rules,

including other classes. Rules with a class as a key
part (including properties, activities, flows, and data
abstract class transforms) can apply to an abstract class. An
abstract class can be inherited by subclasses of the
abstract class and can be a child of a higher
abstract class.
In PMF, acceptance criteria are the requirements on

a user story or epic that must be met for a story to
be marked complete. The criteria defines what the
Acceptance Criteria
product owner expects and what the team needs
to accomplish when implementing the user story or
epic.
An access group restricts access to functionality

within your application. You can create multiple
access group
access groups for the same application to achieve
different levels of access control.
Access Manager is a landing page that you can use

Access Manager to view and authorize operator access to case
types, data, and tools in your applications.
An access role defines the classes that a user can

access role view, update, and delete through the Access of
Role to Object and Access Deny rule types.
An acknowledgment is a letter, email, or other

acknowledgment correspondence that is sent to the originator of a
work item and identifies the work item ID.
An acquirer is a financial institution that represents

the merchants in the transaction. An acquirer
acquirer receives a financial transaction's electronic data
from a merchant and places that data into an
interchange system.
Pega CSA The action section is the area in a harness in which

action section the action is performed. It shows users the actions
that they can perform.
An activity is the sequential processing unit of the

Pega 7 Platform system. An activity consists of one
activity or more steps. Each step can call a Pega 7 Platform
method, transfer control to another activity, or
execute custom inline Java.
An activity list is a queue that contains a list of

activities that are waiting to run. Each user has the
activity list
following activity lists: activity (default), workflow,
and current.
An activity loop is a step in an activity that can run

activity loop repeatedly, such as for each element in a Value List
or Value Group property.
An activity type describes the characteristics of an

activity. Some activity types (Assign, Connect,
Route, Notify, and Utility) identify activities that you
activity type can reference directly in flows. The Activity Type
field on the Security tab of an Activity form
corresponds to the property Rule-Obj-
Property.pyActivityType.
An actor is a user, external service, or agent that

participates in application processes and
specifications. You can view and define actors for
actor
the current application on the application rule, or
by clicking the Actors link in the Details section of
the Application Overview landing page.
Pega CSA An ad hoc case is a case that you do not instantiate

by using an existing case type. Ad hoc cases are
created on-demand by caseworkers when they
ad hoc case
need to handle exceptions in business processing.
Using an ad hoc case does not change the case
type structure in your application.
In Decision Management, the Adaptive Analytics

Engine is the main function of the Adaptive
Decision Manager. The Adaptive Analytics Engine is
responsible for storing and analyzing adaptive
Adaptive Analytics Engine
statistics and producing individual scoring models.
The scoring models are then used in Pega to
perform calculations used for predictions defined
in decision strategies.
In Decision Management, this is the database that

Adaptive Data Store
stores the adaptive statistics and adaptive models.
In Decision Management, this is an integrated

technology that extends predictive analytics with
Adaptive Decision Manager an adaptive mechanism to establish customer
(ADM) preferences with customer responses in real time.
Due to its adaptive nature, no initial collection of
data is necessary.
In Decision Management, an adapative model is a

type of scoring model that captures customer
responses in real-time in order to make and adapt
adaptive model predictions, typically in the absence of historical
records. An adaptive model is used in a decision
strategy to help identify the most appropriate
proposition, or next,best action.
In Decision Management, adaptive statistics refers

adaptive statistics to the persistent information that results from
running a strategy that contains adaptive models.
Pega CSA A role-based authoring environment focused on

Admin Studio system operations such as agents and queues and
APIs. Targeted for experienced system admins.
An agent is an internal background process

operating on the server that runs activities on a
agent
periodic basis. In a multinode cluster, an agent can
run on multiple nodes.
An aggregate property stores more than a single

value, such as a Value List, Page List, Value Group
or Page Group, or a page that can contain a Java
aggregate property
object. These are similar to arrays, repeating
groups, unordered sets or collections found in
other development tools.
A tool that presents Pega's methodology of the

Scrum Framework for application development
teams, product owners, and stakeholers to
Agile Studio
collaborate on features, plan releases, and execute
development tasks in the context of Agile or Scrum
project.
A tool for project stakeholders that captures real-

Agile Workbench time feedback about your application and tracks
feature development.
An alert event is an entry in the alert log. Alert

alert event events use the naming format PegaRULES-Alert-
YYYY-MMM-DD.log.
The alert log contains a sequence of text files

(known as alert events) that support performance-
related monitoring. The alert log supports the
Alert log
optional Autonomic Event Services (AES)
Enterprise Edition product, which summarizes and
monitors alerts across multiple nodes in a cluster
Pega CSA An alternate path in a process consists of

alternative steps that a case might take from the
alternate path primary path. You can add alternative steps to the
primary path of a starting process or to a
subprocess.
A role-based authoring environment focused on

application development targeted for use by
App Studio
business analysts, app develoers, UI/UX developers
and data engineers.
An application is a business solution that automates

work flows in your organization. Multiple, unrelated
application applications can be hosted in the same system. You
create an application by running the New
Application wizard.
An application rule defines a set of ruleset versions

added as a unit to a user's ruleset list. An
application (rule) application rule is an instance of the Rule-
Application rule type, which is part of the
Application Definition category.
The Application Accelerator (AA) is a wizard that

leverages data captured in an Application Profile
(or directly in the Application Accelerator) to speed
the creation of new applications or the extension of
existing applications. The AA automatically creates
a case, and a baseline application that includes
Application Accelerator (AA)
organization and class structure, draft processes
and UI elements. This baseline application can be
modified to implement functionality and create a
functioning, production application. (In Pega 7.1 and
later versions, the Application Accelerator has been
superseded by Application Express.)
Pega CSA An application document contains a high-level

business overview, including information on case
types, flows, user interface, specifications, and
Application document
requirements. You can create an application
document by running the Document Application
tool.
The Application Explorer is a tool that you can use

to quickly access records in the current and built-
Application Explorer on applications that are available to your operator.
These records are organized by work pool, case
type, category, and record type.
The Application Express is a wizard that you can

use to quickly create an initial application with a
Application Express minimum of technical expertise. You can then add
flows, user interfaces, and other rules to complete
the application.
An application menu in Designer Studio, that is

identified by the name of the current application.
application menu
This menu allows users to switch applications,
create a new application or switch work pools.
An application name is a meaningful and unique

name that conveys the purpose of your application.
You specify an application name as a key part for
application name
the following application rules: Rule-Application,
Rule-Application-UseCase, Rule-Application-
Requirement
The Application Packaging wizard allows you to

create a product archive that contains all of the
classes, rules and data that make up an application.
Application Packaging wizard
The result of the wizard can be exported to a ZIP
file and then imported or migrated to another Pega
system.
Pega CSA An application profile is an auto-generated

document, or set of landing pages containing
business-related information that is associated with
the implementation of a project. This information
application profile
supports the Direct Capture of Objectives (DCO)
and includes the processes, case types, reports,
requirements, specifications, participants,
collaborators, and actors for a project.
A high-level scoping document that can be

produced from content in an Application Profile.
This document contains application-specific user
input that includes, but is not limited to, case types,
Application Profile document
specifications, requirements, objectives, interfaces,
reports and correspondence associated with the
selected application. The user can control which
rules and sections appear in the document.
The Application Profiler is a wizard that allows users

to enter information about the application or
framework that is being built or extended. The
Application Profiler creates an Application Profile
Application Profiler and can also produce a printable project
document. The Application Profile generated by
this wizard can be imported by the Application
Accelerator to create or extend an application or
framework. See Application Profile.
An application ruleset is a collection of rules that

identify the components of an application. You
must be a member of a specified access group to
work with an application ruleset The set of
application rulesets
application rulesets determines which rules are
reflected in various tools in Designer Studio, such
as the Application Explorer, the Profile Explorer,
and the Guardrails tool.
Pega CSA The application scoping control is a reusable

gadget that filters by application layer, class name,
and specified search term. The combination of
application scoping control filters used depends on how the control has been
configured. This control is used throughout the
Pega 7 Platform, but is most commonly found on
landing pages.
Application Validation (AV) mode is used during

rule validation to determine which rules are valid to
reference at design time without having to use
Application Validation mode
ruleset prerequisites. Using AV mode offers
performance advantages over the alternative
Ruleset Validation (RV) mode.
The Application-Based Assembly (ABA) cache

identifies rules for which rules assembly on the
current node is complete. Each rule that generates
Application-Based Assembly Java and executes is a candidate for the ABA cache.
cache Note: ABA caching is the previous generation of
caching technology for the Pega 7 Platform. UI
(stream aspect) rules run using ABA caching, and
all other rule types run using VTable caching.
Application-editing mode is a view that you can

enable in Pega Express to access tools and
application-editing mode
information. To enable application-editing mode,
click Turn editing on.
An application bundle is a .zip archive file that

contains an XML document known as the manifest.
applicaton bundle During import of an application bundle, the
manifest controls the order in which rulesets, rules,
or other items in the bundle are imported.
Pega CSA Arbitration is a process that involves a neutral third

party - often a retired judge - who hears arguments
from both sides and makes a decision. The decision
is enforceable in court, meaning it may be used to
arbitration
garnish wages or seize assets. Arbitration is
frequently used by employers and service
providers such as phone companies, as well as by
banks and card issuers.
An area chart displays data points with filled space

rather than points, curves, or lines. You can specify
area chart
the chart type and subtype for a report definition
report by using the Chart Editor
An artifact is an element of the application

artifact development process, such as a design document,
requirement, specification, or UI mock-up.
A collection of rulesets that represents an

application, including the Application rulesets
Assign- defined for the Application rule, the Application
rulesets defined for any built-on application and
the local customization ruleset.
The Assign- base class is an abstract class above

Assign- base class
other classes containing assignments.
An assignment is a task that must be completed

before an open case can continue through an
assignment executing flow. You configure assignments in a flow
by using Case Designer or Process Modeler. Either
a user or external system can act on an assignment.
Pega CSA An assignment (shape) identifies a task that must be

completed by a user or external system before an
open case may continue through an executing flow.
An assignment indicates that the case is temporarily
assignment (shape) paused until a user acts on the case. The user
selects the appropriate action to complete the
assignment, and provides any information required
by the application to support the action the user
selects.
An associated ruleset is a ruleset that is linked to

instances of data classes. Associated rulesets help
associated ruleset
to identify which data instances to include in an
application package or when you export rulesets.
An association is a rule type that defines a one-

directional relationship between two classes, used
often in reporting to include properties from
another class in a report. The rule predefines a
JOIN-type relationship between instances of two
association classes, such as Operators and Assignments, or
between cases and custom data classes, such as
those created by data tables or external database
connections. Unlike joins, association rules work
automatically when a manager or developer builds
a report.
Asynchronous JavaScript and XML (AJAX) is a

coding technique used in interactive web
applications to exchange small amounts of data as
Asynchronous JavaScript and needed, so that the entire web page does not
XML (AJAX) reload each time users request a change. Pega
uses this technology when processing server-side
validation rules and for calculated value
expressions.
An attachment is a document, image, or other file

attachment
added to a case to provide additional information.
Pega CSA An attachment category controls the security of

attachments in your application. It restricts user
operations on an attachment, based on privileges,
attachment category (rule)
when conditions, or attachment types. You can
create attachment categories for your cases in
Case Designer.
An attachment type defines the media and format

of items that users attach to work in your
application. An attachment type is implemented in
attachment type your application as a class that inherits from Data-
WorkAttach-. The following standard attachment
types are supported: File, Note, Screenshot,
Scanned document, URL, and Content.
An audit trail refers to the history of a work item.

Open the Audit tab on a user form to access the
audit trail, which shows information that includes
audit trail
which operators worked on the work item and
when, and what automatic processes were
performed by the application.
Authentication is the process of determining the

identity of a user or requestor of services. In Pega,
authentication authentication is accomplished by matching the
submitted user name and password to those stored
in the users Operator ID.
Pega CSA Auto-generated is a term used to indicate that

executable code was automatically generated by
Pega, rather than being written by application
developers. Auto-generated code is commonly
created when configuring UI rules (sections and
controls). When a rule form is saved, Pega
auto-generated translates some types of rules (such as control,
section, flow action and harness) to HTML, JSP tags
and JavaScript. These auto-generated rules
eliminate hand-coding and usually provide better
performance, security, browser independence and
more consistent branding and styles than hand-
crafted rules.
An auto-populated property is a Page or Page List

property that automatically obtains its data directly
from a specified data page. The values can be an
entire object from the PegaRULES database, or
auto-populatied property
copies of pages developed by a Data Page rule. To
enable auto-population for a Page mode or Page
List property, configure the Data Access fields on
the General tab of the Property form.
A page or page list property that automatically

obtains its data directly from a specified data page.
auto-populating property The auto populate can be in the form of a pointer
or a copy and is triggered whenever the parameter
value for the given data page changes.
Auto-processing is a feature that allows Pega to

perform an assignment automatically under certain
situations. To auto-process an assignment, the
assignment must be configured with a set of when
Auto-processing
rules and corresponding flow actions. At run-time,
Pega evaluates the when rules in top-down order
and performs the flow action that corresponds to
the first when rule that returns a true result.
Pega CSA A user interface control that supports user

selection of one text value from a large list of
candidate values. As the user types in the field, a
Autocomplete
filtered list of qualifying text values appears below
the input field. Users can then select a value from
this list.
An autocomplete field on a form supports user

selection of a text value from a list of candidate
values. After you enter one or a few characters, a
filtered list of qualifying text values displays below
Autocomplete field
the input field. On an input field, the icon indicates
that autocomplete is available for the field. You can
configure styles for the Autocomplete control in
the Skin rule
An Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) is the

Automatic Call Distributor equipment (or software) used to direct incoming
(ACD) calls to service representatives in a call or contact
center.
Autonomic Event Services (AES) is an optional

product that monitors, retrieves, organizes and
Autonomic Event Services
displays Pega 7 Platform system statistics and
(AES)
warning conditions at the enterprise, cluster, and
node levels.
The state or status of a rule, used to determine if a

rule is visible and can be executed when called
during rule resolution processing. Availability is
availability determined by a developer. PRPC provides five
possible values: Yes, No/Draft Mode, Blocked, Final
and Withdrawn. The rule is available if the
availability is set to Yes or Final.
Pega CSA An available rule is visible and can run during rule
resolution processing. For an available rule, the
available rule
value of the pyRuleAvailable property set to
Available or Final (and is not blocked).
The term back-to-back assignments describes a

situation when a user completes an assignment for
a specific work item and then works on a second
back-to-back assignments
assignment for the same work item. The second
assignment can be from the same flow execution or
an unrelated flow execution.
A bacground process is an autonomous process

that occurs with little or no user intervention.
background process
Examples of a background process include logging
and system monitoring.
A backlog is a prioritized list of user stories, bugs,

and issues for a product. It is the responsibility of
the product owner to prioritize the backlog. In
backlog
PMF, you can associate items in your product
backlog with a release to create a release backlog
or project teams to create a team backlog.
Backward chaining allows for a computation to

advance even when the value of an input or
parameter property is not available. This capability
is provided by the Rule-Declare-Expressions rule
backward chaining
type and the Property-Seek-Value method working
together, and can be seen in standard flow actions
including VerifyProperty and
VerifyPropertyWithListing.
A bar chart displays property values as horizontal

bars. You can specify the chart type and subtype
bar chart
for a report definition report by using the Chart
Editor.
Pega CSA A base class is one of twelve standard abstract

classes that are immediately below the top class in
base class
the hierarchy. This top class, known as the ultimate
base class, is identified by the symbol @baseclass
A base rule is the original version of a rule that has

been circumstanced or time-qualified. A base rule
base rule
must exist for every circumstance or time-qualified
rule.
In Decision Management, a behavioral profiles is a

representation of a univariate model that is based
behavioral profile
upon a single behavior variable, like usage or
loyalty.
Best Bets provide a subset of options that are likely

to have the choice you are looking for. Best Bets
best bet
are classes in your application that are the Applies
To key part of one or more rules.
A binary file is a rule type in Pega that identifies

static content files that contain information in a
non-text format, such as images and PDF
documents. Binary file rules store data in a Base64
binary file (rule)
format to support endian-independent, character-
set independent processing. When extracted or
downloaded, the file is reconverted to its original
format.
A collection of binary data stored as a single object

in a database. A BLOB can store any amount of
digitized information, and supports text, images,
Binary Large Object (BLOB) audio or video. PRPC uses BLOB fields to store all
of the data for a case in a proprietary, compressed
format that is highly optimized for performance and
flexibility. Also known simply as a "large object".
Pega CSA A blocked rule has an availability status that

indicates to the rule resolution algorithm that the
blocked
rule (and all others of that type with the same name
or key, in any ruleset) is not executable.
A branch is a container for rulesets with rules that

branch
are undergoing rapid change and development.
A branch ruleset is based off another ruleset and

branch ruleset contains rules that are in active development in the
associated branch.
The breadcrumbs control shows each task, or entry

point, in a flow execution. Application users can
breadcrumbs control click a task based on settings in the flow. The flow
can allow users to jump to any task in a flow, or just
to the completed tasks.
A bubble chart displays three dimensions of data in

a two-dimensional format. With a bubble chart, all
three dimensions are numeric, as opposed to
column or line charts, where one axis is numeric
and the other is a category. The horizontal and
bubble chart vertical axes represent two of the three dimensions,
as in other charts. The size of the colored circle, or
bubble, for each data point represents the third
dimension. You can specify the chart type and
subtype for a report definition report by using the
Chart Editor.
Build for Change is Pegasystems' corporate slogan

and application development philosophy, that
Build for Change acknowledges the continuous evolution of business
processes through methodologies and tools that
embrace flexible procedures.
Pega CSA The Build Order is part of the Construction phase

of the Pegasystems Professional Services project
methodology, and specifies the sequence in which
build order
rules and data instances are created when earlier
phases are complete. The build order might differ in
separate iterations of the implementation.
A journey-centric phase in the Pega Delivery

method. Continuously build and test sprints.
Incrementally complete and deliver work
Build phase
throughout the project and plan for the work of
one iteration to be improved upon in subsequent
iterations.
Bulk processing is a term that inidcates an action is

going to occur on multiple assignments in an
bulk processing application. For example, a user could bulk process
either the approval or rejection of multiple
purchase orders as one action.
A Burndown Chart shows the amount of work

planned, remaining and completed in a release,
sprint or by a project team. The horizontal X-axis
Burndown Chart
shows time starting and ending based on the dates
of your release, project team or sprint. The vertical
Y-axis shows effort in story points or hours.
Business analysis defines needs and identifies

business analysis
solutions that add value to the business.
The Business Analyst portal is an alternative portal

to the full Designer Studio which provides access
to those Pega facilities most useful to Business
Business Analyst portal
Architects. (In Pega 7, the Business Analyst portal
has been removed, and its functionality merged
into Designer Studio.)
Pega CSA A business architect is a member of an application

development team who defines and maintains
business rules, service-level agreements, and
processes (flows). Business architects include
Business Architect (BA)
subject matter experts, business analysts, business
executives, and business end users. A business
architect might also be referred to as a process
architect
Business data is a term that provides the context for

business data
a given task for a given participant.
Business days, also known as work days, are

scheduled work days for users. Business days are
not identified as holidays or other days with no
business day work on a calendar data instance. If your
application includes multiple calendar data
instances, a non-business day for some users might
be a business day for others.
A business exception is an unusual condition within

a business process that warrants investigation or
external review. A business exception might
business exception
indicate fraud, error, compliance failure, or other
potential harm to the organization, customers, or
other parties.
Pega CSA Business Intelligence Exchange (BIX) is an optional

add-on product consisting of a ruleset and a stand-
alone Java program that can be run from a
command line. BIX provides the extract functions of
an ETL (extract, transform, and load) utility by using
the Pega-BIX ruleset, which supports the Rule-
Business Intelligence
Admin-Extract rule type. Data is extracted and
Exchange (BIX)
exported in a format suitable for use in popular
business intelligence applications, such as data
warehouses. High-performance, multi-threaded
extraction operations operate independently of the
Pega 7 Platform, and can occur even when the
Pega 7 Platform is not running.
Business metrics describe a company's case

performance, such as the number of orders
business metrics processed or how many orders are canceled.
Business metrics represent the data that you have
defined when you create properties.
A business objective is an expected business

Business objective
outcome or goal for an application.
Business process management (BPM) is the

organizational activity of developing and managing
processes that are responsive to change and
Business Process Management improve business performance outcomes. When an
(BPM) organization uses BPM, they coordinate the
presentation of the user interface, the logic, and
the data access for an application with the process
for how work gets done.
Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) is a

specification that provides a graphical notation for
Business Process Modeling expressing business processes in a diagram. The
Notation (BPMN) BPMN specification also defines the relationships
between the graphical elements and process
execution languages such as BPEL.
Pega CSA
business rule requirement
A business rule is a requirement that defines,
constrains, and enables organizational operations.
A business rules engine (BRE) is a Java-based rules

engine that separates business logic from
applications and enables the enterprise to capture,
manage, and execute business policies and
Business Rules Engine (BRE)
practices as business rules. The business rules
engine supports declarative rules, multithreaded
execution, and a large number of industry
interfacing standards.
A Business Use Case is a type of use case

(specification) that describes a business process
from beginning to end without regard to process
Business Use Case
ownership. It can involve many different actors and
has a very low likelihood of being reused within an
enterprise.
Business Value Assessment (BVA) is a phase of the

implementation methodology during which
Business Value Assessment
stakeholders define the success factors and
(BVA)
expected return on investment of the project.
Business architects play a major role in this phase.
Cache is a collection of data automatically

maintained at an intermediate point between the
requestor and the ultimate source of the data.
Multiple types of caches, representing various
cache
types of data, exist in Pega, enabling faster access
to rules or data stored in the PegaRULES database
or on another system, especially during rule
resolution searches.
The Calculation Builder is a tool that provides a

Calculation Builder guided interface to help you define SQL
expressions for use in report definition rules.
Pega CSA A calendar records the work schedule of an

organization or group of people, including holidays
and shift start and stop times. Calendar data
instances can be referenced in organization,
calendar
workbasket, and Operator ID data instances, and
service-level agreements. The calendar allows due
dates and similar calculations to be based on
business days rather than calendar days.
A call center is an office or location used by an

call center organization to receive large volumes of calls from
its constituents.
A card association is a network of issuing banks and

acquiring banks that process payment cards of a
specific brand. The Visa and Mastercard
associations do not issue credit or debit cards
directly. They each collectively comprise thousands
card association of banks worldwide. These banks pay membership
fees to the associations, and are permitted to issue
cards. American Express, Diners Club, and Discover
are not associations. Each of these companies
issues its card directly, and maintains its own
clearing network.
A case (step type) is a setting for a case step that

case (step type) configures the step to generate another case of a
specified type.
A case is an instance of a case type and is a primary

unit of work in an application. You can manually
create, or instantiate, a case in an end user portal
or through forms in an application. Your application
case (work item) can automatically create a case when a parent case
is created, or email is sent to an account that is
associated with the starting process of a parent
case. In legacy systems, cases are commonly
referred to as work items or work objects.
Pega CSA Case Designer is a tool that helps you visually

model stages, steps, and processes for all case
types in your application. Its centralized view lets
you capture objectives without switching context
between individual rule forms and your case type.
Case Designer
Use it to design staged-based case types, build
user forms, and seamlessly integrate with other
rules in your application. To access Case Designer,
open the Case Type Explorer and click any case
type name.
A case ID is a permanent, external identifier of a

case. A case ID is the value of property pyID. The
case ID (work item ID)
value is unique system-wide and contains an
optional prefix, a number, and an optional suffix.
Case instantiation is the way that a case is created

in your application. You can manually create a case
case instantiation or automate this process based on the creation of a
parent case, a set of when conditions and case-
type dependencies, or received email.
Case Management is a business practice that helps

you deliver outcome driven results. It relies on case
types to model customer processes, share
information, and ensure that there is visibility into
the work that is completed by your application.
case management Case Management automates service-level
agreements, escalation, and audit trails so that you
can provide a quality, end-to-end customer
experience. Use the Case Type Explorer and Case
Designer to build a Case Management strategy in
your application.
Pega CSA A collection of examples of case types that use

many of PRPC's case management capabilities and
represent best practice implementations that
Case Management Gallery
comply with Pegasystems' guardrails. These
examples can be copied into an application and
extended as needed.
A case manager is an application user who can

case manager view and update delegated business rules, in
addition to performing work.
The Case Manager portal supports users who

manage cases and their related sub-cases and
Case Manager portal tasks across multiple channels, lines of business,
departments, and systems. Users can create, view,
and work on cases and assignments.
Case status is the primary indicator of the progress

of a case towards resolution. Case status is the
case status
value of the standard property
Work-.pyStatusWork.
A case type represents work in your application

that follows a life cycle, or path, to completion.
Each case type has a hierarchical structure and can
case type
include attachments that provide relevant details
about the work that you are processing. Instances
of case types are called cases.
A case type (rule) establishes how to create a case,

case type (rule) including the relationship between the case and
any parent or child case.
Pega CSA The case type backlog is the inventory of the

application�s out-of-the-box case types and
should be updated with notes about what needs to
change in existing case types, and what additional
case types and other requirements need to be
case type backlog
developed and launched in a Minimum Lovable
Product (MLP) release. The backlog contains both
the MLP that will be delivered in the initial release
plus items that may become scope for future
releases.
A case-type dependency is a condition that must

be met before a child case is instantiated or an
case type dependency
assignment is automatically completed. Each
condition defines a case and a status.
A case worker is an individual responsible for

case worker (operator)
creating, processing, and/or resolving a case.
The Case Worker portal provides case workers with

a standard interface for creating, viewing, and
working on their own cases and assignments. Users
cannot monitor and manage work among other
Case Worker portal
operators or workbaskets, or view work statistics. In
Pega 7.1 and later versions, the Case Worker portal
has been deprecated. All end-user interactions with
a Pega 7 application use the Case Manager portal.
A navigation feature in the Designer Studio that

Cases Explorer allows users to view and modify case type
relationships in an application.
Pega CSA The Case Type Explorer is a tool that lets you view
all of the case types that are in your application.
Use it to manage the hierarchical structure of your
case types, access Case Designer, and browse
Cases Type Explorer
examples of case management rules that you can
leverage in your application. To open the Case
Type Explorer, click the Cases icon in the explorer
panel of Designer Studio.
A category is a systematic grouping of rule types

and data types in Pega. Categories are used in the
category Application Explorer, My Rules, Records Explorer,
Rules Explorer (in versions of Pega prior to 7.1),
attachments and reports to enhance navigation.
A category (rule) defines an organizational

framework for reports displayed in the Report
Browser. Each category consists of a label and an
category (rule)
owner type, which exposes the category to a
specific audience, either an individual user, a group
of users, or all users.
A certificate set gathers in one place all keys and

certificate set certificates needed to properly configure, build,
and run an Android or an iOS mobile app.
A Certified System Architect (CSA) is a Pega 7

Platform application developer or technical staff
Certified System Architect member who has passed an exam that
acknowledges the acquisition of foundation-level
knowledge of the Pega 7 Platform.
A change control requirement documents a

modification to a Pega application. You can
change control requirement
implement modifications before or after the release
of an application.
Pega CSA
channel
A channel is a mode of communication or
interaction, such as telephone, email, or fax.
A chargeback is a movement of funds from the

merchant back to the customer, caused by the
customer's denial of a charge on the credit or debit
card account. This usually happens when a
customer calls the credit card company to dispute
chargeback a charge because the products or services were
not received. This can also happen if a card number
was used fraudulently and the merchant cannot
prove that the charge was legitimate (made with
the permission of the legal cardholder), then the
chargeback is made permanent.
The Chart Editor is a tool that you use to create and

edit charts for summarized reports. You can use the
Chart Editor to select a chart type and subtype,
define the appearance and formatting of titles and
Chart Editor
information, and specify the report data that
populates the chart. You can access the Chart
Editor from the Charts tab of a Report Definition
rule form or from the Report Editor.
Check in / check out is a rule management process

that allows application developers to reserve a rule
for editing, to avoid conflicts arising when more
than one developer simultaneously try to edit the
rule. Upon check out, a copy of the rule is added to
check in/check out
a ruleset reserved solely for the developer who
checks out the rule. When the rule is checked back
in, the rule is copied back to the original ruleset,
overriding the previous version, and the updated
rule is available to be checked out again.
Pega CSA The checkin process replaces a base rule version

with a private copy of a Rule- instance that you
checked out and updated. A checkout is a private
checkin process copy of a Rule- instance that you update and later
check in to replace a base rule version. All checked
out rules reside in a personal ruleset that is only
visible to your operator.
A child case type represents work in your

application that must be completed to resolve a
parent case type. Child case types can be
child case type
instantiated manually or automatically. You can
view your child case types in the Case Type
Explorer.
A circumstance is an optional qualification available

for supported rule types. Commonly referred to as
a ""circumstanced"" or ""specialized"" version, a
circumstance circumstance is based upon an unqualified rule
known as the base rule. Using circumstances in
your application allows you to easily support a
variety of use cases.
Circumstancing is the practice of creating

additional variants of a rule based on specific
circumstances, such as property values. When the
circumstancing circumstancing criteria are met, Pega automatically
executes whichever version of the rule either the
base rule or the qualified circumstanced version of
the base rule.
Pega CSA A class is a collection of rules or other objects.

Each class defines capabilities such as properties,
activities, and HTML forms that are available to
other, subordinate classes, or to instances of the
class
class. Classes are organized into a hierarchy, where
the system searches the class hierarchy from the
current class upwards when looking for a rule to
apply.
A class diagram provides an overview of an

class diagram application by showing its classes and the
relationships among them.
Class Explorer is a navigation feature in the

Designer Studio that displays portions of the class
hierarchy differentiating between abstract and
Class Explorer
concrete classes. In Pega 7.1 and later, the Class
Explorer has been merged into the Application
Explorer.
A class group is an instance of the Data-Admin-DB-

ClassGroup class and corresponds to tables in the
PegaRULES database. Class groups cause the
system to store instances corresponding to two or
class group
more concrete classes that share a common key
format in a single database table, which is known as
a work pool. The name of the class group is a prefix
of the names of its member classes.
The class hierarchy is a hierarchical structure that

supports the sharing of rules and data. The ultimate
class hierarchy base class (@baseclass) is the topmost class in the
class hierarchy. All other classes are derived from
this class.
2/13/23, 3:09 PM Pega UI Design Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega UI Design Study
Pega UI Design

10th Edition • ISBN: 9780470458365
Erwin Kreyszig
4,134 solutions
What does collocating Makes sections available for reference wherever

sections allow you to do? data class instances are used.
Lets you examine UI rules and elements - sections,

controls, layouts.
What does the Live UI tool

Add or delete UI rules
do?
Lets you locate properties that use declarative

values.
What is an intent-driven task? Making it as easy as possible on the end user.
https://quizlet.com/301998316/pega-ui-design-flash-cards/ 1/8
Pega
An onlineUI Design
shopping Secion (Groups information and functionality by
application collects and context and purpose)
displays users shipping
address. An address contains a
street number, city, state, and
zip code. This information is
always presented together in a
group, whether it is used for an
order confimartion or for
invoice billing. Which UI
component is appropriate for
displaying the address
information?
Using Live UI, you must In the hierarchy tree, drag and drop the element in
reorder the position of fields the new position
on a user form. How do you
use the tool in order to
complete this task?
Where can a paragraph not be Flow

included?
Specifies the visual styling as well as the responsive

What is a skin rule?
behavior of the UI.
Style formats can be defined Controls like buttons and links, style formats for
for what things? structural elements like layouts.
What are responsive Thresholds placed to dynamically change the view

breakpoints? of a UI
Pega UI Design
The business is switching its Skin rule and application rule.
application branding to use a
warmer color scheme and to
include responsive behavior to
the user interface. Which two
rules must be modified to
implement this change?
What is the event and what is An event is performed by a user that triggers
the action in a UI. changes on the UI. These changes are the action.
During online shopping The event is clicking the check box and the action
checkout, users enter the is hiding the billing address section
shipping and billing addresses
in sequence. After providing
the shipping address, users
click a check box labeled use
the same address for billing.
The section for the billing
address then disappears. What
is the event and which is the
action in this scenario?
What is property-based They occur when a data value changes or when a

events? value meets a specific criteria.
Occurs when an end user takes some action on the

What is a user event? page such as selecting an option or clicking on a
link.
Use to hide or display data fields based on a value

When should you use "visible enterd by the user. Such as displaying marital
when conditions"? information if the marital status field has a calue
entered.
Pega
How do UI
you Design
set "visible when Use the Visibility field to configure the conditions.
conditions" on sections
included in another section,
layout, and on cells?
Always - UI element is always displayed
If not blank - Visible if the value of that field is

something other than blank
If not zero - Visible if the value of the field is not

zero
What are the five visibility
options?
Condition(expression) - Uses a boolean expression
to determine visibility; visible when the expression
returns true
Condition(when rule) - Uses a "when rule" to

determine visibility, visible if the "when rule" returns
true.
Keeps the space surrounding kthe control open.

What does "reserve space
Prevent UI elements on the screen from
when hidden" do?
repositioning when the visible content is displayed.
What does "run visibility When selected, all of the possible data that can be
condition on client" do? displayed is included in the clipboard page.
If the hidden content is not likely to change during

When should you use the "run case processing then it should be selected to
visibility condition on client"? reduce the number of server trips and avoid page
refreshes.
An action set consists to an event, an action, and

What is an action set?
(optionally) conditions.
Pega UI Design Event is the trigger (clicking a button).
Action is the response performed by the system as

a result of the user event.
In the action set, what does
each of the three parts do? Conditions are the restrictions to the rules, which
can be applied to an event and action combo(for
example, you can configure conditions so that
hovering over a field displays a smart tip message
only if the field contains a property value).
What must you define in an At least one event and one action
action set?
Which two of the following are Date changed for the arrival date and the customer
considered property-based order reaching $500.
events in Pegas dynamic UI
model?
Users move the mouse over a

URL link
A section refreshes
Users change the arrival date

on a hotel reservation to one
week later
Users click a button
Total value of a customer

order reaches $500
Where do you set the Visible On the layout

When condition to display a
layout based on the clock of a
button
Pega
What isUI Design
a calendar control? Ensures that users enter a date value
Where are validate rules Flow action, stage in the case life cycle.
typically referenced?
Compares a property against a condition when the

What is a validate rule?
user submits a form.
What type of rule would be Validate rule to display an error.

used to ensure a user does not
enter a date that is in the
future.
When do you use edit validate Use them with single value, value list, and value
rules? group properties to test for patternts.
Where are edit validate rules From a property rule.

referenced?
Ensuring a zip code has 5 digits, email has an @

Examples of edit validate rules symbol included, number entered falls within
specified range of values (credit score).
When does an edit validate Runs when the user submits a form.
rule run?
What is a control required The field must be filled or else an error message
field? will be presented.
Used to restrice input values to valid formats.

What are control editable
Specify min/max of characters allowed in a text
settings?
input control.
Min/max characters allowed in a text input control.

Two examples of control
Specify users cannot enter dates as text, must
editable settings
select date from a calender icon control.
Pega UIdynamic
Where do Designlists Data on the clipboard
reference their data?
For dynamic lists, what is the Using a data page

most common method of
sourcing data?
Explain how the data page The data page receives the data from a database,
works in a dynamic list and then populates the clipboard.
Three things that can source data page, report definition, or clipboard page.
data to the clipboard to be
used in dynamic lists?
The association between Allows you to validate the property based on

validate rules and processes specific business needs.
allow you to do what?
To ensure that a user selects a No. Configure the drop-down list as a required
value from a drop-down list, field.
you should use a validate rule?
For validate rules, what do you Use functions.

use to define conditions?
A value to compare
Each condition consists of

A value to compare against
what three things?
A function that describes the comparison
Pega
You haveUI Design
been asked to add Use a single validate rule to verify both of these
to a form a check box control conditions since a single validate rule can verify
named "Auto Insurance multiple conditions for the same field.
Discount." Selecting the check
box indicates that the user
qualifies for the discount.
However, in order to qualify,
two conditions must be met.
First, the user must be older
than 25. Second, the user has
not received a traffic violation
in three years or more. If both
conditions are not met and the
check box is selected, an error
appears when the form is
submitted. Which one of the
you use in order to support
this requirement?
A requirement states that you Add a drop-down control and source the list using
must add a control that shows a data page.
a list of book titles. The titles
change on a daily basis. The
book records are maintained
on a database. The control
must show the most current
information. The organization
schedules updates to the
application on a weekly basis.
Which configuration would
you use?
2/13/23, 4:01 PM System Architect in Pega Flashcards | Quizlet
System Architect in Pega Study
Maths
System Architect in Pega

Book of Proof
2nd Edition • ISBN: 9780989472104
Richard Hammack
340 solutions
"Products and/or cloud services for application

What does "low-code" mean? development that employ visual, declarative
techniques instead of programming..."
The Pega Express™ methodology is an agile

approach that uses design thinking practices to
Pega Express methodology
capture the customer journey and quickly deliver a
Minimum Loveable Product (MLP) release.
The Pega Express methodology breaks the

How work Pega Express customer journey into smaller pieces called
Methodology? Microjourneys™, which drive the organization to
achieve a specific goal for the customer
https://quizlet.com/mx/513065109/system-architect-in-pega-flash-cards/ 1/18
System Architect in Pega The methodology focuses on delivering one goal

at a time rather than attempting to develop the
entire customer journey at the start. To define an
The methodology focuses... MLP release, the methodology focuses on three
core elements of a great application:
Microjourneys, personas and channels, and data
and interfaces
A Microjourney is a small part of the overall

customer journey and focuses on accomplishing a
specific goal for the customer. For example, a
customer wants to change their address. This
Microjourneys is?
scenario is a Microjourney that starts with the
customer's request and results in an outcome,
where their address is changed in the company's
records.
Personas determine who interacts with the

application, and channels determine how these
individuals interact with the application. For
Personas and Channels example, a persona could be a customer or a
company employee, and a channel could be a web
portal or a chatbot. An application can have
multiple personas and multiple channels.
Data is the information that the Microjourney

interacts with to accomplish the customer's goal,
and the interface defines where the data comes
Data and Interfaces
from or where it is persisted. An application can
interact with multiple types of data, and data can
employ multiple interfaces.
Is an environment that provides specific tools and

what is workspace?
features.

Pega Platform provides four
- App Studio
- Dev Studio
role-based authoring
- Prediction Studio
workspaces, known as studio:
- Admin Studio
Build an application without touching a line of code

- it is all posible with App studio.
-Low code/no code app development
App Studio
-Multi-channel
-Mobile
-UI
Allows developers to go deeper into the Pega

Platform.
Dev Studio
-Pega Platform advanced features
-Pega Marketplace
Built-in decisioning and AI powers up applications

built with Pega.
Prediction Studio
-AI
-Next Best Action.
Manage securuty, dev ops, users, and cloud

performance of your apps.
Admin Studio: -DevOps
-Run-time status
-Cloud
Defining a customer Case Life Cycle

Microjourney
A case life cycle design is a visual model used to

Case Life Cycle
define the major steps of how work gets done.
A case type is an abstract model of a business

What is Case type in Pega?
transaction.
System
What isArchitect
Case in Pega in Pega A case is a specific transaction instance.
This model enables business users to see and

Case life cycle design interact with a case the same way they think about
it.
Name stages by using a noun or noun phrase to

describe the section context.
Name Stages
Use names that are meaningful and relevant to
business users.
Name Process and Steps Using the verb + noun naming convention.
-Stages are the first level of organizing your work in

a case.
Stage, process and steps -Processes contain a series of steps or tasks.
-A step is an action or task performed by the
system or users.
Primary stages are stages that lead to the expected

outcome. The path a case takes through the case
Happy Path and primary stage
life cycle that does not deviate from the primary
stages is referred to as the happy path.
Two or more processes that can be performed in

any order can be configured as parallel processes.
Parallel process When the case is processed, the active assignment
in either process can be performed, increasing
case processing efficiency.
- Alternate stages are stages that handle deviations

from the happy path.
Alternate Stage - can be sequenced into primary stages.
- represent exceptions to the normal course of
events

Change stage
To transition the case progression to a specific
stage automatically.
- Significant change in the status of a case.

Stage
- transfer of authority.
A multi-step form represents a single assignment

Multi-step form
completed by a single user.
The case status indicates the case progress towards

Case status resolution. You can set the case status on any stage
and any step in the case life cycle..
Orders or directions on how to carry out an

Instructions
operation or task.
- A service-level agreement (SLA) establishes a

work completion deadline.
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
- You can apply a service-level agreement to cases,
stages, steps, flows, and assignments.
The service-level timing begins at zero hours as the

Start in SLA
step, process, stage, or case begins.
The goal defines the desired assignment length and

Goal in SLA is typically measured from the start time. The goal
interval occurs once.
The deadline defines the time before which the

step or case is late. The deadline is also measured
Deadline in SLA
from the start time. The deadline interval occurs
once.
System Architect in Pega Urgency is a numeric value that brings visibility to

unresolved work in your application. An assignment
has a default urgency of 10. For each interval, you
Urgency in Pega
define a value between 10 and 100 by which to
increase the initial urgency. The maximum urgency
is 100.
Each field corresponds to a data element that

Field in Pega
stores a single value.
Text (single line) Any single line of text.
Text (paragraph) A large text box that accepts multiple lines of text.
Allows users to select a check box to indicate one

Boolean
of two possible responses. (True and False)
Currency code and value are stored based on the

Currency
default currency type.
Stores date and/or time data, often used with input

Date & time mask field property, allows you to choose a date
from a pop-out calendar
Date only Calendar date with a localized format.
Numbers with a fractional component. Use this field

Decimal
type when fractions are needed
Valid email format with a @ symbol. An email field is

an action-oriented control, meaning the value
Email
stored in the field displays as a link. For an email,
the link initiates users' default email application
System Architect in Pega Positive and negative whole numbers, including the
value zero (0).
Integer An integer field stores only the value that begins at
the first non-zero digit. For values that do not
require arithmetic calculations, use a text field type.
Digits display in a localized format. A phone field is

an action-oriented control, meaning the value
Phone stored in the field displays as a link. For example, if
users access the application on a mobile device,
the phone number link initiates a phone call.
Picklist A list of predefined values.
Web address. A URL field is an action-oriented

control, meaning the value stored in the field
URL displays as a link. For a URL, the link initiates the
users' default browser and opens the target web
page
As part of completing work, an application gathers

information from or displays information to users
Views in Pega with views, also referred to as forms. Views display
the fields necessary to complete the current
assignment
- What fields do users need to see?

- Are the fields editable or read-only?
Views considerations
- How do users enter values in those fields?
- Are users required to modify the values in fields?
You can add existing fields to the user view and

To configure user views.. you can reuse saved views when configuring new
user views.
External System of Record ---
System Architect
Pega Platform system of in Pega ---
record
No system of record -----
A field group is a single entity that contains multiple

fields. The field group does not store data itself but
Field group in Pega
instead acts as a container to associate a set of
related fields.
Like a field group, a field group list captures

associated data. The difference is that a field group
Field group lists
list, like the name suggests, is a list of field groups,
or grouped values.
A field group stores the values of a group of

related properties, and a field group list stores a list
of grouped values.
A field group is a single entity. For example, in an
online ordering application, the customer is an
between a field group and a
example of a field group, that contains fields for
field group list?
customer name and contact information. A field
group list is a list of grouped items. The line items
that make up the purchase request is an example of
a field group list.
Functions iterate over items in a field group list and

Functions are supported for Decimal, Currency, and Integer
field types.
Add all instances of a specified property in a field

Function Sum of
group list.
Calculate the average value of all specified

Function Average of
property instances.

Function Maximum of
Determine the largest value for all specified
property instances.
Determine the smallest value for all specified

Function Minimum of
property instances.
Configure a custom calculation to calculate the

Custom calculations field value by using any number of other simple or
fancy field values.
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Custom calculations support
Division
common operations, such as:
Grouping (using parenthesis)
Boolean AND
Boolean OR
- Calculations automatically update fields whenever

input values change.
a benefit of using calculated
- Calculations reduce mistakes by avoiding the
fields?
need for manual computation of values.
What two items describe the - Update all relevant fields whenever a value
function of a calculation changes.
network? - Identify the relationship between fields.
Data records define permissible values for data

Data records fields. Limiting the input values to valid options
reduces errors and allows for automation.
-Data records provide access to data that is used to

What is the role of data process cases but is not part of an application.
records in an application? -For example, a list of train stations used to process
cases in a travel reimbursement application.
System Architect
What is the role of data in Pega
...
records in an
application?
A local data storage lets you store data records for

a data type, without having to create or maintain
Configure local data storage database tables. Data records stored using a local
system of record can be packaged and distributed
as part of an application.
You can retrieve data from external database

storage by using connectors. For example, a
Connect to an external
purchase application needs access to currency
database
exchange rates. Exchange rate information is
stored in an external database table.
- Small pieces of code that are accessed via the

application server which permit interoperable
machine-to-machine interaction over a network.
Web services
- Generally, interaction is based on sending
requests and responses between a client and a
server, which includes data.
API is the acronym for Application Programming

API Interface, which is a software intermediary that
allows two applications to talk to each other.
Pega Robot Manager allows you to monitor and

Pega Robotic Automation schedule RPA robots and provides performance
analytics for all robots.
Which two of the following - Allows for integration with a system of record that
statements are true about does not support an API.
Pega Robotic Automation - Opens and updates information by using the
(RPA)? system of record's user interface.
System Architect in Pega Careful and appropriate assignment routing design

increases business efficiency because assignments
Assignment routing
go to the individual or group of individuals most
capable of completing a specific assignment.
How does assignment routing Assignment routing improves efficiency by

improve efficiency? assigning work to the most appropriate user.
A worklist displays open assignments, ordered by

urgency, for a specific operator or user. You can
Worklist
use your worklist to view the ID, status, and relevant
instructions for each item.
A work queue is a list of work in your application

that is shared by operators with the same user role.
Work Queue
A work queue is sometimes referred to as a
workbasket.
You route an assignment to the current user if the

Routing options: current user. user who completed the preceding assignment
should complete the current task.
You route an assignment to a specific user if an

individual user must complete the assignment. For
Routing options: specific user. example, you route an assignment to the manager
who approves expense reports and it appears in
her worklist.
You route to a work queue if anyone in the group

can complete the assignment. For example, you
Routing options: work queue. route an assignment to the payroll department
work group because anyone in the group can
create and send payment to the employee.
You can also use business logic routing when you

bussiness logic routing
want to route work based on certain conditions.
System Architect in Pega Case approvals are decision points at which one or
Case approvals in Pega more users decide whether to approve or reject a
case.
o configure an Approve/Reject step, you define

who is assigned the approval and how the case
The Approve/Reject step proceeds if the case is approved or rejected. To
achieve this, you configure the Approve/Reject
step routing and flow.
You can assign approvals to the worklist of a

Routing
specific user or a work queue.
- Approvals generally continue the case, but can

be configured to change to a specific stage. You
can optionally change the case status when the
assignment is approved.
Flow in approval o rejection - You can configure rejections to automatically
resolve a case, continue the case, or change to a
specific stage. By default the case status changes
to Resolved-Rejected when the assignment is
rejected.
mail approvals are a convenient way of requesting

approval from stakeholders that use email
messages to request and grant the approval. By
Email approvals configuring a case type to support email approval,
your application's users can approve or reject case
steps remotely, without having to log in to your
application.
Receive approval from people on different levels

of your organizational chart by configuring a
system of cascading approval. For example, you
Configuring cascading
can create a case that requires authorization first
approvals
from the reporting manager of the worker
processing the case, and then from the senior
manager.
System Architect
cascading approvals in Pega ----
authority matrix ----
- Data views represent instances of how your

application uses data and defines the data
associated with a data type. They provide links
Data views
between data records and your application.
- Data views identify how to obtain data from a
system of record.
In Pega Platform™, the system can send

automated email correspondence to all relevant
parties. For example, consider a requirement for an
Communicating with users automobile claims application. The application
sends an email to customers when their claims are
successfully filed, and any time the status of the
claim changes.
Answer three simple questions:

1.- With whom do I need to communicate?
To effective communication 2.- How will the communication be composed?
3.- When does the communication need to be
sent?
- Automating correspondence allows for sending

- Automating correspondence allows you to send
correspondence?
timely communication.
Designs and configures the application. Lead or

principal architects (LSA) design the overall
architecture. Senior (SSA) and system architects
System Architect
(SA) configure assets such as user interface forms
and automated decisions. They contribute object-
oriented design and technical implementation skills.
System Architect in Pega Works with subject matter experts and

stakeholders to understand business needs. In a
Business Architect (BA) Pega Platform™ application, Business Architects
define business rules, service level agreements,
and processes.
A person who ensures that the team is productive,

facilitates the daily Scrum, enables close
Scrum Master cooperation across all roles and functions, and
removes barriers that prevent the team from being
effective.
Has deep understanding of a particular business

topic or domain. The SME works with the project
Subject Matter Expert (SME)
team to convey business needs and helps validate
information accuracy.
Creates and executes functional and performance

Quality Assurance (QA)
test scripts, participates as part of the Scrum team.
Owns the product backlog and prioritization of

Product Owner
backlog items. Creates acceptance criteria.
Provides overall project plan and delivery

Project Deliver Project
guidance.
Provides thought leadership, oversees project

Consulting solution executing delivery and direction, establishes best practices
and governance.
Engage with project development depending on

project needs and skills alignment. For example, a
Specialty Architects UX Architect may be needed to design complex
user views and a Deployment Architect may be
needed to handle application deployment.
System Architect
System Administrator in Pega
and IT Provide expertise as needed. For example, on
resources infrastructure, security, or integration.
Collaborate on Pega projects. Citizen developers

are non-technical business users who participate in
Citizen Developers
application development. These developers bring
valuable knowledge about the business needs.
In App Studio, domain experts can access core

application development features (case design,
App-Studio data management, and user experience) and apply
their knowledge to improve development
outcomes.
In Dev Studio, implementation experts access rule

forms directly to address complex or less-common
configuration requirements. In addition, Dev Studio
Dev-Studio provides features for configuring security
permissions and access control, managing rules to
promote reuse, and addressing the performance
limitations of an application.
App- Studio:
Naming differences between Field, Goal and deadline, process.
studios Dev-Studio:
Property, Service Level Agreement (SLA), flow.
- Developers can switch between App Studio and

Which two statements Dev Studio as needed to configure rule behavior.
regarding Dev Studio are Dev Studio allows developers to create application
correct? components that business analysts and citizen
developers can add to case types in App Studio.
System Architect in Pega Rules describe the behavior for individual cases,
such as how the user interface is displayed and
Rules in Pega when work urgency increases. Pega Platform uses
the rules you create to generate application code
in the background.
Each rule is an instance of a rule type. Pega

Platform provides many rule types to use as
templates for creating a rule. The rule type
Rule Type in Pega
rule. Each rule type models a specific type of
behavior, such as automated decisions or UI
design. For example, to model a process you use a
specific type of rule called a flow rule.
Developers create a new version of a rule

whenever case behavior needs to change. Pega
Platform maintains a history of changes to a rule,
Versioning allowing developers to review the change history
and undo changes if needed. Because each rule
describes a specific case behavior, the rest of the
case remains unaffected.
For example, a developer updates a UI form with

instructions and removes a critical field. You can
Versioning Example review the history of the form and revert to the
version before the changes were made, without
changing other rules in the application.
Developers delegate rules to business users to

allow business users to update case behavior as
Delegation business conditions change. The business user
updates the delegated rule, while other parts of the
application remain unchanged.
System Architect in Pega For example, expense reports that total USD25 or
less receive automatic approval. You create a rule
to test whether an expense report totals USD25 or
less and delegate the rule to the Accounting
Delegation example
department. The Accounting department can then
update the rule to increase the threshold for
automatic approval increases to USD50, without
submitting a change request for the application.
Developers reuse rules whenever an application

needs to incorporate existing case behavior.
Reuse
Otherwise, you must reconfigure the behavior
every time you need the behavior.
For example, you create a UI form to collect

policyholder information for auto insurance claims.
Reuse example
You can then reuse this UI form for property
insurance claims and marine insurance claims.
To package rules for distribution as part of an

application, you collect rules into a group called a
ruleset. A ruleset identifies, stores, and manages the
Ruleset set of rules that define an application or a
significant portion of an application. If a rule is
similar to a song, a ruleset is similar to an entire
album.
Developers collect individual rules into an instance

of a ruleset, called a ruleset version. It is a best
Ruleset versioning practice to lock older versions of the ruleset.
Ruleset versioning helps developers identify and
manage changes to an application.
System Architect in Pega A major version is the first two digits of a ruleset
version number. For ruleset version 01-02-03, the
major version would be 01.
Major version The major version represents a substantial release
of an application. A major version change
encompasses extensive changes to application
functionality.
A minor version is the middle two digits of a ruleset

version number. For ruleset version 01-02-03, the
minor version would be 02.
Minor version The minor version represents an interim release or
enhancements to a major release. For example, you
need to update an expense reporting application
to make automatic audit travel reimbursements.
The final two digits in the ruleset version number.

For ruleset version 01-02-03, the patch version
would be 03.
Patch version The patch version consists of fixes to address bugs
in an application. For example, you notice that a
field in the current version of an application has an
incorrect label.
Each application consists of a sequence of rulesets

called a ruleset stack. The ruleset stack determines
Ruleset stack
the order in which Pega Platform looks through
rulesets to find the rule that is in use.
2/13/23, 3:22 PM PEGA 8.4 CSA Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA 8.4 CSA Study
PEGA 8.4 CSA

5.0 (1 review)
Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
An abstract model of a business transaction is a

Case Type, Case case type, while a case represents work that
delivers a meaningful outcome.
Stages are the first level of organizing your work in

stages
a case.
Processes Processes contain a series of steps or tasks.
https://quizlet.com/514166571/pega-84-csa-flash-cards/ 1/18
PEGA 8.4 CSA A field group stores the values of a group of

related properties, and a field group list stores a list
of grouped values.
.
Correct answer.
A field group is a single entity. For example, in an
between a field group and a
online ordering application, the customer is an
field group list?
example of a field group, that contains fields for
customer name and contact information. A field
group list is a list of grouped items. The line items
that make up the purchase request is an example of
a field group list.
Data views identify how to obtain data from a

system of record..
Correct answer.
Data Views definition
Data views are a data sourcing feature that
identifies how to obtain data from a system of
record.
A new data record generally does not impact the

business process whereas a change to a data type
generally does impact the business process..
How is a data record different Correct answer.
from a data type? For example, adding a new customer is part of the
standard business process. Adding a new customer
feedback data type results in a modification to the
business process.
Data records provide access to data that is used to

process cases but is not part of an application..
What is the role of data
Correct answer.
records in an application?
For example, a list of train stations used to process
cases in a travel reimbursement application.
PEGA 8.4snapshot
You are using CSA pattern a) Only for the first-time request
in your application to get the
details from the data page.
when will the data page will be
loaded?
a) Only for the first-time
request
b) For every unique request
c) For every request
d) Based on refresh condition
in the data page
A worklist is a list of all open assignments, in order

of importance, for a specific user. For example, an
assignment that requires a human resources
worklist
manager to approve employee time off requests
routes to the worklist of the human resources
manager.
A work queue is a list of all open assignments, in

order of importance, for a group of users.
Assignments stay in the work queue until a user
Work Queue
associated with the work queue selects an
assignment, or a manager sends an assignment in
the work queue to a specific user.
___ organizes related data in an data type, data view

application and a ---- links the
data to the system of record.
When modeling the life ...

cycle of a case, stages
represent a _______________
or a _________________.
PEGA 8.4 CSA Data records must be stored using a database

table for local data storage.
.
Data records provide access to data that is used to
process cases but is not part of an application.
What is the role of data
.
records in an application?
Data records and data types share the same role,
which is to provide structure for data views.
.
Data records direct how an assignment moves
forward.
Basic conditions
When a case enters the Search duplicate cases
step, the system first evaluates the basic conditions
to limit the number of potential cases that are
flagged as duplicates. The current case must meet
all basic conditions to be considered a potential
duplicate.
Weighted conditions
Once all basic conditions are met, the system
Duplicate Case Search continues to evaluate the weighted conditions to
receive a weight value. Each condition has a weight
(between 1 and 100) to determine the relative
importance of a condition when making the
comparisons.
The system adds up the weights of all the
conditions that evaluate to true. If the sum meets or
exceeds a specified threshold value, the system
flags the existing cases that met the conditions as
potential duplicates.
PEGA 8.4 CSA Boolean expression - Returns a true or false value,

based on an evaluation of conditions and
properties that you define.
Decision table - Returns a single value for the row
in the table that meets the conditions, expressions,
and value ranges that you define.
Decision tree - Returns a single value for the
Types of decision logics branch in the tree that meets the if-then logic that
you define.
Fork - Evaluates when conditions, expressions, and
likelihoods that you define to determine which
connector advances the flow to the next shape in
the sequence.
Map value - Converts one or two input values into a
single-value result.
The child case cannot be a temporary case. The

parent case refers to the child case by its case ID.
child case type Because temporary cases are not assigned a case
ID, there is no unique identifier for the parent case
to reference.
Wait types
The Wait step can be configured to pause case
Wait shape types
processing based on Wait type: Case Dependency
or Timer.
Drag the words into the correct boxes.
question Assembling a project team brings together a mix of

roles and team members with the skills needed to
meet project goals.
PEGA 8.4 CSA When you model a case type in a Pega Platform™
application, you configure the application with
instructions to create, process, and resolve a case.
These instructions are rules. Rules describe the
behavior for individual cases, such as how the user
interface is displayed and when work urgency
increases. Pega Platform uses the rules you create
to generate application code in the background.
Rule, rule type
Each rule is an instance of a rule type. Pega
Platform provides many rule types to use as
templates for creating a rule. The rule type
rule. Each rule type models a specific type of
behavior, such as automated decisions or UI
design. For example, to model a process you use a
specific type of rule called a flow rule.
Classes
Pega Platform™ facilitates rule reuse between case
types and applications. Developers often reuse
rules — from single data elements to entire
processes — in applications. Rule reuse improves
Classes
application quality and reduces development time.
Within an application, Pega Platform groups rules
into classes according to their capacity for reuse.
Each grouping is a class. Each application consists
of three class types.
Data transforms
The purpose of a data transform is to manipulate
data in an application. Data transforms copy or
Data transforms
manipulate data into the form you require. Data
transforms can be used to iterate over page lists or
page groups and copy entire pages at a time.
PEGA 8.4 CSA To create a page, click Single Page.

Single pages contain embedded pages as values.
For example, you can create a single page that
stores information about a user that creates a case,
such as a user ID and an email address.
To create a page group, click Page Group.
Page group properties contain unordered groups
of embedded pages. For example, you can create
page list a page group that stores information about work
parties, and each embedded page stores
information about one work party, such as a
customer or a worker.
To create a page list, click Page List.
Page list properties contain ordered lists of
embedded pages. For example, you can create a
page list that store multiple addresses of a
customer.
Responsive breakpoints
A breakpoint defines a display width. Pega
responsive breakpoints are set automatically by
default. When the display width crosses a
breakpoint, the responsive behavior is applied to
the layout. With a dynamic layout, responsive
Responsive breakpoints breakpoint behavior changes the layout of the
fields based on the width of the display area.
For example, the default breakpoints automatically
display four columns as two columns on a tablet,
and as a single column on a mobile phone —
making the form readable on smaller screen widths
and eliminating the need for horizontal scrolling.
A connector defines an outbound request for

information based on metadata that is published for
the data source. Connectors establish a connection
Connector to an external system by using an agreed-upon
framework to pass data, such as Simple Object
Access Protocol (SOAP) or Representational State
Transfer (REST).
PEGA 8.4 CSA A service processes an inbound request and

responds to the requesting system. Services define
parameters for passing data needed to fulfill the
request and the structure and format of the
Service
response, such as eXtensible Markup Language
(XML) or JavaScript Object Notation (JSON). The
requesting system parses the response to map the
returned data to its data structure.
Service authentication
If the source system requires authentication, you
Service authentication can configure the basic, NTLM, or OAuth
authentication method to send data records to and
from your Pega application.
You can configure a multi-step form to help users

complete complicated tasks. For example, instead
of having a single, confusing online order form,
configure a multi-step form. The multi-step form
Multi step form
presents information from the online order form in
multiple focused and concise screens. In the
following example, the user navigates to different
forms by using the navigation menu.
Applications often require access to data that is

used to process cases but is not directly part of the
application. Data records provide values for the
Data Record
fields associated with a particular data type and
can be stored outside the case. As a result, you can
widely reuse and reference data records.
PEGA 8.4 CSA In Pega Platform™, data types represent key

business entities, such as customers. Data types
contain all the fields necessary to describe an
object. For example, an identifier, name, address,
and date of account creation describe a customer.
Generally, a change to data record values does not
need an associated change in the business process
Data records and data types
to support the change. Whereas, a change in the
data type fields represents a change in the business
processes. For example, adding a new customer is
part of the standard business process. Adding a
new customer level — for example, platinum —
results in a modification to the business processes
to manage platinum customers.
many external systems still in use today were not

designed to share data with other applications.
These external systems do not have an API for
sharing data. Other systems may have an API that
Pega Robotic Process
you cannot access, or the API is insufficient to
Automation (RPA)
support your business requirements. In these
situations, you can use the Pega Robotic Process
Automation (RPA) integration capability when no
other integration option is feasible.
Temporary cases are only stored in memory on the

clipboard and not in the Pega Platform™ database.
Temporary cases Temporary cases do not have case IDs.
Temporary cases are processed by a single
operator and cannot be routed.
The Integration Designer provides a single location

in App Studio for viewing all the data objects, data
views, object dependencies, and external systems
Integration Designer
in an application. The Integration Designer also
provides insight into how these entities are
connected.
PEGA 8.4 CSA The Visual Data Model is a diagram that provides
visibility into the application's data model and how
Visual Data Model
the entities are related. Update, add, and delete
fields from the Visual Data Model.
The Integration Landscape is a diagram of the data

objects, cases, and systems of record in the
Integration Landscape application and where they are sourced. The
Integration Landscape can optionally be displayed
above the Integration Designer.
A channel is a messaging service, voice service,

channel web portal or mobile portal.A portal is a web
channel in use by your application.
Reports in the Analyze Performance category

analyze and summarize resolved (completed) work
items along quality dimensions. You can use these
reports to review past performance and identify
Reports - Analyze areas that might be improved. For example, the
Performance Average Performance Time By Task report contains
a bar chart and summary counts of how much time
(in hours) that tasks are in processing mode or idle
mode as well as the total time it takes users to
complete tasks.
Reports in the Analyze Quality category identify, by

assignment, which actions were selected, how
often, and the timeliness of the selection. For
Reports - Analyze Quality
example, the Number of items resolved daily by
work type illustrates the pace at which a work
group completes tasks.
PEGA 8.4 CSA Process metrics measure how work is performed,

and are based on data automatically collected by
Pega Platform™. Examples include the time
needed to complete an assignment, how often a
Process metrics
path is followed in a flow, or the number of Service
Level Agreement (SLA) violations. Process metrics
enable business analysts and business managers to
discover issues that impact process efficiency.
Business metrics measure the success or failure of

business processes, and are based on the data you
define for an application. Examples include the
number of orders for a certain item, or how many
Business metrics
cancellations there are of a certain type of order.
Organizations can use these business metrics to
make informed decisions about improving business
performance.
Pega Platform™ facilitates rule reuse between case

types and applications. Developers often reuse
rules — from single data elements to entire
processes — in applications. Rule reuse improves
Classes application quality and reduces development time.
Within an application, Pega Platform groups rules
into classes according to their capacity for reuse.
Each grouping is a class. Each application consists
of three class types.
PEGA 8.4 CSA The Work class contains the rules that describe how
to process a case or cases, such as processes, data
elements, and user interfaces.
The Integration class contains the rules that
describe how the application interacts with other
Class Types systems, such as the integration assets that connect
the application to a customer database or a third-
party web server.
The Data class contains the rules that describe the
data objects used in the application, such as a
customer data type or order items data type.
Pattern inheritance is automatic. Pattern inheritance

uses the class name structure to determine rules
available to reuse. It searches for the rule of
Pattern inheritance
interest following the class hierarchy — in other
words, pattern inheritance searches classes that
share a class name prefix.
Directed inheritance is inheritance between classes

where the parent class is explicitly specified. You
apply directed inheritance to reuse standard Pega
Platform rules and rules from other applications
outside the business class hierarchy. Unlike the
automatic use of pattern inheritance, directed
inheritance is explicit. You list directed inheritance
on the class rule form.
Pattern inheritance allows you to reuse rules within

a single application. Directed inheritance allows
PONT 1 INHERITANCE you to reuse rules in other applications, including
standard rules provided as part of the Pega
Platform.
PEGA 8.4 CSA A work group identifies a cross-functional team that

contains a manager and a work queue. The work
work group queue in a work group contains shared work.
Operators associated with a work group can share
work among operators in different business units.
Pega Platform™ provides the Clipboard tool to

display data in memory. The Clipboard tool
Clipboard tool organizes and presents all the pages in memory,
listing all the properties on each page and the
value of each property.
Viewing case data on the clipboard tores data that

is generated during case creation and processing.
pyWorkPage is a specific page on the clipboard
and stores data such as the case creation date or
the case ID. Embedded pages within pyWorkPage
pyWorkPage store sets of case data as defined by a data type.
For example, if a case uses a data type named
Customer, then Customer is an embedded page
within pyWorkPage. Pega Platform™ writes all the
properties that describe the Customer data type —
such as contact name — to the embedded page.
When you open a child case, the clipboard also

contains the page pyWorkCover. pyWorkCover
contains the case data for the parent case. The
pyWorkCover page enables you to copy data between the parent
case and the child case and confirm that any data
mapped from the parent case to the child case is
correct.
The purpose of a data transform is to manipulate

data in an application. Data transforms copy or
Data transforms manipulate data into the form you require. Data
transforms can be used to iterate over page lists or
page groups and copy entire pages at a time.
PEGA 8.4 CSA Pega Platform™ provides two types of data

transforms that are used to automatically set
default property values and page properties when
you create a case: pyDefault and
pySetFieldDefaults.
pyDefault and
The first time you create a view for your case type,
pySetFieldDefaults
Pega Platform creates the pyDefault and
pySetFieldDefaults data transforms. You can also
create them manually. When a new case is created,
the pyDefault data transform is invoked by the
pyStartCase process. PyDefault then invokes the
pySetFieldDefaults data transform.
Data pages created in versions of Pega Platform

Data pages
before 7.1 begin with Declare_ instead of D_.
In Dev Studio, you can create data pages, also

known as data views. When creating a data page, a
developer must provide four key pieces of
information.
Data Pages The structure of the page contents
The object type represented by the contents of the
data page
The edit mode supported by the page
The scope of the data page
Data transform
Activity
Connector
data page source can be Report definition
Database lookup
Robotic automation
Robotic desktop automation
PEGA 8.4
If you refer to aCSA
data page to false, property only point out to data page
auto populate the property,
the data is stored on the
property.
Copy data from the data page to a case when you

need data from a specific point in time. Once you
Copy data from a data page copy the data to the case, the data is not retrieved
from the source again unless the request
parameters change.
A layout group separates content into individual

Layout groups panels and permits users to view a group of related
data one panel at a time. Layout
A connector defines an outbound request for

information based on metadata that is published for
the data source. Connectors establish a connection
to an external system by using an agreed-upon
framework to pass data, such as Simple Object
Connectors Access Protocol (SOAP) or Representational State
Transfer (REST). Connectors pass application data
to an external data source through required or
optional parameters and parse the response to
map source data to the data structure used in the
application.
A service processes an inbound request and

responds to the requesting system. Services define
parameters for passing data needed to fulfill the
request and the structure and format of the
service
response, such as eXtensible Markup Language
(XML) or JavaScript Object Notation (JSON). The
requesting system parses the response to map the
returned data to its data structure.
PEGA 8.4 CSA Tracer displays each event on a separate row. The
records display according to the following color
code.
Gray - Activity processing
tracer
Orange - Events from flow, decision, or declarative
rules
Light blue - PegaRULES database and cache
operations
For which requirement must The value of the Date of service field must be no
you configure a validate rule in more than 15 days for a critical issue, and up to 60
Dev Studio? days in the future for an issue with a lower priority.
You can style individual Presentation, Runtime

controls on the____ tab at ___
Which two tasks can ...

you perform with the
Clipboard tool?
What is the difference A field group is a group of related properties, and a

between a field group and a field group list is a list of grouped values.
field group list?
A new data record generally does not impact the

How is a data record different
business process whereas a change to a data type
from a data type?
generally does impact the business process.
What is the role of data Data records provide access to data that is used to
records in an application? process cases but is not part of an application.
The Case Dependency wait type pauses case

Case Dependency processing of a parent case until the child case
dependency resolves.
PEGA 8.4 CSA

An application references a
By applying directed inheritance.
Correct.
Directed inheritance is the only option that allows
an application class to inherit rules defined for the
Work- class.
A work group identifies a cross-functional team that

contains a manager and a work queue. The work
work group queue in a work group contains shared work.
Operators associated with a work group can share
work among operators in different business units.
The two cascading approval models are reporting

structure and authority matrix. Cascading approvals
based on reporting structure require the approval
cascading approval model
of a user's direct manager and higher. You can also
configure business logic to set thresholds to
determine the number of required approvals.
The User Pages category contains pages created

due to user action, either directly or indirectly. User
pages contain data related to work being
performed in the selected thread. While a user
processes a case, all the pages used to store data
Clipboard user Pages about the case are listed in the User Pages
category. For example, the data you enter onto a
form is stored on the user page pyWorkPage.
Likewise, when a developer configures or tests a
rule, all the pages that store data used by the rule
are listed in this category.
PEGA 8.4 CSA The Data Pages category contains read-only data
pages defined by data page rules. Data pages
cache in memory data sourced elsewhere, such as
from a third-party service or a system of record.
For example, your application converts currency
Clipboard - Data Pages
from one type to another, such as converting US
dollars to Euros. The conversion rates, which are
determined by the currency markets, are cached to
a data page for use by one or more users of the
application.
The Linked Property Pages contains read-only

pages created by linked properties, which contain
information from data objects referenced by a
Clipboard -Linked Property
linked property.
Pages
Linked properties are advanced data constructs,
typically created and configured by more senior
developers.
The System Pages category contains pages that

describe the current user session, such as the
active user and the active application.
Clipboard System Pages For example, while a user is logged in to Pega
Platform, Pega Platform maintains a clipboard page
containing information about the user, such as their
current time zone.
2/13/23, 3:38 PM Pega.CSA.KPM.01.Role of a System Architect Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega.CSA.KPM.01.Role of a System Architect Study
Science Computer Science Software Engineering
Pega.CSA.KPM.01.Role of a System Architect

Certified Enterprise Architect All-in-One Exam Guide

1st Edition • ISBN: 9781260121483
Ann Reedy, Beryl Bellman, Prakash Rao
- Direct the technical effort on a project.

- Work with business architects to design an
application architecture.
Lead System Architects - Design the architecture to reuse application
assets as much as possible.
- Meet quality goals, including application
performance.
- Supervise development on the application.

- Focus on a particular process or UI form, and
supervise the development of that process or form.
- Add technical details to specifications, translating
Senior System Architects
application requirements into guardrail-compliant
feature designs.
- Identify opportunities to reuse existing assets
within the application design
https://quizlet.com/gb/306105925/pegacsakpm01role-of-a-system-architect-flash-cards/ 1/2
2/13/23, 3:38 PM Pega.CSA.KPM.01.Role of a System Architect Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega.CSA.KPM.01.Role of a- perform
System Architect
much of the development work.
- Configure and unit test individual application
elements such as correspondence and automated
System Architects
decisions.
- Help draft processes and user interfaces during
DCO sessions.
Which two tasks do system - Configure UI

architects perform on a Pega - Develop feature prototypes
project?
On a Pega project, who is Lead system architect

architecture?
With whom does a system Business architects

architect work to develop
application specifications?
https://quizlet.com/gb/306105925/pegacsakpm01role-of-a-system-architect-flash-cards/ 2/2
2/13/23, 3:24 PM PEGA CSSA Exam Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA CSSA Exam Study
PEGA CSSA Exam


Technology
7th Edition • ISBN: 9780077475864
103 solutions
Clipboard pages created by User Pages

the application.
Clipboard pages created by Declared Pages

executing a Rule-Declare-
Page
A read only clipboard page System Managed Pages

that contains pages such as
pxThread, pxProcess, and
pxRequestor
https://quizlet.com/124257032/pega-cssa-exam-flash-cards/ 1/6
PEGA CSSA
Allows you Exam
to Refresh, Refresh Clipboard - Action Menu
Current Page, Find property in
a given page, CRUD, Execute
an activity on a selected page,
save a page or start a flow on
a page.
Can be used to leverage Java Enterprise Edition (JEE)

middleware infrastructure
services such as Java
Transaction APIs (JTA), Java
Management Extensions (JMX),
and Java Authentication
Services (JAAS).
Can be used to leverage Java Enterprise Edition (JEE)

simplified architecture and
development, varied choices
of servers, tools and
components, and easy
integration.
The two tiers of Java Enterprise Client Faceing APIs - JSP and JSF
Edition (JEE) Strong Middle Tier - EJB, JDBC, JNDI, JMS, JMX
WAR - web application archive

The two deployment methods
EAR - Enterprise Archive, containes WAR and EJB
of Java Enterprise Edition (JEE)
jar files
Ensures load balancing and Clustering

session failover
Sessions must be _____ to Sticky

ensure that all subsequent
requests go to the same node
PEGA CSSA
To configure Exam
system state you prconfig.xml - this is bad for performance
must configure what
Activity Step - against guardrails - everything in

one method
Java can be used in Pega by
Rule-Connect-Java - guardrail complient - can be
two methods
used with Plane Old Java Objects (POJOs). Must be
in classpath.
Obj-Open and Obj-List are OBJ-Open and OBJ-List are optimized to leverage
preferred to RDB methods caching
because...
DB Transactions
Two types of Transactions JTA Transactions
PRPC uses Two phase commits - need XA DB Driver
CMT is invoked for EJB, Java, and JMS
SQL Server
Databases supported Oracle
UDB
Database configuration should Not by using prconfig, should be done with

be done by... connection pools
Using SOAP with PRPC uses Rule-Connect-SOAP - Uses Axis

two types of rules Rule-Connect-Java - Uses POJO Wrapper
SOAP Authentication uses HTTPBasic and the LoginHeader
JMS communication - One to Publish Subscriber Model

Many
JMS Communication - One to Point to Point

One
PEGAJMS
CSSA Exam
On Demand Push vs Pull Scheme
This protocol must be used for IMAP

Exchange
This authentication does not siteMinder

require J2EE
This invokes PRPC outside the JSR94

context of the app server so
no deployment is required
By doing this to prconfig.xml, Externalizing it

repackaging will not be
necessary if it is changed
Clustered
Four options for PRPC Embedded
Deployment Batch
Distributed and Heterogeneous
Repackaging jar - cvf
JAAS Supported
Two Phase Commit
Five Benefits of EAR All service types available
MQ Listener
Transactional Model
Holds data about the reads Rule Cache - Memory

done from the PegaRules
database for rule classes &
Storage Location
PEGA CSSAjava
Used to minimize Exam
code Rule Assembly Cache - Memory
generation and compilation
mainly by tracking ResultSets
lists and user entries & Storage
Location
Stores Class and property Dictionary Cache - Memory

Information & Storage
Location
A Dictionary Cache that Conclusion Cache

contains instance of Java
Objects that were generated,
instantiated and then persisted
to the database for future use
A Dictionary Cache that Property Defination Cache

containes all of the Rule-Obj-
Property rules
Contains lookup list Lookup Cache - Disk

information which display in
drop down boxes & Storage
Location
Contains static content files Static Content Cache - Disk

such as images and help files &
Storage Location
This ensures each note has the System Pulse

most updated rule
This table stores rule changes pr_sys_updatescache

between System Pulse runs
How often does the System Every Minute

Pulse Run
PEGA
This flags CSSA
a rule as Exam
dirty and for System Pulse
FUA on next access
This handles local lookup list System Pulse

cache deletions
If this is removed from the Extract marker file

temp directory, code
regeneration and compilation
will occur
Pega Study
Pega
Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
An application lets customers A reservation

in the application?
You are helping to implement Business architects

Pega
You want to engage business Iterative delivery + Direct Capture of Objectives
and IT resources to review the (DCO)
objective?
Guardrails help developers to track compliance

Which two are benefits of with Pega best practices.
following Pega guardrails. Guardrails help developers build applications that
are easier to maintain and have fewer defects.
When collecting information Add the date of birth field to the case worker's
for a loan application, a case view of the case type.
worker needs to enter the date Add a date of birth data field to the case type.
information?
A _______________ delivers a A Case

meaningful business outcome
to a customer, partner, or
internal stakeholder.
A ________________ is used as a first stage

level of organizing work in a
case.
In Pega Platform, Processes

___________________ are organized
within stages and define one
or more paths the case must
follow.
Pega
When modeling the life cycle transfer of authority
of a case, stages typically
represent a _______________ or a significant change in the status of a case
________________.
When modeling the life cycle be sequenced into the primary stages
typically represent ____________ exceptions to the normal course of events
and can ___________.
A business process Add a local action to the case type.


Adding instructions to a step Describes to an end user what should be done in

____________. the step.
A step in the case life cycle At the Beginning of a step

status of the case
What type of step typically Collect Information

requires contextual
instructions?
Pega
modify or only read the values.
When is the earliest You can configure the user view for a step after you
opportunity for you to add that step to the case life cycle.
Express?
You have added fields for Define the name and address properties as text
entering the name and property types and use text input controls.
would you use?
Which validation method Validation Rule

methods?
______________.
Pega
format?
a bank checking account number pattern.
this requirement?
You have a requirement to add Use a single validate rule to verify both of these
to a view a check box that conditions.
requirement?
Pega
You are adding a field to your Use the required option
case type in which users must
enter the day, month, and year Define the field type as a date
requirements?
What is the difference A child case has a relationship with the parent case
between a top-level case and and a top-level case does not.
a child case?
What are the two ways you You can configure a case to wait for a set amount
can configure a Wait step to of time or until a subcase reaches a defined status.
pause a case?

implemented using a Wait step unless you complete a new account child case.
in a case?
You cannot complete a Make loan request a parent case type, and
purchase case on a website appraisal a child case type.
unless you complete a new
account child case.
Pega
In an online shopping Both Pay-37 and Pac-56 have to be resolved
application, the primary case before PO-11 can be resolved.
While testing case behavior for This page should be located in the Data Pages
an online shopping category.
confirm that the application
properly generates a list of the
customer's previous orders
when querying the company's
order management system. In
which category of clipboard
pages would you expect to
find the page that contains this
list?
pyWorkPage stores which type info about a case

of information?
Review the current values of case data.

You use the Clipboard tool to
perform which two tasks? Test case behavior by setting property values for
an open case.
Where do most data Most data transforms occur between assignments.

transforms occur in a process
flow?
Pega
What action is defined in The Apply Data Transform action.
pyDefault to ensure that
pySetFieldDefaults is invoked
when a case is created?
What data transform feature The superclass feature

do you use when you want to
set a different default value for
the same property within a
hierarchy of subclasses?
When you create data Give each data transform the same name
transforms in a class hierarchy
and want to use the superclass
feature, how do you name
each data transform?

transform?
Pega
The case type hierarchy in In each subcase type data transform, set the work
your insurance application urgency to the required value.
consists of three case types:
Claim (top level), Personal Select the Call superclass data transform option in
Injury (subcase type of Claim), each of the subcase type data transforms.

configure the
requirement?
In which two of the following Copy data from one page to another
data transform? Set default values when creating a case
Pega
Which technique should you Use procedural processing by calling a data
form?


expression?

property?
Where are the source values Where are the source values entered when
entered when creating declare creating declare expressions in Case Designer and
expressions in Case Designer Designer Studio?
and Designer Studio?
When does an expression When the application references the property by

using backward chaining name
update its target property?
performance?
Pega
You are designing a travel plan Total cost of options
step displays a form in which Total cost for the hotel room
extra cost, options such as
valet parking. The application
totals the cost for any selected
options and adds that amount
to the total room cost to equal
the grand total, which is
displayed in a field. Which two
of the following properties
would you use as the target
properties?
In a purchase order When updating a property that is calculated, you

application, you have been do not need to identify every calculation that
asked to add an order total updates any of the source values and manually re-
field that is used on multiple calculate them.
forms in the application. You
want to make sure that The system monitors input properties and
whenever the input values determines when to update the target property
change, the order total will value.
declare expression rather than
a data transform for
calculating the value?
Pega
You are configuring a Specify backward chaining in the total interest rate
expressions which are used to
approval form. To improve
performance, how can you
reduce the number of
calculations?
When does data propagation when a case is created

occur?
You have a purchase request data transform

Use __________ to sum a value in a calculation

Use __________ to conditionalize a data transform

Pega
When do you use a data when you need to retrieve data
page?
When you configure a data A data page rule defines the structure, scope, data
page, you define the structure source, and refresh strategy of the cached data.
as either a page or a list. What
other components do you
need to define?
You need to fetch exchange node

customer data. The data page after it was created.
when the data page will
reload?
You have configured a data Update the data page to change the data source
page to look up customer data information.
in a database table. The data
source changes to a REST web
service. Which of the following
best describes the actions you
should take to make sure your
application uses the right data
source?
Pega
You want to create a list of Configure a local data storage and add your data
products and their attributes to records to the selected data type.
distribute with an application.
Which method do you use to
create the reference data?
Which of the following would delivery options

local data source?
In which types of UI control is drop-down

reference data from the local
data source typically used?
The External Database Table use a data page

Class Mapping wizard creates
a data class and a database
table. How do you make this
data available to your
application?
Which two use cases are a To access an external database

good use of reference data?
(Choose Two) To provide a limited set of input values for a field
What capabilities do you gain You can add behavior for late assignments, and
by configuring a service level determine when an assignment is ready for users to
agreement rule in Designer perform.
Studio?
Which variable in the .pyUrgencyAssignAdjust

assignment urgency
basis?
Pega
The goal milestone in a service in which the case or step should be completed
time _____________________.
The primary purpose of a to help ensure timely completion of assignments

How will the correspondence be sent?

you ask when creating a When does the correspondence need to be sent?
correspondence?
Who is the user that receives the correspondence?
Automating correspondence allows you to send

timely communication.
Automating correspondence allows for sending
Two)
consistent information to users.
In a new hire process, a hiring Enable assignment notifications for the case type.
manager needs to be
Pega
You are configuring a standard Insert applicant's name, loan office, and loan

would you route the
receives it?
Pega
An insurance company Route requests to a work group that uses skill rating
provides personal property parameters for work group members.
would you use?
home appraisal offices in based on a decision rule.
paths in the case life cycle that are chosen by a

Conditional paths in a case life user at run-time
cycle are used to define
______________________. (Choose Two) paths in the case life cycle that are followed based
on run-time values
A parallel process is defined as a process that executes over the same time period
___________________________. as other processes
Pega
Automating decisions based application users to focus on more nuanced
___________________________.
You have created a form that Set the activity name column to primary
lists a group of recreational importance.
activities that users can select
when booking a vacation. One Set the image column to other importance.
column lists the activity name,
a second column provides the Set the check box column to secondary
check box for activity importance.
selection, and a third column
displays a thumbnail image of
the activity. You want to ensure
that users have the information
they need to make their
selections regardless of screen
size. When viewed on a small
display the images. What three
take to support this
You want to list the orders A table

placed by a customer over the
past six months. For each
order, you need to display the
order number, the date of the
order, the total amount of the
order, payment method, and
order status in a series of
columns. What type of layout
do you use to present the list
of orders to a user?
Pega
What are two ways you can Add a field group list to a view in Pega Express.
add a table to a view? (Choose
Two) Add a table to a section used by the view.
What are the main UI control, and which event and action to configure
considerations when preparing to the control.
to configure an action set?
Which of the following sets Tab key > Add new work
represent action sets (event >
action) in Pega Platform? Double-click > Scan barcode/QR code
(Choose Two)
the case?
report definition?
Pega
Your organization has a Create two conditions: Work Status does not equal
that contains columns for loan Quarter.
requirement?
Pega
A report contains five columns Sales territory (.Territory)
of data about sales quotes.
Expiration date (.ExpiryDate)
The case ID (.pyID)
representative
(.pxAssignedOperatorID)
The creation date of the sales
quote (.pxCreateDate)
The sales territory (.Territory)
The expiration data of the
quote (.ExpiryDate)
Prior to property optimization,

which two properties does the
report identify as potentially
impacting performance?
(Choose Two)
What are two ways to view the Run the unit test or view the output of the test with
output of a unit test? the Clipboard tool.

consequences.
When unit testing a rule, you Provides initial values for properties used in rule
can identify a data transform to evaluation.
use during the test. What does
the data transform do?
Pega
You have created a test case The return values used in the decision table
for a decision table and
verified the results. A few The input property values used in the decision
weeks later, another developer table
runs the test case again and
the test fails. Changes to which
two of the following
configurations could have
caused this result? (Choose
Two)
2/13/23, 4:22 PM Pega Senior System Architect Knowledge Checks and Quizzes Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Senior System Architect Knowledge Checks ... Study
Science Engineering
Pega Senior System Architect Knowledge Checks

and Quizzes
5.0 (1 review)
Fundamentals of Engineering Economic Analysis

1st Edition • ISBN: 9781118414705
David Besanko, Mark Shanley, Scott Schaefer
215 solutions
2. Application Development: Using an ECS helps you organize rules in a way that
Creating a Pega Application encourages reuse and provides the ability to adapt
Knowledge Check as the business changes.
State two advantages of

organizing rules using an ECS.
https://quizlet.com/471190040/pega-senior-system-architect-knowledge-checks-and-quizzes-flash-cards/ 1/45
Pega Senior
2. Application System Architect
Development: Knowledge
The Framework layer Checks ...
Creating a Pega Application
Knowledge Check
Which layer of the ECS would

contain a generalized
application that could be
extended by various lines of
business?
2. Application Development: ECS provides a structure supporting rule reuse

Creating a Pega Application - ECS has layers designed to hold rules specific to
Assessment that layer. The placement of rules within ECS is a
determining factor in how they are used
What is the purpose of the
ECS?
2. Application Development: Organization

Creating a Pega Application - The Organization layer contains the assets used
Assessment on an enterprise wide basis. Assets contained in the
Organization layer are available for use in
You have a requirement to applications
create an email Division
correspondence that can be -Assets in the Division layer are available for use in
reused by other applications. applications
in which two layers of the ECS
could you apply the email
correspondence rule?
2. Application Development: Framework

Creating a Pega Application - The Framework layer contains assets used to
Assessment create generalized reusable applications. A
Framework application is then extended by specific
Which layer of the ECS implementations
contains generalized assets
that are then extended by
specific implementations?
Pega Senior
3. Deployments: System Architect
Application An SAKnowledge Checks
copies the required rules into ...
the empty
Versioning ruleset to create the new application version
Knowledge Check
In lock and roll, what occurs

after you use the wizard to
create a new, empty ruleset?
3. Deployments: Application Skimming is the process of saving the highest

Versioning version of a rule into a new higher ruleset version.
Knowledge Check Skimming streamlines application versions when
rule changes follow a logical sequence.
Why would you use skimming
instead of lock and roll when
versioning an application?
3. Deployments: Application You use create a new version when you want to
Versioning lock and roll the version and create a new
Knowledge Check application rule. You can also create a new
application version when you want to have people
When using lock and roll, what access more than one version of the application
is the purpose of selecting the (for example, a phased roll-out or a test period).
new version option?
3. Deployments: Application Update the application rules, the Requires RuleSets

Versioning and Versions prerequisites array in RuleSet version
Knowledge Check rules, and access groups to reference the new
major or minor version.
What tasks must you perform
after the skim is complete?
3. Deployments: Application Extra steps are unnecessary if the ruleset is up to

Versioning date
Assessment - The rules in the reulest version should be up-to-
date prior to versioning the ruleset
When creating a new ruleset
version, what extra step must
the system architect perform?
Pega Senior
Application Knowledge
Application Checks
versioning preserves ... application
prior
Versioning versions
Assessment - You can edit application functionality in a new
version of the application without changing the
What is the importance of initial version
application versioning?
3. Deployments: Application Skimming is most effecient for major and minor

Versioning updates. Lock and roll is most useful for patches
Assessment - Skimming is the process of saving the highest
What advantages does In lock and roll, you must select the appropriate
skimming provide over lock rules to copy into a new empty ruleset. Lcok and
and roll as a versioning roll is labor intensive when used for major
option? updatese.
3. Deployments: Application Access to the ruleset includes all versions in patch

Versioning rulesets. Rules from a lower major ruleset are not
Assessment accessible.
Drag and drop exercise
5. Deployments: Application Organized

Rulesets
Knowledge Check
The default initial application

created by the New
Application wizard contains a
set of rulet for the application
code and _________ assets.
Pega Senior
Application Knowledge
Application Checks ...
validation (AV)
Rulesets
Knowledge Check
Which ruleset validation made

allows for codependent
rulesets?
5. Deployments: Application a given operator session

Rulesets
Knowledge Check
The ruleset list indicates the

rulets that are available to the
application for __________.
5. Deployments: Application The rule is already checked out by someone else.

Rulesets The rule is in a locked ruleset.
Knowledge Check
List two reasons why a rule is

not available for checkout.
5. Deployments: Application Application

Rulesets Access group
Assessment
Select two record types that

are involved when configuring
a production ruleset
Pega Senior
Application Rules Knowledge Checkscannot
using application validation ... reference
Rulesets rulesets in applications build on the application
Assessment
A claims framework contains

two rulesets, ClaimsFW and
ClaimsFWInt. An application
build on the framework also
contains two rulesets, Claims
and ClaimsInt. Which
statement is false if all the
rulesets are configured as
Application Validation?
5. Deployments: Application Rules in MyCo can reference rules in Claims

Rulesets - When using Ruleset Validation, rulesets can only
Assessment reference their prerequisites
A claims application contains

two organizational and two
application rulesets. The
organizational rulesets MyCo
and MyCoInt are configured
as Ruleset Validation, where
the prerequisite for MyCo is
MyCoInt and the prerequisite
for MyCoInt is Pega-Platform.
The two application rulesets
Claims and ClaimsInt are
configured in Application
Validation. Which of the
following statements is false?
7. Deployments: Managing Two or more development teams can configure an

Application Development application in parallel.
Knowledge Check Rule development takes place within an isolated
space (the branch) without affecting functionality in
Describe two advantages of the source code
branching.
Pega Senior
Managing Knowledge
To enable Checks
your team to manage the ...
branches they
Application Development suse and not impact other teams.
Knowledge Check
Why do you create a team

application?
7. Deployments: Managing identify any conflicts between your changes using

Application Development the Merge Branch Ruleset wizard
Knowledge Check
Before moving the updated

rules into the base rulesets,
you first _________________.
7. Deployments: Managing You can view possible rule conflicts and guardrail
Application Development warnings in the branch rule on the Branch quality
Knowledge Check tab.
How do you ensure there are

no rule conflicts or guardrail
warnings in the merge branch
candidate?
7. Deployments: Managing Create a team application

Application Development Create an access group that references the team
Assessment application. Add developers to the access group
Which two of the following are

prerequisites for creating a
branch rule for parallel
development
Pega Senior
Managing Knowledge
is designed Checks ...
for large projects
Application Development is based on another ruleset
Assessment
A branch ruleset is a branch

that ______________ and _____________.
7. Deployments: Managing Review conflicts and warnings

Application Development Check in rules to merge
Assessment
Which two steps do you

perform after you develop
branch rules and before you
merge a ruleset?
9. Application Development: abstract rule

Rule Resolution
Knowledge Check
Rule resolution applies to most

rules that are instances of
classes derived from the
___________ base class.
9. Application Development: an exact match of a property or date circumstance

Rule Resolution
Knowledge Check
During rule resolution, a first,

best match is determined by
________________.
Pega Senior
Development: Knowledge Checks ...
default
Rule Resolution
Knowledge Check
During rule resolution, the

_____________rule is selected if no
exact circumstance matches
are found.
9. Application Development: To be included in the results, each candidate rule

Rule Resolution must have the same Major version number and a
Knowledge Check minor version number less than or equal to the
specified minor version number listed in the
Assume an operator's ruleset operator's ruleset list.
list includes Loans:01-01. Why
would a candidate rule found
in Loans:01-02 not be included
in the results of the rule
resolution process?
9. Application Development: Rules found in the ancestor tree of the rule in

Rule Resolution question - by either pattern or direct inheritance -
Knowledge Check are retained in the list of rule candidates.
Assume the referenced rule

has an Apply to: class of TGB-
HRApps-Work-Onboarding.
Why would a candidate rule
with an Apply to: class of TGB-
HRApps-Work be retained in
the list of rule candidates?
Pega Senior
The version Checks
of the ruleset ... last. This
is considered
Rule Resolution ensures that circumstances rules are not
Knowledge Check automatically overridden if the base rule is
updated in a more recent ruleset version.
As candidate rules are ranked
during rule resolution, which
criteria is considered last?
Why?
9. Application Development: Apply to: TGB-FW-LoanShark

Rule Resolution Ruleset: LoanSharkPrime:01-01-01
Assessment Availability: Yes
- The output of the resolution process is the first
A rule with an Apply to: class rule candidate found that matches all of the rule
of TGB-FW-LoanShark-Work- resolution criteria
AutoLoan calls
CollectingBorrowerDetails.
Which rule instance is selected
from the rules cache during
rule resolution?
Ruleset list:
TGB:01-01
TGBInt:01-01
LoanShark:01-01
LoanSharkPrime:01-01
LoanSharkInt:01-01
9. Application Development: If a user does not have access to the selected rule,
Rule Resolution the system sends a message that it could not find
Assessment an appropriate rule to execute
- The rule resolution algorithm verifies that the user
Which of the following has authorization to access the selected rule
statements is true about the
rule resolution process?
Pega Senior
Development: Knowledge Checks ...
Withdrawn
Rule Resolution - When a rule marked as Withdrawn is found during
Assessment rule resolution, the system looks for an instance of
the rule in the next highest class of ruleset
Which rule availability setting
can you use to force the
system to look for an instance
of the rule in the next highest
class or ruleset?
11. Application Development: Circumstancing allows you to describe exception

Circumstancing behavior with a set of targeted rules rather than
Knowledge Check one complex rule. Each targeted rule configures
behavior to address a specific exception.
How does circumstancing
solve the problem of
configuring exception
behavior in an application?
11. Application Development: The real estate firm will use multiple value
Circumstancing circumstancing to display the appropriate
Knowledge Check disclosure for each listing based on the
circumstance template and definition.
What type of circumstancing
will a real estate firm use to
display a disclosure statement
that varies by both the status
and location of the listing?
11. Application Development: A national insurance company requires a different

Circumstancing minimum for liability coverage in each state
Assessment - Circumstancing allows you to create a targeted
rule for each state, rather than one complex rule
In which of the following for all states
situations would you use a rule
circumstance to resolve the
requirement?
Pega Senior
Circumstance Checks
the form by ... date;
property and
Circumstancing specify June 15, 2019 as the start date
Assessment
An application change goes

into effect on June 15, 2019.
are added to a user form to
the form?
11. Application Development: The base rule is used if no circumstanced variant

Circumstancing applies
Assessment
Which statement best

describes the role of the base
13. Case Management: Search duplicate cases uses weighted conditions.

Duplicate and Temporary Each condition has a relative importance defined
Cases by a weighting value.
Knowledge Check
What does search duplicate

cases process use to compare
specific properties or values
with cases already in the
system?
Pega
13. Case Senior System Architect
Management: Knowledge
Save storage in the PegaChecks
database ...
Duplicate and Temporary
Cases
Knowledge Check

temporary cases?
Airline customers can view their travel itinerary or

13. Case Management:
submit a request to modify their itinerary, subject to
fees
Cases
- The airline customer service case type would
Knowledge Check
benefit from using a temporary case. The temporary
case is resolved if the customer views their travel
Which scenario might benefit
itinerary. The case is persisted if the customer
from using a temporary case?
modifies their itinerary
13. Case Management: The case is stored in memory

Duplicate and Temporary - The case is only stored in memory, whether the
Cases case is temporary or permanent
Assessment
When a process is configured

to create temporary cases,
which of the following occurs
when a user creates a case?
13. Case Management: Add a Persist Case SmartShape to the process

Cases
Assessment
What task must you perform in

order to persist a temporary
case?
Pega
Management: Add aKnowledge Checks
basic condition where ... operator in
the create
Duplicate and Temporary an existing case is the same as in the current case
Cases - if the basic condition evaluates to true, the
Assessment current case is eligible as a potential match and is
evaluated using weighted conditions
You want to evaluate cases as
potential duplicates when the
existing cases and the current
case have the same create
operator. How would you
ensure that only cases with the
same create operator are
evaluated?
13. Case Management: Adjust the condition weights

Duplicate and Temporary - Give the conditions that frequently produce
Cases invalid duplicates lower weights
Assessment Adjust the threshold value
- Adjust the weighted conditions sum threshold
Management reports that an value, so that more conditions or conditions with
unacceptably large number of higher weights must evaluate to true
cases are incorrectly identified
as potential duplicate cases.
Which two approaches could
you use to modify the
duplicate case search process
so that it produces fewer
invalid duplicates?
15. Case Management: Parallel A Split For Each allows you to iterate over a list of
Processing employees to start an interview process for each
Knowledge Check employee.
Which type of Smart Shape

would you use to start an
interview process based on a
list of employees who must
interview a job candidate?
Pega
15. Case Senior System
Management: Parallel Architect Knowledge
You would Checks
choose a Split ... it lets you
Join because
Processing call multiple subprocesses that run in parallel
Knowledge Check
In an equipment selection
process, you want the Facilities
Setup and IT Setup processes
to run in parallel using a smart
shape. Which smart shape
would you choose?
15. Case Management: Parallel For each child case, you override the default
Processing setting that locks the parent cases.
Knowledge Check
Assume you want users to

have the ability to work on
top-level cases while their
child cases are open. How
would you configure your
locking settings?
Pega
Management: Parallel Architect
SelectKnowledge Checks
Allow one user locking option...on Purchase
Processing Requests and select the Allow access for the
Assessment parent case when the child case is opened option
of Purchase Orders
Your application contains a
top-level case type named
Purchase Request and a
Purchaser Order child case.
The company has determined
taht only one user at a time
may open and work on a case.
However, users working on
purchase orders should not
lock out users working on the
parent purchase request
cases. Howe would you
configure the lock settings
among the case types?
15. Case Management: Parallel An Any Join condition

Processing - This condition resumes the main flow when only
Assessment on of the subprocesses completes
In a prepare job offer process

you configure a Split For Each
shape. The shape runs a
compensation approval
subprocess to a list containing
four managers. The prepare
job offer process resumes as
soon as one manager
completes the approval
process. Which join condition
in the Split For Each shape
Pega
Management: Parallel Architect
Add aKnowledge Checks
Split For Each shape ... request
and run the
Processing subprocess for each vendor on a page list
Assessment
An order fulfillment process

includes a request for quotes
from multiple shippers. You
want the system to
automatically call a quote
request subprocess for each
vendor. How do you configure
the process?
17. Case Management: Flow Pega performs the pre-processing action each time
Action Processing the flow action is presented to the user
Knowledge Check
If a flow action includes a pre-

processing data transform or
activity, when does Pega
perform the actions?
17. Case Management: Flow You need to identify the impacted flow action and
Action Processing determine whether the new data transform or
Knowledge Check activity should be placed before or after the flow
action. You also create or update the desired data
Why is analyzing the transform or activity.
requirement and the case type
important?
Pega Senior System Architect

17. Case Management: Flow
Knowledge
the action Checks
runs each time ... to the
the user returns
assignment
Action Processing
- A pre-processing action runs each time the flow
Assessment
action is performed on an assignment. If the user
returns to the assignment, the pre-processing
action is repeated
adding a pre-processing
The action automatically runs if the flow action has
action to a flow action are
the highest likelihood for the assignment in the
true?
process flow
17. Case Management: Flow The data transform runs every time the user
Action Processing performs the flow action run
Assessment - Pre- and post-processing data transforms and
activities run every time you invoke the flow action
You created a data transform
to concatenate the first and
last name values of a user
name. You add the
concatenate data transform to
a flow action as a post-
processing action. What
occurs when the flow runs?
19. Case Management: You use a decision table when you need to test the
Decision Tables and Trees values of multiple properties to make the decision.
Knowledge Check
What is the main reason for

using a decision table rather
than a when rule for
automating a decision?

19. Case Management: WhenKnowledge
you want to applyChecks ...logic to
if...then...else
Decision Tables and Trees evaluate a set of conditions.
Knowledge Check
When would you use a

decision tree rather than a
decision table to automate a
decision?
19. Case Management: Create one column for feedback, with three rows
Decision Tables and Trees for the three possible decisions
Assessment - You would create one feedback column and three
rows for evaluating the three possible feedback
A job recruiter screens results
candidates to assess their
qualification. The recruiter
targeted position. Matches a
company, or does not match
any position. A decision table,
based on the recruiter's
advances the cases through a
corresponding connector

19. Case Management: Knowledge
Two nested Checks
branches - one ... technical
two evaluate
Decision Tables and Trees skill scores and another to evaluate interpersonal
Assessment skill scores
A top-level branch that test for assessment scores
Candidate hiring decisions are less than 40
based on the feedback from
the interviewer and test
scores. If necessary, other test
scores are used in the
evaluation
are automatically rejected
are rejected if either their
technical skill score or their
interpersonal skill score is
below 40
- Candidates with assessment
scores higher than 60 are
automatically approved
tree?
19. Case Management: Check the decision tree for conflicts

Decision Tables and Trees - Checking for conflicts verifies that every row will
Assessment be evaluated by identifying on or more branches
that cannot be reached. If a branch cannot be
You have designed a decision reached, the test values will not be evaluated
decison tree?
Pega
The authority Checks
matrix works ...the approval
best when
Approving Cases with an chain is directed by a set of rules to individuals
Authority Matrix both inside and outside of the organization of the
Knowledge Check submitter. The reporting structure model works
best when approvals always move up a defined list.
between the authority matrix
and reporting structure
cascading approval models?
21. Case Management: A cascading approval step simplifies the

Approving Cases with an configuration of a process that requires multiple
Authority Matrix approvals. You can base the cascading approval on
Knowledge Check a reporting structure or an authority matrix.
Dynamic layouts arrange items in a flexible form
What is the purpose of a that automatically adjusts to screen size.
cascading approval step?
Describe the purpose of
dynamic layouts.
21. Case Management: Authority matrix

Approving Cases with an - You use authority matrix model when approvals
Authority Matrix are not based on a reporting structure
Assessment
You configure a cascading

approval step for insurance
claims. The request requires
approval from the submitter's
manager. However, approval
from operators in other units in
the organization may be
required. Which approval
would you use?
Pega
Set the decision table toChecks
evaluate all...
rows
Approving Cases with an - You must evaluate all rows in the decision table.
Authority Matrix Otherwise, the table returns only one result
Assessment
You have added a cascading

approval step that uses an
authority matrix. You have
specified a decision table to
each case. you have confirmed
approvers. However, the
system routes all requests to
only one approver. Which of
the following actions would
you take to correct this issue?
Pega
Management: SelectKnowledge Checks
the reporting structure ...
configuration with
Approving Cases with an custom levels, then configure when rules to
Authority Matrix determine the number of levels
Assessment - When rules are used to test whether an approval
level is needed
Your application requires
cascading approval for the
expense reports. Approvals
must follow the submitter's
reporting structure, with the
expense reports up to $500. A
director must approve
expense reports up to $1500. A
vice president must approve
expense reports of $1500 or
greater. How do you configure
the approval process?
23. Case Management: A work group is not part of the organizational

Organizational Records structure. Although it is an organization rule, a work
Knowledge Check group is used to allow managers to monitor, report,
and assign work among operators and work
Which of the following is not queues across the organization.
part of the organizational
structure: Division, unit, work
group, or organization?
Pega
Management: SelectKnowledge Checks
the organization in ... chart
the organization
Organizational Records and use the chart menu to add the division.
Knowledge Check
A requirement states that you

must add a new division to
your organization. What
approach allows you to see
where in the organization
hierarchy you are adding the
division?
23. Case Management: Operator ID

Organizational Records Work Queues
Assessment
You add a new work group to

an application. Which two
organization rules do you
need to update?
23. Case Management: Work group

Organizational Records - A work group is used to allow managers to
Assessment monitor, report, and assign work among operators
and work queues across the organization
structure?
Pega
Add the regional units asChecks
sub-units to...the Sales unit
Organizational Records - The regional units report to the Sales unit.
Assessment Therefore, the regional units are sub-units to the
Sales unit
The TGB organization structure
has a Sales unit, and it belongs
to the Marketing division. TGB
plans to add new units for the
East, Central, and West
geographical sales regions.
These regional units report to
the Sales unit. How do you
configure the organizational
hierarchy to support the new
structure?
25. Data Modeling: Field list of allowed values

Values property
Knowledge Check
A field value enables you to

manage the ______________
separately from the _______________.
25. Data Modeling: Field True

Values
Knowledge Check
True or false: You can add

different field values for a
single property in the same
context.
Pega
25. Data Senior
Modeling: System
Field Architect Knowledge
Customize Checks
a list of allowed values for...a property
Values based on the context of the property
Assessment
Field values enable you to

_____________.
25. Data Modeling: Field Create a field value record for each value and set
Values the context using the Apply to: field
Assessment
How do you customize the

allowed values for a property
based on the context of the
property using field values?
27. User Interface: User Portals The purpose of a user portal is to provide users
Knowledge Check with a view into their application. Each portal is
customized to the needs of a particular group of
What is the purpose of a user users.
portal?
27. User Interface: User Portals An action area displays the content of a user form
Knowledge Check when users select a flow action. The action area
describes the work users perform to complete an
What is the purpose of an assignment.
action area in a harness?
27. User Interface: User Portals A screen layout defines the structure of a portal.
Knowledge Check The screen layout defines the panes of the portal.
The content of each pane is determined by
What is the purpose of a referencing a section.
screen layout in a harness?
Pega SeniorUser
27. User Interface: System
Portals Architect Knowledge
A navigation Checks
record is used ... the entries
to configure
Knowledge Check on a menu. It lists a menu entry and identifies the
action performed when a user selects the entry.
What is the purpose of a
navigation record?
27. User Interface: User Portals A binary file record is a container for a non-text file.
Knowledge Check It provides the security, inheritance, versioning, and
deployment benefits granted through the process
What benefits does a binary of rule resolution.
file record provide for storing
not-text files?
27. User Interface: User Portals Upload the image in the application theme
Assessment - To update the logo in the portal header, upload
the new logo in the application theme
Which step do you perform to
update the logo in a portal
header?
27. User Interface: User Portals Navigation record

Assessment
Which record do you

configure to add an item to
the left panel menu in the
Case Manager portal?
The appropriate skin to apply branding to the

portal
27. User Interface: User Portals - You configure a portal to use the branding
Assessment configured application skin, or to apply a specific
skin to the portal
Which two options do you The user role of the type of user who would access
configure on a portal record? the portal
- You configure a portal rule to support either user
to developer access
Pega SeniorEnabling
29. User Interface: System Architect Knowledge
Use tool-tips Checks
to announce a control's...function, use
Accessibility Features in a high-contrast screen, configure a button or a link
Applications to dismiss an overlay, set the enter event on a
Knowledge Check control to enable keyboard tabbing, include links
with icons, mark a dynamic container as the main
What application accessibility content area to enable direct access to the content
improvement approaches can in the dynamic container, and use a drop-down list
you enable without the of options instead of text entry for fields with
accessibility ruleset? predictable answers.
29. User Interface: Enabling The PegaWAI ruleset complies with WAI-ARIA
Accessibility Features in standards and requires no additional configuration.
Applications
Knowledge Check
What additional role

configuration is required when
implementing the PegaWAI
ruleset?
29. User Interface: Enabling High contrast color schemes are available for users
Accessibility Features in with vision limitations
Applications Tooltips on controls are read aloud to the user by a
Assessment screen reader
Which two standard

accessibility options are
available without adding the
PegaWAI ruleset?
29. User Interface: Enabling Provide enhancement interface support for users
Accessibility Features in requiring assistance
Applications
Assessment

accessibility roles?
Pega SeniorEnabling
Add the Checks
PegaWAI ruleset ... application
to the list of
Accessibility Features in production rulesets
Applications - To implement the PegaWAI ruleset, you first add
Assessment and save the ruleset to the list of production
rulesets in the Advanced section of the appliance
What do you do before you Definition page
configure the advanced tab of
the Access group to apply the
PegaWAI ruleset?
29. User Interface: Enabling The Disability preview button in the Accessibility
Accessibility Features in inspector tool
Applications - The Disability preview in the Accessibility
Assessment inspector tool allows you to preview what the
current UI looks like to users with different forms of
A developer decides that color blindness
buttons in Pega application are
blue, while the button text is
purple. What Pega feature
allows the developer to check
whether application users with
a form of color blindness can
easily differentiate between
the button text and the button
background?
31. User Interface: Localized The five ways to adapt to regions using localization
Application Content are accommodate the local language, currency,
Knowledge Check date format, time zone, and time format
What are five ways to adapt to

regions using localization in
international applications?
Pega SeniorLocalized
Field value, Checks
paragraph, and ...
correspondence
Application Content rulesets can be exported, translated into multiple
Knowledge Check languages, and reused in an application to
accommodate multiple regions.
What is the advantage of using
rulesets when localizing an
application in multiple
languages?
31. User Interface: Localized Export all the required fields using the Localization
Application Content wizard, have them translated, and import your own
Knowledge Check custom translation pack.
How can your application be

localized if a language pack is
not available for that region?
Correspondence and paragraph rules are

exported as HTML files to be translated
31. User Interface: Localized - After downloading the translation pack, look for
Application Content Base and Translation HTML files. Save the localized
Assessment versions in the Translation files
You can use the Localization wizard to export the
Which of the following two strings to be translated which contain certain rules
statements are true about the such as field value or message rules
localization wizard? - Field value and message rules appear in an XML
file. The translated version is inserted in the XML file
and imported in Pega platform
31. User Interface: Localized Field Value

Application Content - Field values support localization by overriding an
Assessment English word or phrase with an equivalent term in
another language
Which rule is used to store the
labels, messages, and other
text strings that require
translation?
Pega SeniorLocalized
Instruction text Checks ...
Application Content Short descriptions
Assessment
You can use field values to

localize ___________ and ____________.
33. Information Exchange: - Autopopulate a hospital intake form when a new

Keyed Data Pages patient provides insurance card information
Knowledge Check - Display saved payment options when a user opts
to change the default payment option
Non-keyed data page
- Display a list of insurance packages to an eligible

33. Information Exchange:
employee. Display the insurance details when a
Keyed Data Pages
package is selected
Knowledge Check
- Display a list of homes in need of a visit from a
census taker. Display home details when a home is
Keyed data page
visited
33. Information Exchange: - Keyed page access is not available for single
Keyed Data Pages pages
Knowledge Check - Only properties can reference keyed data pages
True
33. Information Exchange: - Parameters can be used in non-keyed data access

Keyed Data Pages but cannot be used in keyed data access
Knowledge Check - Keyed page access configuration occurs on the
property rule
False
Pega Senior
33. Information System Architect
Exchange: Knowledge
two separate data pagesChecks ...
Keyed Data Pages
Knowledge Check
A keyed data page serves as

an alternative to having
______________.
33. Information Exchange: is not

Keyed Data Pages
Knowledge Check
Data is, or is not, stored in the

property that refers to the data
page?
33. Information Exchange: a data page parameter changes

Keyed Data Pages
Knowledge Check
When you copy data from a

data page, the data is
refreshed only when _____________.
33. Information Exchange: data model

Keyed Data Pages
Knowledge Check
To implement the reference

pattern, use a data page in
your application without
defining it as part of the
___________.
Pega Senior
Exchange: Knowledge
Source Checks
the contents of the ...directly from
UI control
Keyed Data Pages a data page
Assessment - The reference pattern references data directly
without making it part of the data model
Users must select the make
and model of their vehicle
when submitting a new
insurance claim. Which is the
best implementation for this
use case?
33. Information Exchange: Configure a page property with the Refer to a data
Keyed Data Pages page option enabled
Assessment - The system of record (SoR) pattern references
data in an external system without including it in the
A product return case must case data
always show the current
contract information for the
customer from a customer
database. Which is the best
case?
33. Information Exchange: Configure a page property with the Copy data
Keyed Data Pages from a data page option enabled
Assessment - The snapshot pattern copies data from an
external system to the case
An online order must include
item price information at the
time of the order placement.
Which is the best
case?
Pega Senior
Exchange: CreateKnowledge Checks
a keyed data page ... information
with vehicle
Keyed Data Pages - A keyed data page frontloads the data from the
Assessment data source and then uses one or multiple keys to
locate and return matching instances. The keyed
When users select the model data page is the best implementation when there
of their vehicle, the application are frequent unique queries before the information
displays the specification for becomes stale.
the model. Most vehicle model
requests occur before the
vehicle information becomes
stale. Which is the best
implementation for the use
case?
35. Information Exchange: An external class maps Pega properties to

Database Updates database columns
Knowledge Check
An external class differs from

other Pega classes in which
way?
35. Information Exchange: Opens an instance of a class stored in either the

Database Updates PegaRules database or an external database
Knowledge Check
Obj-Open
35. Information Exchange: Opens an instance of a class stored in either the

Database Updates PegaRules database or an external database using
Knowledge Check a permanent unique key
Obj-Open-By-Handle
Pega Senior
Exchange: Knowledge
Searches Checks
the database, retrieves ... records,
multiple
Database Updates and copies them to the clipboard as an array of
Knowledge Check embedded pages
Obj-Browse
35. Information Exchange: Opens a clipboard page, acquires a lock (if one is
Database Updates not already held), and refreshes the page
Knowledge Check
Obj-Refresh-and-Lock
35. Information Exchange: Saves the contents of a clipboard page to the

Database Updates database, a deferred save
Knowledge Check
Obj-Save
35. Information Exchange: Immediately saves the contents of a clipboard

Database Updates page to the database
Knowledge Check
Obj-Save with WriteNow
35. Information Exchange: Deletes a database now based on the contents of a

Database Updates clipboard page
Knowledge Check
Obj-Delete
35. Information Exchange: Deletes a database row based on a unique ID

Database Updates
Knowledge Check
Obj-Delete-By-Handle
Pega Senior
Exchange: Knowledge
Cancels the most recentChecks ... Obj-Save
uncommitted
Database Updates method so that the instance is not written as part of
Knowledge Check a later Commit operation
Obj-Save-Cancel
35. Information Exchange: Cancels or withdraws any previous any previous

Database Updates uncommitted changes to the PegaRules database
Knowledge Check from the current thread
Rollback method
PegaRules database
35. Information Exchange: - Stores all rules and system information for a Pega
Database Updates application
Assessment PegaDATA database
- Stores information such as cases, assignments,
Match the database type to its and case history
description External database
- Stores data outside of the Pega application
An external class always has an associated

database table instance
Database Updates
It is possible to create declare index rules on
Assessment
external classes
- Properties in an external class are present on the
clipboard, and you can set property values with
external classes are true?
declare expressions
Pega Senior
Exchange: 5 Knowledge Checks ...
Database Updates - The first property-set is written to the deferred list
Assessment and persisted to the database at the commit step
overwriting the second property-set value written
An activity executes the directly to the database
following five steps on an
integer property in the
sequence shown. What is the
value in the database after all
five steps complete?
1. Property-set (value = 5)
2. Obj-Save
3. Property-set (value = 10)
4. Obj-Save with Writenow
5. Commit
35. Information Exchange: <Append>

Database Updates
Assessment
Which symbolic index keyword

adds an element to the end of
a page list property?
35. Information Exchange: Execute SQL statements that contain database

Database Updates vendor specific syntax
Assessment Execute a complex SQL statement such as a join or
stored procedure against an external database
options are good uses of
Connect SQL rules?
Pega Senior System Architect Knowledge Checks ...

Connector
- A Pega application populates a screen with recent
credit card transactions. The screen references a
data page that uses REST to obtain the transactions
37. Information Exchange: from another system
Exchange Data with Other -A Pega application saves insurance claim files in a
Applications CSV format to specific directory. The files are
Assessment uploaded and processed nightly by an insurance
company's claim processing application
Connect the appropriate Pega Service
integration model to a use - A customer logs in to a mortgage bank website to
case check the status of their loan. The website obtains
the current status from a Pega loan processing
application
- A Pega application processes emails sent to a
specific email address into new cases
37. Information Exchange: Data pages

Exchange Data with Other activities
Applications
Assessment
A connector can be directly

referenced from ______________
and ______________?
Pega Senior
Exchange: Knowledge Checks ...
1,2,3,4,6,5
Exchange Data with Other
Applications
Assessment
In which order are rules and

dataa instances applied for a
connector?
1. Data page/Activity
2. Data transform (from
application data structure to
structure)
3. Mapping rule (from
integration clipboard structure
to format specified by the
target service)
4. Connect rule
5. Data transform (from
integration clipboard structure
to application data structure)
6. Mapping rule (from format
reviewed by the service to
structure)
39. Information Exchange: You must simulate an itegration when the service is
Simulating Integration Data not available or when the response needs to be
Knowledge Check dictated.
When do you simulate an

integration?
Pega Senior
Exchange: WhenKnowledge
the connector hasChecks ... generated
not yet been
Simulating Integration Data
Knowledge Check
When do you use the

simulation option in a data
page?
39. Information Exchange: if the interface definition is not finalized

Simulating Integration Data - If the interface definition is unavailable, there is
Assessment not connector and you must simulate the data page
In which of the following

situations do you simulate a
data page?
39. Information Exchange: Simulate a connector

Simulating Integration Data Call a connector from a flow
Assessment

situations require use of
activity?
41. Information Exchange: The most significant benefit is the ability to

Integration Setting reference external systems in a way that can vary
Management depending on environment, without requiring the
Knowledge Check update of integration rules and data instances.
What is the most significant

benefit of using global
resource settings?
Pega Senior
Exchange: CreateKnowledge
a data transform Checks ...
Integration Setting - You use a data transform to load a data page with
Management the correct settings
Assessment Create a data page
- You use a data page to access the Global
Which two of the following Resource Settings
steps are necessary to
implement Global Resource
Settings?
41. Information Exchange: Dynamic system setting

Integration Setting - A DSS is a data record used to store
Management environmental variables and are not part of a
Assessment ruleset. Data records are editable even when
rulesets are locked in production.
Which of the following record
types are editable on a
production system?

settings without unlocking rulesets
- Using Global Resource Settings allows you to not
Integration Setting
have to update the rules in the application, just the
Management
data values for the integration properties
Assessment
settings in one place
Select two benefits of using
- Managing your integration settings in one place
Global Resource Settings
allows you to easily move an application from one
environment to another

1. The Knowledge
SOAP connector isChecks
invoked ...
- The connector references a data page
2. A data page property is referenced
3. The data transform for the data page is executed
41. Information Exchange: if the page is not already available on the clipboard
Integration Setting - The data page references a data transform to
Management populate the data page with the endpoint
Assessment 4. The data transform invokes a utility function to
obtain the value of a DSS
Correctly order the list of five - The data transform calls a function to obtain the
rules and records endpoint value from the DSS record
5. The value is used by the SOAP connector to
invoke the service
- The connector uses the value to access the
system at the endpoint
43. Information Exchange: Transient

Integration Errors
Knowledge Check
What type of errors typically

correct themselves over time?
43. Information Exchange: response data transform

Integration Errors
Knowledge Check
In data pages, a best practice

is to detect errors in the
_______________.
43. Information Exchange: You would use it when the response is not
Integration Errors immediately needed and a process for handling the
Knowledge Check error is required
When would you use an error

handler flow for your
connector?
Pega Senior
Exchange: Knowledge
The service is running onChecks ... is
a system that
Integration Errors temporarily unavailable
Assessment - The transient error is because the situation is
temporary
An error is generated when a
connector invokes a remote
is an example of a transient
error?
43. Information Exchange: Use an existing function in the error handling data
Integration Errors transform
Assessment - There is an existing function for writing messages
to a log file
Which of the following allows
you to write all errors that are
detected when loading a data
page to a log file?
43. Information Exchange: The standard connector error handler flow can
Integration Errors help recover from transient errors
Assessment The error handler flow is invoked if the error is not
handled elsewhere
statements are the most
accurate with respect to the
error handler flow?
45. Information Exchange: A service allows other applications to access your

Web Services application
Knowledge Check

service?
Pega Senior
Exchange: Knowledge
A condition Checks
allows you to ... error
add a custom
Web Services message to the response
Knowledge Check
What is the purpose of using a

condition in a SOAP
exception?
45. Information Exchange: Access the data from a data page

Web Services Create a new case
Assessment
Which of the following actions

can you perform with the Pega
API?
45. Information Exchange: 1. Service package

Web Services 2. Service rule
Assessment 3. Mapping rule (from format received by the
service to clipboard structure)
What is the order rules and 4. Service activity
data instances are applied for 5. Mapping rule (from clipboard structure to format
services? specified by service type)
A when rule returns true when the request is

queued
- Queue when
Authentication falls when using the service
Web Services
- Security
Assessment
A valid instance of the service activity is unable to
be found
Match the term to the
- Service
description
An error occurs while transforming incoming data
from the request message to the clipboard
- Mapping
Pega Senior
47. Reporting: System Architect
Designing Knowledge
The tool Checks
uses Pega classes ...table
to find the
Reports with Multiple Sources
Knowledge Check
How does the Pega reporting

tool find and retrieve data
from the appropriate table?
47. Reporting: Designing Pega uses two records - a database record and a
Reports with Multiple Sources database table record - to map classes to database
Knowledge Check tables
How does Pega map classes

to database tables?
2/13/23, 3:11 PM Pega Section 10: Decision Design Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Section 10: Decision Design Study
Maths
Pega Section 10: Decision Design

5.0 (1 review)
Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
An application must test Map Value

combinations of item size and
color and return the result
valid for allowed
combinations. Which decision
rule is best suited to this
decision?
https://quizlet.com/327092078/pega-section-10-decision-design-flash-cards/ 1/5
Pega Section
Customers under the10:
age Decision
of 18 Design
When
must provide the name and ID
number of a consenting parent
as part of an enrollment
process. Which decision rule is
best suited to determine
whether to display entry fields
when a consenting parent is
needed?
An application recommends Predictive Model

mobile phone plans to
customers. Which type of rule
predicts the customer
response to an offer based on
existing data?
The risk premium for a Decision Tree*Correct

property insurance quote is When
based upon the location, size, Strategy
and age of a house. Which two Decision Table*Correct
types of decision rules are
best suited to configuring this
decision? (Choose Two)
The purpose of a when rule is to evaluate one or

What is the purpose of a when
more conditions to return a result of either true or
rule?
false.
organizes a set of one or more true/false tests into

when rule
a tree-like structure
Pega Section 10: Decision Design

Determine whether to perform a data
transform.*Correct
Determine whether a UI field should be
Which three decisions would visible.*Correct
you model with a When rule? Determine whether to include a column when
(Choose Three) running a report.
Determine if a process runs.*Correct
Recalculate an expression whenever one of the
input values changes.
Which statement best A When rule can only return a true or false result.
describes the evaluation of a
When rule?
What is the main reason for You need to test the values of multiple properties
using a decision table rather to make the decision.
When would you use a When you want to apply if...then...else logic to
decision tree rather than a evaluate a set of conditions.
decision?
Testing a decision table or decision tree on its own

Unit Testing before testing it in the context of the entire
application
evaluate one or two criteria to return a result, and

Map values
can return numeric or text results.
Pega Section
A job recruiter 10: Decision Design
screens Create one column for feedback with three rows
candidates to assess their for the three possible decisions.
qualifications. The recruiter
targeted position, matches a
company, or does not match
any position. A decision table,
based on the recruiter's
advances the case through a
corresponding connector
Pega Section
As part of 10:
the process of Decision Design
An otherwise branch that tests for assessment
assessing a candidate, the scores less than 40.
feedback provided by the A branch that evaluates both technical and
interviewer is used to decide interpersonal skill scores
whether or not to hire a Two nested branches - one to evaluate technical
candidate for a position. If skill scores and another to evaluate interpersonal
necessary, other test scores skill scores.*Correct
are used in the evaluation. A top-level branch that tests for assessment scores
Candidates with an assessment less than 40.*Correct
score of 40 or less are
automatically rejected before
they are evaluated further.
Candidates with an assessment
score of 60 or less are
rejected if either their technical
skill scores and interpersonal
skill scores are below 40.
Candidates with scores higher
than 60 are automatically
approved.
tree? (Choose Two)
You have designed a decision Check the decision tree for conflicts.
decision tree?
evaluate case data to determine outcomes that

Business rules
direct a business process
2/13/23, 3:16 PM PEGA CSA Practice Exam Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA CSA Practice Exam Study
PEGA CSA Practice Exam

The Practice of Statistics for the AP Exam

5th Edition • ISBN: 9781464108730
Daniel S. Yates, Daren S. Starnes, David Moore, Josh Tabor
2,433 solutions
https://quizlet.com/411111175/pega-csa-practice-exam-flash-cards/ 1/30
PEGA CSAisPractice
Which situation best Exam d.
addressed through If a loan applicant resides in Canada, add a legally
circumstancing? required disclosure to the confirmation email
acknowledging the submission of their loan
a. Loan applicants must request.
provide their name, address,
and occupation. If the Circumstancing allows you to adjust execution of a
customer is already a process step based on case conditions. Altering
customer, automatically the content of correspondence based on a specific
populate the customer details condition, such as the state of residence for a loan
from the system of record. applicant, is a common use case for
Otherwise, require that the circumstancing.
applicant enter this
information on the form.
b. If a loan applicant is
married, prompt the applicant
to provide the name, date of
birth, and taxpayer ID for their
spouse.
c. Notify a manager if the

"Review Request" assignment
exceeds the established
deadline of 24 hours.
d. If a loan applicant resides in

Canada, add a legally required
disclosure to the confirmation
email acknowledging the
submission of their loan
request.
PEGA CSA
Which rule Practice
warning do you Exam b. An application uses an activity to add a customer
address by justifying the information to a system of record.
current design?
Writing data to a system of record may require use
a. An application uses an of an activity, even though activity use triggers a
activity to calculate a guardrail violation. In this situation, the violation
promotional discount. should be justified.
b. An application uses an
activity to add a customer
information to a system of
record.
c. An application is being
prepared for release, and a
process is still in draft mode.
d. A property on a report is not

optimized, and may affect
report performance.
PEGA CSA Practice

Which requirement would be Exam a. If a timesheet is rejected, it can be corrected and
best implemented as an resubmitted.
alternate stage when defining
a case type? Alternate stages are those stages that are not a
part of the "normal" course of events, but must be
a. If a timesheet is rejected, it available under certain circumstances such as this.
can be corrected and
resubmitted.
b. Travel requests must be

reviewed by the submitter's
manager. Any travel request
exceeding USD10,000 must
also be reviewed by the
division VP.
c. When a customer requests

delivery of airplane tickets, the
application prompts the user
to provide their mailing
address.
d. Upon resolution of an order,

a survey should be sent to the
purchaser.
PEGA CSA
Select two Practice
statements that Exam a. A case represents the processes, data, and work
best describe the relationship parties involved in completing a business
between a case and a child transaction. A child case typically focuses on a
case. (Choose Two) subset of data relative to a parent case and usually
involves different work parties than the parent case.
a. A case represents the
processes, data, and work AND
parties involved in completing
a business transaction. A child b. A case is considered the primary processing unit
case typically focuses on a (parent case) of a business transaction, while a child
subset of data relative to a case is any related case that represents work that
parent case and usually must be completed to resolve the parent case.
involves different work parties
than the parent case.
b. A case is considered the

primary processing unit
(parent case) of a business
transaction, while a child case
is any related case that
represents work that must be
completed to resolve the
parent case.
c. A case is used when the

steps needed to complete a
business transaction involve
conditions between the steps.
A child case is used to indicate
one of the steps if the parent
case does not involve
conditions between the steps.
d. A case represents all of the

steps needed to complete a
business transaction. A child
case is only used when the
step needed to help complete
a business transaction involves
one or more tasks and one or

more actors.
You have a case type for c. Data is propagated when the credit check child
account opening which has a case is created.
credit check child case. You
have configured data
propagation on the account
case for the credit check
subcase. Which of the
following statements
described the data
propagation feature?
a. Data is propagated every

time the account case is saved
to the database.
b. Data is propagated when

the credit check case is
updated.
c. Data is propagated when

the credit check child case is
created.
d. Data is propagated when

the account case is updated.
PEGA
Select theCSA Practice
statements that bestExam c. Use data transforms to map data from a source
describe the purpose of a data to a target, and perform any conversions needed
transform. (Choose Two) to achieve the intended mapping results.
a. Use data transforms to store AND

data obtained from a SQL
query on a clipboard page, d. Use data transforms to set properties values on a
which can then be paginated given page, whether they are initial values or
for presentation in a report. updated values.
b. Use data transforms to

define the contents of a
clipboard page in either read-
only or read-write mode.
c. Use data transforms to map

data from a source to a target,
and perform any conversions
needed to achieve the
intended mapping results.
d. Use data transforms to set

properties values on a given
page, whether they are initial
values or updated values.
PEGA
CustomerCSA Practice
must provide at Exam b. Value Group
least one of the following
three telephone numbers: Use a Value Group property to create a property
that can contain an unordered group of single
•Home values.
•Office
•Mobile
Which property mode should

be used to collect and identify
this phone number by name?
a. Single Value
b. Value Group
c. Page List
d. Page
An application includes the b. Page List

property reference
.Customer.Assets(3).AssetType. A Page List is used to create a property that can
contain an ordered list of embedded pages.
The property type of
.Assets(3) is a ________________.
a. Page
b. Page List
c. Value List
d. Page Group
PEGA
Two formsCSA
for an Practice
online Exam b. Backward chaining for the taxes and the grand
shopping process use a total
declarative network to
calculate values. The first form The values will be updated only when the second
contains fields that display the form is opened.
item total amounts and the
order total amount. The
second form includes fields
that display the taxes and the
grand total that will be
charged to the user's credit
card. Which declare
expression configuration
would you use so that all the
values on the second form are
calculated only when the user
reaches the form?
a. Backward chaining for the

item totals and total order
amount
b. Backward chaining for the

taxes and grand total
c. Forward chaining for the

taxes and grand total
d. Forward chaining for the

item total amounts and total
order amount
PEGA CSA
Which two Practice
requirements are Exam b. A request is rejected if it has not been resolved
examples of an escalation by the end of the Deadline interval.
action on a service level
agreement? (Choose Two) AND
a. A manager decides to c. An email is sent to the assignee's manager if the

reassign an uncompleted assignment is unresolved at the end of the
assignment when the deadline Deadline interval.
interval expires.
b. A request is rejected if it has

not been resolved by the end
of the Deadline interval.
c. An email is sent to the

assignee's manager if the
assignment is unresolved at
the end of the Deadline
interval.
d. The assignment urgency

increases if the assignment is
unresolved at the end of the
Goal interval.
PEGA CSA
Which three rule Practice
types can Exam a. Section
you reference in a Section rules are used to include content from user
correspondence rule to forms in correspondence.
provide content for the
correspondence? (Choose b. Paragraph
Three) Paragraph rules are used to include strings of text
in correspondence.
a. Section
c. Property
b. Paragraph Property rules are used to include case data in
correspondence.
c. Property
d. Data transform
e. Validate
PEGA CSA
An insurance Practice
claim process Exam d. Add a Send Email Smart Shape to the deny
includes an assignment in connector leaving the review assignment.
which a manager reviews
claims. If the claim is denied, The Smart Shape automatically sends email when
an email is automatically sent the case is resolved.
to the user and the case is
resolved.

process to send this
correspondence?
a. Add a notification to the

assignment
b. Add a
SendCorrespondence local
action to the review
assignment.
c. Add an assignment and a

notification to the deny
connector leaving the review
assignment.
d. Add a Send Email Smart

Shape to the deny connector
leaving the review assignment.

An email correspondence a. Include contents in a paragraph rule and
contains instructions for filling reference it in your correspondence.
out a form. The instructions
contain images which illustrate Paragraphs present formatted text that can include
how to fill in fields. The colors, fonts, styles, and images
instructions are used in various
correspondences used by
your company. Which is the
best way to include the
instructions?
a. Include contents in a
paragraph rule and reference
it in your correspondence.
b. Include contents in a
section and reference it in your
correspondence.
c. Include instructions in a
standard correspondence
type rule and reference it in
your correspondence.
d. Include contents in a
paragraph rule and reference
it in a text area control on your
correspondence.
PEGA CSA Practice

In which situation is the use of Exam a. Sending a text message when a case is resolved.
an activity necessary?
You would use the CorrNew activity in a Utility
a. Sending a text message shape.
when a case is resolved.
b. Copying data from a parent

case to a child case when the
child is created.
c. Copying data from one

page to another.
d. Retrieving data from an

external system.
A step in an activity for c. Specify pyWorkParty as a step page.

creating correspondence calls
another activity to send This step page provides data context during the
correspondence to all the execution of this step.
parties listed on the
pyWorkParty page.

first activity to achieve the
desired behavior?
a. Specify pyWorkParty as a
parameter page.
b. Specify pyWorkParty as the

primary page.
c. Specify pyWorkParty as a
step page.
d. Specify pyWorkParty as a
clipboard page.
PEGA CSA
You create a formPractice
that you Exam a. None
want to add to your process.
In which flow shape would you You add forms to flow actions, which are defined in
add your form? connectors.
a. None
b. Connector
c. Assignment
d. Utility
PEGA CSAapplication
A loan request Practice Exam c. Decision Tree
includes an approval process
as follows: A decision tree uses if-then-else evaluations.
Requests for an amount

greater than USD30,000 are
reviewed by a credit manager
or a vice president. If the
customer's credit score is less
than 720, then the request is
reviewed by a vice president.
Otherwise, the request is
reviewed by a credit manager.
Requests for USD30,000 or
less are reviewed by a loan
officer.
Which rule would you use to

automatically advance the
request to the correct user?
a. Map value
b. Decision table
c. Decision tree
d. When rule
PEGA CSA
Which two of thePractice
following Exam b. Decision table
rules can be used to direct A decision table is used to derive a value that has
case processing in a flow? one of a few possible outcomes, where each
(Choose Two) outcome can be detected by a test condition.
a. Correspondence AND
b. Decision table e. When condition

A when condition is used to evaluate a Boolean
c. Data transform logical statement involving comparisons among
values of properties to return true or false.
d. Declare expression
e. When condition
You are adding a date of birth c. Use a validate rule to test the date.
field to a job application form.
You want to make sure that the A validate rule can use a function to test the date.
user enters a date in the past.
How would you support this
requirement?
a. Use a when condition to test

whether the date is in the past
or in the future.
b. Use a calendar control that

tests the date.
c. Use a validate rule to test

the date.
d. Use a declare expression to

test the date.
PEGA CSA aPractice

A form contains text field forExam d. Specify an edit validate rule in the property used
entering a U.S. postal code. by the text field.
You want to make sure that the
user enters five digits in the An edit validate rule can test the field pattern, in
field. What rule would you use this case for five digits.
to enforce this requirement?
a. Use an integer property

type in the text field.
b. Specify a validate rule in the

property used by the field.
c. Use five character min/max

settings on the field.
d. Specify an edit validate rule

in the property used by the
text field.
PEGA
An onlineCSA Practice Exam
computer c. Configure an auto-complete control using a data
equipment vendor maintains page as the data source.
an inventory database of more
than 1000 items. While A data page allows you to source data from the
shopping, users select items database. The autocomplete allows the user to filter
from a list. the list of items as they type.

field so that it displays the
items?
a. Configure a drop-down list

using a property containing a
local list of items as the data
source.
b. Configure an auto-complete
control using a clipboard page
as the data source.
c. Configure an auto-complete
control using a data page as
the data source.
d. Configure a drop-down list

using a clipboard page as the
data source.
PEGA CSAthat
An application Practice
processes Exam d. Create the fields for the spouse in a separate
loan requests must collect layout and use a visible when condition to
information from borrowers to determine when the fields for the spouse should
check their credit report. If a appear or be hidden.
borrower is married, the
borrower must provide this Every extra unit of information in a dialogue
information for a spouse as competes with the relevant units of information and
well. For each person, the diminishes their relative visibility. Use the visible
application requires a first when feature whenever appropriate so that users
name, last name, and taxpayer are not inundated with information until needed.
ID.
What is the best way to

a. Add fields for both the

borrower and the spouse to
the UI and make both sets of
fields required.
b .Create two sections: one for

the borrower only, and the
other for the borrower and
their spouse. Use declarative
processing to determine which
section to display.
c. Add an assignment for the

borrower's information and an
assignment for their spouse's
information, and use a decision
shape to determine when to
skip the assignment for the
spouse's information.
d. Create the fields for the

spouse in a separate layout
and use a visible when
condition to determine when
the fields for the spouse

PEGA CSAorPractice
should appear be hidden Exam
Users can access an apartment a. Use a dynamic layout.
search application from
laptops and mobile phones. You can configure a dynamic layout to arrange UI
Pictures of the apartments, elements in different formats at different screen
descriptions, and agent sizes.
information are organized in
columns.

screen to accommodate both
laptops and mobile displays?
a. Use a dynamic layout.
b. Use a column layout.
c. Use a screen layout.
d. Use a smart layout.
PEGA CSA Practice

You are configuring a grid Exam c. Use two action sets: one for the right-click event,
layout so that a row is set in and one for the up key and down key events.
focus when a user right-clicks
a row, uses the up key, or uses
the down key. In addition, You can combine the focus and edit action for the
when the user clicks a row, it is right-click event.
shown in edit mode.
How do you configure the grid

a. Use two action sets: one for

the right-click action, and one
for the up key and down key
actions.
b. Use one action set for the

click, up key, and down key
actions.
c. Use two action sets: one for

the right-click event, and one
for the up key and down key
events.
d. Use one action set for the

click, up key, and down key
events.
PEGA CSA
An employee Practice Exam
medical c. Add a visible when condition to the section
coverage form contains a containing information about the spouse.
check box to indicate whether
the employee has a spouse. You use the when condition to test whether the
When a user selects the check check box value is true or false.
box, the form displays a
section that includes additional
fields for entering information
about the spouse.

form?
a. Add a visible when

condition in the cell containing
check box.
b. Set visibility to if not blank in

the section containing
information about the spouse.
c. Add a visible when

condition to the section
containing information about
the spouse.
d. Set visibility to if not blank in

the cell containing the check
box.
PEGA CSA Practice

Your organization replaces Exam b. Create a Weeks Until Replacement column and
employee laptops two years use a function in the column to calculate the value.
from the date the laptop was
issued. A manager asks you to A function can be used to calculate the number of
create a report that shows, for weeks remaining based on the Issue Date and two-
each employee, the number of year deadline.
weeks until the replacement
date. Report columns include
Employee ID, Laptop ID, and
Issue Date. How would you
configure the report definition
to provide the requested
information?
a. Create a Weeks to
Replacement column. In the
Issue Date column use a
function to calculate the value.
b. Create a Weeks Until

Replacement column and use
a function in the column to
calculate the value.
c. Create a Weeks to
Replacement column. Create a
filter using the Issue Date
property and a function to
calculate the value.
d. Create a Weeks Until

Replacement column and
update values in the database
on a weekly basis.
PEGA CSA Practice

A report contains columns for Exam b. Office location column equals Atlanta.
case IDs, creation dates,
managers, and office This condition generates a report that includes only
locations. How do you cases created in Atlanta.
configure a report filter
condition so that it displays
only cases created in the
Atlanta office?
a. Case ID column equals

Atlanta.
b. Office location column

equals Atlanta.
c. Case ID column does not

equal Atlanta.
d. Office location column does

not equal Atlanta.
A data page has the Refresh if c. Depends on when it is accessed

Older Than field set to five
minutes. When will the data A data page is refreshed on the first access after it
page reload? was marked stale.
a. Five minutes after it was last

accessed
b. Five minutes after it was last

updated
c. Depends on when it is
accessed
d. Five minutes after it was

created and never again
PEGA
Consider CSA Practice
a purchase request Exam c. To store options for the priority of a purchase
case. In which of the following request
local data source? Use a local data source to store reference data.
a. To store purchase request

line items
b. To store customer data

retrieved from a system of
record
c. To store options for the

priority of a purchase request
d. To store purchase request

case data
In a purchase application you a. data page

need to retrieve product
details from the product A data page is used to retrieve or read data from
catalog. There is a SOAP an external system.
connector configured for
integration with the product
catalog. The connector should
be invoked from a(n) __________.
a. data page
b. flow
c. data transform
d. activity
PEGA
You want CSA Practice
to enable external Exam b. Service
systems to retrieve the claim
history for a given customer A service rule allows you to expose a service. Pega
from a Pega claims application. is acting as the service and the external system as
What component is required the client.
to implement this
requirement?
a. Data page
b. Service
c. Connector
d. Local data source
PEGA
Select theCSA Practice
statement that best Exam d. To map the columns of a database table to
describes the use of the properties in a data class, to facilitate access to the
Database Table Class Mapping contents of the database table.
tool. (Choose One)
The Database Table Class Mapping tool provides a
a. To import data from an wizard that generates all the artifacts needed to
external database into a Data interact with reference data in an external database.
Table, for use in an application These artifacts include a data class, a database
as reference data. table instance and a link between those two
artifacts.
b. To map the content of a
database table to a data page,
for use in an application as
reference data.
c. To expose data on an
embedded page for reporting,
by linking properties stored on
an embedded page to
columns in a dedicated
database table.
d. To map the columns of a

database table to properties in
a data class, to facilitate access
to the contents of the
database table.
PEGA CSA
Which tool Practice
do you use to viewExam c. The Clipboard tool
case data currently in
memory? The Clipboard tool is used to review case data
currently in memory.
a. The Tracer tool
b. Live UI
c. The Clipboard tool
d. The Property Optimization

wizard
When running an application, d. The Tracer tool.

you notice that a field contains
an incorrect value. Which The Tracer tool records the execution of every rule
developer tool allows you used in an application. For each executed rule, the
analyze rule execution in the Tracer tool records the contents of the Clipboard
application to determine how at the time the rule was used, and the outcome of
the incorrect value was rule execution.
introduced?
a. Live UI.
b. The Clipboard tool.
c. The Dependency Network

Analyzer.
d. The Tracer tool.
PEGA CSA
Which tool wouldPractice
you use to Exam c. Live UI
evaluate a user form and
identify which properties use Live UI indicates properties used in declarative
declarative processing to processing with the letter "D".
calculate the values?
a. Declarative network display
b. Tracer
c. Live UI
d. Clipboard
2/13/23, 4:03 PM Pega CSA Quizzes Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSA Quizzes Study
Pega CSA Quizzes

Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
An application lets customers A reservation

in the application?
You are helping to implement Business architects

https://quizlet.com/380659775/pega-csa-quizzes-flash-cards/ 1/20
Pega
You wantCSA Quizzes
to engage business Iterative delivery. Direct Capture of Objectives
and IT resources to review the (DCO).
objective?

Which two are benefits of are easier to maintain and have fewer defects.
following Pega guardrails. Guardrails help developers to track compliance
with Pega best practices.
When collecting information Add a date of birth data field to the case type.
for a loan application, a case Add the date of birth field to the case worker's
worker needs to enter the date view of the case type.
information?
When modeling the life cycle significant change in the status of a case. transfer of
of a case, stages typically authority.
represent a _______________ or a
________________. (Choose Two)
When modeling the life cycle exceptions to the normal course of events.
of a case, alternate stages be sequenced into the primary stages.
typically represent ____________
and can ___________. (Choose Two)
A business process Add a local action to the case type.

Pega CSA Quizzes

Adding instructions to a step Describes to an end user what should be done in

____________. the step.
A step in the case life cycle At the beginning of the step

status of the case
What type of step typically Collect information

requires contextual
instructions?
When is the earliest You can configure the user view for a step after you
opportunity for you to add that step to the case life cycle.
Express?
a bank checking account number pattern.
this requirement?
Pega
You haveCSA Quizzes
a requirement to add Use a single validate rule to verify both of these
to a view a check box that conditions.
requirement?
You are adding a field to your Use the required option. Define the field type as a
case type in which users must date.

implemented using a Wait step unless you complete a new account child case.
in a case?
Pega CSA Quizzes

In an mortgage application, Make loan request a parent case type, and
the user creates a loan appraisal a child case type.
relationship?
In an online shopping Both Pay-37 and Pac-56 have to be resolved

application, the primary case before PO-11 can be resolved.

Work-class. How is this rule
Select the two items of The class of the rule. The type of the rule.
information used to uniquely
identify a rule. (Choose Two)
Pega CSA
A company Quizzes
provides two Check the inheritance path to determine if an
applications to its employees. appropriate data element is already available.
The first application is
managed by the Accounting
department, and allows
employees to submit expense
reports for reimbursement. The
second application is
managed by the IT
department, and allows
employees to submit support
tickets for IT-related issues.
Both applications require a
data element to track the
status of cases. Select the best
strategy for implementing this
requirement.
You check out a rule to update The application ignores the checked-out version
it. While the rule is checked and uses the previous version in the application
out, another developer ruleset.
decides to test a case type by
creating and processing the
case. What happens when the
application attempts to use the
rule you checked out?
A claim case records the items page list

that describes an item of loss
looks like this:
property reference
.ItemOfLoss(1) is an example of
a __________ property?
Pega
You wantCSA Quizzes
to capture the Picklist
are: Standard, premium, or
next-day. You use the Data
define the list with the
options?
A candidate's language skills Value group

used to capture the
pyWorkPage stores which type Information about a case.

of information?
You use the Clipboard tool to Test case behavior by setting property values for
perform which two tasks? an open case. Review the current values of case
(Choose Two) data.

transform?
Pega
The caseCSA Quizzes
type hierarchy in Select the Call superclass data transform option in
your insurance application each of the subcase type data transforms. In each
consists of three case types: subcase type data transform, set the work urgency
Claim (top level), Personal to the required value.
Injury (subcase type of Claim),
(Choose Two)

configure the
requirement?
In which two of the following Set default values when creating a case. Copy data
situations would you use a from one page to another.
data transform? (Choose Two)
Pega CSA Quizzes

You are designing a travel plan Total cost of options. Total cost for the hotel room.
extra cost, options such as
valet parking. The application
totals the cost for any selected
options and adds that amount
to the total room cost to equal
the grand total, which is
displayed in a field. Which two
of the following properties
would you use as the target
properties? (Choose Two)
In a purchase order The system monitors input properties and

application, you have been determines when to update the target property
asked to add an order total value. When updating a property that is calculated,
field that is used on multiple you do not need to identify every calculation that
forms in the application. You updates any of the source values and manually re-
want to make sure that calculate them.
whenever the input values
change, the order total will
declare expression rather than
a data transform for
calculating the value? (Choose
Two)
Pega CSA Quizzes

You are configuring a Specify backward chaining in the total interest rate
expressions which are used to
approval form. To improve
performance, how can you
reduce the number of
calculations?
When does data propagation When a case is created

occur?
You have a purchase request a data transform

Use __________ to sum a value in a a calculation

Use __________ to conditionalize a data transform

Pega CSA
You need Quizzes
to fetch exchange Node
customer data. The data page after it was created.
reload?
You have configured a data Update the data page to change the data source
page to look up customer data information.
in a database table. The data
source changes to a REST web
best describes the actions you
should take to make sure your
application uses the right data
source?
Which of the following would Delivery options

local data source?
In which types of UI control is Drop-Down

reference data from the local
data source typically used?
Pega CSA
The External Quizzes
Database Table Use a data page
Class Mapping wizard creates
a data class and a database
table. How do you make this
data available to your
application?
Which two use cases are a To provide a limited set of input values for a field.
good use of reference data? To access an external database.
(Choose Two)
Which variable in the .pyUrgencyAssignAdjust

assignment urgency
basis?
The goal milestone in a service in which the case or step should be completed
time _____________________.
The primary purpose of a help ensure timely completion of assignments

What three questions should When does the correspondence need to be sent?
you ask when creating a Who is the user that receives the correspondence?
correspondence? (Choose How will the correspondence be sent?
Three)
Which two statements identify Automating correspondence allows you to send

why you should automate timely communication. Automating
correspondence? (Choose correspondence allows for sending consistent
Two) information to users.
Pega
In a new CSA Quizzes
hire process, a hiring Enable assignment notifications for the case type.
manager needs to be
You are configuring a standard Insert applicant's name, loan office, and loan

would you route the
receives it?
Pega CSAcompany
An insurance Quizzes Route requests to a work group that uses skill rating
provides personal property parameters for work group members.
would you use?
home appraisal offices in based on a decision rule.
Adopting a rule delegation strategy can help

business conditions. Adopting a rule delegation
strategy enables business users and architects to
focus on their specific tasks related to application
development and maintenance.
Pega
What twoCSA
items Quizzes
should a An unlocked ruleset added to the Application rule
developer configure before as a production ruleset. An Access Group that has
delegating a rule? (Choose access to the production ruleset.
Two)
Conditional paths in a case life paths in the case life cycle that are chosen by a
cycle are used to define user at run-time. paths in the case life cycle that are
______________________. (Choose Two) followed based on run-time values.
A parallel process is defined as a process that executes over the same time period
___________________________. as other processes
Automating decisions based application users to focus on more nuanced

___________________________.
In which of the following A national insurance company requires a different

situations would you use a rule minimum for liability coverage in each state.
circumstance to resolve the
requirement?
An application change goes Circumstance the form by property and date;

into effect on June 15, 2016. specify June 15, 2016, as the start date.
are added to a user form to
the form?
Which statement best The base rule is used if no circumstanced variant

describes the role of the base applies.
Pega
You haveCSA Quizzes
created a form that Set the check box column to secondary
lists a group of recreational importance. Set the image column to other
activities that users can select importance. Set the activity name column to
when booking a vacation. One primary importance.
column lists the activity name,
a second column provides the
check box for activity
selection, and a third column
displays a thumbnail image of
the activity. You want to ensure
that users have the information
they need to make their
selections regardless of screen
size. When viewed on a small
display the images. What three
take to support this
You want to list the orders A table

placed by a customer over the
past six months. For each
order, you need to display the
order number, the date of the
order, the total amount of the
order, payment method, and
order status in a series of
columns. What type of layout
do you use to present the list
of orders to a user?
What are two ways you can Add a table to a section used by the view. Add a
add a table to a view? (Choose field group list to a view in Pega Express.
Two)
Pega
Which ofCSA Quizzes
the following sets Double-click > Scan barcode/QR code. Tab key >
represent action sets (event > Add new work
action) in Pega Platform?
(Choose Two)
You are configuring a Confirm Configure a visible when condition expression for
and Pay view that includes a the PayPal link control.
payment type selection list.
The following image shows the
Credit Card Type selection list.
One of the payment options is
PayPal. PayPal requires users
to confirm order details on the
PayPal website. How do you
configure the link to PayPal to
display only when users select
PayPal as their payment
option?
the case?
report definition?
Pega CSA
A manager Quizzes
requests a report For the Case ID property, select Highest to Lowest
Your organization has a Create two conditions: Work Status does not equal
requirement?
A BLOB provides flexibility by avoiding the need for

Select the three true schema changes when the data model changes. A
statements about the use of a BLOB can store an object of any size. A BLOB
BLOB field. (Choose Three) allows an application to read or write an entire
case in one database transaction.
Pega
A reportCSA Quizzes
contains five columns Expiration date (.ExpiryDate). Sales territory
of data about sales quotes. (.Territory)
The case ID (.pyID)

representative
The creation date of the sales
quote (.pxCreateDate)
The sales territory (.Territory)
The expiration data of the
quote (.ExpiryDate)
Prior to property optimization,

which two properties does the
report identify as potentially
impacting performance?
(Choose Two)

consequences.
can identify a data transform to evaluation.
You have created a test case The input property values used in the decision
for a decision table and table. The return values used in the decision table.
verified the results. A few
weeks later, another developer
caused this result? (Choose
Two)
Pega
The userCSA
enters Quizzes
a response on Use the Tracer tool, search for the first FAIL status,
a form and clicks Submit. The and see which step is causing the error.
Pega Platform application
returns an error. Which tool
can you use to determine the
cause of the error in your
application?
The Tracer tool shows you a Pause the Tracer tool until just prior to when the
log of detailed information on error occurs. Start the Tracer tool just prior to when
your application. Select two the error occurs.
methods you can use to limit
the amount of information to
You would like to use the Designer Studio

Tracer tool to debug an error
in your application. In which
portal can you use the Tracer
tool?
Pega Study
Pega

7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
The coordination and enactment of business

What is BPM? processes. iBPM develops ways to create customer
centric business solutions which automate work.
What are BPM applications Managing structured, automated processes

well suited for?
Asynchronously manage a collection of tasks,

What is Case Management? actions, processes - even ad hoc content to
support business objective.
What are the 3 business Research, Respond, Resolve

objectives?
What do case management capabilities to manage manual, optional, and

application provide? conditional processes
Pega
How does BPM benefit BPM promotes business effectiveness by
organizations? promoting efficiency
Initiation
Inception
What is the Pega development Elaboration
cycle? Construction
Transition
Go-Live
Recieve
Route
Research
What are the six "R's"
Respond
Report
Resolve
What is the hierarchy that users Operator ID

are authorized to use Pega Access Group
system? Application Rule
What is a rule? Logical Instructions
What is a class? Group of rule instances - Rules "applies to" classes
Container of classes and rules instances for

What is a ruleset?
deployment
A template for work; case instance/object is

What is a case type (work)?
created and in process
Pega Category - grouping of rule types
Rules Type - predefined class with predetermined

behavior and configured parameters (like a section)
What are the four types of
rules?
Rule instances - a unique instance of a rule type
Rule Form - interface with tabs to configure

parameters for a rule instance
They define what an application must do and

What are requirements?
establishes expectations for application behavior
Defines how an application satisfies one or more

What are specifications?
requirements
What does a good Description, subject matter expert, and pre/post

specification consist of? conditions
-Work created and resolved

-Projects, transactions, services or responses
What is a case?
-Opened and closed to resolve a problem, claim,
or request or complex activity
What is a stage? High level process
What is best practice for a 7 stages +/- 2

stage
What is a step? Sequential steps with a stage
Logic flow defined through Pega artifacts and

What is a process flow rule?
shapes
What is the best practices for -No more than 15 actions per flow
flow modeling? -Limit assignments to 4 connectors
Pega
What is a process shape? Pega artifact shapes
-Assignment (Green Box) = A point of human

interaction
-Decision (Diamond) = an automated decision
-Sub process (Blue Box) = Flow pauses until the sub

What are the types of process process completes
shapes?
-Utility (Yellow/Orange Box) = automated system
action
-Start (Green Circle) = start of process
-End (Red Circle) = End of process
-Assignment connector = flow action and

represents the user interface
What are the types of

-Decision Connector = represents decision
connectors?
outcome of testable decision
-Other connectors = links two shapes
What is a single step Single user interface (UI) to be performed by an

assignment? end user (generally yes/no logic)
Represents a series of actions performed by one of

What is a multi step process?
more actors (end users, external systems, etc)
Represents an automated action to create one or

What is a case (sub-case)? more cases ( a subset of work or new work)
-cases can be divided into stages and steps
What is a flow action? Controlling logic for UI
PegaWhat is a portal? Represents the work enviroment and contains the

harness, provides access to the applications
Contains information about appearance, centralizes

What is a skin? formatting across one or more applications.
Application color, font, formatting
Describes the user's workspace and controls the

What is a harness?
type of work the end use can do at an assignment
-New Harness: Used to create work

-Perform Harness: Used to do work
-Review Harness: Open a case in read only or
harnesses?
displays a confirmation screen
-Confirm Harness: Used when a case is resolved
-Represent user action

What do flow actions do? -Presented in order of likelihood
-Defines the work space for an operator
-Contains the actual "UI" visible to user

-Controls how users perform the flow actions
What is a section?
UI access: Layouts, Controls, Labels
-Sections can include layouts and other sections
-Default layout (single column)

-each property is represented by a control and
responds dynamically to changes in the displayable
What is a dynamic layout?
area. Supports computers, mobile phones and
tablets.
-Responsive!
What is a "when rule"? Conditional rule used to answer yes/no questions
What is an expression? Automatic assignment of values to properties
Pega -Email
-Fax
-Text
correspondences?
-Letter
Can be sent from an assignment or a utility
Composed of visual layouts and controls;

What is a section rule?
contained with a harness/portal
The fundamental unit of the data model. The entity

What is a property? that stores the data collected and present to an
end user
- Text
-Identifier
-Password
-Encrypted Text
-Date
What are the property types?
-Time of Day
-DateTime (combo)
-Integer
-Decimal
-boolean
Represents a data model for a single data object

What is a page property?
with properties
Represents a data model for a repeated list of data

What is a page list property?
objects
What is a value mode Single data value

property?
Pega -Text
-Integer
What are the types of value -Decimal
mode properties? -Dates
-Times
-Boolean
What is a value mode for data? Describes a single piece of information
-Single Value
Value mode types? -Value list (ordered group)
-Value group (unordered group)
Describes an aggregation of information and

What is a page mode for data? establishes contextual relationship between two
single value properties
-Page: single set of related information

-Page List: ordered array of related information
What are the page modes for (referenced (indexed) with a numerical value)
data? -Page Group: Unordered array of related
information (referenced (indexed) with a keyed
value)
Used for data manipulation of data, to copy,

What is data transformation?
calculate or concatenate data
What are decision rules? When Rule, decision table, decision tree
Used to direct an assignment to a specific user or

What are routers?
user group
What are service levels? Enforce response time requirements

(SLA's)
Pega -Dynamic layout

-Smart-freeform layout
What are the types of layouts?
-Repeating layout - Sourced by a page list or page
group
Representation of a data structure. Explains what

What is a data model? data objects are, and what distinctive elements
define them
-Application Settings
What are the parts of the New -Business Objectives
Application Wizard? -Case Types
-Data Object
-Application
What are the types of -Case
explorers? -Data
-Records
What are the key activities in Process modeling and UI modeling

DCO?
What is the clipboard used reviews data in memory and debug applications
for?
User pages: contains data about work performed

Data pages: persistant data-cached in memory for
What are the parts of the peformance
clipboard? Linked property pages: references to data objects
System Pages - Enviromental data-use level and
system level
Edit Validate: Occurs on client side and provides an

error message upon entry.
What are the parts of
Validation Rule: Occurs on the server side, user
validation?
needs to submit before an error message is
returned
2/13/23, 3:46 PM Creating a Pega Platform application Flashcards | Quizlet
Creating a Pega Platform application Study
Creating a Pega Platform application

Numerical Analysis
9th Edition • ISBN: 9780538733519
873 solutions
What does the New Following organizational best practices and

Application wizard ensuring standards
you are doing?
Pega Platform enables you to The same dimensions as your business

organize your application by
what means?
Best practices around reuse and standardization as

What does the ECS enforce?
the system expands.
As of 8.6, Cosmos React does Rule delegation, localization, and mashup

not support which features
from earlier releases of Pega
Platform?
https://quizlet.com/gb/680529064/creating-a-pega-platform-application-flash-cards/ 1/4
Creating a productivity
What developer Pega Platform application
Developers map data into template regions,
gains do you get with the toggle desired features on or off,
Cosmos rules model? brand the application with App Studio.
Improved data visibility

Enhanced case processing
What does the Cosmos React Customizable columns
design give you? Focus on relevant data
The ability to instantly modify values and perform
quick actions on table rows
When creating a new Theme Cosmos,

application what are your Theme UI-Kit,
three options? Cosmos React.
A new case preview panel

Flexible screen space management
What are the primary
An improved search experience
improvements to the user
The ability to open and work with several
experience introduced by
independent sessions of your web application
Cosmos rules?
Increased efficiency when working with multiple
cases
Classic Pega UI
In what four technologies can iOS
React render? Android
Custom production applications
Start at the home page,

What ways can you launch a Follow a link,
Cosmos application? Use bookmarks,
New tabs or windows
Is Cosmos React an SPA? Yes
The UI-Kit is now considered a True

legacy product?
Creating a requires
If your business Pega Platform application
False
localization across multiple
languages you can build-on
Cosmos React?
User can use standard web interactions like:

What capabilities does an SPA
The browser's back button
allow?
An unlimited number of browser tabs
Performance-wise Cosmos Cosmos React runs two to three times faster than
React runs how many times Cosmos Rules due to fewer transferred resources.
faster than Cosmos Rules ?
How do you save time when You save time because you reuse key elements of
you create an application on a an existing application, such as case types or data
template? types.
You can create custom True

application templates?
Which layer of the Enterprise

Class Structure (ECS) contains
generalized assets that are
then extended by specific
implementations?
You have a requirement to

create an email
correspondence that can be
reused by other applications.
In which two layers of the
could you apply the email
correspondence rule?
(Choose Two)
Creating a Pega
What is the purpose of thePlatform application
(ECS)?
2/13/23, 3:56 PM Pega CSSA Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSSA Study
Pega CSSA
5.0 (1 review)

4th Edition • ISBN: 9780134444321
Tony Gaddis
629 solutions
enables you to organize your application by using

the same dimensions as your business. And
(ECS)
encourages rule reuse through these dimensions.
contains the built-in assets necessary for

Pega Platform Layer (ECS) processing cases and other work in Pega
applications.
Contains the assets used on an enterprise-wide

Organization layer (ECS)
basis.
contains the assets used on a division-wide basis. It

Division Layer (ECS)
is optional.
https://quizlet.com/416185051/pega-cssa-flash-cards/ 1/13
Pega CSSA A portion of a Pega solution that contains reusable

application elements. Provides an application that
Framework Layer
can be used as the basis for many production
applications. These can be extended.
defines an application customized for a specific

division or line of business. An implementation layer
Implementation layer (ECS)
application may extend one or more framework
layer applications.
Which layer of the ECS would The Framework layer

contain a generalized
business?
is a way to differentiate current and past

Application versioning
application configuration
2 versioning methods lock and roll, skimming
Lock and Rolls allows you to review and lock a

ruleset version, advance it to a new, higher version
Lock and roll and optionally update the application with a new
ruleset version or create a new version of the
application. Ideal for small changes or patches.
In lock and roll, what occurs A system architect copies the required rules into
after you use the wizard to the empty ruleset to create the new application
create a new, empty ruleset? version.
Skimming is the process of saving the highest

Skimming
Skimming can bump a minor or major version
number.
Pega CSSA
What rules status are always Yes, Blocked and final
carried forward in skimming
What rule status is never No

carried forwarded in skimming
What rule status is carried Withdrawn

forward in minor skim but not a
major.
When to use skimming over Skimming streamlines application versions where

lock and roll rule changes follow a logical sequence.
You use Do not update my you update the patch version number of a ruleset
application when (verision without updating the application ruleset list
control)
You use Update my you are rolling out an application and updating the
Application to include the new minor version or when the application rule lists the
Ruleset Versions when ruleset patch version number.
(verision control)
You want to lock and roll the version and create a

You use Create a new version
new application rule. Or You want to allow people
of my application when
access to more than one version of the application
Update the application rules, the Requires RuleSets

What tasks must you perform and Versions prerequisites array in RuleSet version
after the skim is complete? rules, and the access groups to reference the new
The rulesets ending in Int are rules related to integration.

used for
is a container or an organizational construct used

ruleset
to identify, store, and manage a set of rules.
Pega CSSA
What 4 rule sets does the new application, applicationInit, org, orgInit
application wizard auto create
Production rulesets include updated in the production environment

rules that are
Application Validation (AV) and Ruleset validation

2 options for ruleset validation
(RV)
What rules are in AV mode the application rules

when the applicaiton wizard
created an application
What rules are in RV mode organization rules

when the applicaiton wizard
created an application
If the AV mode is used, rules in Same application

the ruleset can reference all Rulesets belonging to any built-on application
rules in the rulesets defined in
the:
If RV mode is used, rules in the prerequisites list. RV defines a list of its

ruleset can reference all rules dependencies
in the rulesets defined in the
With RV, you cannot call AV not listed as a prerequisite

rulesets that are...
Only use RV for rulesets that Across multiple rule sets

are designed to be used...
Include unlocked AV rulesets One application

in only.....
the ruleset list governs rule execution at run time
Pega CSSA
The ruleset list indicates the Operator session
rulesets that are available to
the application for a given...
List two reasons why a rule is The rule is already checked out by someone else.
not available for checkout. The rule is in a locked ruleset
A branch is a container for undergoing rapid change in development

rulesets with records that are...
A branch ruleset: Another rule set
Is based on (branched from).....
Two or more development teams can configure an

Describe two advantages of application in parallel. Rule development takes
branching. place within an isolated space (the branch) without
affecting functionality in the source rules.
Creates a team application built on the main

application
Creates one or more development branches in the
To develop rules in parallel team application
using branched rulesets, each Grants access to the team application
team follows these steps: Creates or configures rules using the branch
Merges each branch into the application rulesets
when development in branches is complete and
stable
You use the _________ wizard to merge branch rulesets

move branch contents into the
base rulesets
search algorithm used to find the most appropriate

Rule resolution is a
instance of a rule to execute in any situation
Pega CSSAapplies to most

Rule resolution the abstract rule base class
classes derived from
Case types (Rule-Obj-CaseType )

Properties (Rule-Obj-Property )
examples of instances of rules
UI rules such as Sections (Rule-HTML-Section) and
derived from the abstract
Harnesses (Rule-HTML-Harness)
Rule-base class....
Declare expressions (Rule-Declare-Expression)
Data pages (Rule-Declare-Pages)
Predefined rule keys that are used as a unique

identifier, such as the Apply to: class, rule name,
and rule type
User's ruleset list
Inputs to the rule resolution
Class hierarchy of the rule in question
algorithm include
Circumstances such as the value of a property, or
time and date restrictions
Availability of the rule
User's access roles and privileges
A first, best match is determined by an exact match

How does rule algorithm
of a property or date circumstance, or a default
decide first best match
rule if no exact circumstance matches are found.
Find the best instance and check for duplicates

process of rule resolution Confirm the rule is available for use
Verify the user is authorized to use the rule
Pega CSSA Choose all instances with the correct purpose

Discard rules where Availability = Not Available
Discard inapplicable rulesets and versions
Discard all candidates not defined in a class in the
How the rules cache is ancestor tree
populated Rank remaining rule candidates
Sort the remaining rule candidates
Remove rule candidates with an Availability set
to Withdrawn
Determine default rule candidate
Assume the referenced rule Rules found in the ancestor tree of the rule in
has an Apply to: class of TGB- question — by either pattern or direct inheritance —
HRApps-Work-Onboarding. are retained in the list of rule candidates.
with an Apply to: class of TGB-
Availability = Available always useable
rule cannot be edited or copied into another rule

Availability = Final
set
An availability of Not Available indicates the rule

may not be used during the rule resolution
process. When a rule set to Not Available is found
Availability = Not Available
during the rule resolution process, the rule in the
next-highest version is considered for rule
resolution.
An availability of Blocked indicates the rule may be

used during the rule resolution process. If a
Availability = Blocked blocked rule is selected during rule resolution,
execution is halted and an error message is
displayed.
Pega CSSA When a rule marked as Withdrawn is found during

Availability = Withdrawn rule resolution, the system looks for an instance of
the rule in the next highest class or ruleset.
How does circumstancing Circumstancing allows you to describe exception

solve the problem of behavior with a set of targeted rules rather than
configuring exception one complex rule. Each targeted rule configures
behavior in an application? behavior to address a specific exception.
As-Of-Date
Pega supports the following
Single Value
types of circumstance
Multiple Value
conditions.
Date property
What does search duplicate Search duplicate cases uses weighted conditions.
cases process use to compare Each condition has a relative importance defined
specific properties or values by a weighting value.
system?
call multiple independent processes that operate in

You use the Split Join shape to
parallel and then later rejoin
A Split For Each shape allows one subprocess multiple times by iterating through
you to run... a set of records stored in a page list or page group.
Which type of Smart Shape Split for each

would you use to start an
interview processes based on
a list of employees who must
The default locking option in Only one user at a time to update a case. 30 minute
Pega, Allows.... lock by default
Pega
Assume CSSA
you want users to For each child case, you override the default
have the ability to work on setting that locks the parent case.
locking settings?
If a flow action includes a pre- Pega performs the pre-processing action each time
processing data transform or the flow action is presented to the user.
activity, when does Pega
perform the action
What is the main reason for You use a decision table when you need to test the
using a decision table rather values of multiple properties to make the decision
When would you use a When you want to apply if...then...else logic to
decision?
The two cascading approval reporting structure and authority matrix.

models are
You use the reporting approvals always move up the reporting structure
structure model when of the submitter or another defined list.
a set of rules directs the approval chain to

You use the authority matrix
individuals both inside and outside the organization
model when
of the submitter.
A cascading approval step simplifies the

What is the purpose of a configuration of a process that requires multiple
cascading approval step? approvals. You can base the cascading approval on
a reporting structure or an authority matrix.
Pega CSSA
A work group identifies a a manager, and a set of operators, a set of work
cross-functional team that queues,
contains
A work group is not part of the organizational

structure. Although it is an organization rule, a work
group is used to allow managers to monitor, report,
structure: Division, unit, work
group, or organization?
queues across the organization.
A requirement states that you Select the organization in the organization chart
must add a new division to and use the chart menu to add the division.
approach allows you to see
where in the organization
division?
A field value enables you to list of allowed values, property.

manage the ________________
separately from the ______________.
True or False: You can add True

context.
A user portal is the User view into the app

applications ...
The purpose of a user portal is to provide users

What is the purpose of a user with a view into their application. Each portal is
portal? customized to the needs of a particular group of
users.
Pega CSSA An action area displays the content of a user form

What is the purpose of an when users select a flow action. The action area
action area in a harness? describes the work users perform to complete an
assignment.
A screen layout defines the structure or a portal.

What is the purpose of a The screen layout defines the panes of the portal.
screen layout in a harness? The content of each pane is determined by
referencing a section.
a portal is represented with a... portal rule
are defined by harnesses and sections. Composite

Composite portals
portals are cross-browser compatible
Custom portals are defined by an activity. As a best

Custom portals practice, configure a new portal as a composite
portal.
A navigation record is used to configure the entries

on a menu. It lists a menu entry and identifies the
navigation record?
A binary file record is a container for a non-text file.

What benefits does a binary
It provides the security, inheritance, versioning, and
non-text files?
of rule resolution.
Accesability: Set tooltips on Announces control functions to users with a screen

controls, buttons, links, icons, reader
and input fields. why?
Accesability: Configure a high- Ensures the contrast is sufficient for users with
contrast color scheme. why? vision limitations
Pega CSSA
Accesability: Set the enter Enables keyboard controls for tabbing through the
event on a control when you interface
set a click event on the control
(for example, configuring the
up and down keys to support
navigating through a list and
set focus on an item). Why
Accesability: Include links with Provides a visible description of the icon that an
icons.. Why assistive device can read to a user
Accesability: Use a button or a Provides a navigation element that an assistive

link to dismiss an overlay.why device can describe to a user
Accesability: Mark a dynamic Provides the ability for users tabbing through a
container as the main content page to skip to the main content link by pressing
area by default. Why? the Enter key
Accesability: Use a drop-down Provides a visible list of options that an assistive

list of options instead of text device can read to a user
entry for fields with
predictable answers (for
example, a series of numbers
or colors). Why?
identify and rectify accessibility issues with your

The Accessibility Inspector
application. The inspector has two main features
tool in Pega allows you to
that aid accessibility design
preview what your application looks like to users of

Disability preview
varying visual ability
What additional role None

configuration is required when
ruleset?
Pega
What areCSSA
five ways to adapt to The five ways to adapt to regions using localization
regions using localization in are accommodate the local language, currency,
international applications? date format, time zone, and time format.
What is the advantage of using Field value, paragraph, and correspondence

rulesets when localizing an rulesets can be exported, translated into multiple
application in multiple languages, and reused in an application to
languages? accommodate multiple regions.
field value rules for capturing labels and notes,

To ensure you design your
paragraph rules for instructions and messages, and
application for localization you
correspondence rules for emails and other
create
correspondence.
How can your application be Export all the required fields using the Localization
localized if a language pack is wizard, have them translated, and import your own
not available for that region? custom translation pack
A keyed data page serves as two separate data pages

an alternative to having
___________.
The most significant benefit is the ability to

reference external systems in a way that can vary
depending on environment, without requiring the
resource settings?
update of integration rules and data instances.
typically do not last long; they correct themselves

over time. For example, the connector is unable to
Transient errors
connect because the application is being restarted
and is temporarily unavailable.
are typically due to a configuration error or an

error in the remote application logic. For example,
Permanent errors an invalid SOAP request is sent to a SOAP service.
In this scenario, the error persists until the SOAP
request message is fixed.
2/13/23, 3:50 PM PEGA CSA 8 Flashcards | Quizlet
PEGA CSA 8 Study
PEGA CSA 8
5.0 (7 reviews)
Information Technology Project Management: Providing

Measurable Organizational Value
5th Edition • ISBN: 9781118898208
Jack T. Marchewka
346 solutions
https://quizlet.com/352609877/pega-csa-8-flash-cards/ 1/29
PEGA CSA 8 1. Develop and Deploy low-code/no-code business

applications
2. Facilitate collaboration between stakeholders

and developers
3. Automate processes to reduce customer wait

times
7 takeaways about the PEGA

4. Improve quality with built-in guidance on best
Platform
practices
5. Extend one or more prebuilt applications to save

time
6. Leverage a large range of capabilities for

building customer-focused applications
7. Deploy on-premises or to the cloud
Defines the behavior of part of an application.

Rules are saved in the PegaRULES database, and
Rule
the name acts as a unique key for storage and
access.
Identifies, stores, and manages the set of rules that

define an application or a major portion of an
application. A RuleSet contains rule instances,
RulesSet
which are divided in the system by the RuleSet
name, which is an instance of the Rule-RuleSet-
Name rule type.
A metaphor to describe how PEGA interacts with

customers the right way at the right time. Each layer
Situational Layer Cake specializes on a different dynamic variable, such as
a customer's attributes; country or region, product
or line of business.
PEGA CSA 8 1. Case Design

2. Data and Integrations
App studio (Focus) (possibly
3. Channels and Interfaces (mobile, email, chatbots,
delete card)
etc.)
4. UI Authoring
You want to develop an 1. System Architect

onboarding application that is
accessible on mobile devices. 2. Scrum Master
Build the team that best meets
your project needs. 3. Mobile UX Architect
1. Project Leader 4. Business Architect
2. System Architect 5. Product Owner
3. Scrum Master
4. Mobile UX Architect
5. Business Architect
6. Automation Engineer
7. Product Owner
You want to engage business DCO

working models. What est
Practice Helps accomplish this
objective?
1. Guardrails help developers to track compliance

Which two of the following are with PEGA best practices.
benefits of following PEGA
guardrails? 2. Guardrails help developers build applications
that are easier to maintain and have fewer defects.
PEGA CSA application

Role: Advanced 8 Dev Studio
Developer
Studio:
Role: System Administrator Admin Studio
Studio:
Role: UI/UX developer App studio
Studio:
Role: Data scientist Prediction Studio
Studio:
Adding instructions to a step Describes to an end user what should be done in a

__________. step.
When modeling the life cycle 1. Transfer of authority

o a case, stages represent a
__________ or a _____________. 2. Significant change in the status of a case
A step in the case life cycle At the beginning of the step.

sets the case status to
Pending-Approval. When does
the case status automatically
update?
When modeling the life cycle 1. Exceptions to the normal course of events.
represent _______________ and 2. Be sequenced into primary stages
______________.
PEGA
What typeCSA 8typically
of step Collect Information
requires contextual
instructions?
Grouping can only be 1. Dev Studio

performed in __________, not in 2. Case Manager
the ________ portal.
A manager has requested a Use the cost center column to group the results
request for each of the
listed under the cost center.
report definition?
A manager requests a report For the Case ID Property, select Highest to Lowest
PEGA CSA 8has a

Your organization Create two conditions: Work Status does not equal
standard loan requests report New AND Creation Date is equal to Previous
requirement?
1. Unlimited storage size — BLOB fields are not

constrained by size, so a BLOB field can contain
any amount of information.
2. Flexibility — Pega writes all case data to the

BLOB, so changes to the data model of a case are
What is a BLOB (Binary Large contained within the BLOB. Using the BLOB field
Object)? avoids the need to update the database structure,
or schema, as the data model changes.
3. High performance — Since the BLOB field stores

all case data, Pega reads and writes the entire case
at one time. This optimizes application performance
for end users as they create and process cases.
The BLOB field provides greater flexibility and

performance for case data. The BLOB field is
capable of storing an unlimited amount of data. The
Why is case data stored in a
BLOB field also allows the data model of a case to
BLOB column?
change without impacting database storage. And
the BLOB field allows an application to read or
write the entire case at once.
PEGA CSA 8
Why are properties exposed,
Exposing properties allows Pega to read the
property value without decompressing the BLOB to
or optimized, for reporting?
extract the property value.
identify configuration errors in a rule before the

The purpose of unit testing is
errors are compounded in an application when the
to _____________.
result of the rule depends on another rule.
The purpose of unit testing is to verify that each

element of the application — for example, a
decision table or a report definition — works as
Unit Testing expected. Unit testing reduces the risk of a
configuration error in one rule propagating to
other rules in the application, causing significant
delays to case processing.
The purpose of a test page is store data to use when unit testing a rule
to _________________________.
RuleToRun - is the clipboard representation of the

rule you tested. If more than one version of the rule
RuleToRun
is present in the application, view this page to
identify the tested rule version.
A temp_ page - is created or copied when you test

a rule. The names of these pages begin with the
Temp_ page
string temp_. View this page to examine the data
used to initialize the rule for the unit test.
What are two ways to view the Run the unit test or view the output of the test with
output of a unit test? the Clipboard tool.
PEGA CSA 8
What is the role of a test case
A test case identifies one or more testable
conditions that determine whether a rule returns an
in application development?
expected result.
What is the relationship A test case describes one or more assertions that
between an assertion and a describe expected behavior for a rule.
test case?
Tests the value of the specified property. Requires

the page on which the property is defined, a
comparison operation, and a comparison value
Property
Ex:
pxUrgencyWork is equal to 10
Tests the value returned by a decision rule.

Requires values for each input property needed by
the decision rule to return the expected result
Decision Results
Ex:
When Referred by employee is false return
RecruitingWB
Tests whether a rule executes within an allowed

amount of time. Requires a comparison operation
and an allowed time in seconds
Expected run time
Ex:
Expected run time is less than or equal to three
seconds
Tests for the presence of a page in memory.

Requires the name of the page and a comparison
operation
Page
Ex:
Page D_CoursesList has no errors
PEGA CSA 8
What does the Unit testing
It lists all the test cases defined for an application
and the status of each test case as of its last
landing page show?
execution.

consequence.
can identify a data transform to evaluation
You have created a test case 1. Input properties used in the decision table
for a decision table and 2. Returned values in the decision table
verified the results. A few
weeks later, another developer
cause this result?
Rule delegation empowers business users to

What is the purpose of rule
respond to continuously changing business
delegation?
conditions.
1. Establish a unique access group for the business

users to whom you will delegate rules.
Best Practices for Rule 2. Delegate rules for process items that change
Delegation repeatedly.
3. Delegate rules that are easy for the business user
to change.
What are the criteria for You determine which rules to delegate based upon
determining rules to delegate? business needs and ease of business user access.
PEGA CSA 8
What is a good test for a name
A good test of a rule name is to build a sentence
using the rule name, the rule type, and the business
for a delegated rule?
logic.
is a ruleset in which rules can be modified and

Unlocked Ruleset
saved.
A ruleset containing rules that can be modified

Production Ruleset
after the application deploys.
Why is organizing delegated You cannot edit rules in a locked ruleset.

rules in an unlocked ruleset
necessary?
Why is a meaningful Business user delegates need to understand the

description for a delegated possible impact of their changes.
rule important?
1. An ACCESS GROUP that has access to the

What two items should a production ruleset.
delegating a rule? 2. An UNLOCKED RULE SET added to the
Application rules as a production rule set.
1. Adopting a rule delegation strategy can help

improve the business's ability to adapt to changing
business conditions.
2. Adopting a Rule Delegation strategy eneables
strategy.
business users and artitects to focus on thier
specific tasks related to application developement
and mintenance.
PEGA
You have CSA
added 8
fields for Define the name and address properties as text
entering the name and property types.
would you use?
You use validate rules to compare a property

Validate Rules
against a condition when the user submits a form.
edit validate to test for patterns
Which validation method A Validate Rule

methods?
How would you ensure that a You would use editable settings to set both the
user always enters 20 minimum and maximum number to 20 characters.
characters in a field?
______________.
format?
PEGA CSA
Edit 8 rules
validate Validate character patterns
a bank routing number field to number pattern.
a view. Routing numbers must
contain nine digits. How would
you configure the field to
You are adding a field to your 1. Define the field type as a date
case type in which uses must
enter the day, month, and year 2. Use the Required option
requirements?
In a job application case, a Enable assignment notifications for the case type
hiring manager needs to
receive an automatic email
notification when the case
reaches a Collect Work
1. How will the correspondence be sent?
What three questions should 2. Who is the user that receives the
you answer to create effective correspondence?
correspondence?
3. When does the correspondence need to be
sent?
PEGA CSA
Which two 8 identify
statements 1. Timely
correspondence? 2. Consistent
is a general purpose layout used to a organize a

single set of fields. Dynamic layouts support
responsive behavior to support use on multiple
Dynamic Layouts
devices (computer, tablet, phone). As the screen
size changes, the layout shifts its contents to wrap
content on-screen.
is used to organize lists, tables, and other repeating

structures. Repeating layouts reference a page list
or page group, either by referencing a clipboard
Repeating Layout
property or a data page. As the screen size
changes, elements display or are hidden to
maximize the value of the displayed content.
Dynamic layouts arrange items in a flexible form

Dynamic Layouts
that automatically adjusts to screen size.
Design templates allow you to apply a consistent

What is one advantage of
structure to a form. You can change the structure
design templates?
by changing the template.
Responsive breakpoints are default settings built

What are responsive
into the application skin rule. They manage the
breakpoints in Pega
content transition of an application between
applications?
monitor, tablet, and mobile phone displays.
Why do tables need Relying on breakpoints alone for tables can result
responsive configuration in in unimportant columns having prominence over
addition to responsive more important columns.
breakpoints?
PEGA CSA 8
What are two ways you can
1. Add a table to a section used by the view
adda table to a view?

2. Add a field group list to a view in App Studio
A page list is presented in a A repeating dynamic layout

nonlinear format that
automatically adjusts based on
screen size. The image is an
example of _______________________.
Systems of Record 1. PEGA system of Record - Feedback
1. PEGA system of Record 2. External system of Record - Customer, Product
2. External system of Record 3. No systems of Record - Preference
3. No system of Record
Options:
Feedback, Customer, Product,
and Preference
3. No systems of Record
PEGA CSA 8a customer

You are designing 1. Case Type - Support Request
support request application.
The application needs to 2. Data Type - Customer
support customers with
multiple addresses and 3/4. Data Types - Address, Credit Card
multiple credit cards. What is
the appropriate way to set up
the data structure?
1. Case Type
2 Data Type
3/4. Data Types
Options:
Support Request, Customer,
Address, Credit Card
You have a cleaning service 1. Implementation Data Class - this selection means
booking application, HomeCleaningPackages inherits from the
CleanApp. You are creating a CleanApp - Data class. This is the appropriate
local data type, selection to leverage CleanPackages, which is
HomeCleaningPackages, and defined in the same class.
you want to leverage an
existing data class, CleanApp -
Data - CleaningPackages.
When defining your data type,
which option would you
choose for asset reuse?
1. Implementation data class
2. Organization data class
3. CleanApp UI Pages class
4. ClenApp Work class
PEGA CSA
What is the 8 of
advantage Configuring Visibility and Disable options to run on
selecting Run visibility the client reduces the number of server trips and
condition on client and Run avoids page refreshes.
disabled content condition on
client?
First identify the UI element target that you want to

What is your first consideration dynamically show and hide, enable and disable, or
when configuring field make required before deciding at which level
attributes for dynamic display? (section, layout, or field) to apply the visible when
condition.
A trigger performed by users, such as clicking a

button, hovering a pointer over a field, or entering
a value in a field.
Event
1. Event
2. Action
A response performed by the system as a result of

the user event. For example, when users click a
button, the application creates a case.
Action
1. Events
2. Action
Restrictions such as when rules, which can be

applied to an event and action combination. For
example, you can configure conditions so that
Conditions hovering over a field displays a smart tip message
only IF the field contains a property value.
IF (is the key)
PEGA CSA 8
What is the purpose of an
You use an action set to configure dynamic UI
changes such as displaying a menu when a user
action set?
clicks a button.
What are the main The UI control, and which event and action to
considerations when preparing configure to the control.
to configure an action set?
You use the Applicability drop-down list to

How do you configure an
configure whether the action set is processed if the
action set to occur when the
control is displayed in read-only mode, editable
control is in read-only mode?
mode, or both.
How do you configure an First configure a CLICK EVENT with a REFRESH

action set on a button to clear ACTION. Next, add a VIEW HISTORY ACTION to
user selections and then the EVENT.
the case?
You are configuring a Confirm Configure a visible when condition expression for
and Pay view that includes a the PayPal link control.
payment type includes a
payment type selection list.
One of the payment options is

PayPal. PayPal requires users
to confirm order details on the
PayPal website. How do you
configure the link to PayPal to
display only when users select
PayPal as their payment
option?
What is another name for data Data View

page?
Thread data page related to a particular case
PEGA CSA 8 Data page makes a single data page instance

Node accessible by all users of the application and other
applications running on a given mode
Lets you share data pages for a given user session

and is often used when the data page contains data
Requester associated with the logged in operator. For
example, you bank accounts balance is unique to
your user experience
Use a connector to populate data from an

Connector
EXTERNAL data source
Use for populating a data page from another page

Data Transform
in memory
Returns a list of data objects mapped IN THE

Report Definition
APPLICATION
Used to return a specific data object mapped in the

Look Up
application
Obtain data by running an application on a

Robotic Automation
DESKTOP
Robotic Process Automation Obtain data from an automated back end process
Can be used for special situation where none of

Load Activity
the other options are suitable
Single Page Example Current Stock Price
A list of all previous stock transactions is an

Multiple pages example
example of multiple pages
PEGA
You needCSA 8exchange
to fetch Node
daily basis from a WEB
SERVICE and make them
available in your application
using a data page. Which
scope would you select for the
data page?
You have a data page with The data page will reload on the next access one
customer data. The data page hour after it was created.
reload?
1. Set the data save options Save Type to Database

Save - The activity name column uniquely identifies
each row.
Which of the following steps
provides easy configuration 2. Set the data save options Class - The other
and maintainability of a importance setting hides the column if there is not
savable data page for an enough room on the screen.
existing data type?
3. Set the data page definition edit mode to
Savable - The secondary setting makes the check
box column available regardless of screen size.
defines the responsive behavior and formatting,

such as colors, fonts, images, and layouts used in a
Pega application. A skin generates the styling for
the application. A skin also defines the responsive
Skin
breakpoints applied to dynamic layouts.
Responsive breakpoints enable your application to
work on various devices, such as tablets and
mobile phones.
PEGA CSA 8 defines a set of style attributes that can be reused

in user interface elements. Mixins allow for defining
efficient and clean style repetitions, and an easy
way to update styling. For example, you can create
a mixin that defines your corporate color scheme
Mixin
that is then reused for buttons, menus, and headers.
If your corporate colors change from blue to
orange, you only need to update the mixin with the
new color, and any UI element that uses the mixin
gets changed.
1. Typography
2. Background
4 categories of Mixin
3. Border
4. Combination
defines the styling of a specific UI component. A

component is an element that you can style within
Format
the skin — for example, a layout (dynamic layout),
or a control (button).
1. General
2. Layouts
4 categories of components
where you add formats:
3. Controls
4. Reports
What element should you MIxin

create to maintain a consistent
group of styles?
PEGA CSA 8 Skin inheritance allows a skin to inherit formats and

mixins from a parent skin. The parent skin defines
formats and mixins that the dependent skin can use
as is or update them in a new mixin or format. When
Skin Inheritance
a format on the parent skin is modified, the
dependent skin automatically inherits those
changes unless the format is overridden in the
dependent skin.
Like skins, mixins can also inherit from other mixins.

A new mixin should be created when a new
meaning for the style is needed. For example, you
may create a generic notification style in a mixin,
and then create a new mixin that inherits from the
notification mixin for errors.
Mixin Inheritance
Notify or Error
As with skin inheritance, using inheritance with

mixins provides a layering effect where, if you
change part of a style in a base skin, the change
modifies any mixins that inherit from it.
A __________________ defines the Skin - skins use formats and mixins to define the
look and feel of an application. overall look and feel of an application.
You want to create a reusable Mixin - Mixin allow you to create a reusable style
font style for buttons and links. across all formats and skins.
To do this you would create a
______________.
Which option represents the A CONTROL specifies a FORMAT which uses a

relationship between mixins, MIXIN
controls, and formats?
PEGA CSA 8 1. Child Skins only need to customize in the parent

skin. - Layering skins allow you to make a change to
the parent skin and the change updates across all
Which two of the following child skins.
options are benefits of using
skin inheritance? 2. Standard styles created in a parent skin are easier
to maintain. - Use a child skin to either define mixins
or formats not present in the parent skin or overide
inherited mixins or formats as needed.
A prospective employee must Running a criminal background check - the decision

pass a criminal background point will route to whether the job is or is not
check before receiving an offered to the prospective employee
offer. When would you add a
decision point to the workflow
process?
1. Verifying prospective
employees work references
2. Running a criminal
backround check
3. Declining offer to
prospective employees
4. Offering job to prospective

employee
A process that executes over the same time period

A parallel process is defined as
as the other processes. - Processes that run
____________.
concurrently are called parallel processes.
Application users to focus on more nuanced

Automating decisions based decisions that require business expertise. -
on business logic enables Reordering and automating decisions based on
______________. business logic allows users to focus on more
nuanced decisions that require human expertise.
PEGA CSA 8 paths in the case life cycle that are chosen by a
user at a run-time or are based on run-time values.
Conditional paths in a case life - Manual decisions are performed by a user and
cycle are used to define are defined using multiple outgoing connectors
___________. emanating from an assignment. Automated
decisions are defined by a set of one or more
conditions to evaluate.
Each user has a role such as caseworker or

customer service representative, that determines
Operator
which actions the user can perform. PEGA calls
users OPERATORS
How does assignment routing Assignment routing improves efficiency by

improve efficiency? assigning work to the most appropriate parties.
A list of all open assignment, in order of

importance, for a GROUP of users. Assignments
stay in the work queue until a user associated with
Routing: Work Queue
the work queue selects an assignment, or a
manager sends an assignment, or a manager sends
an assignment in the work queue to a specific user.
A worklist is a list of all open assignments, in order

Routing: Worklist
of importance for a SPECIFIC USER.
IF the current user should perform the task. For

Routing options: Current User example, the employee creating the request enters
the expense details.
IF a specific user will complete the assignment. Ex,

Routing Options: Specific User
the manager who approves expense reports.
PEGA CSA 8 Route to a work queue for a specific group when

anyone in the group can complete the assignment.
Routing Options: Work Queue For example, the payroll department work group
that creates and sends the payment to the
employee.
Ex of routing to Current User: A customer creating an order online
Ex of routing to Specific User A human resources manager who approves time off
(WorkList): requests.
An employee in the benefits department who

Ex of routing to a Work Queue:
processes benefit changes.
You use business logic routing based on a WHEN

Business Logic Routing: CONDITION when you want to route work based
on certain conditions.
1. The approval process flow

Choose 3 items that are
considerations for approval 2. The approval levels
configuration:
3. The list of approvers
Cascading approvals based on reporting structure

require approval of an employee's direct manager
and higher. You can also configure business logic
to set thresholds to determine the number of
required approvals.
Cascading Approval -
Reporting Structure For example, an expense report requires manager
approval before accounting can process the
payment. Depending on the total of the expenses
submitted, the expense request may also need
approval by a senior manager, a director, and a vice
president.
PEGA CSA 8 A cascading approval based on an authority matrix

is more flexible than reporting structure. It supports
routing to other entities outside of the reporting
structure.
Cascading Approval - For example, a change request for a consulting

Authority Matrix project needs various approvals based on the type
of change.
Authority matrix's need additional configuration,

including a data structure identifying the approvers
and a property to identify the current approver.
You can assign approvals to the worklist of a

specific user or a work queue.
For example, if an account manager can approve a

Single Approval Use Case
request for an equipment upgrade, the approval
goes to the manager's work list. IF any member of a
group of managers can approve the request, the
approval goes to the group's work queue.
Expense report processes To the user - You route the assignment directly to
require travel expenses the user by specifying the user ID.
assignments be routed to a
specific auditor. Auditors are
members of an auditing work
group. How do you route the
assignment to a specific user?
PEGA CSA
An insurance 8 offers
company Route request to a work group whose members
personal property insurance. have the skill rating parameters.
Jewelry is a special type of
personal property. Jewelry
coverage requires that the user
managing the request is
trained to appraise jewelry.
Assignments for jewelry
appraisals must go to skilled
users. Which routing approach
would you use?
home appraisal offices in based on business logic. - Use business logic with
various regions. Each office multiple conditions to route assignments to the
has a work queue. The correct work queue based on location.
company requires that
appraisals be assigned to
offices based on the home's
location. For example, home
appraisals for Boston are
assigned to the New England
Office work queue. Which
routing approach supports this
requirement?
Routing a candidate evaluation to the reporting

manager - using a single approval, you can assign a
Ex of Single Approval Routing
task to be approved by the current user's reporting
structure.
Route job requisition approval to a reporting

manager, the senior manager, then director. - Using
Ex of cascading approval
cascading approval, you can configure approval
routing
based on the reporting structure so the necessary
parties approve an assignment.
PEGA CSA 8 Route an expense report to the department

manager when the expenses exceed $1000 - Using
Ex of Business Logic Routing business logic you can route to a particular user
(the department manager) when expenses are
greater than $1000
Route support requests for customers whose

preferred language is Spanish to customer service
representative who speak Spanish. - Using custom
Ex of custom routing
routing, you can use the ToSkilledGroup router to
route to a work group of a customer service
representative who have the skill, Spanish.
A rule is an instruction for describing a specific

What is the purpose of a rule
case behavior, such as a process or automated
in a Pega application?
decision.
System architects create a new version of a rule

whenever case behavior needs to change. Pega
maintains a history of changes to a rule, allowing
system architects to review the change history and
undo changes if needed. Since each rule describes
a specific case behavior, the rest of the case
Versioning
remains unaffected. For example, a system architect
updates a UI form with instructions and removes a
critical field. You can review the history of the form
and revert back to the version before the changes
were made, without changing other rules in the
application.
PEGA CSA 8 System architects delegate rules to business users

to allow business users to update case behavior as
business conditions change. The business user
updates the delegated rule, while other parts of the
application remain unchanged. For example,
expense reports that total USD25 or less receive
Delegation automatic approval. You create a rule to test
whether an expense report totals USD25 or less
and delegate the rule to the Accounting
department. The Accounting department can then
update the rule to increase the threshold for
automatic approval increases to USD50, without
submitting a change request for the application.
System architects reuse rules whenever an

application needs to incorporate existing case
behavior. Otherwise, you must reconfigure the
behavior every time you need the behavior. For
Reuse
example, you create a UI form to collect
policyholder information for auto insurance claims.
You can then reuse this UI form for property
insurance claims and marine insurance claims.
identifies, stores, and manages the set of rules that

Ruleset define an application or a major portion of an
application.
System architects collect individual rules into an

Ruleset Version
instance of a ruleset
represents a substantial release of an application. A

major version change encompasses extensive
changes to application functionality. For example,
the Accounting department uses an application to
Major Version
manage expense reports. If Accounting wants to
extend the application to track employee time off
for payroll accounting, you create a new major
version of the ruleset.
PEGA CSA 8 represents an interim release or enhancements to a

major release. For example, you need to update an
Minor Version expense reporting application to make automatic
audit travel reimbursements. You create a new
minor version of the ruleset.
consists of fixes to address bugs in an application.

For example, you notice that a field in the current
Patch Version version of an application has an incorrect label. You
create a new minor version to correct the field
label.
The ruleset stack determines the order in which

Pega looks through rulesets to find the rule being
used. Each entry in the ruleset stack represents all
Ruleset Stack the versions of the specified ruleset, starting with
the listed version and working down to the lowest
minor and patch version for the specified major
version.
2/13/23, 4:20 PM Pega CSSA Deployments Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSSA Deployments Study
Pega CSSA Deployments

identifies components to move to a destination

Pega Platform system
lists the rulesets, data, and other objects that

Product rule
makeup an application in a file
does not include standard rulesets and data

because already built-in Pega platform
What is the product rule an the Rule-Admin-Product class, referred to as a

instance of? RAP file
list all the items included in the archive when the

archive is generated for migration
What is the product rule
product preview? items include instances of rules in selected ruleset
versions, application and framework data, system
data, database schema changes, and codesets
A wizard that guides the steps to producing a

product rule.
What is the application
Allows developers to identify missing components
packaging wizard?
and manually customize data instances associated
with standard rulesets
The product rules is stored in an archive file

How is the product rule
called a RAP file which is compressed using ZIP or
stored?
JAR
https://quizlet.com/655342135/pega-cssa-deployments-flash-cards/ 1/9
Pega CSSA
What does Deployments
the product rule data instances and data types
prompts you to include?
Start the application packaging wizard

Select application to package
Select ruleset and ruleset version (must be
unlocked)
Identify the chain of built-on applications
Identify products on which Pega-powered
application depends on (skip if none)
Identify organization, division, and unit
steps to create a product rule
Identify access groups associated with application
through the application
Identify operators
packaging wizard
identify work queues
identify work groups
Identify local data storage data types
Identify Java codes used by application
Identify integration resources (instances
associated with application are automatically
selected)
Click finish
Preview product rule
Modify product rule to add or remove instances

What can you do to a product or change default settings
rule after it is generated?
Migrate product rule
Export the product rule file to the local computer
Select the "Allow unlocked ruleset versions?"

How do you modify the
checkbox on File details section
product rule to export
Select the "Custom/Production rulesets"
delegated rulesets?
checkbox on the Applications to include section
Pega
How do CSSA Deployments
you modify the Clear the "Include associated data items"
product rule to exclude checkbox in the Applications to include section
specific associated data
instances in the wizard?
How do you modify the Clear the "Include data types" checkbox in the
product rule to exclude Applications to include section
specific data tables in the
wizard?
How do you modify the Clear the "Include rule history" checkbox in the
product rule to exclude rule Applications to include section
history instances in the
wizard?
to simplify application migration and maintenance.

Why do yo associate data
Avoids having to include each data instance on
instances with rulesets?
the product rule manually
What are some data instances operator IDs, access groups, databases, and
that can be associated with database tables.
product rules?
What happens to data they automatically get added to the archive file of
instances associated with the product rule
application rulesets?
(True or False) Data instances true

remains available to all
applications regardless of the
associated rulesets
When do imported rules in a immediately, as soon as they're imported. Even

ruleset that a user can already before other rules in the archive finish getting
access may be executed? imported
Pega CSSA
When can Deployments
declarative rule immediately, may fail if associated properties are
begin to execute upon not imported yet
migration?
identify application components in a product rule

What are 3 options to
perform for product rule Create archive/RAP file of the product rule
migration?
Import archive file to the destination system
What steps must be done to Check in all the rules you want to export
export an application, Use a name for the file valid for both destination
product rule, or ruleset to an and current server
archive using the Export
Wizard?
Application
What export modes can be Ruleset/Version
used to produce the .zip file Product
in the Export wizard? Patch
Archive on Server
What are application Check in all rules

versioning best practices? Lock all but highest version rulesets
creates a new empty ruleset version and copies

the necessary updated rules into the new ruleset
best for incremental patch versions

What is lock and roll?
ex: when locking and rolling version 01-01-05 into
version 01-01-06, the system will run the updated
rules in 01-01-06 and search for the non-updated
rules in 01-01-05 and all previous versions.
Pega
How do CSSA Deployments The application record and access groups are
the application
record and access groups get automatically updated with skimming
updated with lock and roll This action is optional with lock and roll
versus skimming?
saves the highest version of a rule into a new,

higher ruleset version
What is skimming?
Mainly applies to resolved rules and filters out
rules unavailable for rule resolution
Only the latest rule versions are saved in a new

minor or major version. Older rules are ignored
(and should be locked)
What rule versions are saved
during skimming? Ex: if a rule is in version 01-01-02 and a new
updated version is in 01-01-03, and you're
skimming over to version 02-01-01, the rule passed
over is the updated rule in version 01-01-03
What rules are carried Available, Final, Withdrawn, and Blocked rules
forward during a minor skim?
What rules are carried Available, Final, and Blocked rules

forward during a major skim?
What rules are never carried Not Available rules

forward during skimming?
Does the application older Yes

versions get preserved after
lock and roll or skimming?
What rulesets are created 2 Application rulesets

when a new application is 2 organizational rulesets
generated?
Pega CSSA
Are rulesets Deployments
created by the Yes, the integration wizard creates a separate
integration wizard upon new ruleset for each integration
integrations?
Ruleset with at least one unlocked ruleset version

What are production used during production and rules updated in the
rulesets? production environment.
Mostly used for delegated rules
Where are production Must be configured in the application record and

rulesets specified in the access group
configured/specified?
process of rule validation during design time

performed whenever a rule is saved
What is ruleset validation?
Guarantees rules are available on the target
system
Application validation (AV, applies to application

What are the two types of rulesets)
ruleset validation? Ruleset validation (RV, applies to organizational
rulesets)
applies to application rulesets, reduces time diff

between design and runtime
Rules in AV mode can reference all the rules down
an application stack and within its own ruleset
(including rules in RV mode)
Application Validation mode: If the application definition is changed, some rules
in AV mode may become invalid and cause errors
Pega CSSA Deployments Applies to organizational rulesets

Defines a prerequisite upon which the ruleset
depends on, and can only reference rules from
prerequisites
Ruleset Validation mode: If no pre-requisites are available, set the Pega-
ProcessCommander:08-02-99 patch as
prerequisite
A ruleset defined as a prerequisite cannot set the
defined rule as a prerequisite of its self (not cyclic)
How are ruleset validation They are identified in brackets next to the ruleset
mode prerequisites (ex: Ruleset[prerequisite]
identified?
Use RV mode for rulesets used across many

applications
What are best practices for Include unlocked AV mode rulesets in one
setting validation of rulesets application only
in an application? Build applications for common rulesets
Run validation tool after implementing critical
changes/milestone
Governs rule execution at run time by indicating

The ruleset list or ruleset
the rulesets available to the application for a
stack:
given operator session
By identifying the application version rule on the

Operator's access group upon logging in.
How is the ruleset list The rules on the application version define the
assembled? ruleset list
The ruleset list is organized based on the

application stack
How is the ruleset list and rule The ruleset list defines the order for rule
resolution related? resolution
Pega CSSA
In what order Deployments
do rules take Rulesets at the top take higher precedence
precedence in the ruleset
list?
What two records are The application and an access group

involved when configuring a
production ruleset?
container for rulesets with records that undergo

what are branches? rapid change and development (branched
rulesets)
based on another ruleset

A branched ruleset is? contains rules in active development in the
associated branch
For how many features is a A branch is created for each feature your team is
branch created for? developing
Create a team application built on the main

application,
Create development branches on team
application,
grant developers access to team application,
Create/Update rules in the branches,
How to develop rules in
Resolve conflicts between branches and team
parallel?
application,
Merge branches into team application rulesets,
Merge into main application (system checks which
rules were updated and which rules do not exist
in team application before merging the updated
rules from the branch into the main application)
What does the system check system checks which rules were updated and
for before merging rules from which rules do not exist in team application
a team application into the before merging the updated rules from the
main application? branch into the main application
Pega CSSA
Prerequisite Deployments
for creating a Create a team application, Create an access
branch for parallel group that references team application and add
development? developers to it
Steps before merging Review conflicts and warning, check in rules to

branched rulesets: merge
What wizard creates the initial The New Application Wizard

application rulesets when
creating a new application?
Organizational rulesets reusable organizational assets, such as data

include: structure.
Application Rulesets include: application configuration rules
Every time a rule is saved, it guarantees that

referenced rules are available on the target
When are rulesets validate?
system. Does not affect rule resolution at run time,
only applied at design time.
What does the validation tool The validation tool checks for invalid rules in the
do? application
2/13/23, 4:11 PM Pega Interview Questions and Answers Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega Interview Questions and Answers Study
Pega Interview Questions and Answers


10th Edition • ISBN: 9780470458365
Erwin Kreyszig
4,134 solutions
Defer load means, suppose u can use any tabbed

Section in that situation u want to load the data on
each tab u can write one activity to retrieve data,
then a large amount of data will be loaded in
clipboard, Its a performance hit to load the more
What is a defer load? Is it data in clipboard, So in that situation we can use
possible to defer load the Defer load option it will prevent performance
values in a drop-down? because while u Check the Defer load option it will
ask some activity on each tab Cell properties, so
whenever the particular tab is opened then relevant
activity only will be fired and load the related data.
So it will Avoid performance. Yes we can load the
values in a dropdown.
https://quizlet.com/503698237/pega-interview-questions-and-answers-flash-cards/ 1/21

The main Advantage of the Declare pages is, It
prevents the multiple DB hits , Suppose is there
multiple requestors in that node whenever first user
login into the application then load activity will be
Advantages and limitations of fired and create a declare page and then loaded
declare page? the data in that page, requestors who can on that
node will show this declare page and use the data
on that page. The Disadvantages are it's read-only
to the requestors, and can not add the additional
data and can't delete the specific data.
Declare pages are created through declarative

rules, Declare keyword must be specified while
creating a declare page, Declare pages are read-
only pages, These pages Can't delete, update
Difference between declare
directly.
page and regular pages?
User pages are created through page new method
in an activity, these pages can be updated, deleted
directly, these pages automatically deleted once
logout from the system.
Difference types of declarative Declare Expressions, Declare Constraints, Declare

rules present? On change, Declare trigger, Declare Index.
How do u specify if expression In the Chain tracking tab.

triggers forward or backward
chaining?
It will search the first on dependency network After

How between chaining checking the dependency the execution Starts
process works in Pega? (Goal from Lower expression to higher expression. In
Seek) Activity, u can use goal-seek-property to find the
missing value of the property.
What type of Reporting List View and Summary View

features are provided by
Pega?

A summary view rule defines a two-level report
display, presenting summary counts, totals or
averages to be displayed initially, and allowing
users to click a row to drill down to supporting
detail for that row. Summary view rules support
interactive charts, trend reports, and the use of
AJAX for pop-up Smart Info windows.
between ListView and
A summary view rule is an instance of the Rule-Obj-
SummaryView?
SummaryView rule type. This rule type is part of the
Reports category. A list view rule, an instance of the
Rule-Obj-ListView rule type, defines a report. Users
can personalize list view reports easily and interact
with them. Use the Report wizard to define list view
reports and link them to our portal.
How to call a listview from an In an activity, the Obj-List-View can execute a list
Activity? view rule.
To divide the ListView into different pages and set

What is Paging in a listview?
the number of records to be displayed on a page.
Exposing a property means to make a property as a

What is exposing a property? separate independent column so that it can be
used in SQL queries and as a criterion in reporting.

Process Commander stores the values of all
aggregate properties and some Single Value
properties in a BLOB column (the Storage Stream)
usually in a compressed form. Such properties
cannot support selection in list view and summary
view reports and can slow retrieval and processing
in other operations.
-Select Tools > Database > Modify Database

Schema.
-A list of databases identified in Database data
instances appears. Select a database and click
Next.
-A list of tables in the selected database appears
from Database Table instances. Select a table.
-Click Explore Columns.
How to expose a single value
-The resulting List of Classes window displays the
property?
number of rows in the table, the number of columns
in the table and a list of the classes assigned to that
table. The Properties Set to Be Visible value counts
the properties for which the Column Inclusion
value is Required or Recommended. This Column
Inclusion value is advisory and does not indicate
whether the property is exposed — corresponds to
a column. The Count column shows the total count
of properties in this class plus those its parent
classes.
-To see the columns currently defined in this table,
click the numeric link labeled Number of columns
in this table.
-The List of Database Columns window shows the
column name, column data type, and column width
in bytes for each column in the table.

Declare Index rule is a better approach.
-Create a concrete class derived from the Index-

base class.
-Create Single Value properties in the new class to
hold the values of the embedded values.
-Create a Declare Index rule with the appropriate
How to expose aggregate embedded Page Context value that copies the
property? embedded values into a new Index-instance.
-Save the Declare Index rule. It executes
immediately, adding and deleting instances of the
new class.
-Expose database columns corresponding to the
Index-class.
-Reference the Index- properties in the list view
rule.
We can refer the properties in the Display tab

Can we refer the property without exposing. But we can't refer the property
without exposing in Reports? without exposing in Criteria fields of the Content
tab.
What is the activity responsible GetContent Activity

for getting the data in
ListView?
What the class of getContent Embed-ListParams class.

Activity?
Can or have you customize the Yes

getContent Activity?
Pega Interview Questions and

Step 1:Answers
Create Activity in Our Class and create the
New page
Step 2: write a query and store invariable.
Step 3: call the listview as Call Rule-Obj-ListView
Step 4: Write another activity in Embed-ListParams
Step 5: create the parameter. This parameter gets
the SQL query from the previous activity.
How to customize the Step 6: write Java method The java code in this
getContent Activity? method is Get the page from pyContentPage if a
page already exists. If a page is not available it
creates the new ContentPage.
Step 7: In this code get the SQL query from the
above parameter and pass this query and above
created ContentPage as parameters to this
tools.getDatabase().executeRDB(query, page
name) method.
How do we get the data from Using Join tab in Reports

the two different tables?
Write a database View. In this view logically

How do we fetch the data combine the Two different tables. Create a class for
from two different tables this logically combined Table. Write the ListView.
without using two different Applies to class is class of the Combined table. So
tables? we can refer the properties of both the tables in list
view.
HTML Property rules appear in list view and

What is the use of HTML
summary view rules to define the appearance of
property in ListView?
values in reports.
Consider this scenario: I need Select .pxCreateDateTime ( an exposed property )

to generate a list view report under criteria and give the value you are looking
of all the work objects created for. To include it in a section, check the embedded
on a particular date and then I checkbox and customize the HTML of the section.
need to include this list view in In that, we need to access the list view in a JSP tag
a section. How can this be or In the section, Property is DisplayAs ListView.
done?
Pega Interview
What is the difference Questions and Answers
List view is generally used for complex queries
between ListView and Obj- where sorting is required and also we can retrieve
List? less information using Paging.
List view (an instance of Rule-Obj-ListView ) is used

to define a custom report or personal version of a
report.
A list view can be configured as follows:
-Applies to a class of list view will be taken as the
database table map for the search criteria.
-Display fields tab is used to depict the fields that
are displayed along with category and to
enable/disable sorting.
-The content tab is used to depict the criteria, fields
to be retrieved, the key of each row (if selected)
and Report source (Page name where the values
should be saved and the activity to be called).
-In the organize tab we specify to enable/disable
paging, page size, mode, alignment etc.
Explain in brief the We can also configure additional buttons and their
configuration of a list view? fragments here.
-Format tab is used to depict the formatting of the
list (like even/odd coloring) and details on single
click etc.
The list view can be accessed from an activity or

HTML as follows:
Call Rule-Obj-List View. Show View activity with the
class name and list view name as parameters
- <pega: ListView name=" {name of list view}"
classname= "{Class name of list view}">
A list view can be used for complex retrievals from

the database by not specifying the display, format
and Organize table. Action, in that case, would
perform instead of refresh.

Summary views are used to create reports which
are grouped by certain criteria and can be later
drilled down.
A Summary view can be configured as follows:

-Applies to the class of summary view will be taken
as the database table map for the search criteria
-The category is used to know under which tab the
report should come.
-Criteria are used in the where the class (this can
be asked to a user by enabling prompt user)
Explain in brief about the -Group by and field functions (like count) are used
configuration of a summary for initial display. If we have more than one group
view? by it is Displayed one after another on clicking +
-Drill down fields are used to display the fields
when we click on the assignment.
-The format is used to tell how to format the display
and charts can also be used.
The summary view can be accessed from an

activity or HTML as follows:
- Call Rule-Obj-ListView.ShowView activity with the
class name and summary view name as parameters
- <pega: SummaryView name="{name of summary
view}" classname={Class name of summary view}">
Difference between list Obj- We can retrieve instances from multiple classes by
list-view results and obj- using the obj-list-view, In obj-browse, we can
browse? retrieve only Single Class Instances.

An agent is an internal background process
operating on the server that runs activities on a
periodic basis. Agents route work according to the
rules in our application.
Agents also perform system tasks such as sending
What is an Agent?
e-mail notifications about assignments and
outgoing correspondence, generating updated
indexes for the full-text search feature,
synchronizing caches across nodes in multiple
node systems, and so on.
New SysAdmin Agents. Rule Set name is the Agent

How do we create an Agent? name. The agent is an instance of Rule-Agent-
Queue.
No. Agent schedules cannot be created manually.

The Agent Manager on our Process Commander
system generates at least one agent schedule
instance for each agent rule.
Do we need to create Agent By default, the Agent Manager checks for new or
Schedule? updated agents rule once every ten minutes. After
we create an agents rule, the Agent Manager
generates one Agent Schedule instance for each
node running on your Process Commander system
the next time it checks for new agents rules.
Do we need to migrate Agent No

Schedule to other
environments?
Each agent activity runs individually on its own

interval schedule, as a separate requester thread.
Periodic — The agent runs the activity and then
What is the Agent running time "sleeps" for the number of seconds entered in the
intervals? Interval column.
Recurring — The agent runs the activity based on a
specified calendar schedule (for example, every
Monday at 5:00 P.M.).

QueueAnswers
mode indicates whether the agent uses the
agent queue capability to process items from the
agent queue. This feature allows the agent to
temporarily skip over items that fail — for example,
because a needed resource is locked and try again
later to process the item later. Standard — Specifies
that this agent processes items from an agent
What are the Agent Running
queue and that it relies on the system to provide
modes?
object locking and other transnational support.
-Advanced — Specifies that this agent uses custom
queuing
-Legacy — specifies that this is an agent that was
created in a version prior to V5.4 and has not yet
been updated. This option is not available for
agents created in V5.4 or later.
Agent activity calls another activity. This called

activity may not appear in agent rule set. So setup
of the Rule setlist and Roles by providing Access
What is the use of referring
group in security Tab.
Access Group in Agents?
Select the access group to use for the legacy and
advanced agents listed in this rule. This field is
ignored for agents with a type of Standard.

-< envAnswers
name="agent/enable" value="true" />Verify
the above tag in prconfig file. Value of the above
tag is true or false.
-In Agent Schedule, schedule tab verifies the
checkbox Enable this agent is Checked or Not. And
also verify the Enabled? The checkbox is checked
or Not.
-The same thing also checks in Agents Rule.
How do we Troubleshoot or -In Tracer, we can trace the particular operator or
Trace an Agent? particular Agent.
-In prsysmgmt portal, In Agent Management select
the particular Agent and Delay the Agent and then
run the Tracer.
-We can use the Agent Management link in the
System Management Application to monitor and
control agent processing. The agent runs on
different nodes, select the particular node and run
the Tracer.

The agents in the Pega-ProCom RuleSet process e-
mail, service level rules, and assignments, archive
work objects, and so on.
The agents in this rule provide the following types

of processing:
-Processing service level events and escalation.
Applying a flow action to assignments in bulk.
Sending out e-mail correspondence
-Archiving and purging work objects, attachments,
and history
What are the Agents for SLA
-Retrieving PDF files from the Pega distribution
and Correspondence?
Manager
-Running tests defined through the optional
Automatic Testing facility
-Checking incoming e-mail
-The activity System-Queue-
ServiceLevel.ProcessEvents supports service level
processing for both assignments and work objects.
-The activity Data-Corr-.Send supports outgoing e-
mail if your system contains one or more Email
Account data instances with a second key part of
Notify.
The Agent Manager is a master agent that gathers

and caches the agent configuration information set
for our system when Process Commander starts.
Then, at a regularly scheduled interval, it
Who will create Data-Agent-
determines whether any new agents rules were
Queue?
created during the last period. If there are new
agents rules, the Agent Manager adds them to its
list of agents and generates agent schedule data
instances for them for each node.

Our system includes three standard agents rules.
Because these agents rules are in locked RuleSets,
we cannot modify them. To change the
configuration settings for the agents listed in these
rules, update the agent schedules generated by the
agents rule.
Pega-IntSvcs: Five agents in the Pega-IntSvcs

RuleSet process queued service and connector
requests and perform maintenance for
PegaDISTRIBUTION MANAGER (formerly called
Correspondence Output Server, or COS).
Pega-ProCom: The agents in the Pega-ProCom

RuleSet process e-mail, service level rules, and
assignments, archive work objects, and so on.
The agents in this rule provide the following types

of processing:
What are the Standard -Processing service level events and escalation
Agents? -Applying a flow action to assignments in bulk
-Sending out e-mail correspondence
-Archiving and purging work objects, attachments,
and history
-Retrieving PDF files from the Pega distribution
Manager
-Checking incoming e-mail (deprecated in V5.3)
Pega-RULES
The agents in the Pega-RULES RuleSet perform
general system housecleaning and periodic
processing.
The agents in this rule provide the following
processing:
-System Cleaner
-System Pulse
-System Indexer
-Rule Usage Snapshot
-Static Content Cleaner
-System Work Indexer

When you need to modify the behavior of an agent
listed in an agents rule in a locked RuleSet (any of
What is the use of Data-Agent- the standard Process Commander agents rules, for
Queue? example) you do so by editing one or more of the
generated
Service Level Agreements(SLA)
A service level rule is an instance of the Rule-Obj-

ServiceLevel type. Each service level rule defines
one to three-time intervals, known as goals,
deadlines, and late intervals, that indicate the
What is a Service Level expected or targeted turnaround time for the
Agreement? assignment, or time-to-resolve for the work object.
The gaol time is the smallest time interval, the
deadline time is a longer interval, and the late
interval defines post-deadline times. Each time
interval is in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Service level rules can be associated with a work

object or an assignment.For assignments, the
service level rule is referenced in the Assignment
What are the types of SLA? Properties panel of the assigned task.For the
Where can they be defined? overall work object, the service level rule is
identified in the standard property .pySLAName,
typically set up through a model for the class. (The
default value is the Default service level.)

Escalation refers to any processing within a Process
Commander application that causes high-priority
work objects to become visible to users and
managers and to be processed sooner rather than
later. The numeric property known as urgency
determines the order that assignments for that work
How do we do Escalation?
object appear on worklists. Escalation recalculates
the urgency value to reflect its age, impending due
date, or explicit management inputs.
Escalation can occur through a service level rule
associated with the flow and through background
processing by the Pega-ProCom agent.
A service level rule is an instance of the Rule-Obj-

ServiceLevel type. The service level can define a
goal and a deadline times for processing an
assignment and can execute activities if the goal or
the deadline is not met. This assignment-level
service level is distinct from any service level
associated with the entire flow. At runtime, an
internal countdown clock (measuring the
What is SLA's, how are they
completion of the assignment against the goal and
different from Agents?
deadline times computed from the service level
rule) starts when the assignment task is created. An
agent is a background internal requestor operating
on the server. These requestors can periodically
monitor conditions and perform processing as
necessary. Most agents are defined by an Agent
Queue rule (Rule-Agent-Queue), which includes a
list of the activities they perform.
SLA's are always associated with an assignment. Just

How to implement SLA's? Is it
drag an SLA shape and provide an instance of
possible to define an SLA for
Rule-Obj-ServiceLevel.Yes, SLA can be defined for
the entire work object? If yes,
the entire work object by defining it in the model.
how?
The property for this is pySLAName.

How to restrict a flow to
Answers
By using privileges and when conditions under the
process tab of the flow instance. Flow Actions In
particular users?
PEGA
A flow action rule controls how users interact with

work object forms to complete assignments. Each
flow action is defined by an instance of the Rule-
Obj-FlowAction rule type.
Flow actions are of two types:
-Connector flow actions appear as lines on Visio
presentation in the Diagram tab of a flow rule. A
line exits from an assignment shape and ends at the
What are the types of Flow
next task in the flow. At runtime, users choose a
Actions?
connector flow action, complete the assignment,
and advances the work object along the connector
to the next task.
-A local flow action, when selected at runtime,
causes the assignment to remain open and on the
current user's work list. Local flow actions are
recorded in the Assignment Properties panel and
are not visible on the Visio flow diagram.
A local flow action permits users at runtime to

update, but not complete, an assignment. Local
flow actions always are optional. Users may
What is the Difference
perform none, one, or multiple local flow actions,
between Connector Flow
or repeat a local flow action multiple times.
Action and Local Flow Action?
At runtime, users choose a connector flow action,
complete the assignment, and advances the work
object along the connector to the next task.
At runtime, the system runs this activity before it

does other processing for this flow action. This
Explain about Pre Activity? activity is not visible on the Visio flow diagram. This
activity executes only once, the first time a user
selects this flow action for this assignment.

Activity to run after other successful processing of
this flow action.
For screen flow rules By default, when this flow
action appears as a step in a screen flow rule, and
the user at runtime clicks away to a different step in
Explain about Post Activity?
the screen flow rule, this activity rule does not run.
To cause this activity to execute when the user
clicks away to a different step, select the Post
Action on Click Away? a checkbox on the
Assignment shape properties panel.
A local flow action permits users at runtime to

update, but not complete, an assignment. Like
connector flow actions, local flow actions are
referenced inside an assignment task in a flow.
At runtime, users can select local flow actions to
update assignment or work object properties,
change the assignee, and so on but do not
Explain about Local Flow
complete the assignment. If a service level rule is
Action?
associated with the assignment, the service level
continues to run.
Local flow actions always are optional. Users may
perform none, one, or multiple local flow actions,
or repeat a local flow action multiple times. On the
Action tab of the Flow Action form, we can mark a
flow action rule as local, or connector, or both.
How do we make one Local On the Design tab of the Flow form, we can list
Action available in all local flow actions that are to be available at every
Assignments? assignment in the flow.
-A Property is an instance of the Rule-Obj-Property

rules type.
-The property defines and labels a value that can
What is the Property? be associated with a class.
-For instances contained in the database, a
property often corresponds to a relational
database column.

[custom_table]
Single Array or List Group
Value modes Single Value Value List Value Group
Page modes Page Page List Page Group
What are the Property Modes?
Java Object mode Java Object Java Object List Java
Object Group
Java Property modes Java Property Java Property
List [/custom_table]
Edit input rules are instances of the Rule-Edit-Input

class. They are part of the Property category.
-An Edit Input rule provides a conversion facility.
-Use Edit Input rules to convert data entered by a
user (or received from an external system) from a
format that our application doesn't use into another
format.
-Edit input rules perform conversions, not
validations. This rule type does not cause any
response to a user about the validity of the input.
-Edit input rules use Java code for the conversion.
-We can reference an edit input rule in the Edit
Explain with an example the
Input Value field on the Property form.
difference between Rule-Edit-
Input and Rule-Edit-Validate?
Edit validate rules are instances of the Rule-Edit-
Validate class. They are part of the Property
category.
-Use the Edit Validate form to define a Java routine
that tests the validity of an input value in an activity
that processes user input.
-Properties rule (of mode Single Value, Value List or
Value Group) may reference an edit validate rule
on the Advanced tab.
-Use the Property-Validate method in an activity to
execute the edit validate rule when a value is
submitted through a user input form.

How Rule-Edit-Validate is
Answers
Edit Validate is to validate a single property at a
time but obj validate rules are used to validate all
different from Rule-Obj-
the properties in a single go. Obj-Validate method
Validate?
is used for this purpose.
How one single property can By using HTML Properties at the section level, not
be represented in different at the property level.
forms on a screen?
Consider this scenario : I have By using a qualifier "pyDecimal Precision" under

a property of type decimal, I Qualifiers tab.
need to restrict it to two
decimal places only. How
easily this can be done?
Implementation of Dynamic Select:

-In properties panel select Display As is
DynamicSelect.
-Write Activity for generating Dynamic Select.
How to implement dynamic -By using Show-Page method display the data in
select and smart prompt? XML format.
What's the major difference -Dynamic Select is a drop down from which we can
between them? only select a value.
-Smart prompts acts both as a text box and a drop
down.
-Smart prompts are implemented by using
ISNS_FIELDTYPE, ISNS_CLASS, ISNS_DATANODE.
Page property refers to a particular class and is

used to access the property of that class. Page List
between Page and Page List
Property also refers to a particular class, but it's a
property, how are they
collection of individual pages of the same class
Implemented?
which can be accessed through numeric indexes.

-HTMLAnswers
Property rules are instances of the Rule-
HTML-Property class. They are part of the Property
category.
-Use HTML Property rules to control how
properties appear on work object forms,
correspondence, and other HTML forms, for both
display and for accepting user input.
What is HTML Property?
-For properties of mode Single Value an HTML
Property rule may be identified in the Display
Property field of the Property rule form.
-HTML Property rules also may appear in list view
and summary view rules to define the appearance
of values in reports, and in harness, section, and
flow action rules that define work object forms.
Standard properties means all the properties in the

Pega-RULES, Pega-IntSvcs, Pega-WB, and Pega-
ProCom RuleSets have names start with px, py, or
pz.These three prefixes are reserved. We cannot
create new properties with such names. We can
override these standard properties with a custom
property of the same name (without changing the
mode or Type).
Px: Identifies properties that are special, meaning

that the values cannot be input by user input on an
Explain about Special
HTML form.
Properties?
Py: Properties with names that start with py are not

special, meaning that values can be input by users
on an HTML form.
Pz: Properties with names that start with pz support

internal system processing. Users cannot directly
manipulate pz properties. our application may
examine these values, but do not set them. The
meaning of values may change with new product
releases.

VALIDATIONS In PEGA
A validation rule is used to validate the value
against some other value. Once the validation fails
What types of validations are the system add error message to that field in the
there? clipboard.
-Client Side Validations

-Server Side Validations
-Obj-Validate-we can be referred this method in

Activities and inflow actions at Validate Rule field.
-Edit-Validate—- we can refer this in property form
What are the Methods we at the edit-validate field and in activities through
have used for validations? property-validate method.
Note: I think Obj-Validate is used for Server Side
Validation and Edit-Validate is used for Client Side
Validation.
2/13/23, 3:52 PM Pega 8 Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega 8 Study
Pega 8
5.0 (1 review)

7th Edition • ISBN: 9780073383149
David Burton
776 solutions
https://quizlet.com/482221739/pega-8-flash-cards/ 1/65
Pega 8 Situational Layer

With Pega's B
CakeTM approach, how do
you configure a regional
variation for Human Resources
(HR) time off cases?
A.- Create a rule for the
variation and add the rule to
the common layer of the
application.
B. -Create a rule for the
variation and add it to a
secondary common
application layer.
C. -Create a rule for the
variation and add the rule to
the layer for the region.
D. - Create a rule for the
variation and replace the
existing HR time off rule in the
application common layer.
Pega 8
An organization has two lines d
of business: selling books for
children and reselling college
textbooks. The division selling
books for children can use the
same basic user interface (UI)
as the division reselling
textbooks with the exception
of the payment methods.
How do you apply the
Situational Layer CakeTM in
this scenario?
A. Place the UI rules in the

base layer, and create a new
layer for the payment rules for
both lines of business.
B. Place the UI rules and
generic payment method rules
in the base layer, and create a
new layer for the division-
specific payment rules. C.
Place the UI rules in the base
layer, and create a parallel
base layer for the payments
rules.
D. Place the UI rules in the
base layer, and create a new
layer for the payment rule for
each division
Pega
An order8fulfillment case type A
allows a customer to update
user profile information during
the order placement stage.
The user profile consists of the
following three pages:
Account ID and password
Customer contact information
A list of open orders with
status of each order
to update any of the user
profile pages at any time
during case processing?
A. Add a set of optional

actions to the case workflow.
B. Add an alternate stage to
the case life cycle.
C. Add an optional process to
the case workflow.
D. Add a button for each
profile page to each
assignment
Pega 8
A development team plans to D
enhance functionality of an
existing application by
enhancements to a small
group of users before rolling
the changes out to the entire
user base.
A. Place the updated rules into

a new minor version of the
ruleset and include the new
ruleset version in a new
application.
B. Place the updated rules into
a new ruleset and include the
new ruleset in a new
application.
C. Place the updated rules into
a new ruleset and include the
new ruleset in a new version of
the application.
D. Place the updated rules into
a new minor version of the
ruleset and include the new
ruleset version in a new
version of the application.
Pega 8
You are creating a case type to A
process job applications for a
large corporation. Job
applications for security
positions require a physical
assessment in addition to the
standard criminal background
check. The physical
assessment can occur before
or after the background check.
type to achieve the required
behavior?
A. Create a process for the

physical assessment that is
followed by a process for the
background check.
B. Create a process for the
physical assessment that is
parallel to the background
check process.
C. Create a process on one
stage for the background
check and a process on
another stage for the physical
assessment.
D. Create a process for the
background check and an
optional process for the
physical assessment.
Pega 8
You are developing a case C
type to process visa
applications. As part of the
process, applicants need to
schedule an interview with the
consulate. A child Interview
case is created for the
interview process and
assessment. Following the
interview, it typically takes 48
hours for the consulate to
reach a decision. For the visa
case to proceed to applicant
notification, the Interview case
needs to be resolved.
type to achieve the required
behavior?
A. Add a Create Case step that

creates the Interview child
case. There is no need to add a
Wait step.
B. Add a Create Case step that
case. Following this step, add a
Wait step that pauses the
parent case until the interview
case reaches a status of
Resolved and after 48 hours
have elapsed.
C. Add a Create Case step that
parent case until 48 hours
have elapsed.
D. Add a Create Case step that

Pega 8 until the Interview
parent case
case reaches a status of
Resolved.
You are designing a credit A

transaction case type and have
the following requirement:
Transaction disputes must be
resolved within 3 days. To
meet this requirement you
need to set the _____________ in the
A. deadline
B. goal
C. urgency
D. passed deadline
Add JSP Tags to an ...

email - source
Reproduce a part of a
form in
correspondence -
Insert Rule
Reference the Lasname
property in
correspondence -
Insert Property
Pega 8 states: Loan

A requirement C,D
applicants must enter their
annual salary. If the salary is
above the qualifying threshold,
the application is automatically
approved. If the salary is
below threshold, the applicant
must identify a cosigner.
Select two configuration
options that follow best
practices to meet the
requirement. (Choose two.)
A. Design a user view with an

annual salary field. Create an
optional action to collect
information about the cosigner
and assign the action to the
appropriate stage.
B. Create an assignment step
for a loan officer to review the
applicant's annual salary and
determine if a cosigner is
necessary.
C. Design a user view with an
annual salary field and a
section for cosigner
information. Use a Visible
When condition to display the
cosigner section when the
salary is below the threshold.
D. Use a collect information
step with an annual salary
field. Use a decision shape to
determine whether to advance
to a step to enter cosigner
information or complete the
process.
Pega 8 calls to apply for a

A customer B
new bank account. The
customer service
representative (CSR) needs to
perform an assignment named
Select Account Type. During
the discussion, the customer
can request written
information regarding different
account types.
Select the case lifecycle
design that satisfies this
requirement.
A. A user view for requesting

information to the Select
Account Type assignment.
B. Add an optional action to
the stage that contains the
Select Account Type
assignment.
C. Add a case-wide optional
action.
D. Add a router to the Select
Account Type assignment.
Pega 8
You are configuring routing for D
a customer warranty service
request. All warranty service
requests are routed to the
warranty resolution group
except for warranty service
requests for beta-release
product that requires review
by the vice president of
service. How do you configure
assignment routing to review
warranty service requests?
A. Route the assignment to the

vice president of service who
routes assignments to the
warranty resolution group as
needed.
B. Route the assignment to the
warranty resolution group who
sends an email notification to
the vice president of service
for the beta-release product.
C. Route the assignment to the
skilled group for the beta
release when the request is for
the beta release. Otherwise,
route the assignment to the
warranty resolution group.
D. Route the assignment to the
vice president of service when
the request is for the beta
release. Otherwise, route the
assignment to the warranty
resolution group.
Pega 8 refund case type

A customer A
requires that an auditor
receives an email notification if
the refund is greater than
twice the price of the item.
Which recipient role do you
select to configure this
requirement?
A. Configure the email to go to

a work queue.
B. Configure the email to go to
a customer.
C. Configure the email to go to
an interested person.
D. Configure the email to go to
an owner.
In a claims application, A,B

customers can file home
insurance claims. Each claim
contains a list of items of loss.
Depending on circumstances,
some claims are investigated
for potential fraud in parallel
to the actual claim process.
Which two entities would you
model as case type? (Choose
two.)
A. Fraud investigation
B. Claim
C. Customer
D. Items of loss
Pega 8 a service level

You configure D
to adjust assignment urgency
to 100 when the goal interval
lapses.
How does assignment urgency
impact the deadline and
passed deadline intervals?
A. Urgency value remains at

100, but other service level
processing continues.
B. Urgency value continues to
increment as configured.
C. Service level processing is
halted until the assignment is
completed.
D. The user is notified that the
maximum urgency has been
reached
How do you route an B

assignment so that any
available member of the
department can perform the
task?
A. Route the assignment to the

admin user ID.
B. Route the assignment to a
work queue.
C. Route the assignment
separately to all members.
D. Route the assignment to a
work list.
Pega
You want8your application to B
have consistent styling across
portals. You want the
background color of all
buttons in your application to
be blue. You want the
background color of the
buttons to be easily updated
in case corporate branding
changes.
Which attribute do you modify
to set the background color?
A. The application skin

B. The buttons format
C. The controls format
D. The background mixin
Pega
An online8sales application A,D
supports both laptop and
mobile devices. You are
configuring the application
skin and you notice the
responsive layout in the
mobile device is not displaying
views as stakeholders require.
to resolve this situation without
negatively impacting the
laptop users? (Choose two.)
A. Use the same application

skin in all portals.
B. Update the process to give
mobile users a separate portal.
C. Do not use a skin for the
mobile application version.
D. Adjust the responsive
behavior in the skin for optimal
viewing in the mobile portal
In designing your application, A

you want to apply consistent
visual styles to all parts of the
application.
How do you meet this
requirement?
A. Specify a skin in the

application rule.
B. Apply styles to the screen
layout.
C. Use the Live UI tool to
select the skin rule.
D. Specify a skin in the harness
rule.
Pega 8
You are implementing a UI C
form collecting job applicant
information. Users must
provide values to certain fields
before submitting the form.
A. Use multiple Validate rules

for each mandatory field
B. Use an Edit Validate rule to
verify if each of the mandatory
properties has a value
C. Use a Validate rule to verify
the mandatory fields have a
value
D. Configure the mandatory
fields as Required in the
section rule
Pega 8 nearby
A form listing B,D,F
restaurants has four columns:
Restaurant name Restaurant
location Thumbnail image of
the seating area Make
reservation (check box)
You want to ensure that users
have the information they
need to make a reservation
regardless of screen size.
When viewed on a small
display images. What
three configuration steps do
you take to support this
requirement? (Choose three.)
A. Set the importance of the

Make reservation column to
Primary.
B. Set the importance of the
Restaurant name column to
Primary.
C. Set the importance of the
image column to Other.
D. Set the importance of the
image column to Secondary.
E. Set the importance of the
Restaurant location and Make
Secondary.
F. Set the importance of the
Restaurant name and Make
Primary.
Pega 8 process allows

A reservation A
part of a travel itinerary.
Which configuration displays a
check box to allow users to
select travel insurance only if
the itinerary includes a flight?
A. A visible when condition

applied to the check box
B. An action set applied to the
check box
C. A declare expression
configured for forward
chaining
D. A validate rule applied to
the flow action
You are configuring an d

external data source using the
Integration Designer. You have
the REST, Dev, Stage, and Prod
endpoint URLs, and a name for
the data source.
What other information do you
need to configure the external
data source?
A. The name of the database

where the source data is
stored
B. The data views using the
external data source
C. A plan for mapping the data
and REST response fields
D. A backup endpoint URL if
the configured URL refuses to
connect
Pega 8 do you select

Which source D
for a data page that contains
the details of single record for
a data type?
A. Report definition
B. Data transform
C. Connector
D. Lookup
An on-demand transportation B
application has a Conversation
preference data type. When
customers use the application
to request a ride, they can
specify their conversation
preference: whether they
would like to talk to their driver
or if they would prefer silence.
Company stakeholders are
interested in analyzing the
conversation preference data.
How is the Conversation
preference data type sourced?
A. Local system of record

B. No system of record
C. External system of record
Pega 8
A hotel booking application B,D
allows customers to change
rooms after making a
reservation. The status of each
room in each hotel is stored
on a data page sourced from a
database table.
options do you use to update
the database table when a
customer changes rooms?
(Choose two.)
A. A When rule to trigger the

database update
B. An editable data page
containing the room
information
C. A savable data page
containing the room
information
D. A data transform to copy
updates to the data page
Pega
An online8car parts business D
wants customers to find parts
easily. You are asked to
implement the following
requirement: Customers must
select a make, model, and year
to initiate a vehicle-specific
search.
data storage in the application
to implement the requirement?
A. Configure a local data

storage of the make, model,
and year of the vehicle.
B. Configure a static list of the
make, model, and year
vehicles.
C. Configure a data page to
store the make, model, and
year data.
D. Configure a connection to a
system of record using the
External Database Mapping
Wizard
Pega 8 holds product

A data page c
information. The data page's
Reload if older Than filed is set
to 15 minutes. The data page is
created at 06:12. At 06:20 the
user requests product
information. At 06:42 the user
requests product information.
When is the data reloaded?
A. 06:35
B. 06:20
C. 06:42
D. 06:27
In an application for A
configuring hardware
equipment for new employees,
the manager chooses a laptop
model from a drop-down list.
The list of available laptop
models is maintained in an
external system and may
change over time.
Which of the following do you
use as the data source for this
drop-down list?
A. A data page
B. A local list
C. A data table
D. A data transform
Pega 8for an instant loan,

To qualify B
an applicant must earn a
monthly income of at least
GBP2000 and cannot exceed
GBP20000 in total liability.
How do you enforce these
restrictions when requesting
an instant loan?
A. Use a Validate rule to call

two Edit validate rules: one for
income and one for liability.
B. Use a single Validate rule
with two conditions: one for
income and one for liability.
C. Use UI controls to validate
the entries in the income and
liability fields.
D. Use two Edit Validate rules:
one for income and one for
liability.
Pega 8 must validate

An application A,B
postal codes for Canadian
customers to match the
pattern A1A 1A1, where A
represents a letter and 1
represents a number.
options allow you to ensure
that a user provides a valid
postal code? (Choose two.)
A. Configure a drop-down
control to select the postal
code based on the specified
city and province.
B. Configure an edit validate
rule to test that the entered
postal code conforms to the
required pattern.
C. Configure the postal code
field as a text property with a
required input field.
D. Configure a validate rule to
test that the entered postal
code conforms to the required
pattern.
Pega 8 views a product

A customer C
available in multiple color
options. The customer must
select only one color for each
product.
Which UI control allows a
developer to present the user
with all color choices at once,
without prompting or clicking,
while ensuring that the user
can only select one of the
color options?
A. Radio buttons
B. Text input
C. Drop-down
D. Check box
You are implementing a data C

entry screen to include an
asset ID field to track company
equipment. All asset IDs are
eight characters in length. The
first three characters are
letters followed by a five-digit
number.
Which validation approach
restricts entries to the required
format?
A. Text data type

B. Validate rule
C. Edit Validate rule
D. Min/Max characters
Pega 8 two requirements

Identify the A,C
that are satisfied by using a
data transform. (Choose two.)
A. Display the same data on

multiple user views.
B. Convert integer data to text
data.
C. Copy an existing order to a
new case.
D. Validate the format of a
property value.
Pega 8 an application for

You create C
employees to submit
timesheets. Employees enter
employee.
To configure the form where
users enter hours, select the
best configuration option to
calculate the total hours for
the week.
A. Use a When rule. When the

value of any work, vacation, or
sick time changes, the total
hours change.
B. Use declarative processing.
When the value of any work,
vacation, or sick time changes,
the total hours change.
C. Use procedural processing.
When the value of any work,
vacation, or sick time changes
and the user submits the form,
the total hours change.
D. Use a data transform. When
the user enters the form, the
data transform determines the
sum of the work, vacation, and
sick time properties
Pega 8 an application for

You create C
employees to submit
timesheets. Employees enter
employee.
You configure the user view
that displays remaining
vacation and sick time. The
balance calculates by
subtracting the vacation time
and sick time for the week
from the current vacation and
sick time balances.
Which configuration option is
used to summarize the
time?
A. Use a When rule. When the

application references the
time, each value calculates.
B. Use declarative processing.
Whenever the vacation time or
sick time entries change, the
time calculate. C. Use
pyDefault and
pySetFieldDefaults. When the
process invokes the data
transforms, the remaining
vacation and sick time
calculate.
D. Use procedural processing

Pega 8 transform.
with a data
Remaining vacation and sick
time calculate after the user
submits a timesheet.
How do you reference the A

State property on an Address
page group with the index
Home?
A. .Address(Home).State
B. .Home.State.Address
C. .Home(Address).State
D. .Address.Home.State
What is the relationship C

between pyWorkPage and
case data?
A. pyWorkPage timestamps all

the data generated while
creating and processing a
case.
B. pyWorkPage stores all the
data pages generated when a
case resolves.
C. pyWorkPage stores all the
data generated while creating
and processing a case
Pega 8
You are developing a case B
type that processes
scholarship applications.
Scholarship applications
advance based on the
standardized test scores of the
applicants. A decision shape
directs the process flow. You
want to test whether the
process flows correctly, but
you have not fully configured
the user interface so that
applicants can enter their
standardized test scores.
How do you test that the
process flows correctly based
on the decision?
A. Use the Run Rule window to

create a unit test to evaluate
the flow rule.
B. Use a declare expression to
set a value for the
standardized test score field.
C. Use Live UI to see how the
case processes and if an error
occurs. D. Use the Clipboard
tool to set a value for the
standardized test score field.
Pega 8
A car insurance quote request D
requires a view for potential
customers to enter information
to process the request.
What are the primary
considerations to make before
you configure fields in the
view?
A. The fields users need to see,

if the field is required, and
where data is sourced from
B. The fields users need to see,
where data is sourced from,
and how users enter values
C. The fields users need to see,
how users enter values, and if
the fields are required
D. The fields users need to see,
if the field is required, and if
the fields include a date type
A customer wants to copy the C

order contents?
A. Data page
B. Declare expression
C. Data transform
D. Function
Pega 8 for a hotel

A requirement C
requirement?
A. Configure a Validate rule for

the room selection step.
B. Apply a Disable when
condition to the total cost
field.
C. Add a When condition to
the room selection step.
D. Define a declare expression
for the total cost field.
A process routes loan requests D

to a specific loan officer based
on the type of loan.
If the loan is a mortgage, it is
routed to Adam Ross. If the
loan is for an automobile, it is
routed to Julia Samuels. If the
loan is an equity line, the case
is routed to Don Smith.
How do you configure a router
to ensure that case advances
to the correct loan officer?
A. Route the case to a worklist

using a skilled router.
B. Route the case to a work
queue using a When condition.
C. Route the case to a work
queue using a skilled router.
D. Route the case to a worklist
using a When condition.
Pega 8 requests a report

A manager c
that contains the following
Status. You must sort the cases
so the case with the most
recent create date appears at
the top of the list and
descends in order.
How do you design the report
definition to support this
requirement?
A. Add a filter condition where

Create Date is greater than the
current date.
B. Make the Create Date the
first column in the report.
C. Select Highest to Lowest
sort type for Create Date.
D. Select Lowest to Highest
sort type for Create Date.
Pega
You have8created a new report C
that contains a list of
employees, hire dates, and
managers. You have been
asked to display each manager
in a row. Beneath each
manager row, you must list the
manager's employees and
their hire dates.
How do you support this
request?
A. Summarize the manager

column
B. Sort the manager column
C. Group the manager column
D. Filter the manager column
Pega
A report 8
contains columns for D
Customer, Billing Cycle, Credit
Card, and Expiration Date. A
manager requests that the
report show only those
customers who meet the
following conditions:
The customer is on a monthly
billing cycle
The credit card is either
MoreCash or Vista
The credit card expires within
60 days
Which set of filtering
conditions returns a report
with the desired data?
A. Credit Card equals

MoreCash AND Credit Card
equals Vista AND Billing Cycle
equals monthly AND
Expiration Date is 60 days
greater than today
B. Credit Card equals
MoreCash OR Credit Card
equals monthly AND
Expiration Date equals next 60
days.
C. Credit Card equals
MoreCash OR Credit Card
is not quarterly AND Expiration
Date is less than 60 days
D. Credit Card equals
MoreCash or Vista, Billing
Cycle equals monthly, and
Expiration Date equals next 60
days
Pega
You have8been asked to create D
a pie chart that shows the
number of employees in each
regional office, and the name
of the manager in each office.
A list report contains columns
for Employee Name, Manager
Name, and Office.
report to create the pie chart?
A. Group the Employee Name

and Office columns.
B. Group the Employee Name
column.
C. Summarize the Employee
Name and Manager Name
columns.
D. Summarize the Employee
Name column
Which two conditions do you A,B

test with a unit test? (Choose
two.)
A. A property value is set

correctly by a data transform.
B. An application is
successfully migrated to a test
system.
C. A data page populates
without any errors.
D. An application displays user
views for 20 users within three
seconds.
Pega 8 a process, you

While running A
notice that a read-only field on
a form contains a value.
Which tool allows you to
determine if a declare
expression was used to
calculate the value?
A. Declarative network
B. Clipboard tool
C. The Tracer
D. Live UI
Pega
An online8retailer allows B,C
customers to select a courier
service for deliveries. The list
of available courier services is
drawn from a data type
sourced in the Pega database.
The Fulfillment department
wants to allow local
warehouse managers to add
courier services to mitigate
increases in delivery times and
remove courier services that
fail to meet delivery metrics.
Which two options are
required to allow local
warehouse managers to
update courier service records
in production? (Choose two.)
A. Create an access group for

local warehouse managers.
B. Delegate the records for the
courier service data type.
C. Define an approval process
for adding and removing
courier services.
D. Enable rule checkout for the
local warehouse managers
Pega 8
Which business need do you A
address through delegation?
A. A service representative
must attach the appropriate
form when emailing a
customer.
B. A risk officer wants to adjust
the income threshold for
automobile loans.
C. A care supervisor wants to
authorize a second opinion for
an insurance claim.
D. A general manager must
approve catering proposals
that exceed EUR5000.
Your online shopping B

application serves
international customers. You
need to define a Data Page
that holds currency exchange
rates. All users accessing the
application need to use the
information.
The Scope of this Data Page
should be set to ________________.
A. Application
B. Node
C. Thread
D. Requestor
Pega
You want8to unit test a rule. To B,C
ensure that the rule executes
as intended, you need to
valid data.
to populate the clipboard
before testing the rule?
(Choose Two)
A. Configure an assertion to
define the required data.
B. Configure a validate rule to
populate the needed data.
C. Run a data transform to
create the test page.
D. Copy data from an existing
clipboard page
Pega 8 for responding

The deadline C
to all customer requests is
eight hours. If the deadline is
exceeded, and the request is
from a premium customer, the
assignment automatically
transfers to the department
manager.
this requirement?
A. Create service level

agreement rules for each
customer category. Use a
decision table to determine
which service level agreement
rule to apply to the
assignment.
B. Create a single service level
agreement rule with a Transfer
escalation action. Use a
decision table to test for
premium customer service
requests.
C. Create a single service level
escalation action. Use the
value of a property to
calculate the deadline interval.
D. Create a single service level
escalation action. Use a when
rule to test for premium
customer service requests.
Pega 8
Which requirement can be D
implemented through
circumstancing?
A. An application routes
upgrade requests for US
customers to one work queue,
and requests for European
customers to a different work
queue.
B. An application sets the
default shipping option for
orders that exceed USD100 to
two-day delivery. Otherwise,
the default option is five-day
delivery.
C. An application audits
insurance claims that an
insurance adjuster values at
USD10000 or greater.
Otherwise, the claim is
approved.
D. An application establishes a
goal of four hours to adjust
claims for platinum customers.
For other customers, the
application establishes a goal
of one business day
Pega 8 request case

In a purchase C
type, you have the following
requirement: Purchase
requests should automatically
go to a manager of an
employee.
design a case with a ____________.
A. process that routes to the

manager
B. stage to route requests to
the manager
C. step that routes to the
manager
D. change stage step to allow
the employee to route to the
manager
A company requires that D

the application.
the patient as an instance of
which class?
A. Data-Party-Com
B. Data-Paty-Operator
C. Data-Party-Org
D. Data-Party-Person
Pega 8
You are designing a medical C
claim case type and have the
following requirement:
Medical claims must be
resolved within 5 days.
need to set the __________ in the
A. goal
B. urgency
C. deadline
D. passed deadline
Pega 8 use cases that

Choose two B,D
require the configuration of
conditional paths within the
case type. (Choose Two.)
A. A shopping application
requires a guest to fill out
payment information. A user
who enters a membership
number skips the payment
information step.
B. A scholarship eligibility
application requires students
to enter standardized test
scores. Students withy
qualifying test scores can
schedule an interview.
Students without qualifying
test scores receive a rejection
email.
C. A catering booking
application requires customers
to enter information about
expected party size, event
date, and event time. When
customers submit the
information, the catering
company sends a confirmation
email.
D. An application requires
customers to specify the type
of request from a drop-down
list. The request routes to the
appropriate department work
queue. A user with access to
the work queue processes the
case through fulfillment.
Pega 8 to build a report

You are asked B
listing customer order cases
with an Order Total value over
USD10000 sorted by Creation
date (pxCreateDate). The
report should display the
following three fields: Case ID
(pyID), Customer ID, and
Order Total.
Which property or property
combination should you
optimize to improve
performance?
A. pxCreateDate
B. pxCreateDate and Order
Total
C. Order Total
D. Customer ID and Order
Total
Pega 8 includes columns

A list report D
for purchase requests and
regional cost centers. A
the regional cost centers.
report definition?
A. Use the purchase requests

column to group the cost
centers.
B. Filter the results so that the
report includes only cost
center and purchase requests.
C. Summarize the regional
cost centers by count.
D. Summarize the purchase
requests column by count.
Pega 8 a list report that

You create B,C
displays the following
information: -Assigned case
worker
-SLA deadline
(.pySLADeadline)
-Loan Office (.LoanOfficer)
-Work status (.pyStatusWork)
-Loan type (.LoanType)
The report has two
requirements:
-Group the loan requests by
loan officer (.LoanOfficer).
-Use a filter to return requests
with an urgency
(.pxUrgencyWork) greater than
80.
Which two properties do you
optimize to improve report
performance? (Choose Two)
A. .LoanType
B. .pxUrgencyWork
C. .LoanOfficer
D. .pxAssignedOperatorID
Pega 8
You are configuring an A
application to process
automobile insurance claims.
The claim case creates child
cases for each component of
the claim: injury to a party,
damage to a vehicle, and
damage to property.
cost of the claim as users
A. Create a declare expression

to update the claim total when
the cost of each child case
changes.
B. Define a case calculation to
update the claim total with the
total of each child case.
C. Add the Update Case shape
to the Claim case type to
capture changes to each child
case cost.
D. Configure the Create Case
shape to propagate the total
cost from each child case to
the claim.
Pega 8 holds product

A data page b
information and has the
Reload if Older Than field set
to 30 minutes.
The data page is created at
7:43. The user then performs
the following actions:
product information
product information
reloaded?
A. 8:13
B. 8:45
C. 8:10
D. 8:40
Pega 8 scenarios that you

Choose two A,B
configure using procedural
processing. (Choose Two.)
A. A flight booking page
where customers can adjust
the location and date of the
departure and return flights.
The ticket prices recalculate
after the customer chooses the
"recalculate price" option.
B. A purchase order request
page with a summary of items.
The order total price updates
after the customer changes a
quantity.
C. A prescription order page
with a list of available
prescriptions sent from the
customer's health care
provider. When the user opts
to fill one or more
prescriptions, the cost
summary updates.
D. A restaurant reservation
page in which the user
chooses a reservation time and
the system returns the number
of available tables.
While testing a form, you need D

to verify the contents of a data
page in memory.
Which tool do you use to view
the current contents of the
data page?
A. Live UI
B. Case Designer
C. The Data Explorer
D. The Clipboard tool
Pega 8 appropriate use

Identify two A,C
cases for accessing external
data using the External
Database Table Class Mapping
wizard. (Choose Two)
A. Currency exchange rate

data
B. Population data by country
and year
C. Fahrenheit to Celsius
conversion
D. Current life expectancy in
the US
Which two statements A,D

demonstrate the role of a
report? (Choose Two)
A. Reports are used to source
a list of selectable items while
working in an assignment.
B. Reports are used to update
data in a database.
C. Reports are used to select
items from a list while working
in an assignment.
D. Reports are used to assess
process performance
Pega 8
You are building a form that B,D
contains a list of courses.
Users will select the courses in
which they want to enroll.
Which two tasks must take
place in Designer Studio?
(Choose Two)
A. Enable section editing and

configure the selection check
box by removing the caption.
B. Create a field group list
property and make the
property a data reference.
C. Configure the view in Run
mode and change the order of
the columns in the view.
D. Edit the field group list
property and set data access
to copy data from a data page.
Select the three benefits of A,B,D

Objectives (DCO). (Choose
Three)
A. Enter and store business
requirements in the
application.
B. Facilitate collaboration
C. Empower project
D. Automate custom business
processes.
E. Generate the latest code
from business-friendly
metaphors.
Pega 8 an application to
You create A,C,E
coordinate bus scheduling.
Choose three elements that
are essential to this
A. A set of fields to capture the

schedule details
B. A route delay alternate
stage
C. A scheduling case type
D. A work party to represent
the driver
E. A user view to enter the
schedule details
Consider the following C

requirement:
The patient must be able to
modify physician details at any
time without impacting primary
case processing.
this requirement?
A. Add a primary stage with at

least one process to the case
life cycle.
B. Add an assignment to the
case life cycle.
action to the case life cycle.
D. Add an alternate stage with
at least one process to the
case life cycle.
Pega 8 claim case creates

An accident A,C
a vehicle claim case for each
vehicle involved in an accident.
Which two configurations
prevent the accident claim
(Choose Two)
A. Add each vehicle claim as a

child case of the accident
claim.
B. Add an optional process to
pause the accident case until
the vehicle claims are paid.
C. Add a wait shape to the
accident claim case to wait
until all vehicle claims have a
status of Resolved.
D. Add a manual approval step
to the accident claim case.
Pega 8
You are defining a user view C
for a loan application. If the
loan applicant indicates there
is an existing open account,
the Date account opened
must be before the current
date.
Select the approach that
requirements.
A. Use a when rule to verify

the past. B. Use a validate rule
to verify the Date account
opened is in the past. C. Use a
calendar control to verify the
Date account opened is in the
past.
D. Use a pick list control to
Which two dependencies do A,B

you directly enforce with a
Wait step? (Choose Two)
A. Pausing a case until a user
submits a specified value
B. Pausing a case until another
case (or all cases) reaches a
specified status
C. Pausing a case until a
predetermined time expires
D. Pausing a case until a new
child case is created
Pega 8 states: When a

A requirement C
business guest checks out of a
hotel, the guest must
requirement.
A. Configure both checkout
request and hotel review as
top-level cases.
B. Configure hotel review as a
spin-off case of the checkout
request. C. Configure hotel
review as a child case of the
checkout request.
D. Configure checkout request
as a child case of hotel review.
Pega 8 states: A
A requirement B
customer can update an
address at any point during
case processing by
performing the following
steps.
1. The customer submits the
new address. 2. The
application verifies that the
address matches postal
service requirements. 3. The
customer then approves the
corrected address.
requirement?
A. Add an alternate stage to
the case life cycle to change
the address.
B. Add a case-wide optional
process to the case workflow
to perform the address
change.
action to the workflow for the
address submission.
D. Add a button to each
assignment to present the
customer with a form to submit
a new address.
Pega
Consider8the following A,B
scenario:
During the Interview process
for a Job Application case, an
administrative assistant selects
the date and location of the
interview. Next, an email
confirmation is sent to the
candidate. During the
interview, the hiring manager
captures notes from the
discussion. Finally, the
candidate is assigned a
technical exercise and the
results are added to the case.
Select two step names that
follow the guidelines for
identifying and naming the
steps in the process. (Choose
Two)
A. Notify Candidate
B. Ask Questions
C. Schedule Interview
D. Technical Exercise
Direct Capture of Objectives A,C

(DCO) aims to increase which
two aspects of application
delivery? (Choose Two)
A. Speed
B. Performance
C. Accuracy
D. Coding
Pega 8access an apartment

Users can A
hunting application from
different devices with different
properties. By default, the
photos are displayed in three
columns. When the screen
width is less than 800 pixels,
the photos should be
displayed in two columns. How
do you implement the screen
for this requirement?
A. Use a dynamic layout with a
pixels to change from inline-
grid triple to inline-grid
double format.
B. Circumstance the section
rule to display different
number of columns at different
screen sizes.
C. Use a column layout with a
pixels to hide the left column.
D. Circumstance the layout to
display different number of
columns at different screen
sizes
Which of these options are C,D

typically configured on a
A. Alignment of field values
B. Number of columns in each
row
C. Align columns and rows to
present data in a spreadsheet
D. Label Positioning
Pega 8
In an application selling office C
supplies, the Payment form
displays order items and
a dynamic layout. You find out
later that the OrderSummary
form also needs to display the
order items. How do you
implement the UI so that the
order items display is shared
between Payment and
OrderSummary forms?
A. Buils the OrderSummary
section with a layout inside to
group the order items, similar
to the Payment section.
B. Convert the Payment
section layout that contains
order items to a section, and
embed this section in the
OrderSummary section.
C. Reuse the Payment section
in the OrderSummary form and
circumstance the section rule
to hide payment information.
D. Embed the Payment section
in the OrderSummary section.
What are the minimum A

A. One action, one event, and
one condition
B. Two actions and one event
C. One action and one event
D. One actions and one
condition
Pega 8 an application
You configure B
to allow users to download a
mobile app. When users select
one of the three supported
platforms (Android, iOS, or
Windows Mobile), the
application opens a new
window pointing to the
appropriate app store.
behavior?
A. Add one button and
configure one action set. In
the action set, specify a click
event with three actions to
open each vendor URL in a
window. Apply a when rule to
each action to determine the
correct URL.
B. Add a button for each
platform and configure an
action set for each button. In
window.
C. Add one button and
configure three action sets. In
window.
D. Add three check boxes and
one button. For each check
box, configure an action set
with a click event to set the
value of the URL. For the
button, configure an action set
with a click event to open the
URL in a window
Pega 8
Which three use cases A,C,E
demonstrate the Pega
dynamic UI behavior? (Choose
Three)
A. Display a shipping address
section when users select the
Different than billing address
check box.
B. Display partner information
fields when a screen loads for
married applicants.
C. Display a message upon
form submission that a date
field must be in the future.
D. Unmask a password field
when users click an icon. E.
Automatically calculate order
total when users change
quantities
Pega 8select a check box

Users can D
to subscribe to a messaging
number.
application to display a field
for entering a mobile phone
number only when the check
box is selected?
A. Use a when condition in a
data transform to determine
whether to show the mobile
phone number field.
B. Use a circumstance on the
check box property to create
a rule variant that is effective
selected.
C. Use a when condition in the
flow to branch the flow based
on case data.
D. Use a when condition in the
UI form to determine whether
to show the mobile phone
number field
Pega
In a hotel8reservation C
application, a form displays a
by users.
form to refresh the hotel list
whenever the check-in or
check-out date changes?
A. Display the hotel in an
embedded section with a
visible when condition.
B. Configure edit validates on
the date fields to refresh the
change.
C. Configure action sets on the
date fields to refresh the
change.
D. Configure an action set on
the hotel list display to refresh
the section when the hotel list
changes.
During a design review of an B

saved as separate sections.
A layout can be saved as a
A. cached in memory to
improve performance
B. reused in other forms
C. aligned properly
D. rendered in different
browsers
2/13/23, 3:32 PM Pega 8.7 CSSA Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega 8.7 CSSA Study
Pega 8.7 CSSA

5.0 (1 review)
Book of Proof
2nd Edition • ISBN: 9780989472104
Richard Hammack
340 solutions
Enterprise Class Structure.

helps you organize rules in a way that encourages
ECS and advantages
reuse and provides the ability to adapt as the
business changes.
A framework layer contains reusable application

Framework layer elements and provides an application that you can
use as the basis for many production applications
The implementation layer contains application

elements that are specialized for a specific business
audience or purpose. The contents of the
Implementation layer
implementation layer extend the elements of the
framework to create a composite application that
targets a specific organization or division.
https://quizlet.com/nl/445017392/pega-87-cssa-flash-cards/ 1/19
Pega 8.7
The act of CSSA
using a version release cycle
method begins a
Every major version, minor release cycle

version, and patch version
represents a
Lock and roll is best for patch versions

Skimming streamlines application versions where
Skimming is better for minor and major versions
You use create a new version when you want to

lock and roll the version and create a new
When using lock and roll, what
application rule. You can also create a new
is the purpose of selecting the
new version option?
access more than one version of the application
(for example, a phased roll-out or a test period).

major or minor version
It's beneficial to delay the SLA Users who cannot immediately begin working
for
1) Immediately
3 values you can give to
2) Timed Delay
Assignment Ready
3) Dynamically Defined on Property
Urgency adjustments are 100

capped at
Pega 8.7processes
When both CSSA are Split Join
unrelated, can proceed
independently, and in parallel;
Use this flow shape:
1) When the parent process resumes processing

(all, any, some of the sub-processes are complete)
3 things to consider when
2) Context of the sub-process
using a Split Join shape
(current case, specific case)
3) Embedded Page
A sub-process that consists of Process Flow

actions
A sub-process that consists of Screen Flow

a series of forms
In this shape, each sub- Split for Each

process runs asynchronously
and in parallel
The system autopopualtes the class

______ field after adding the
property for the flow shape
You must configure these two (1) Define when the parent process resumes
values when setting a Split For processing
Each shape (2) Configure the context of the subprocess
In this shape, the sub-process Spinoff

does not rejoin the main flow.
The main process does not
wait for the sub-process to
complete
Pega
How do 8.7 CSSAaccess to
you provide You can define a different context for the sub-
an outside resource when process to be executed in, thereby shifting the
configuring flow shapes? scope
Which two object methods Obj-Open

must you lock a case when Obj-Open-ByHandle
using
(T/F) Child cases automatically T

inherit parent locking
strategies
What is the default locking Allow one user

strategy for a parent case
Which locking strategy locks Allow one user

the parent case whenever the
user opens a child case
If you configure a child case to Less

override the locking strategy
of the parent, configure the
time-out value of the child
case to be ______ than that of
the parent
This locking strategy prohibits Allow multiple users

case locking configuration on
any child case
If multiple users need to open Allow multiple users

and review cases without
updating them, use this locking
strategy
Pega 8.7 CSSA

Allow multiple users is a Parent case types
locking strategy only available
to:
(T/F) Locking strategies apply T

to new and existing cases
(T/F) Concatenation is a good F, concatenation is best performed with a declare

use case for pre/post expression
processing actions
(T/F) Completing event T

information the first time a user
opens a form is a good use
case for a pre-processing
action
When you configure a flow (1) Whenever the user selects the flow action
with pre-processing, when (2) Each time the user is presented with the
does Pega perform the action assignment
When you configure a flow Each time the user submits the action
with post-processing, when
does Pega perform the action
The three types of rules that (1) Apply Data Transform

pre/post processing can be (2) Run activity
used for (3) Robotic Process Automation
Which pre/post processing Apply Data Transform

action would you use to copy
data
Which pre/post processing Run Activity

action would you use to run a
series of sequential steps
Pega 8.7 CSSA

Which pre/post processing RPA (Robotic Process Automation)
action would you use to
receive or send data that users
enter in a case form that the
applications are running on a
user's desktop
(1) The sequence that the system runs different

The 3 things to consider when
Actions
configuring Pre or Post
(2) Flow action likelihood (loads highest by default)
processing
(3) Reuse
(T/F) You can reference False, referencing savable data pages is only
savable data pages in pre- possible in Post-processing
processing for flow actions
(T/F) You can configure Data True

Transforms, Activities, and
Robotic Process Automation in
both pre and post processing
(T/F) You can commit only one False, you can add multiple data pages
data page for each post-
processing action
Two ways to reference a (1) The Data Page itself

savable data page in a post- (2) A property that is auto-populated by the data
processing action: page
How is referencing a savable You can reference multiple data pages

data page in a post-
processing action different
than a Save Data Plan step?
Pega
You can 8.7 CSSA
configure pre- Bulk Processing
processing only for actions
that do not support
______________?
Automations always run Synchonously, pauses

_________________ and flow
processing _______________ while
automation is in progress
What happens after an The system updates the clipboard and renders the
automation completes section and flow action references
processing?
How do you include Using a savable data page in a post-processing

information in your case that step
your current case does not
include?
2 types of data pages to store Top-level, embedded

modified info
(1) Invokes a RPA

(2) Saves the Data Pages
(3) Runs the DT
Order of post-processing (4) Runs the Activity
RDDTA
Random Dogs Don't Think Alike
(1) Do not include a commit method in the activity

(2) If you use an activity that depends on user
3 things to consider when
entered parameters, include it in the post-
using an activity fir post-
processing rather than in the flow
processing
(3) You can use the activity to perform validation
(this is useful for complex validation)
Pega
Standard8.7
dataCSSA
instances that Organization Records
are used to support
requirements involving org
structure
A work group consists of A manager and a work queue
Operators in different units can be assigned to the

How does a work group
same work group to grant shared access to the
facilitate collaboration?
same work queue
Operators and work queues Business Units

are associated with:
The operator must always be a Default Workgroup

configured with ______________
What configuration is The operator must be associated with multiple

necessary if an operator is work groups
receiving work from multiple
departments?
Adding a user in App Studio Record

automatically creates a _________
in Dev Studio
Creating a team in App studio Work group and a Work Queue that reference each
automatically creates a other
______________ and a _______________ in
Dev Studio
When you add a new work Work Queue, Operator ID

group to an app, you must
update which two records:
When you create a work Default Workgroup

queue, you must also define a
Pega 8.7
When you CSSA
create a work Default work queue, associated work group
group, you must specify the manager
___________, with the ____________
The relationship between work Many to Many M:M

groups and work queues is __:__
Each unit has one Manager Operator
An operator's availability is Calendar

defined via a ________
A work queue belongs to a Unit, work group

_____________ and a _____________
When you create an Work Queue and Work Group

application, the System
creates a default
Pega performs Guardrail Saving a rule

examinations when
Guardrail warnings and scores Each application, Pega Platform core rules
are applied to ____________ and do
not include ____________
Compliance score measures Severe or moderate guardrail warnings,

the # of rules with _________________
compared to the # of rules No warnings or caution level guardrail warnings
with __________________
Each time you update an Reassess guardrails or revalidate rules

application, you should do the
following regarding
application quality:
Pega 8.7
(T/F) Pega CSSA
provides a feature T
to revalidate rules by ruleset,
so the new warning is applied
to old rules
How to identify performance Load Testing

issues before the issues are
experienced in a production
environment?
(T/F) Reducing the # of rows T

retrieved from PegaRULES
database also reduces the # of
bytes sent
(T/F) Performance Thresholds T

have default values
Two ways to adjust (1) DSS (Dynamic System Settings)

performance thresholds (2) prconfig.xml
What is the preferred method DSS (Dynamic System Settings)

of adjusting performance
thresholds
What prefix and suffix needed Prepend "prconfig/" and append "/default" on
to set a DSS alert setting purpose
If a threshold is set on both prconfig.xml

DSS and on the prconfix.xml
file, which takes precendence?
Pega 8.7 CSSA (1) Short Description

(2) Owning Ruleset
What 5 things must you define (3) Setting purpose (what are you going to
for performance thresholds? measure)
(4) Node classification
(5) Value (the actual threshold)
(T/F) You need to restart the T

app before DSS take effect
The rule assembly process cache of rules used to execute applications

creates a
(1) New JVM nodes are started

Pega performs rule assembly
(2) New code is deployed
on which 3 ocassions?
(3) Updated rules are executed for the first time
FUA First Use Assembly
When existing rules are marked for deletion, re-cached (this can inflate
updated, cached rules are application performance on first deploy)
________________ and the rule is
________________
Each combination of rulesets, Ruleset list, cache

called a _______ has its own
_____________
How to reduce potential Limit users that can check out rules, limit variation in
performance issues ruleset lists (utilize common access groups)
Production rulesets, might be added to the ruleset

Exercise caution when adding
list in an inconsistent order, increasing unique
___________ to an access group
ruleset lists
Pega 8.7 CSSA (1) Merge ruleset branches

(2) Minimize the # of access groups
Best actions to minimize the # (3) Disable rule check-out for those who don't
of rulesets in use need it
(4) Avoid adding a ruleset to multiple application
records
(1) Table size

3 most common sources of
(2) Reading data from the BLOB
Database issues
(3) Using SQL
An alert exists for each Threshold violation.

______________. But they don't Cause.
always provide the ______________
Database Table
You can create _____________
How? You can change the class definition to does
records for one or more
not belong to a class group" and create a DB table
classes in the class group.
and record
(1) classifying nodes with node types

The two main tasks for node
(2) In Dev Studio, associating job scheduler and
classification
queue processors with node types
If all nodes in a cluster are It is associated with at least one of the classified
classified, a job scheduler or nodes
queue processor will only run
if
If you associate a node type to Runs on any untyped node

a scheduler or Job scheduler
not defined....
Pega 8.7
When two CSSAhave the
properties CBAC.
same external, only one is External Description
returned in the _____ because
both properties have the
____________ for both
___________ is granted to every View Access

data element that you list (in
CBAC)
two-way,
Data encyption is a ________
process, meaning... meaning that an authorized user can decrypt
encrypted data
Passwords are stored in the password, hashing

________ property type, and are
protected by default through
___________
the algorithm that performs the encryption and

What is a cipher
decryption of an item
A character string, used to generate a unique

what is a key
encryption result
Each organization uses a Custom key

____________ to encrypt their data
The use of custom keys ciphers

enables different organizations
to leverage _______________ to
generate a unique encryption
result
Pega 8.7security,
To increase CSSAyou can key
configure automatic ___
rotation
What is a keystore Repository where keys are stored
Two main data encryption (1) Class-level

approaches (2) Property-level
Benefits
Efficient when encrypting the entire case or record
stored in the BLOB
Benefits and limitations of Limitations

class-level encryption Does not encrypt data outside the BLOB in the
database
e.g. properties that are exposed as columns for
reporting, stored on the clipboard, or secondary
data stores
Benefits
Encrypts properties in and outside the database
(specifically, in the clipboard, logs, search indexes,
Property-level encryption and reports)
benefits and limitations
Limitations
Can be time-consuming to individually encrypt and
decrypt a large # of individual properties
You can encrypt properties Text

that are optimized for
reporting if they are of type
___________
Class-level encryption occurs Pega retrieves and opens an instance

when ___________
Pega 8.7 CSSA

With class-level encryption, BLOB column
you encrypt the entire ________
_____________ for rows in the Pega
Database that correspond to
specific classes
To configure property-level PropertyEncrypt

encryption, you configure a -> and list the properties you want to encrypt
___________ access control policy
Two general approaches to (1) Built on

building an app (2) New
2 ways to approach a built-on (1) Build from Scratch

app (2) New Application Wizard
3 OOTB (Out of the box) (1) Theme Cosmos

options offered by New (2) Live-UI Kit
Application Wizard (3) Cosmos React
The recommended design system for new apps to

Theme Cosmos take advantage of a Non-React Pega Cosmos
design system
Traditional kit for building a new app. Now

Theme UI-Kit
deprecated and considered legacy.
Latest client-side UI rendering engine (React JS)

Cosmos React -not all case management features currently
supported
Which option would you Theme Cosmos

select if you need full
functionality
Pega 8.7 CSSA

Which option to choose to Cosmos React
take full advantage of latest UI
and functionality
Configuration settings and Controlling application behavior

configuration sets provide
low-code options for _____________
(1) Control the use of features in an application

3 ways to use configuration (2) Determine which process in a flow should be
settings followed
(3) Control UI experience
An example of Controlling the Disabling email integration for a specific case step
use of features in an
application (config settings)
An example of determining Adjusting the monetary threshold for where a case

which process in a flow should needs additional approval (provides a low-code
be followed (config settings) solution)
In Agile methodologies, displaying certain

How to use config settings to
instructions for certain UI to users if a process is
control UI experience
changed
Configuration settings should DSS (Dynamic System Settings)

replace __________ for enhanced
functionality
Configuration sets are created App Studio

and maintained in
When a config set is created, it It has at least one configuration setting

won't appear in the
configuration landing until
____________
Pega 8.7 CSSA

Configuration settings use RBAC
____________ to grant access
A ______________ can update Administrator

access so that ______________ can
write and delete configuration
sets
Configuration settings are Include Associated Data

included in the product file
when _____________ checkbox is
selected
- Opening a new case

Actions commonly defined
- Displaying a user's worklist
inside a mashup include:
- Selecting and performing an assignment
-A web server
Before you begin a Pega web
-At least one case type
mash-up, you need to have the
-SameSite cookies are disabled
following
-Add allowed domains (allowed referrers)
-Create a New Case

-Display a page
-Get Next work
Possible actions to perform
-Open an assignment
within Pega Web Mashup
-Open a case by ID
-Open a case by Handle
-Open a case by URL
To retain the state of the case Retain mashup state on browser refresh
after the user refreshes the
browser that displays the
mashup, turn on the
_________________ switch
Pega 8.7 CSSA -Not backwards compatible

-Only works if mashup gadget is loaded on same
thread
Limitations of Retain mashup
-The state is retained if the refresh occurs in the
state on browser refresh
same session
-The option to retain the case state does not work
for temporary work objects
Any parameters that you put in the mashup code

on the external page. For example, if you have a
What are dynamic parameters
custom parameter called CustomerID and you
in Pega Web Mashup?
want to pass this value, you would have to allow
passing dynamic parameters.
Static parameters in Web All the parameters that the system generates with
Mashup the mashup code
(T/F) Selecting iframe code F, it does improve the response time but does not
improves the response time of support the passing of dynamic parameters
the mashup and supports
passing dynamic parameters
Similar to SSO configuration, a third-party authentication

______________ module manages
the authentication of Pega
Web Mashup users
Pega provides a standard Internet Application Composer (IAC)

authentication service named:
The standard custom HTTP headers in the HTTP request

IACAuthentication activity
extracts values from ___________ in
the _____________ to identify an
authenticated operator
Pega 8.7
How does theCSSA The activity creates a record for the user by
IACAuthentication activity customizing a model operator using information in
handle a case where the user the HTTP request header to create an operator ID
does not have an operator ID for the user
record?
(1) pyuseridentifier
The IACAuthentication activity
(2) pyusername
requires that the HTTP request
(3) pyorganization
provides the following to
(4) pyorgdivision
create an operator ID:
(5) pyorgunit
When generating operator ID externally stored credentials, rather than

records for web mashup users, credentials store in Pega Platform
set the IACAuthentication
service to use ___________ rather
than _________________
pyBlockUnregisteredrequests pwmChannelID
check which parameter?
pzSecureFeatures is turned on
_____ by default
No, this feature ensures that BAC violations are

can pzSecureFeatures be
written to the security logs. Admin, App, Dev, and
overriden?
Prediction Studios are exempted
pyShowSecureFeatureWarning on
is turned ___ by default
2/13/23, 4:05 PM All Pega CSSA (The Motherload) Flashcards | Quizlet
All Pega CSSA (The Motherload) Study
All Pega CSSA (The Motherload)

4.8 (5 reviews)

Technology
7th Edition • ISBN: 9780077475864
103 solutions
Pega Web Mashup enables you to embed a Pega

What does Pega Web Mashup
application within a web page or other web
allow?
application on the internet.
The Generate Mashup code option opens a dialog

that provides the necessary HTML for you to copy,
What does the Generate paste, and view within the web page.
Mashup code option do?
This code is used to configure what your
application will do on the host site.
(T/F) Anything that you can True

display in a harness can
appear in the web mashup
application
https://quizlet.com/416687473/all-pega-cssa-the-motherload-flash-cards/ 1/33
All PegaareCSSA
________________ (The
a common use Motherload)
Case flows
of embedded Pega Platform
content in another
application's web page
___________ is another way of PegaGadget

referring to the application
view provided by the Web
Mashup
In the Pega Mashup code, the DIV

________ tag supports a set of
attributes for customizing the
behavior of the gadget on the
web page.
When loading the webpage By default, the code references the starting flow for
that contains the Pega mashup the case type, and calls the CreateNewWork action
Code, what, by default, is to create a new case.
referenced at the start (what is
the first thing that appears)
Use the 'data-pega-resizetype' attribute to

customize the mashup width.
How do you control the size of
your mashup to fit the == 'fixed' - fits mashup into a fixed space
webpages area.
== 'stretch' - expands mashup to fill the available
space.
Opening a channel between The trusted domains are specified in the Pega
the host site and the Pega Application rule.
Platform application requires
you to specify a list of trusted
domains. Where are these
domains specified?
All
How Pega CSSA
do you style (The
a Pega Web Motherload)
Apply a skin rule by configuring a portal for web
Mashup to look similar to the mashup users using a portal skin (rather than an
web page of which is hosting it application skin).
(the company website).
1. Create a portal and assign the portal to the

access group for web mashup users.
Steps to configuring a portal 2. Create a portal skin to configure the application

skin for web mashup users. styling for web mashup users.
(Three steps)
3. Associate the skin with the portal and edit the
harness class and name to match those associated
with your mashup application
Pega provides a standard IACAuthentication

authentication service
ACTIVITY named ______________ for
Pega Web Mashup
configurations.
All Pega
Which two of CSSA (The Motherload)
the following 1 and 4
statements are true about
styling a Pega Web Mashup?
(Choose Two)
- You can use the existing skin

from the application, or modify
the skin rules associated with
the portal rules
- The portal skin cannot inherit

attributes from the application
skin
- A Pega Web Mashup cannot

be used for unauthenticated
users who lack a Pega
operator ID
- The style of the application is

configured through a skin rule
Which two of the following 2 and 4

steps are required to create a
Pega Web Mashup? (Choose
Two)
- Set the data-pega-resizetype

attribute to customize the
mashup width
- Configure a list of approved

sites for the site origin
- Define attributes to defer for

the default action
- Generate the mashup code
All Pega
You want CSSA a(The
to configure Pega Motherload)
data-pega-parameters="
Web Mashup gadget to use {Customer:'[page\id\Account]'}
the value of an element from
the host page as the value of a
gadget attribute or action
parameter. What is the correct
syntax that should be used?
(The DOM element is named
"Account")
Activity 'A' calls Activity 'B'. Activity 'B' runs to

Explain the 'Call' method that
completion and then hands control back to Activity
activities use to call other
'A'. Activity 'A' then completes and hands control
activities.
back to the rule which called it
Activity 'A' calls Activity 'B'. Activity 'B' runs to

Explain the 'Branch' method
completion but then hands control back to the rule
that activities use to call other
which called Activity 'A' in the beginning. Activity 'A'
activities.
ends when Activity 'B' is completed.
Parameters used in activities parameter page

are held on a special clipboard
page, known as the
____________________, which is not
visible with the Clipboard tool.
'Restrict access' will restrict a user from using the

For activities, there are two
activity at run time.
forms of security which
prevent an activity from being
The activity type will limit how developers can use
ran, what are they?
the activity.
All
EveryPega
activity CSSA (The Motherload)
step has multiple Method
parts. Which part of an activity
step describes the action to
perform?
- Method
- Description
- Jump
- Label
A node designated with the Universal node

_________________________ type
supports queue processors
and job schedulers configured
to run on a
BackgroundProcessing node
What are two reasons to 1 and 4

configure background
processing rules for tasks?
(Choose Two)
- To defer tasks to a specific

time, such as off-peak hours
- To process case updates

more efficiently
- To automate tasks that

otherwise rely on human
interaction
- To allocate a task to a
specific node or nodes in a
cluster.
All Pega
Queue CSSA
processor rules(The Motherload)
standard
replace agent rules with
_______________ configuration
Job scheduler rules replace advanced

agent rules with ______________
configuration
When should a job scheduler Job Scheduler rules should be used to perform
be used? periodic or recurring tasks
When should Standard queue Standard queue rules are used for simple queue
rules be used? management
Dedicated queue rules can be used in situations

such as deferring a task to a period of low
When should Dedicated utilization (delaying a task to a point in time where
queue rules be used? not many users are using the application), or when
additional threads are required to achieve high
throughput.
How do queue processors and Job schedulers do not manage the read/write
job schedulers differ from one operations on database objects.
another when it comes to
handling read/write Queue processors automatically manage the
transactions on database read/write transactions on database objects.
objects?
The system puts the entry into failure status and

indicates the process is broken.
What happens when a queued
process fails?
The system also reverses any changes the process
initiated.
Where can you trace queue In Admin Studio on the Queue processors page
processor rules?
All Pega
Where CSSA
can you (The Motherload)
view detailed The Data Flow for the processor.
information about processor
functions?
Refund requests are queued 2 and 4

for overnight processing. What
information is required to
queue the refund request?
(Choose Two)
- The case ID of the refund

request case
- The ID of the queue

processor
- The ID of the customer

requesting the refund
- The data and time at which

the queued item can be
processed
For log files, what is an An appender determines the type of events written
appender? to log files.
Contains warnings, errors and information

What is the PEGA log used
messages about internal operations and is used for
for?
debugging the application.
What is the ALERT log used Contains performance-related alerts.

for?

Contains alerts suggest improper configuration of
Internet Application Composer facilities.
What is the ALERTSECURITY
log used for? Also contain alerts concerning overt attempts to
bypass system security features through URL
tampering.
Optional add-on that provides the extra functions

of an ETL (extract, transform, and load) utility
What is the BIX log used for?
provided by the Business Intelligence Exchange
(BIX).
What is the SERVICES-PAL log Contains performance data saved from services.
used for?
What is the CLUSTER log used Contains information about the setup and run-time
for? behavior of the cluster.
(T/F) Log files are unable to be False.

filtered.
Controls which logging events appear in the PEGA

What is the Logging Level
log. You can specify what logging events from
Settings tool used for?
which node you want to have appear in the log.
Activities can be used in instances of different

Rulesets and the Pega class classes under the same name. If several of these
hierarchy are irrelevant to instances from different classes are used during the
logging. Explain how this same execution, they will all be logged to the same
impacts logging. log file and the log file will not distinguish from
which class instance each activity came from.
(T/F) You can override the True

prlogging.xml file so that only
logging to the log file occurs
on a specific node and ignores
logging for the other nodes.

PLA is a standalone web application that is used to
test applications during UAT, performance and
stress testing and after deployment to production.
What is the PegaRULES Log
Analyzer PLA consolidates and summarizes three types of
logs - ALERT, PEGA and Garbage Collection - from
an individual Pega JVM server node in your
application system.
Contains diagnostic messages that identify

For the PegaRULES Log individual system events.
Analyzer, what does the ALERT
log provide? The ALERT log supports PERFORMANCE-related
monitoring.
Monitors system stability - gathers system errors,

exceptions, debug statements and messages
For the PegaRULES Log
created by your activities.
Analyzer, what does the PEGA
log provide?
The PEGA log is also referred to as the console log
or system log.
For the PegaRULES Log Gives insight into how your Pega application is
Analyzer, what does the JVM using memory
garbage collection log
provide?
(T/F) Each node on a Pega True

system produces two log files
- the ALERT log and the PEGA
log
Name two specific times in the During UAT performance and stress testing and
project life cycle when immediately after application deployment.
reviewing log files is important.
All Pega
The PEGA logCSSA (The Motherload)
file is used debugging
specifically for ______________
The Tracer is used to view events that occur during

case processing and provides a complete log of
What is the Tracer used for?
the events. Using this log you can identify errors in
your application.
Gray - Activity processing
In the tracer, what do the

Orange - Events from flow, decision, or declarative
following colors correspond
rules
to in terms of function - Gray,
Orange, Light blue.
Light blue - PegaRULES database and cache
operations
_________________ stops the tracer Break conditions

when the system generates an
error
How do you specify the Tracer Enter a value of zero into the Max Trace Events to
to automatically download Display
events without displaying them
on the screen?
Breakpoints in the Tracer are used to focus on an

What are breakpoints used for
activity or a series of breakpoints are used to focus
in the Tracer?
on a series of activities.
The Tracer will pause once it Tracing resumes when you click Continue or after
hits a breakpoint, when will it an hour elapses, whichever occurs first.
resume?
The watch function monitors a specific property

In the Tracer, what does the
value or values to determine if and when the
watch function do?
property value changes.
All
WhatPega CSSA (The Motherload)
is the Performance Used to understand the system resources
Analyzer (PAL) used for. consumed by processing a single requestor session
What is the Database Trace Used to trace all SQL operations like queries or
tool used for? commits that are performed.
Used to obtain a detailed trace of performance

What is the Performance
information about the execution of activities, when
Profiler tool used for?
condition rules, and data transforms.
How does RA Elapsed, also Rule assembly only occurs one time, but takes a
known as first use assembly good amount of time to occur. This can cause
(FUA), affect Performance performance tests to return results that look worse
Analyzer (PAL) testing? than what they actually are.
How do you obtain Run through the process once to ensure all rules
Performance Analyzer (PAL) have been assembled before taking any
test results that are unaffected measurements. Then run the process again.
by FUA (first use assembly)?
(T/F) Generating a stack trace False. Generating the stack trace is expensive and
is a recommended process should only be used when required.
when measuring your
applications performance
The PDC is a tool that runs on the Pega Cloud that

actively gathers, monitors, and analyzes real-time
performance and health indicators from all active
Pega Platform applications.
What is the Pega Predictive
Diagnostic Cloud?
Helps business stakeholders and IT administrators
take preventative action by predicting potential
system performance and business logic issues and
providing remediation suggestions.
All
(T/F) Pega CSSA (The
Pega applications send Motherload)
True.
data to PDC and PDC does
not request data from Pega
applications.
In PDC, _________________ are case types

categories of issues that can
occur in your system.
The user enters a response on 2

a form and clicks Submit. The
Pega application returns an
error. Which tool can you use
to determine the cause of the
error in your application.
- Use the Live UI tool and

search for the form that is
causing the error
- Use the Tracer tool, search

for the first FAIL status, and
see which step is causing the
error
- Use the Alerts tool and

search for the alert that is
reporting the error
- Use the Clipboard tool and

search for the property value
on pyWorkPage that is causing
the error
All Pega
Select CSSA
two methods to (The
limit theMotherload)
2 and 4
amount of information
displayed in the tracer tool to
- Set a breakpoint at the

beginning of your application
- Pause the Tracer tool until

just before the moment the
error occurs
-Clear the Tracer tool after the

error occurs
- Start the Tracer tool just

before the moment the error
occurs
The reason you want to run a 1

process immediately before
taking performance readings is
_________________
- To allow the rules to

assemble
- To make sure there are no

bugs in the system
- To train the system which

process you are going to
measure
- To make sure you know

which buttons to click so you
can be quick
All Pega
In which CSSA
scenario (The Motherload)
is it most 2
appropriate to leverage
Predictive Diagnostic Cloud
(PDC)?
- A company has a Pega

application and is interested in
browsing a list of
performance-related alerts.
- A company has multiple Pega

applications and is interested
in monitoring the health of all
active applications
- A company has a Pega

application and is interested in
finding the cause of an error
that occurs during case
processing
- A company has multiple Pega

and non-Pega applications
and is interested in receiving
guidance to avoid system
performance issues
Where is the Pega Web In the case type

Mashup code configured?

1. 'data-pega-event-onpagedata' attribute to
specify the default value for the gadget
2. Use a JavaScript function, doAction(), to set or

PWM supports three options
read data values from the web page hosting the
for passing data to or from a
gadget
Pega app, what are they?
3. Use an action object to perform additional

actions or to interact with another gadget
(configured as a script with the gadget DIV)
(T/F) You must add the False. The activity is added automatically
IACAuthenticate activity to
your mashup
For the IACAuthentication, web.xml

which file contains the
authentication?
1. (Pre-Activity step) Extracts values from HTTP

headers in the request to identify the operator
2. Uses the operator identifier to verify the user is in

the system
What are the steps to the

3. Validate a security token which is generated by
IACAuthentication activity (4
the external system and provided in the HTTP
steps)?
header. (Token indicates the external authentication
module has validated the user)
4. Optional step - send the token back to the

authentication module and verify the module
generated the token
you must save them into one of your application

How can you modify an rulesets and add that app ruleset to the application
authentication activity? rule assigned to the access group of the BROWSER
requestor type
All
(T/F) Pega CSSA
By default, queue (The Motherload)
True
processor and job scheduler
rules are processed on one or
more BackgroundProcessing
nodes?
The 'Run in Background' smart shape (step)

Tasks are queued using what
two things?
The 'Queue-For-Processing' method in an activity
o Specify the activity to run on the queued item

Steps to configuring a o Choose a locking option
standard queue processor o Specify an optional access group to establish
context (optional)
o Specify the queue processor

Steps to configuring a o For delayed queueing, provide a Date time
dedicated queue processor property for the queued object, at which time the
system processes the queued item
o Choose to run the task on all the selected nodes

or only one node
o Specify a schedule for the task (repeating,
periodic, at startup)
Steps to configuring a job o If specifying daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly -
scheduler you can specify the time of day at which to run,
including time zone
o Identify the context - Context determines the
privileges and permissions granted to the system
when performing the task
What role must you have to be SysAdmin4

allowed to troubleshoot issues
with the queue processor?
All Pega
For the CSSA you
job scheduler, (The
can Motherload)
For the job scheduler, you can configure the
use the Performance tool to Performance tool to manage job scheduler
do what? statistics
The queue processor or job The ASYNCPROCESSOR requestor type

scheduler start after adding
the access group to what?
In an activity, how do you add Use the Log-Message method

messages to the PEGA log?
What type of data will Pega Data with identifying information (case data)
NOT send to the Predictive
Diagnostic Cloud?
Using the PDC, which landing Stability and Improvement Plan landing page
page allows you to see
information that helps you
identify areas to target to
improve system performance?
Each alert has a KPI value associated with it, if the

How are KPI values used with alert value is higher (or equal) than the KPI
the PDC threshold, it causes an action type in the PDC to be
triggered
What is the benefit of Leveraging relevant records encourages rule reuse

leveraging relevant records? by developers.
Rules can only be marked as a rule type

relevant record if the _____________
is available for designation as a
relevant record.

1. Add the record from App Studio
2. Mark the record itself as relevant from Dev

How do you add a rule to the
Studio
relevant records list? (3 ways)
3. Add the record from the Application:Inventory

landing page.
Which of the following use 2

cases benefits from leveraging
relevant records?
- A manager un-involved in
application development must
make changes to a SLA rule as
business conditions change.
- A developer un-involved in
the bulk of application
development configures a
standard flow for cancelling a
case
- A developer configures a
flow with post-processing data
transform for use by multiple
case types
- A developer wants to ensure

a SLA rule is available at run
time.
All
How Pega CSSA
do you make (The Motherload)
a relevant 3
record unavailable in App
Studio?
- Mark the relevant record as

unavailable from the record
itself
- Remove the relevant record

designation from the record
itself
- Make the relevant record as

inactive from the Relevant
records landing page
- Remove the relevant record

designation from the Relevant
Records landing page
Which three rule types can be 1, 3 and 4

reused through the use of
relevant records? (Choose
Three)
- Sections
- Data transform
- Flows
- Paragraphs
Properties
Sections
Harnesses
You can manually mark these
Paragraphs
rule types as relevant records
Correspondences
(8 rules)
SLA's
Flows
Flow actions

A product rule identifies the application
components (rulesets, data, and other objects) you
What is a product rule?
want to move to a destination Pega System (Dev ->
QA for example)
(T/F) Product rules usually False. They usually don't include standard rulesets
include standard rulesets and and data since those components are built into all
data Pega systems.
A product rule is an instance Rule-Admin-Product (RAP)

of the ________________ class
1. Identify the application components in a product

rule
In order to migrate an
application between system
2. Put the rule contents in an archive file
environments, what actions
must you perform? (3 steps)
3. Copy the archive file to the destination system
and import the file
1. Associate your data records (operator IDs, access

groups, database tables, and databases) with
rulesets; this ensures all the data records required
by your application are included in the archive file
2. Make sure all rules are checked in so that the

Before creating an archive file,
rulesets are complete and current
do the following things to
ensure that the file is complete
3. In most cases, lock application rulesets included
and correct (4 things)
in the package to help ensure no changes occur to
the app rulesets during the migration
4. Merge branched rulesets and remove the

branches from the application if you are exporting
the application to a production system
All
WhenPega CSSA
migrating (The Motherload)
an application, This causes the production rulesets listed on the
why would you choose to application rule to be migrated. You would want
migrate the these production rulesets to be migrated if you are
'Custom/Production rulesets'? using DELEGATED or LOCALIZATION rulesets
When migrating an application, The instances of the custom data types that you
if you choose the "Include data created for your application will be migrated.
types" option to be included in
the archive file, what will be
migrated?
When migrating an application, Delta mode will cause only the highest patch
if you choose the "Delta mode" version of the application's rulesets to be migrated.
option to be included in the
archive file, what will be Delta mode is useful for patch updates.
migrated? And what is Delta
mode useful for?
When migrating an application, Useful for specifying data classes that are required
you are able to include class for an application to run correctly on the
instances to be migrated. What destination system.
is this most useful for?
When migrating an application, This is important if your application includes views

you are able to include that reference each other. Listing the instances in
individual instances (specific the wrong order (on the migration page) compared
operators or access groups in to how they are listed in the product rule can
the product rule for example). create dependency tree errors.
These instances are processed
in the order listed on the
product rule. Why is this
important?
All Pega
Which CSSA (The
two components does Motherload)
Data types and data instances
the Application Packaging
wizard prompt you to include
when you generate an archive
file? (Choose Two)
- Data types
- Data instances
- Product rules
- Checked-out rules
You use the Application User can start executing rules as soon as the rules
Import wizard to import an are imported.
archive file on a destination
system. When does the
destination system begin
executing the imported rules?
You create a product rule to 1 and 4

generate an application
archive file for export. which
two actions do you perform
before creating the archive
file? (Choose Two)
- Check in the rules that are in

the application ruleset
- Create a new version of the

application
- Unlock the application

rulesets
- Associate application data

instances with application
rulesets

A device-specific container is around the Pega
Platform application to act as an interface with the
What is the Pega Mobile mobile device.
Client?
Basically an app version of your application that
can be downloaded through a mobile app store
What is the Pega Mobile This allows you to include a Pega application into a
Application Package File pre-existing non-Pega app.
1. Upload a certificate set for the appropriate

mobile platform (iOS, Android).
Three prerequisite steps to 2. Configure access to the Pega Mobile Build

take for Pega mobile app Server (receive credentials and the URL with the
configuration. Pega Mobile Client license)
3. Confirm with system Admin that Pega Platform is

configured to support access through HTTPS.
1. Pega Mobile Client options - Security and offline

access options for the app.
Mobile channel configuration

2. OS-specific build options - Options that impact
is comprised of three main
how an app for a specific platform is built. Includes
groups of tasks. What are they
how debugging and logging is configured.
and what does each do?
3. App branding options - Options that control the

basic look and feel of the mobile app.
When designing a Pega percentages

application for mobile
purposes, the sizing layout
formats should be set with
__________________ instead of being
set with pixels.
All Pega
Always CSSA as
use _______________ (The
a Motherload)
data pages
data source if you are
designing applications to work
on a mobile device when the
device is not connected to a
network.
Select two best practices to 1 and 3

follow when designing mobile
applications. (Choose Two)
- Incorporate native device

features
- Specify layouts widths in

pixels because the response
breakpoint uses pixels
- Use controls that allow

tapping
- Avoid sourcing controls and

grids from data pages
All Pega
To display CSSA
a list of items(The
to a Motherload)
1 and 2.
user who may access the
application on mobile and Option 3 is a best practice for mobile app data
non-mobile devices, which two sourcing, but does not influence the display of the
of the following options are list.
best practices for designing
the user interface? (Choose
Two)
- Use a table and mark the

columns in the table as
primary, secondary, and other.
- Use a repeating dynamic

layout
- Source the list using a data

page
- Define the layout widths in

pixels
All Pega
For the CSSA
following (The Motherload)
use cases, 1. Mobile Browser
decide which platform (Pega
Mobile application package 2. Pega Mobile application package file
file, Mobile Browser, Pega
Mobile Client) should be used: 3. Pega Mobile Client
1. A patient dosing app, used

by hospital employees to track
patient medication schedules,
must always have access to the
server.
2. An insurance company
wants to include a claims
process configured using Pega
Platform
3. A grocery store wants

customers to be able to
download its app to their
devices so they can order
groceries from any place at
any time.
(T/F) Data synchronization True

between the mobile device
and the server occurs
automatically when the mobile
device is online

1. When using offline-enabled mobile app, the app
saves all work to a queue
When using an application that
has offline processing 2. Cases created while offline are not displayed in
capability, describe the the list of available cases.
process from creating and
processing cases offline to the 3. When data synchronization is triggered, all saved
data synchronization for those data is updated to the server.
cases to the server.
4. After the sync is complete, cases created offline
are now displayed in the UI
1. When the mobile app goes from being offline to

online.
2. If the device is online and five minutes have

Four times when data
passed since the last data sync
synchronization will occur.
3. When a user submits an assignment
4. When a user creates a new case
1. Enable offline support for users by configuring

To enable an offline mobile the appropriate access group
app, you perform these two
major tasks. 2. Enable the appropriate case types for offline
processing.
Reusing the cache eliminates the need to generate

a cache for each user.
Why should you enable
application rule caching for
This ensures a faster start of offline-enabled
offline mobile apps?
applications from the time of the last Pega Platform
server start.
Which portal should be used The pyCaseWorker portal or a customization of the

for offline mobile apps? pyCaseWorker portal.
All
CasePega CSSA
types that (The Motherload)
use offline pyStartCase
processing must use the
starting flow _______________ to
initialize processing and
instantiating cases in a stage-
based case life cycle.
If you have a case type that You must write custom JavaScript to perform the
you are configuring for offline same functionality.
processing and it does not use
the starting flow, pyStartCase,
what must you do?
When a user opens a case in offline mode, the

For offline case processing, system cannot obtain a lock on the case. When the
why should you use an mobile app syncs back with the server, the system
optimistic locking strategy for attempts to obtain a lock on updated cases. The
case types? optimistic locking strategy helps avoid conflicts if
other users worked on updated cases.
For widely distributed mobile 1. Make essential elements available offline for a
apps, large numbers of users consistent user experience.
may be synchronizing their
apps at any given time. This 2. Ensure that synchronizations are fast and efficient
situation can strain server
resources. What two key
design considerations should
you keep in mind to help
prevent straining the servers?
A cache manifest is a simple text file used to store

What is a cache manifest.
the files needed for a mobile app to run offline.
To define a cache manifest, Save a copy of the pyCustomAppCache to your

where should a copy of the application ruleset.
pyCustomAppCache record
be saved to?
All Pega
Which CSSA
class must the (The Motherload)
Data-Portal class
pyCustomAppCache record
be applied to?
A whitelist is a set of rules requiring synchronization

What is a whitelist?
between a mobile app and the server.
A blacklist is a set of rules that are not synchronized

What is a blacklist?
between a mobile app and a Pega application.
By default, offline mobile Includes rules explicitly referenced in the UI or

synchronization includes which process.
rules and excludes which
rules? Excludes rules with obscured references.
Pega provides a set of five 1. Data Page rules

customizable whitelists 2. Field value rules
(instances of a specific rule 3. Data transform rules
type) for applications. What 4. Validate rules
are they? 5. When rules
Each whitelist and blacklist application; @baseclass

record should be copied to
your _________________ ruleset.
The record must be applied to

________________ class.
You use blacklists to exclude specific data pages

from mobile app and server synchronization.
What is a blacklist used for?
You can list data pages used on either the mobile
app or the server only.

A full synchronization occurs when users log in for
the first time and when app developers force a
When does a full
manual sync to push changes to mobile users.
synchronization occur and
what is it?
entire rule or data record.
After an offline device comes back online, the

mobile app performs a delta synchronization.
When does a delta sync occur
and what is it?
A delta syn incrementally exchanges smaller
amounts of data to reflect user activity.
Delta syncs improve performance of the mobile

What benefit do delta syncs
app by reducing the data exchanged between the
provide? How does it do this?
mobile app and the server.
Use the 'delta sync blacklist' record when you want

When should you use the delta
to exempt syncing data pages that contain a large
sync blacklist record?
amount of data that changes infrequently.
Large data pages can hold all the data needed for
your application.
How does using large data
pages to store reference data Only individual records from the data page that are
in your application help needed to render a specific screen are loaded into
improve the performance of a the devices memory (Memory improvement).
mobile app?
Also, only the record's whose data changed are
synced (Performance improvement).

1. Create the data page using a standard data page
record type.
2. Declare it as a large data page by:

How are large data pages
created? (Two steps) a. editing the whitelist for the List of data pages that
are available offline but are not referenced in the
UI
b. Appending ';large' to the data page name.
1. pyModificationDateTime - Returns the time when

the large data page was previously synchronized to
the client. The data source uses it to return only the
When sourcing a large data
records that were modified after the last data
page with a report definition,
synchronization.
you must include these two
additional columns. What are
2. pyIsRecordDeleted - Returns true only for
they and what do they do?
records that have been removed. Values for the key
columns of the removed record should be returned
as well.
Where do you configure the On the Mobile Offline landing page, edit the
locales for offline apps? pyLocalesListOffline rule.
1. Enables requestor reuse

What are three ways that
requestor pooling improves 2. Shares allocated resources
service performance?
3. Eliminates server wait time for requestor creation
The _______________ setting defines Maximum idle requestors

the size of the requestor pool.
All Pega
To allow CSSAnumber
an unlimited (The Motherload)
-1
of idle requestors by keeping
them until they time out, set
Maximum idle requestors to
_______.
The __________________ setting Maximum active requestors

defines the maximum number
of concurrent requestors to
allocate to the service.
To allow an unlimited number -1

of active requestors, and
eliminate wait time, set
Maximum active requestors
value to ______.
For the Maximum active 1

requestor setting, if requestor
pooling is disabled, set
Maximum active requestors to
_____
2/13/23, 4:14 PM Pega CSSA 8 Knowledge Checks Flashcards | Quizlet
Pega CSSA 8 Knowledge Checks Study
Pega CSSA 8 Knowledge Checks

Introduction to Algorithms
3rd Edition • ISBN: 9780262033848
Charles E. Leiserson, Clifford Stein, Ronald L. Rivest, Thomas H. Cormen
726 solutions
State two advantages of Using an ECS helps you organize rules in a way that
organizing rules using an ECS encourages reuse and provides the ability to adapt
(Enterprise Class Structure) as the business changes.
The Framework Layer
Which layer of the ECS

(Enterprise Class Structure)
Other layers are Implementation Layer (Specific
would contain a generalized
Division or Line of Business), Division Layer (assets
used on a division wide basis[middle level]),
Organization layer(EnterpriseWide)
business?
All of these are contain in the pega platform.
In lock and roll, what occurs A SA(System Architect) copies the required rules
after you use the wizard to into the empty ruleset to create the new
create a new, empty ruleset? application version.
https://quizlet.com/476968147/pega-cssa-8-knowledge-checks-flash-cards/ 1/13

Skimming streamlines application versions where
You use create a new version when you want to

lock and roll the version and create a new
When using lock and roll, what
application rule. You can also create a new
is the purpose of selecting the
new version option?
access more than one version of the application.
(for example, a phased roll-out or a test period).

The default initial application Organizational

created by the New
Application wizard contains a
set of ruleset for the
application code and _______
assets.
Application Validation (AV)

Which ruleset validation mode
allows for codependent the other validation mode is RuleSet Validation(RV)
rulesets? which creates one or more ruleset versions on
which the ruleset version depends.
The ruleset list inidicates the A given operator session.

rulesets that are available to
the application for _______
List two reasons why a rule is The rule is already checked out by someone else;
not available for checkout. The rule is in a locked ruleset.

Two or more development teams can configure an
Describe two advantages of application in parallel. Rule development takes
branching. place within an isolated space (the branch) without
affecting functionality in the source rules.
You create a team application to enable your team

Why do you create a team
to manage the branches they use and not impact
application?
other teams.
Before moving the updated Identify any conflicts between your changes using
rules into the base rulesets, the Merge Branch Ruleset wizard.
you first _________.
How do you ensure there are You can view possible rule conflicts and guardrail
no rule conflicts or guardrail warnings in the branch rule on the Branch quality
warnings in the merge branch tab.
candidate?
Rule resolution applies to most abstract Rule-

classes derived from the _______
base class.
During rule resolution, a first, An exact match of a property or date circumstance.

best match is determined by
_________.
During rule resolution, the default

_________ rule is selected if no
exact circumstance matches
are found.
Pega CSSA
Assume an 8 Knowledge
operator's ruleset Checks
To be included in the results, each candidate rule
list includes Loans:01-01. Why must have the same Major Version number, and
would a candidate rule found Minor Version number less than or equal to the
in Loans:01-02 not be included specified Minor Version number listed in the
in the results of the rule operator's ruleset list.
resolution process?
Assume the referenced rule Rules found in the ancestor tree of the rule in
has an Apply to: class of TGB- question -- either by pattern or direct inheritance --
HRApps-Work-Onboarding. are retained in the list of rule candidates.
with an Apply To: class of TGB-
As candidate rules are ranked The version of the ruleset is considered last. This
during rule resolution, which ensures that circumstanced rules are not
criteria is considered last? automatically overridden if the base rule is
why? updated in a more recent ruleset version.
How does circumstancing Circumstancing allows you to describe behavior

solve the problem of with a set of targeted rules rather than one
configuring exception Complex rule. Each targeted rule configures
behavior in an application? behavior to address a specific exception.
The real estate firm will use multiple value

What type of circumstancing circumstancing to display the appropriate
will a real estate firm use to disclosure for each listing based on the
display a disclosure statement circumstance template and definition.
that varies by both status and
location of the listing? Other types of circumstancing include: Single
Value, Date Property, and As-of date.
What does search duplicate Search duplicate cases uses weighted conditions.
cases process use to compare Each condition has a relative importance defined
specific properties or values by a weighting value.
system?
Pega CSSA
Which type 8 Knowledge
of Smart Shape Checks
A Split For Each allows you to iterate over a list of
would you use to start an employees to start an interview process for each
interview processes based on employee.
a list of employees who must
In an equipment selection You would choose a Split Join because it lets you
process, you want the Facilities call multiple subprocess that can run in parallel.
Setup and IT Setup processes
to run in parallel using a smart
shape. Which smart shape
would you choose.
Assume you want users to For each child case, you override the default
have the ability to work on setting that locks the parent case.
locking settings?
If a flow action includes a pre- Pega performs the pre-processing action each time
processing data transform or the flow action is presented to the user.
activity, when does pega
perform the action?
You need to identify the impacted flow action and

Why is analyzing the determine whether the new data transform or
requirement and the case type activity should be placed before or after the flow
important? action. You also create or update the desired data
transform or activity.
What is the main reason for You use a decision table when you need to test the
using a decision table rather values of multiple properties to make the decision.
Pega CSSA
When would 8 Knowledge
you use a Checks
When you want to apply if/then/else logic to
decision?
A cascading approval step simplifies the

What is the purpose of a configuration of a process that requires multiple
cascading approval step? approvals. You can base the cascading approval on
a reporting structure or an authority matrix.
A work group is not part of the organizational

structure. Although it is an organization rule, a work
group is used to allow managers to monitor, report,
structure: Division, Unit, Work
Group, or Organization?
queues across the organization.
A requirement states that you Select the organization in the organization chart
must add a new division to and use the chart menu to add the division.
approach allows you to see (Configure > Org & Security > Organization >
where in the organization Organizational Chart)
division?
A field value enables you to List of allowed values separately from the property.
manage the ________ separately
from the _______.
True or False: You can add True

context.
The purpose of a user portal is to provide users

What is the purpose of a user with a view into their application. Each portal is
portal? customized to the needs of a particular group of
users.

An action area displays the content of a user form
What is the purpose of an when users select a flow action. The action area
action area in a harness? describes the work users perform to complete an
assignment.
A screen layout defines the structure or a portal.

What is the purpose of a The screen layout defines the panes of the portal.
screen layout in a harness? The content of each pane is determined by
referencing a section.
A navigation record is used to configure the entries

on a menu. It lists a menu entry and identifies the
navigation record?
A binary file record is a container for a non-text file.

What benefits does a binary
It provides the security, inheritance, versioning, and
non-text files.
of rule resolution.
1. Use tooltips to announce a controls function.

2. Use a high contrast screen.
3. Configure a button or a link to dismiss an overlay.
4. Set the enter event on a control to enable
What application accessibility
keyboard tabbing.
improvement approaches can
5. Include links with icons.
you enable without the
6. Mark a dynamic container as the main content
accessibility ruleset?
area to enable direct access to the content in the
dynamic container.
7. Use a drop-down list of options instead of text
entry for fields with predictable answers.
What additional role the PegaWAI ruleset complies with WAI-ARIA

configuration is required when standards and requires no additional configuration.
ruleset?

1. Local Language
What are five ways to adapt to 2. Currency
regions using localization in 3. Date Format
international applications? 4. Time Zone
5. Time Format
What is the advantage of using Field Value, Paragraph, and Correspondence

rulesets when localizing an rulesets can be exported, translated into multiple
application in multiple languages, and reused in an application to
languages? accommodate multiple regions.
How can your application be Export all the required fields using the Localization
localized if a language pack is Wizard, have them translated, and import your own
not available for that region? custom translation pack.
A keyed data page serves as Two separate data pages

an alternative to having _________.
Data is, or is not, stored in the Is Not

property that refers to the data
page?
When you copy data from a A data page parameter changes

data page, the data is
refreshed only when _________.
To implement the reference Data Model

pattern, use a data page in
your application without
defining it as part of the ______.

1. Data stored in another system. Always References
Data Access Patterns: System of Record, always current.
System of Record? 2. Copies Data into the case. Always References

copied data. Current at time of copy.
SnapShot?
3. Allowed data use without adding data. Value
Reference? selected is copied to the case (Commonly used to
populate UI controls such as drop down lists.)
You simulate an integration when the service is not

When do you simulate an
available or when the response needs to be
integration?
dictated.
When do you use simulation When the connector has not yet been generated.
option in a data page?
The most significant benefit is the ability to

reference external systems in a way that can vary
depending on environment, without requiring the
resource settings?
update of integration rules and data instances.
Transient [Generally these occur due to the server

temporarily being unavailable or restarted]
What type of errors typically
correct themselves over time? The other type of Error is Permanent Errors, these
are typically due to a configuration error or an
error in remove application logic.
In data pages, a best practice Response Data Transform.

is to detect errors in the _______.
When would you use an error You would use it when the response is not
handler flow for your immediately needed and a process for handling the
connector? error is required.
Pega CSSA
What is the 8 Knowledge
purpose of a Checks
A service allows other applications to access your
service? application.
What is the purpose of using a A condition allows you to add a custom error
condition in a SOAP message to the response.
exception?
How does the Pega reporting The tool uses Pega Classes to find the table.
tool find and retrieve data
from the appropriate table?
You create a report that shows History-Work- and History-

how quickly cases were
processed in a specific
assignment. Which classes
contain the standard
properties you use in your
report?
When configuring a class join, Create a filter condition.

how do you specify a property
that defines the relationship
between the primary and
joined classes?
How can you use a subreport Use the subreport as a filter, comparing with a list
to list the operators who have of all operators and removing all entries where
not updated cases of a there is a match between the two reports.
specific case type within the
past week?
Pega Web Mashup is used when a company

When is Pega Web Mashup
requires that a Pega process be embedded into an
used?
existing web page or alternate application.

What happens when a queued
The system puts the entry into a failure stats and
indicates the process is broken. The system also
process fails?
reverses any changes the process initiated.
Where can you view detailed The Data Flow for the processor.
information about processor
functions?
What is the purpose of an An appender manages the writing of errors,

appender? warnings, and other debug information to a log file.
Name two specific times in the During UAT (User Acceptance Testing) and Stress
project life cycle when Testing immediately after application deployment.
reviewing log files is important.
Which performance tool is Performance Analyzer (PAL)

used to display resource
statistics recorded by the pega
platform?
PDC (Pega Diagnostic Cloud) monitors your

application performance and diagnoses system
What is the business value of health issues to minimize their impact on your
PDC? business. PDC analyzes information sent from pega
platform to provide suggestions on possible
solutions to issues as the occur.
Leveraging relevant records encourages rule reuse

What is the benefit of
by developers, which improves application quality
leveraging relevant records?
and reduces development time.
Add the record from App Studio, mark the record

How do you add a rule to the itself as relevant from Dev Studio, or add the
relevant records list? record from the Application: Inventory landing
page.
Pega
In order CSSA
to migrate8an
Knowledge Checks
First, identify the application components in a
application between system product rule. Then, put the rule contents in an
environments, what actions archive file. Finally, copy the archive file to the
must your perform? destination system and import the file.
When using an offline-enabled The saved work joins a queue for synchronization.
mobile app, what happens When the mobile device connects to a network, the
when a user saves work on an application server processes the queue.
assignment?
You select the Enable Offline Support check box

How do you enable offline on the Advanced tab of the access group and then
access for an access group? you confirm enablement on the New Mobile
Channel Configuration tab.
How do you enable offline On the case type Settings tab, in the General
access for a case type? section, you select the Enable Offline check box.
What requirement must a case The case type must be initialized and instantiated
type satisfy before you enable with the pyStartCase starting flow.
the case type for offline
processing?
What are the two key 1. Which Essential Elements should be available
considerations when Offline.
configuring a mobile app for 2. How to ensure synchronizations are fast and
offline use. efficient.
What types of resources do Cache Manifest includes images, icons and font
you add to the cache families.
manifest?
What is the difference Whitelist: Contains rules that MUST be

between a whitelist and a synchronized between a mobile app and server.
blacklist Blacklist: Rules that are NOT synchronized.

How is a delta-sync different entire rule or data record. Delta-Syncs
from a full-sync? incrementally exchange smaller amounts of data to
reflect changes.
What are two key benefits of Performance and Memory Management

using large data pages for improvments are the two key benefits of using
reference data? Large Data Pages for Reference Data.
You can use the Modify Locales List link from the
Where do you configure the
Mobile Offline landing page to edit the
locales for offline apps?
pyLocalesListOffline rule.
What are the three ways that Requestor Pooling enables requestor reuse, shares
requestor pooling improves allocated resources, and eliminates server wait time
service performance? for requestor creation.
Which three pooling settings 1. Maximum Wait (in Seconds)

can be configured on the 2. Maximum Active Requestors
settings tab of dev studio 3. Maximum Idle Requestors
Offline Landing Page and the
Offline Service Package Rule?

Pega CSSA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pega CSSA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pega CSSA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2/13/23, 3:47 PM Pega Flashcards | Quizlet

Textbook solutions for this set

Starting Out with Python

Search for a textbook or question

Terms in this set (354)

Generally used to map data from a source to a

What must be selected to Call superclass data transform

1.) Set default values when

Can configure applications using consistenet set of

Pega Platform uses a __________ model-based

Business users of the applications, processing and

Create, view and work on theri cases and

Can case workers monitor or No

Responsible for working on cases and monitoring

Part of the delivery team responsible for designing

Provide the technical skills needed to complete the

1.) Use DCO to enter business

2.)Identify the departments

3.)Build the required features

4.)Build and test the

Help develoopers to track compliance with Pegas

Pega What is a case? Work that delivers a business outcome

Define the tasks and decisions needed to resolve a

contain workflows or processes that users follows

In a case life cycle, stages that lead to the

What is a happy path Sequence of primary stages

An action a user performs, an automatic action, or

Ensure all team members have a common

You are developing a case life Collect personal info

In a help desk ticket Step

A loan origination case Work queue

Service levels are defined by goal, deadline, and past deadline

The primary purpose of a Help ensure timely completion of assignments

What fields do end-users need to see?

What three questions should

Process of collecting, analyzing, refining, and

Helps ensure the business applications you build

Statements that describ business value the

An agreement between stakeholders on what a

How does Pega define How you implement your application

Pega The ability to link specifications back to business

What are at the center of Specifications

Which statement demonstrates 2

Require HR VP approval for

Reduce inaccurate claims to

Allow up to 200 concurrent

Passwords must be at least

Eliminate order processing

A user should be able to

User must be able to select

System displays "Authorization

Which statement demonstrates 2

User passwords shall be

If the complainant type is

The product catalog should be

Reduce time needed for time-

Used to organize process steps that ar enot part of

What is a change stage Automatically transitions the case flow to a

Define the tasks that users accomplish while the

Supplement that tasks users can do as they work on

2/13/23, 3:47 PM Pega Flashcards | Quizlet